Inventors list

Assignees list

Classification tree browser

Top 100 Inventors

Top 100 Assignees


Hand-off control

Subclass of:

370 - Multiplex communications

370310000 - COMMUNICATION OVER FREE SPACE

370328000 - Having a plurality of contiguous regions served by respective fixed stations

370329000 - Channel assignment

Patent class list (only not empty are listed)

Deeper subclasses:

Class / Patent application numberDescriptionNumber of patent applications / Date published
370332000 Based upon a particular signal quality measurement 265
Entries
DocumentTitleDate
201101765121X MESSAGE BUNDLING - A method includes receiving, at a network entity, a circuit switched paging request, wherein the paging request is for a UE that is attached to a packet data network and is registered to a circuit switched network. The method also includes obtaining a calling party number from the circuit switched network, the calling party number being information corresponding to a call from a party calling the UE, and generating a circuit service notification application message comprising more than one message of the circuit switch technology, such that one of message comprises the calling party number. Another operation relates to transmitting, from the network entity to the UE, the circuit service notification application message, the transmitting occurring while the UE is attached to the packet data network and while the UE is operating in an active state for receiving and/or transmitting packet data or signaling messages.07-21-2011
20130044730Optimized Home Evolved NodeB (eNB) Handover in an LTE Network - A method to provide an optimized intra-HeNB GW handover operation that reduces signaling to and from an LTE MME (Mobility Management Entity) function of the 3GPP E-UTRAN Evolved Packet core (EPC). In operation, an HeNB Gateway (GW) intercepts handover requests from a source HeNB to a target HeNB and processes these requests locally, with minimal interaction from the MME. Where possible, messaging to and from the MME is minimized and/or reduced, irrespective of the 3GPP requirement that the GW relay all handover-related messages to the MME.02-21-2013
20130044733AUTHENTICATION SYSTEM AND AUTHENTICATION METHOD IN WIRELESS LAN ENVIRONMENT - The authentication system in the wireless LAN environment includes a first wireless LAN access point for providing a wireless LAN service to a terminal device accessing the first wireless LAN access point; the terminal device for transmitting an authentication request to a second wireless LAN access point when the terminal device moves to access the second wireless LAN access point while receiving the wireless LAN service through an access to the first wireless LAN access point; and the second wireless LAN access point for identifying the first wireless LAN access point based on identification information contained in the authentication request transmitted from the terminal device which has moved to access the second wireless LAN access point, acquiring authentication information on the terminal device from the identified first wireless LAN access point, and performing an authentication for the terminal device based on the acquired authentication information.02-21-2013
20130044732METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING RESOURCE RELEASE - Method, apparatus and communication system for resource release controlling are provided in the disclosure. When a user equipment (UE) with an idle mode signaling reduction (ISR) being activated moves from a first source network to a second target network, if a first SGSN in the first source network knows that a second SGSN in the second target network does not support interaction with a serving gateway (S-GW) and does not support ISR, the first SGSN controls the deletion of bearer resources on a MME in the first network by sending a resource deletion message.02-21-2013
20130044731Proactive Feedback Transmissions During Handover Procedures - Methods, systems, and devices are described for utilizing proactive feedback information during a handover of a mobile device from a source base station to a target base station. The mobile device may transmit handover messages to the target base station that includes feedback status information, which may include automatic repeat request (ARQ) information elements in some embodiments. The target base station may request that the source base station transmit packets to the target base station based on the received feedback status information. The source base station may transmit handover messages to the mobile device that include feedback status information in some embodiments. Some embodiments may provide for fast resumption of data transmission by utilizing the proactively sent feedback status information from a mobile device to a base station during handover. Some embodiments may reduce the bandwidth for transferring unnecessary data between base stations.02-21-2013
20120201222SYSTEM AND PROTOCOLS FOR INTER-MOBILITY ACCESS GATEWAY TUNNELING FOR FAST HANDOFF TRANSITION - A system and method for transitioning connectivity of a mobile node between mobility access gateways on a communication system using an inter-MAG tunneling protocols for a fast handoff. The protocols can use pre-configured or dynamic protocols on the IP-Layer or another layer on the protocol stack. In a hi-directional tunneling mechanism, the protocol and system supports the transfer of the mobility session context information for the mobile node to the next MAG in advance of the fast handoff to avoid delays and an inter-serving gateway bidirectional tunneling mechanism to allow forwarding of the mobility session traffic between new serving gateway and the prior serving gateway without ambiguity.08-09-2012
20100272069Method and System for Idle Mode Signaling Reduction - A method and a system for idle mode signaling reduction (ISR) are provided. The method includes obtaining ISR activation information of a source network, and setting an ISR status of a user equipment (UE) in a target network according to the obtained ISR activation information of the source network. Thus, the ISR status of the UE can be processed when the UE is handed over between networks.10-28-2010
20090103492WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK BASE STATION EXTENSION - Apparatus and methods to permit the deployment of wireless base stations, where a deployed remote base station is backhauled to the core network over a wireless connection to an operatively attached donor base station using protocols that encapsulate backhaul communications within standard subscriber communication protocols.04-23-2009
20100142481APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNAL FOR HANDOFF IN BROADCASTING NETWORK - An apparatus for transmitting a signal for handoff in a transmitter of a broadcasting network where a plurality of center frequencies exist includes: a baseband broadcasting signal generation unit configured to generate a baseband broadcasting signal from broadcasting data to be transmitted; a transmitter identification signal sequence generation unit configured to generate a transmitter identification signal of the transmitter; a first transmission unit configured to combine the baseband broadcasting signal and the transmitter identification signal, and up-convert the combined signal to a center frequency of the transmitter; and a second transmission unit configured to modulate the transmitter identification signal, and up-convert the modulated transmitter identification signal to center frequencies of adjacent transmitters.06-10-2010
20100142482OPEN WIRELESS ARCHITECTURE (OWA) UNIFIED AIRBORNE AND TERRESTRIAL COMMUNICATIONS ARCHITECTURE - This invention relates to an Open Wireless Architecture (OWA) unified airborne and terrestrial communications architecture providing optimal high-speed connections with open radio transmission technologies (RTTs) between aircrafts and ground cells, and between different aircrafts in Ad-Hoc or Mesh network group, to construct the multi-dimensional unified information delivery platform across the airborne networks and the terrestrial networks wherein the same OWA mobile device or OWA mobile computer can be used seamlessly and continuously both in the aircrafts and on the ground.06-10-2010
20100142480METHOD OF SEAMLESS VERTICAL HANDOVER FOR SDR TERMINAL AND SCA BASED SDR TERMINAL FOR THE SAME - The present invention provides a method of seamless vertical handover for an SDR terminal and an SCA based SDR terminal for the same. A method of seamless vertical handover for an SDR terminal of the present invention includes: determining whether a download of a waveform application related to a peripheral access network is needed by collecting peripheral access network information prior to requesting vertical handover; if it is determined that the download is needed, downloading and storing the waveform application; and performing the seamless vertical handover using the pre-stored waveform application upon request the vertical handover. Therefore, the seamless vertical handover for the SDR terminal can be efficiently performed.06-10-2010
20100142479INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Techniques for improving the capacity of a wireless communications system using interference cancellation (IC). In an early decoding and IC aspect, a frame transmitted from a user to a base station may be decoded prior to the entire frame being received by the base station. The remaining portion of the frame may then be re-constructed at the base station prior to its reception, and cancelled from the receive signal to reduce the interference to frames received from other users. In a power control aspect for early decoding and IC, the power control target level at a local base station may be adjusted in response to successfully early decoding a frame, without affecting the overall outer loop power control operation. Further aspects include late decoding techniques for utilizing the IC of other users' signals to improve the probability of decoding a given user's frames, as well as techniques for traffic channel demodulation using channel re-estimation.06-10-2010
20100142478NEIGHBOR NETWORK ADVERTISEMENT - A method and apparatus for enabling a network to provide information associated with neighboring network(s) of different access technologies to the wireless device, prior to the wireless device determining the need for a handover. When a determination is made by the network that a handover to a new access network is required, the network may send a message to the wireless device that commands the wireless device to leave a currently used access network. Alternatively, the network may send a message to the wireless device that guides or obligates the wireless device to select one of the access networks in the list, provided by the network, in case the wireless device chooses to make a handover. Upon receipt of a command message, the wireless device leaves a currently used access network either immediately or a reasonable time after having set up a connection to a new access network for ensuring smooth handover.06-10-2010
20100142477Wireless Communication Terminal and Method of Controlling the Same - It is judged whether a mobile node 06-10-2010
20110182268OPTIMIZATION OF NON-OPTIMIZED HANDOFF FROM A FIRST ACCESS TECHNOLOGY TO A SECOND ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - A UE and a method are described herein for optimizing a non-optimized handoff from a first access technology (e.g., E-TRAN, WiMAX, UMTS, WiFi, UMB and E-UTRAN) to a second access technology (e.g. 1× RTT, 1× EVDV, HRPD or eHRPD). In one embodiment, the “optimized” non-optimized handoff effectively decreases the mute time that is experienced by the UE during the handoff from the first access technology to the second access technology from around 628 ms to less than 500 ms which is a marked improvement.07-28-2011
20120163340METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAINTAINING COMMUNICATION DURING A BATON HANDOVER - A method and apparatus enable high-speed downlink data transmissions to continue while a baton handover is in progress. In an aspect of the disclosure, a method of wireless communication includes switching an uplink from a source cell to a target cell while maintaining a downlink with the source cell, and transmitting over the uplink to the target cell at least one metric of quality of the downlink In one example, the metric of quality may be a CQI. In another example, the metric of quality may be a HARQ ACK/NACK. The metric of quality of the downlink may be transmitted from the target cell to the source cell, directly or by way of a radio network controller.06-28-2012
20120163339APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GROUP COMMUNICATION - An apparatus for group communication in a base station through a plurality of terminals connected to a terminal coupler receives periodic reports of Carrier to Interference Noise Ratio (CINR) from the plurality of terminals, calculates the moving average CINR and makes a BS-initiated handover decision for the plurality of terminals, and controls the plurality of terminals to simultaneously perform handover to a target base station.06-28-2012
20120163337METHOD OF ALLOCATING HOME NETWORK PREFIX, INTER-HANDOFF METHOD, AND MULTI-HOMING SYSTEM THEREOF - Disclosed is a method of allocating a home network prefix to a mobile terminal having multi interfaces by a local mobility anchor. The local mobility anchor allocates a first home network prefix independently to each of the multiple interfaces for simultaneous access of the multi interfaces. The local mobility anchor allocates a single second home network prefix in common to each of the multi interfaces for inter hand-off between the multiple interfaces. In this manner, a home network prefix for simultaneous access of multi interfaces is separated from a home network prefix for inter hand-off.06-28-2012
20120170549Method and Apparatus for System Frame Number Synchronization in Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) Networks - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which a first signal from a first Node B (NB) using a first system frame number (SFN) is received; and a second signal from a second NB using a second SFN is received, wherein the first SFN and the second SFN are identical.07-05-2012
20090180440Client-Based Multimode Handover in Communication Systems - A communication system having a first communication device being in communication with a second communication device via a communication connectivity to a first communication network. The first communication device having a first handover module operable to handover communication connectivity from the first communication network to a second communication network. The second communication device having a second handover module cooperatively operable with the first handover module to maintain communication between the second communication device and the first communication device while the first handover module operates to handover communication connectivity from the first communication network to the second communication network.07-16-2009
20100020764MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, ITS CONTROL DEVICE, HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - According to one embodiment, a mobile communication system includes base stations each forming a wireless zone for wirelessly accommodating mobile terminals, and a control device accommodating the base stations. The control device includes a construction module, a prediction module and an instruction module. The construction module constructs a database regarding a history of handovers by the mobile terminals. The prediction module predicts a base station of the next connection destination of a mobile terminal being in communication and timing of a handover to the base station of the next connection destination on the basis of the database. The instruction module instructs the handover to the predicted base station to the mobile terminal being in communication before the timing comes.01-28-2010
20100020765METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR CONCURRENT DATA AND SIGNALING METHODOLOGY FOR WIMAX HANDOVER - Techniques, systems and methods for concurrent data and signaling for WiMAX handover are disclosed herein. The serving base station may receive a handover request message from a mobile station and transmit a parameter to the mobile station to indicate a time to suspend a first set of one or more service flows between the serving base station and the mobile station during a handover procedure and continue data exchange between the mobile station and the serving base station for a second set of one or more service flows during the handover procedure. The proposed techniques reduce the service suspension time during the handover procedure.01-28-2010
20100157938METHOD AND APPARATUS APPLIED TO IDENTIFICATION FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - The invention provides a method and apparatus to be executed in a first UE (User Equipment), applied to identification for handover from a current serving network to a target network, the method comprising the steps of: acquiring handover status information for a second UE communicating with it; and sending identity confirmation information to the second UE according to the handover status information so that the second UE can validate its identity, wherein the handover status information and the identity confirmation information are transmitted via different networks. With the proposed method and apparatus, the handover procedure between two wireless networks can be facilitated even in the case of not providing identification information of the calling party of the handover call.06-24-2010
20090196257APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER OF TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are an apparatus and a method for performing a handover of a terminal in a wireless communication system. In the method, a ranging code is transmitted to a target base station on which a handover is to be performed. A ranging response message comprising Connection Identification (CID) update information is received from the target base station together with resource assignment information for transmission of a ranging request message. Therefore, fast resumption of downlink data reception of the terminal can be supported through fast CID update during a handover.08-06-2009
20090196255Differentiating GGSN terminated PDP context from PGW terminated EPS bearer during inter-RAT handovers - A method and apparatus that can be used for differentiating a GGSN terminated PDP context from a PGW terminated EPS bearer during the Inter-RAT handovers are provided. The method can include checking an access point name received from a first network entity. The method can also include, when the access point name does not contain an evolved packet system specific label, initiating a context deactivation.08-06-2009
20090196252WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A SEQUENCE OF DATA UNITS BETWEEN A WIRELESS DEVICE AND A NETWORK - Wireless communication method for transmitting a status report for a sequence of data transmitted along a wireless communication link between a wireless device and a network having a plurality of base stations, the wireless communication link having a transmitting side and a receiving side. The method comprises: on the receiving side, determining status information on data units of the sequence, indicating whether each data unit has been received or not on the receiving side; and transmitting, from the receiving side to the transmitting side of the wireless communication link, a status report containing a pointer designating a first non-received data unit in the sequence and a bitmap providing the status information for a set of data units following said first non-received data unit in the sequence.08-06-2009
20090196251MANAGEMENT OF A MULTI-APPLICATION MOBILE CARRIER TREE - Efficient utilization and management of integrated mobile base station carrier trees is provided herein. Such trees provide an organizational structure for allocating calls in a code division, tone division, time division and/or like mobile infrastructure. Calls can be allocated to portions of the carrier tree as a function of characteristic(s) associated with the call. Accordingly, like calls are grouped within the carrier tree with like calls. In addition, portions of the carrier tree can be re-allocated to different types of traffic to meet fluctuations in traffic demand. Further, calls can be re-packed from existing segments of the carrier tree to other segments to maintain calls having common characteristics in contiguous groups, and to maintain idle segments another contiguous group(s). Accordingly, the wireless carrier tree can be packed and managed more efficiently, providing greater throughput and reduced contention for resources.08-06-2009
20090196256METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING CELL RESELECTION FOR WTRU OPERATING IN DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION - A method for discontinuous reception (DRX) implemented in a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) during cell reselection including initiating cell reselection; disabling DRX operation, wherein disabling DRX operation enables continuous reception; transmitting a CELL UPDATE message; receiving a CELL UPDATE CONFIRM message; and enabling DRX operation based on the received CELL UPDATE CONFIRM message.08-06-2009
20100150107Inter-Access Network Handover - In a wireless network environment comprising first and second packet-switched access networks, each access network using a tunnelling-type micro-mobility protocol and a Quality of Service (QoS) routing protocol to route packet data to and from mobile nodes attached thereto, and each access network comprising an access router to which a mobile node may attach, a mobility agent with which said mobile node may register and a gateway, a method of facilitating network layer handover of said mobile node from said first access network to said second access network, said mobile node registered in said first access network with a serving mobility agent, which method comprises the steps of: said mobile node receiving a router advertisement from said second access network, which router advertisement comprises a network-layer address of a target mobility agent in said second access network with which said mobile node may register; and said mobile node forwarding said network-layer address to said serving mobility agent, whereby said serving mobility agent may communicate with said target mobility agent to facilitate network-layer handover of said mobile node to said second access network.06-17-2010
20100150109METHOD OF IDENTIFICATION OF A FEMTOCELL BASE STATION AS A HANDOVER TARGET, AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - A method is provided of identifying which one of a plurality of femtocell base stations neighbouring a first femtocell base station is to be the target for handover of a call connection with a user terminal from the first base station. The neighbour femtocell base stations use the same primary scrambling code as each other. The femtocell base stations use code-division multiple access, CDMA. Each of the neighbour femtocell base stations transmits a respective broadcast signal that include timing information such that each neighbour femtocell base station transmits a broadcast signal having different timing information to that of the other neighbour femtocell base stations. The user terminal receives broadcast signals, determines the timing information of at least one of the received broadcast signals and reports the timing information to the first femtocell base station. The first femtocell base station identifies the target femtocell base station for handover from the timing information.06-17-2010
20090290556WIRELESS NETWORK HANDOVER WITH SINGLE RADIO OPERATION - Briefly, in accordance with one or more embodiments, a handover of a wireless device from a first network to a second network may be implemented via operation of a single radio in the wireless device. A network architecture capable of implementing such a single radio handover operation may comprise a mobility management entity of a first network and an interworking function device capable of emulating an authenticator and/or protocol translation device of the first network or a second network. First switching logic is capable of exchanging information between the mobile station and the internetworking function device during a handover operation, and second switching logic is capable of exchanging information between the internetworking function device and an ASN, RNC, and/or SGSN of the target network.11-26-2009
20080259872Media independent handover-based network system having a vertical handover capability and vertical handover method thereof - A heterogeneous network system performs a vertical handover based on media independent handover (MIH) in different networks in which a WiMAX (Wireless Broadband Internet) network (or a WiBro (Wireless Broadband Internet)) and a WLAN (Wireless LAN) network are coexisted. The heterogeneous network system cyclically acquires neighboring network information in advance through a media independent handover server, and performs new address (NCoA) generation at a handover preliminary time. And then DAD (Duplicate Address Detection) and BU (Binding Update) are performed. Accordingly, the vertical handover between different networks can be performed to receive packets from a switched network while a handover delay time is minimized.10-23-2008
20080259871Method of performing vertical handover between different wireless networks - A method of performing a vertical handover between different wireless networks based on media independent handover (MIH) includes the steps of checking a link state of the first network to transmit a handover notify message from the mobile node to an old access router when a handover is needed, and transmitting a handover request message from the old access router to a new access router to form a tunnel to exit toward the old access router. Thereafter, packets to be transmitted to the mobile node through the first network are buffered in the old access router. After changing the wireless service from the first network to the second network the mobile node, the packets buffered in the old access router is then transmitted to the new access router, and the mobile node receives the packets through the second network.10-23-2008
20080259870METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER - A method and apparatus for performing a handover are disclosed. An Internet protocol (IP) multimedia subsystem (IMS) client registers with an IMS network and establishes an MIH session with an MIH application server using an SIP. The IMS client establishes a session for IP-based service, (e.g., VoIP), with a communication peer using SIP messaging. MIH messages are exchanged for handover with the MIH application server over IP using SIP messages by encapsulating the MIH messages in SIP instant messages. Alternatively, the MIH messages may be exchanged with the MIH application over IP by sending equivalent SIP messages in place of the MIH messages.10-23-2008
20080259868Wireless communication system and associated method for routing messages to wireless networks - A wireless communication system is provided that includes a base station and a routing map. The base station is in wireless communication with a plurality of wireless networks. The routing map stores information relating to a location of a mobile station in wireless communication with a first wireless network. The base station receives a signal for the mobile station and transmits the signal to only the first wireless network, according to information retrieved from the routing map related to the location of the mobile station. The wireless network may be a wireless local area network. A handover of the mobile station from the first wireless network to a second wireless network may be made based upon a measured signal characteristic between the mobile station and the first and second wireless networks.10-23-2008
20100014485BUFFERING PACKETS DESTINED FOR A MOBILE DEVICE WHILE THE MOBILE DEVICE MOVES FROM ONE NETWORK TO ANOTHER NETWORK TO PREVENT HANDOFF PACKET LOSS - A method and system for preventing packet loss during handoff of a mobile host between access networks. In accordance with an aspect of the invention, a home agent on a network maintains a FIFO (First In-First Out) buffer for every mobile host that it serves. When a packet destined for a particular mobile host is received at the home agent, it is assigned an incremental sequence number, encapsulated as an IP packet, and forwarded to the mobile host with the sequence number as an identifier. The packet and sequence number are thereafter stored in the buffer for a period of time after the packet was forwarded to the mobile host. After hand-off to the arriving network is completed, the mobile host sends the sequence number of the last-received IP packet to the home agent and the new care-of IP address. Using this sequence number, the home agent then determines whether any incoming packets had been routed to the previous care-of IP address. These are retrieved from the buffer, and resent to the new care-of IP address.01-21-2010
20090003283RE-USING SEQUENCE NUMBER BY MULTIPLE PROTOCOLS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Techniques for re-using sequence number by multiple protocols in a protocol stack are described. In one design, at least one protocol data unit (PDU) from a first protocol may be received as at least one service data unit (SDU) at a second protocol, with each PDU being assigned a different sequence number by the first protocol. A sequence number for each SDU may be determined based on a sequence number for a corresponding PDU from the first protocol. A PDU may be formed by the second protocol based on the at least one SDU. A header may be generated for the PDU and may include (i) the sequence number and possibly a segment offset for the first SDU and (ii) a header block for each remaining SDU, which may include a segment length, a sequence number offset, and a segment offset for that SDU.01-01-2009
20090190549System for packet data service in the mixed network of asynchronous communication network and synchronous communication network and hand-over method thereof - Disclosed herein is a mobile communication terminal and handover method therefor. In the mobile communication system, a Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN) of the asynchronous network is connected to a Packet Data Service Node (PDSN) of the synchronous network. Accordingly, as a mobile communication terminal, using packet data service in the asynchronous mobile communication system, moves into an area of a synchronous mobile communication system, the synchronous mobile communication system sets control signals and traffic to transmit packet data in response to a request from the asynchronous mobile communication system. Further, if forward and reverse channels are assigned between the mobile communication terminal and the synchronous mobile communication system, call setup is performed to provide the packet data service, and then a node B of the asynchronous mobile communication system releases the connection to the mobile communication terminal.07-30-2009
20130028235MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK, INFRASTRUCTURE EQUIPMENT AND METHOD - A mobile communications network, which may include base stations, is configured to communicate data packets with communications terminals. A core network, which may include a mobility manager, communicates data packets with base stations. A first base station may be configured to receive a short message data packet from a communications terminal, identify the communications terminal, to determine, from the short message data packet an indication of the first base station to which the communications terminal is attached, and to store an indication of the first base station through which the short message data packet was sent in association with an identifier of the communications terminal. The mobile communications network may be configured to identify that the communications terminal has changed attachment to a second base station, and to send the down link data packet to the second base station for communication to the communications terminal.01-31-2013
20130028236HANDOVER DEVICE OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING MULTI-COMPONENT CARRIER AND METHOD THEREOF - A source base station (SeNB) composes a handover request message including information of which at least one or more CC formed for a user terminal (UE) and information about the performance of the UE associated with at least one or more CC and transmits the handover message to a target base station (TeNB) and the TeNB transmits to the SeNB a handover request response message including at least one CC allocation information as information for the CC which the UE uses thereby or CC allocation information and a CC activation indicator associated with the CC allocation information, and an activation composition indicator having a bit length with respect to the allocated CCs. Packet loss due to the handover is minimized by enabling the UE to rapidly use the CC(s) to be used in the TeNB as the moved cell and transmission efficiency of a system can be enhanced thereby.01-31-2013
20130028234Method And Apparatus For Cell Update While In An Enhanced Cell_Fach State - A method and apparatus for cell update while in a Cell_FACH state are disclosed. After selecting a target cell, system information is read from the target cell including high speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) common system information. A radio network temporary identity (RNTI) received in a source cell is cleared and a variable HS_DSCH_RECEPTION is set to TRUE. An HS-DSCH medium access control (MAC-hs) entity is configured based on the HS-DSCH common system information. High speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) transmission is then received in the target cell. A CELL UPDATE message is sent to notify of a cell change. The HSDPA transmission may be received using a common H-RNTI broadcast in the system information, a reserved H-RNTI as requested in a CELL UPDATE message, or a temporary identity which is a subset of a U-RNTI. The MAC-hs entity may be reset.01-31-2013
20110194532SMART ROAM SYSTEM AND METHOD - Systems and methods for determining when to switch wireless access points from a current wireless access point to a new wireless access point are disclosed. In various embodiments the systems and methods monitor a signal strength received from the current wireless access point, monitor a signal strength received from the new wireless access point and compare the signal strength received from the wireless access points. Switching from the current wireless access point to the new wireless access point can occur, for example, when the signal strength received from the new wireless access point is greater than the signal strength received from the current wireless access point by a first pre-determined value.08-11-2011
20110194531METHOD OF NETWORK RE-ENTRY IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method of performing network re-entry of a mobile station based on restart of a base station and an apparatus for performing the same are disclosed. The method comprises the steps of receiving a first message from a base station, the first message including a restart count of which value is varied whenever the base station is restarted; comparing the restart count value with a count value previously stored; and transmitting a second message to the base station if the count values are different from each other, the second message including a first identifier for identifying the mobile station in respect of connection information (context) of the mobile station and a ranging purpose indication field set to a value indicating network re-entry due to restart of the base station.08-11-2011
20110194530Systems and Methods of Advertising Handoff - A heterogeneous communication system enables femto Access Points (APs) to advertise handoff related information on a first Radio Access Technology (RAT), such as for receipt by a multi mode mobile device (e.g., a mobile device capable of operation on a plurality of RATs), wherein the handoff related information permits the multi mode mobile device to identify the femto access point on a second RAT. The multi mode mobile device can be connected to a macro node (e.g., a macro base station, an evolved Base Node, etc.) using the first RAT via a Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) air-interface (e.g., 1×, HRPD, eHRPD), while independently reading/decoding overhead messages on the second RAT for connection thereto (e.g., connection to the femto access point on the second RAT.) The second RAT can be another WWAN, a Wireless Local Access Network (WLAN) or a Personal Access Network.08-11-2011
20110194529RANGING BY MOBILE STATION IN LEGACY SUPPORT MODE - Ranging by a mobile station in a legacy support mode is disclosed. According to embodiments of the present invention, S-SFH information transmitted by a base station in a system operating in FDM based uplink mixed mode is configured in a manner different from that of the FDM based uplink mixed mode. And, a mobile station performs a ranging by interpreting S-SFH differently according to a presence or non-presence of the mixed mode. Therefore, the present invention efficiently manages the ranging of the mobile station and reduces unnecessary signaling overhead.08-11-2011
20110194535QoS Management for Self-Backhauling in LTE - A method manages bearers over a first wireless link between a self-backhauled base station and a base station, where the self-backhauled base station serves one or more user equipments (UEs) via one or more second wireless links in a network. The method is implemented at the self-backhauled base station and includes identifying changes in numbers and/or characteristics of UE bearers multiplexed onto a backhaul bearer associated with the first wireless link. The method further includes dynamically reconfiguring resources allocated to the backhaul beare08-11-2011
20110194534ESTABLISHING COLOCATED SECOND CELL USING A SECOND SCRAMBLING CODE BY A FEMTO BASE STATION - In a cellular communications network, it may be desirable for a large number of basestations to share one or a small number of scrambling codes. When a basestation identifies a desired scrambling code, which is also being used by another nearby basestation, steps are taken such that a location area update is triggered whenever a mobile communications device moves from a coverage area of the nearby basestation into a coverage area of said basestation. Further, the basestation establishes a first cell, using the desired scrambling code, and also establishes a second cell also served by the basestation, using a second scrambling code. By ensuring that mobile devices are preferentially served by the second cell, the possibility of interference with the nearby basestation is reduced.08-11-2011
20110194533Method of Handling Radio Resource Reconfiguration - A method of handling radio resource reconfiguration for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes establishing at least one data radio bearer (DRB) and an Evolved Packet System (EPS)-bearer identity of the least one DRB, wherein the least one DRB is associated with a first radio resource configuration; indicating that establishment of the at least one DRB and the EPS-bearer identity of the at least one DRB is illegal when the mobile device reverts back to a second radio resource configuration from the first radio resource configuration.08-11-2011
20090122760Method and Apparatus for Association Control in Mobile Wireless Networks - A method for association of a mobile terminal with an access point (AP) includes determining a set of available APs. The AP from among the available APs that has the coverage area that is likely to encompass the mobile terminal for the greatest period of time or distance is selected. The selected AP is associated with the mobile terminal.05-14-2009
20100157940DATA GENERATION APPARATUS, DATA GENERATION METHOD, BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, SYNCHRONICATION DETECTION METHOD, SECTOR IDENTIFICATION METHOD, INFORMATION DETECTION METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - [Problems] To reduce a cell search process including sector identification without increasing a load on a transmission/reception device.06-24-2010
20100118833METHOD FOR PERFORMING INITIAL RANGING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing initial ranging in a wireless communication system includes transmitting a ranging request message and receiving a ranging response message including a temporary identifier for a mobile station which transmits the ranging request message. By using the temporary identifier which identifies the mobile station before establishing authentication, it is possible to prevent the MAC address from being exposed to a malicious attacker through a wireless interface and to secure location privacy.05-13-2010
20100118831Method For Network Layer Handoff Over a Wireless LAN and an Associated Access Point Device - A method and a wireless access point device for a network layer handoff of a wireless mobile node over a wireless local area network. The method includes detecting a wireless mobile node that has moved into the coverage area of the wireless access point device; maintaining an available IP address pool; selecting a temporary IP address from the IP access pool in response to the detection of the mobile node moving into the coverage area; and assigning a temporary IP address to the mobile node for use by the node during an interim period. The method produces a network layer handoff of a wireless mobile node over a local area network. Also provided is a computer readable article of manufacture tangibly embodying computer readable instructions for executing the steps of the method.05-13-2010
20100118830Mobile Intelligent Roaming Using Multi-Modal Access Point Devices - A system and method are provided in which access point (AP) devices in a wireless local area network (WLAN) are typed or configured into one of three measurement and reporting roles: Monitor-Mode AP (MMAP), Portal AP (PAP), a Border AP (BAP) or an Interior AP (IAP). APs are assigned specific link measurement requirements according to their assigned type or role. In general, MMAPs and PAPs have the greatest measurement and reporting responsibilities, BAPs have less measurement and reporting responsibilities than PAPs and IAPs have the least measurement and reporting responsibilities. The APs generate measurements that are supplied to appropriate equipment to facilitate handover decisions with respect to a dual-mode wireless client device that roams between the WLAN and another network or vice versa. As a result, link measurements are only performed by APs in locations where such measurements are necessary for handover service, thus reducing the overall processing load on the WLAN infrastructure.05-13-2010
20130028237HANDOVER METHOD, HANDOVER SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS FOR A UE ATTACHING TO A LOCAL IP NETWORK - With the deployment of home NodeB or home eNodeB, a user can access both operator's core network and Local IP Access (LIPA), e.g. to home based network or general Internet, on the same device at the same time. However, existing mechanisms does not allow an efficient way of LIPA mobility support, especially when there are multiple home NodeBs or home eNodeBs serving the same LIPA domain. The present invention provides a solution that can achieve seamless mobility among different home NodeBs or home eNodeBs without interruption to LIPA service. The LIPA traffic for the terminal can be contained within the local domain during the handover process. It also provides support of the relocation of the gateway that provides the LIPA access to the mobile terminal.01-31-2013
20080205342SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HANDOFFS BETWEEN TECHNOLOGIES - Systems and methods for providing a handoff between technologies are disclosed. An intra-technology handoff occurs where the same integrated chassis handles the session for the different access technologies. In an intra-technology handoff, the same IP address and the session can be maintained through the handoff. The mobile node can undergo a handoff without issuing a registration request in some embodiments. An inter-technology handoff occurs from one integrated chassis to another integrated chassis. The integrated chassis can preserve session and context information in a session manager and in a handoff from one access technology to another the same session manager can be chosen with the session and context information remaining intact even though the access technology has changed. The integrated chassis can provide an access technology handoff where the core network does not notice any change and applications running on or delivered to the mobile node are not effected.08-28-2008
20100074227METHOD AND A NETWORK NODE FOR CONTROLLING OUTPUT UPLINK AND DOWNLINK POWER LEVELS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The present inventions relates to a method and a network node for controlling an output uplink power level of a mobile station and for controlling an output downlink power level of a target base station in a target cell of a mobile communications system. The method comprises receiving at the network node a message indicating that a handover of the mobile station from an originating cell to the target cell is completed; and commanding the target base station to use an initial output downlink power level and the mobile station to use an initial output uplink power level, wherein the initial output downlink power level and the initial output uplink power level are based on at least previous power control levels used a time after previous handovers were completed between the originating cell and the target cell.03-25-2010
20100074226Proxy based approach for IP address assignment to decrease latency of hand-offs in mobile IP telephony - A mechanism for decreasing the latency in an IP address assignment process for mobile systems using IP as network layer protocol is described. The proposed system is aimed at supporting seamless hand-offs for real-time applications like VOIP. A set of optimized messages is defined to eliminate the need for exchanging long DHCP messages to acquire an IP address. The mechanism involves splitting the IP address assignment functionality into two parts, with the base station being responsible for assigning IP addresses to individual end user devices, and the Mobile Switching Center assigning a block of IP addresses to each base station.03-25-2010
20100074225SYSTEM AND METHODS OF INTEGRATING AN OVERLAY WIRELESS DATA NETWORK CANOPY INTO A HIGH BANDWIDTH FTTX (FIBER-TO-THE PREMISES / CURB / NEIGHBORHOOD) NETWORK - An approach to integrate a wireless data network canopy into the high-capacity fixed FttX (Fiber-to-the-Premises/Curb/Neighborhood) network at intersection points throughout the overlay rather than interconnecting them as two disparate networks in order to provide a plurality of data containing video, audio, voice communications, broadcast radio programming, and data both fixed and mobile. This approach is applicable to active networks. Considerations must still be made for security.03-25-2010
20100074223CS to IMS Hand-Back and Hand-in for IMS Systems for Legacy CS UE with Home Node B Access - A system and method for allowing legacy circuit switch user equipment (CS UE) to operate via a packet switch system, such as an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) system, is provided. The mobility and session control aspects of communications with the legacy CS UE is separated. A user agent is placed in the receiving node (e.g., a home node B) that acts as the SIP agent for the CS UE for session control. An interworking function is provided to allow mobility between the macro CS network and the PS (e.g., IMS) network. Hand-back and hand-in procedures with service continuity are also provided.03-25-2010
20100074222METHOD FOR IMPROVING BUFFER STATUS TRIGGERING MECHANISM IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND RELATED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for improving a buffer status triggering mechanism for a mobile device of a wireless communication system comprises triggering a buffer status report when uplink data becomes data available for transmission and a logical channel corresponding to data of the uplink data has higher priority than logical channels corresponding to data available for transmission already existed in a transmission buffer if there is already data available for transmission other than the uplink data included in the UE transmission buffer.03-25-2010
20100074224IMS to CS Handover for IMS Systems for Legacy CS UE with Home Node B Access - A system and method for allowing legacy circuit switch user equipment (CS UE) to operate via a packet switch system, such as an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) system, is provided. The mobility and session control aspects of communications with the legacy CS UE is separated. A user agent is placed in the receiving node (e.g., a home node B) that acts as the SIP agent for the CS UE for session control. An interworking function is provided to allow mobility between the macro CS network and the PS (e.g., IMS) network. Hand-back and hand-in procedures with service continuity are also provided.03-25-2010
20100074220HANDOVER METHOD BETWEEN SYSTEMS OF MULTI-MODE TERMINAL - The present invention relates to a handover method between systems of a multi-mode terminal. A multi-cast based protocol is added to an Internet protocol (IP) based wireless network to cooperate with the wireless access protocol of the terminal. In addition, minimized processes are added to use the wireless access protocol having wide area coverage. Accordingly, the handover between the systems may be performed while packet loss or service delay caused by a movement of a user may be minimized, and terminal complexity may not be increased.03-25-2010
20100074218METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PILOT CAPTURE FOR WIRELESS INTERSYSTEM HANDOVER - The present invention provides a method and apparatus applied to pilot capture for handover between wireless communication networks. In the method, when a mobile station needs to hand over from a GSM system serving as current service network to another wireless communication network, the GSM system and the mobile station will update the logic location of the first idle frame to be met subsequently, which will be inserted after the TDMA frame where the corresponding starting point of pilot capture resides, then the mobile station utilizes idle timeslots after the starting point to form a pilot capture time window with a predefined length, eventually the mobile station captures the pilot signal of the another wireless communication network in the pilot capture time window. Comparing to conventional pilot capture method, with the method provided by the present invention, the mobile station not only capture the complete pilot signal of target handover network, but also achieve the whole pilot-capture process with relatively short time.03-25-2010
20100074219Methods and Apparatus for Reverse Link Timing Correction - Methods and apparatus for reverse link timing correction in a wireless communication device. In particular, when a handoff of the device from a first sector currently serving the device to a second sector not currently serving the device is detected, a first function linking timing correction of a reverse link of the device to forward link timing corrections is changed to a second function for timing correction. In particular, the second function is configured to correct reverse link timing during a time period of either during or for a predetermined period after a handoff of the device from the first sector to the second sector, where the second function is based on a criterion different from criteria of the first function.03-25-2010
20100074221APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS, METHOD OF PERFORMING HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS, AND MOBILE ROUTER - Provided are an apparatus for controlling handover between heterogeneous networks, a method of performing handover between heterogeneous networks in a mobile router, and a mobile router. The method includes determining whether a handover to a network employing a different method from a network to which the mobile router belongs is required based on information prestored in the mobile router, the network to which the mobile router belongs determined by current location information of the mobile router and performing the handover according to the result of the determination. Mobility detection time can be reduced by applying the handover technique between wireless/satellite networks based on link trigger and location to a mobile router moving at high speed. Thus, service interruption can be prevented regardless of movement speed, even in a satellite shadow region such as a station.03-25-2010
20130077600Managed Handover Process - A method for providing information to a first terminal system and/or a second terminal system which connected to each other through a network and are subject to a potential or actual handover, provides convenience information about the execution of the potential or actual handover to at least one of the first and the second terminal systems, prior to or with the start of the handover, and provides in addition to at least one of the first and the second terminal systems a commercial communication relating to a commercial measure, whereby the commercial communication is provided in correlation with the provision of the convenience information.03-28-2013
20130039344METHOD FOR EFFICIENTLY UPDATING SECONDARY CARRIER INFORMATION IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for updating secondary carrier information for preemptively allocating secondary carriers during handover and an apparatus for carrying out the method. A method in which a terminal performs handover in a broadband access system that supports multiple carriers according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises: a step in which a target base station receives, from a serving base station, a first message including carrier allocation information on at least one secondary carrier preemptively allocated to the terminal; a step of performing network reentry with the target base station; and judging whether the multi-carrier configuration of the serving base station and the multi-carrier configuration of the target base station are the same, and, if the configurations are different from each other, transmitting, to the target base station, a second message for requesting multi-carrier capability negotiation.02-14-2013
20130039342User Equipment, Network Node, Second Network Node and Methods Therein - Embodiments herein relate to a method in a user equipment (02-14-2013
20130039343MOBILE WIRELESS SYSTEM, ACCESS POINT DEVICE, AND HANDOVER PROCESSING METHOD - A mobile wireless system includes a first gateway (L-PGW), a second gateway (PGW), a first access point (HeNB) capable of establishing a communication path simultaneously with the first and second gateways, and a second access point (eNB) capable of establishing a communication path only with the PGW. When a mobile terminal connected to the HeNB and communicating with a communication destination node using a first path through the L-PGW switches a connection destination to the eNB, the HeNB establishes a second path through the HeNB and the PGW, while maintaining the first path. The HeNB transmits data, which has been transmitted to the HeNB along the first path, to the eNB along the second path, until the UE is connected to the eNB, and a third path to the communication destination node through the PGW is established. Accordingly, an interruption time of data reception involved in handover is shortened.02-14-2013
20130039338Releasing Time Domain Measurement Restrictions - In some implementations, a method includes identifying handover from a source eNodeB (eNB) to a target eNB or reestablishment with a subsequent eNB after losing connection with an initial eNB. Time-domain measurement resource restrictions for the UE are identified. The time-domain measurement resource restriction for the UE is released in connection with identifying the handover or the reestablishment.02-14-2013
20130039340METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR REDIRECTING DATA TRAFFIC - A method, apparatus and system for resource allocation in redirection of data traffic are provided. The method includes receiving a message including a subscription identification, position information associated with the subscription and an action proposal associated with the subscription (02-14-2013
20130039341DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER AND A METHOD FOR THE SAME - Disclosed are a device for controlling uplink transmission power and a method for the same. In a terminal device for controlling uplink transmission power according to the present invention, a receiving antenna receives a first message containing a power correction value from a base station. A processor determines the transmission power value which will be used in transmitting a second message, based on the power correction value. A sending antenna transmits the second message to the base station, using the determined transmission power value, and, at this time, the power correction value is a value for correcting the transmission-power value is a value for correcting the transmission-power value which was used during initial ranging by the terminal or handover ranging of the terminal.02-14-2013
20130039337APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SEAMLESS HANDOFF OF A SERVICE BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF NETWORKS - Apparatus and method for seamless handoff of a service between different types of networks. The system may include a first user equipment, a second user equipment, a first network, a second network, and an application server. The first user equipment and the second user equipment may be configured to communicate with each other initially through a first data path of the service. The first network may be configured to determine whether the first user equipment should change its access network from the first network. The second network may be configured to allocate a new bearer and a second network IP address to the first user equipment when the first network requests the first user equipment to change its access network from the first network to the second network. The application server may be configured to modify the first data path based on the second network IP address and the new bearer, to form a second data path of the service through which the first user equipment and the second user equipment communicate after handoff of the service from the first network to the second network. The first data path of the service may pass through the first network and the second data path of the service may be formed to pass through the second network.02-14-2013
20130039339Other Network Component Receiving RRC Configuration Information from eNB - In order to re-establish a suspended RRC connection, the mobile device (02-14-2013
20130039336METHOD AND APPARATUS TO CONTROL HSDPA ACTIVATION/DE-ACTIVATION - A method and a user equipment (“UE”), for High Speed Downlink Packet Access (“HSDPA”) de-activation, the method determining whether a number of serving HSDPA cell changes of the UE exceeds a threshold within a predetermined time period; and; sending a transition indication from the UE to a network node to deactivate HSDPA if the threshold is exceeded for within the predetermined time period. Also, a method and a network node, for High Speed Downlink Packet Access de-activation, the method determining whether a number of serving HSDPA cell changes of a user equipment communicating with the network node exceeds a threshold within a predetermined time period; and; deactivating HSDPA for the UE if the threshold is exceeded within the predetermined time period.02-14-2013
20130083772WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication terminal includes a wireless communication circuit that wireless connects to a first or a second network; a processor that controls switching of a network to which the wireless communication circuit connects; and a timer that starts counting based on a wireless communication state and finishes counting a first time period when a given time period has elapsed, and counts a second time period that is longer than the first time period. The processor maintains the first network to which the wireless communication circuit connects and attempts re-connection to the first network until the timer finishes counting the first time period, switches a destination of the wireless communication circuit to the second network if there is a connectable second network when the timer finishes counting the first time period, and if not, attempts re-connection to the first network until the timer finishes counting the second time period.04-04-2013
20130083771REDUCING NETWORK-INITIATED QOS INTERRUPTION TIME WHEN RADIO AND CORE NETWORKS ARE OUT OF SYNCHRONIZATION DUE TO DIFFERENT UNDERLYING TECHNOLOGIES - A method enables a user equipment (UE) intervention to reduce a network-initiated Quality of Service (QoS) interruption time or a disruption of the network-initiated QoS, while avoiding application intervention. The method includes communicating with a source radio access network (RAN) in accordance with a network-initiated quality of service (QoS) profile. The method also includes transferring to a target RAN. The method further includes triggering, by a user equipment (UE), a QoS setup to reestablish the QoS profile.04-04-2013
20130083777Methods and Apparatuses for Supporting Handover of a PS Voice Call to a CS Voice Call by Using SRVCC Function - A method for a Mobile Control Node, MCN, supporting handover of a packet switched, PS, voice call of a given user entity anchored in a IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) to a circuit switched, CS, voice call, by using a Single Radio Voice Call Continuity, SRVCC, function, whereby, —after handover from PS to CS (04-04-2013
20100027505Handover in a Radio Communication System - In a method for communication by radio a first network radio station allocates radio resources to a subscriber station and communicates with the subscriber station using a portion of the radio resources. A second network radio station uses another portion of the radio resources to send a signaling signal which is intended exclusively for the subscriber station. The first network radio station and/or the second network radio station receives a message from the subscriber station, acknowledging receipt of the signaling signal. In response to the message from the subscriber station, the communication of the subscriber station is handed over from the first network radio station to the second network radio station.02-04-2010
20090010222VoWLAN ROAMING CONTROLLER WITH STATION PRE-AUTHENTICATION - A method of triggering handoff of a mobile station to a candidate BSS, for VoWLAN communication, uses a roaming controller for monitoring link qualities of the serving and candidate BSS by selective/controlled fast scanning through RSSI screening at each packet reception. Using link qualities, a list of candidate BSSs for handoff is maintained. The controller selects a candidate BSS for handoff and completes pre-authentication of the mobile station with the selected best candidate BSS. When the link quality of the of the selected candidate BSS becomes better than that of the serving BSS, handoff is triggered. Link qualities may be monitored by screening a metric other than RSSI. When no candidate BSS is found, scanning is reduced/temporarily interrupted, to conserve power. When the serving BSS link quality is above a given threshold when the mobile station is in the serving BSS center, the functions of fast scanning and pre-authentication are interrupted.01-08-2009
20130034080METHOD FOR FAST RETURN TO SOURCE RAT (RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY) AFTER REDIRECTION TO TARGET RAT - A method of wireless communication includes receiving redirection information, from a source radio access technology (RAT), to set up a connection in a target RAT. The redirection information includes a fast return indication. A UE returns to the source RAT in accordance with the fast return indication after call release in the target RAT.02-07-2013
20130034084Method and System for Sector Switching During Packet Transmission - A method and apparatus for handing off packet-transmission between sectors of a wireless communication system is disclosed herein. During transmission of a packet from an access network to an access terminal, the access terminal determines that the packet should theoretically be transmitted to the access terminal in fewer timeslots in another sector than the number of allowed timeslots remaining for the packet transmission in a current sector. In response, the access terminal abandons packet transmission in the current sector and hands off to the other sector, in an effort to increase throughput and save air interface resources.02-07-2013
20130034082OPPORTUNISTIC DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - Embodiments of computer-implemented methods, systems, computing devices, and computer-readable media are described herein for opportunistically transitioning service flows of mobile devices between being direct and indirect. In various embodiments, a proximity between first and second mobile devices that are in wireless communication with each other may be monitored. In various embodiments, a selective transition of a service flow between the first and second mobile devices from being indirect through the radio network access node using a first radio access technology (“RAT”) to being direct using a second RAT may be facilitated, e.g., responsive to a determination that a first criterion has been met. In various embodiments, a selective transition of the service flow from being direct using the second RAT to being indirect using the first RAT may be facilitated, e.g., responsive to a determination that a second criterion has been met.02-07-2013
20130034083Mobile Handoff Through Multi-Network Simulcasting - A method and apparatus supporting handoff using simulcasting of multimedia information via a gateway are disclosed. A gateway supporting both a personal area network and a broadband network may receive multimedia information transmitted to an access device by a wide area network. The gateway may send the received multimedia information to the associated access device, and may communicate with the wide area network.02-07-2013
20130077599SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING CELL SELECTION IN A HETEROGENEOUS CELLULAR NETWORK BASED ON PRIMARY DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC FLOW - Systems and methods are disclosed for controlling cell selection between a high power base station and a neighboring low power base station in a cellular network. In one embodiment, a primary direction of traffic flow for a user equipment located within a transition zone between a high power base station cell of the high power base station and a low power base station cell of the low power base station is determined to be either an uplink direction or a downlink direction. Cell selection for the user equipment is then controlled based on the primary direction of traffic flow for the user equipment such that selection of the high power base station cell is favored if the primary direction of traffic flow is the downlink direction and selection of the low power base station cell is favored if the primary direction of traffic flow is the uplink direction.03-28-2013
20090034474Method and apparatus for dynamic adjustment of uplink transmission time - Systems and methods for dynamically adjusting the transmission time interval (TTI) for a communications system are presented. The described aspects provide for dynamically adjusting the TTI in a communication session between a base station or nodeB and a wireless device or user equipment between a shorter TTI, which can provide increased data throughput and lower power consumption, and a longer TTI, which can provide more rugged communication link connections. By dynamically adjusting the TTI, the communications link can be optimized for the given communication channel conditions. Determinations, based on indicia related to the communications system conditions, can be employed in dynamic TTI adjustment. These determinations can be formed centrally at the Radio Network Controller (RNC), at the RNC supplemented with user equipment (UE) available information, or formed in a distributed manner between the RNC and UE across a communications system.02-05-2009
20100046476SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION HANDOVER METHOD, RADIO NETWORK AND NODE - A synchronization method, a communication handover method, a radio network, and a RAN node are disclosed. The interface information synchronization method includes: determining whether a condition for initiating interface information update is fulfilled; and sending information about the S1 interface between the RAN node and the core network node, and/or information about the X2 interface between the RAN node and the neighboring RAN node to the neighboring RAN node if the condition for initiating interface information update fulfilled.02-25-2010
20100046475Wireless communication system, server and mobile station therefor - This invention provides a wireless communication system wherein a network to which a mobile station should be handed over can be selected, using parametric data collected from network components other than the mobile station. Time taken for a handover between different types of network systems is reduced. The wireless communication system of the present invention comprises a mobile station equipped with multiple wireless interfaces, a server connected to a fixed network, and multiple access points. The mobile station determines available wireless interfaces and sends notification of the available interfaces' identifiers to the server. The server collects managerial data from network components and selects a wireless interface, based on the notification from the mobile station and the managerial data. The mobile station registers its locations in visiting networks corresponding to multiple available wireless interfaces with the server. The server retains the registrations of mobile station locations for the above wireless interfaces.02-25-2010
20100046469IP HANDOFF PROCESS METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONNECTION OF INTERNET PROTOCOLS BETWEEN MOBILE AGENTS IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - An IP handoff process method and Internet service system are provided. In the IP handoff process method, a registration request message for multiple IP handoff is received from a mobile station having a plurality of Internet protocol (IP) addresses through a currently-moving mobile agent of the mobile station. Then, the registration request for multiple IP handoff is processed according to information included in the received registration request message. A reply message thereof is transmitted according to the result of updating the information to the mobile station through the currently-moving mobile agent. Then, the received registration request message is transmitted to a previous mobile agent of the mobile station before moving and a home agent of the mobile station as it is.02-25-2010
20100046466HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - There is provided a handover control method in a mobile communication network wherein an IP packet is exchanged between an access router and a base station, comprising the steps of: receiving a handover request from a mobile station; discarding a packet presently retransmitted and a packet waiting to be scheduled; and switching between cells.02-25-2010
20100046474HOME AGENT - When handover is performed from a first network to a second network, a home agent transmits a reply request message to a terminal through the first network after new configuration of a tunnel for transmitting and receiving a packet through the second network. If the home agent receives a reply message corresponding to the reply request message through the first network, the home agent detects that the configuration of the tunnel for transmitting and receiving the packet through the first network can be deleted, and deletes the configuration of the tunnel.02-25-2010
20100046473MOBILE TERMINAL - When handover is performed from a first network to a second network, a terminal transmits a reply request message to a home agent through the first network after new configuration of a tunnel for transmitting and receiving a packet through the second network. If the terminal receives a reply message corresponding to the reply request message through the first network, the terminal detects that the configuration of the tunnel for transmitting and receiving the packet through the first network can be deleted, and deletes the configuration of the tunnel.02-25-2010
20100046472METHOD OF MANAGING DATA BLOCKS DURING HANDOVER - A method of enabling a source base station (BS) to manage an uplink data block during handover from the source BS to a target BS in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes informing the target BS of a sequence number of a uplink data block to be received from a user equipment (UE) and receiving from the target BS the uplink data block corresponding to the sequence number. Data is properly shared by a source base station (BS) and a target BS during handover. Thus, processing capacity of the target BS can be reduced and overhead on network interface can also be reduced.02-25-2010
20100046471COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS BASE STATION, AND WIRELESS TERMINAL STATION - A downlink data frame addressed to a terminal is copied and obtained downlink data frames are transmitted through different APs, respectively. When a plurality of same uplink data frames are received through the different APs, any one uplink data frame selected out of the uplink data frames is transmitted to its destination. An uplink data frame received from the terminal is copied and obtained uplink data frames are transmitted through different STAs, respectively. When a plurality of same downlink data frames are received through different STAs, any one downlink data frame selected out of the downlink data frames is transmitted to the terminal.02-25-2010
20100046470WIRELESS MOBILE STATION, WIRELESS BASE STATION CONTROL DEVICE, WIRELESS SYSTEM AND WIRELESS CELL MANAGEMENT METHOD - A wireless mobile station (02-25-2010
20100046468Apparatus and method to dynamically handover master functionality to another peer in a wireless network - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method of dynamically handing over master functionality from a wireless station configured as a master station to another peer station in a wireless network, comprising, discovering the peer station's Master/AP capability, which may be, but is not required to be, via a (Re)Association request, selecting the peer station to be a new master station based on predetermined parameters, passing the basic service set (BSS) context from the master station to the new master station in a master station Role Request message before transitioning, notifying the new master station to activate its master station role via the master station Role Request message, and switching by the client station to the role of new master station upon receipt of an AP Role Activation message and starting to send Beacons with a BSSID that is the same as used in Beacons of the previous master station.02-25-2010
20130034081HANDOVER IN LONG TERM EVOLUTION NETWORK - Described embodiments provide for handover in a long term evolution (LTE) communication network. A LTE macrocell base station may receive a measurement report from user equipment while providing a communication service to the user equipment located within a service area of the LTE macrocell base station, and determine whether or not the neighbor cell is a LTE macrocell or a LTE femtocell based on the measurement report. The LTE macrocell base station may initiate hand-over of the user equipment to a neighbor WCDMA macrocell base station when the neighbor cell is determined as the LTE femtocell.02-07-2013
20090316653Methods and Apparatuses for Performing Random Access in a Telecommunications System - The present invention relates to methods and apparatuses (radio base station and UE) for enabling a UE to perform a contention-based random access. According to embodiments of the present invention, a non-dedicated random access preamble identifier is determined by a radio base station and the determined preamble is transmitted in a message to the UE which selects a non-dedicated random access preamble based on the received preamble identifier and performs a contention-based random access using the selected preamble.12-24-2009
20090180441HANDOVER METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system utilizing Mobile IP, information on the access network is exchanged between access routers. And when a mobile terminal performs a handover, the previously exchanged information on the neighbor access routers and the access network information are provided to the mobile terminal. By so doing, the mobile terminal can determine a destination access router in advance, enabling to realize an efficient handover processing.07-16-2009
20120207136SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED TERMINAL, METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR CONFIGURING AND UPDATING SERVICE ACCESS POINTS AND PROVIDING SERVICE CONTENT IN THE MOBILE DOMAIN - Various techniques for service access point configuration for mobile terminals of wireless systems are provided. Pre-configured service access point settings may be provided on a multimedia memory card with a client application capable of configuring the service access point settings in the mobile terminal from the pre-configured service access point settings on the multimedia memory card. Over-the-air updating of service access point settings may be performed by communication between a service access point and a mobile terminal or a client application on the mobile terminal for automatically configuring service access point settings on the mobile terminal based upon information provided by the service access point. Service content specific pricing in the mobile domain is also provided. Service content specific pricing content delivery may be provided through a particular service access point configured for the service content specific pricing.08-16-2012
20120207130METHOD AND APPARATUS OF HANDLING USER EQUIPMENT CATEGORY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A User Equipment (UE) category handling method and an apparatus for handling late version UE category attached to an early release version network in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system are provided. A communication method includes transmitting a terminal capability report message including multiple terminal categories, receiving a Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection reconfiguration message including a terminal category to be used by the terminal according to serving base station of the terminal, and communicating with the network using the terminal category received from the network. The UE category handling method and apparatus of the present invention allows the UE to report a network-adaptive UE category, thereby avoiding soft buffer problem caused by version information mismatch and facilitating communication with the network without malfunctioning.08-16-2012
20100098025Method and appartus for handover between IEEE 802.16E and 802.16M systems - Methods for a mobile station to handover between IEEE 802.16e and 802.16m systems are provided. The mobile station is served by an IEEE 802.16e-only base station or an IEEE 802.16e zone of a 16e/16m-conexistence base station. In a zone-switch based handover procedure, the mobile station first performs an IEEE 802.16e legacy handover procedure such that the mobile station handovers from the serving base station to an IEEE 802.16e zone of a target base station. The mobile station then performs a zone-switch procedure such that the mobile station switches from the IEEE 802.16e zone to an IEEE 802.16m zone of the target base station. In a direct handover procedure, the mobile station performs an IEEE 802.16m handover procedure such that the mobile station handovers from the serving base station to the IEEE 802.16m zone of the target base station directly.04-22-2010
20100034168System and Method for Enabling SR-VCC with Shared IMPU - Embodiments of the present invention provide a system and method for identification of a UE for session transfer requests initiated by an MSC Server using a GRUU. The UE provides the GRUU to an MME upon IMS Registration, and the MME provides the GRUU to the MSC Server as part of a handover request. The MSC Server may use an Mg or Mw SIP interface, or an ISUP interface to initiate a session transfer. If the MSC Server has an Mg or Mw SIP interface, the GRUU is asserted in a SIP message, e.g., an INVITE message, sent to initiate session transfer. If the MSC Server does not have the SIP interface, i.e., uses ISUP to initiate session transfer, then the GRUU is passed via a gsmSCF into an SCC AS. The SCC AS uses the GRUU to identify the UE for which the session transfer request is being initiated.02-11-2010
20120182972METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ESTABLISHING OR MODIFYING LOCAL IP ACCESS BEARER - A method and device for establishing or modifying a local IP access bearer are provided by the embodiments of the present invention, said method includes: a handover request message transmitted by an evolved Node Base station is received, said handover request message carries an evolved Node Base station identifier, said evolved Node Base station identifier is the same as the local packet data network gateway identifier; the local breakout ability of said evolved Node Base station is obtained; according to said evolved Node Base station identifier, the local breakout ability of said evolved Node Base station and the local IP access point name, the local IP access bearer is established or modified between a serving gateway and the local packet data network gateway, said serving gateway is located in the core network or the evolved Node Base station.07-19-2012
20120182967APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING WIRELESS COMMUNCIATION BETWEEN WIRELESS ACCESS STATIONS VIA A MOBILE TERMINAL - A packet is transferred between first and second wireless access stations via a memory of at least one mobile terminal. The first wireless access station is provided with source information to be provided for one or more users, and the second wireless access station acquire the source information from the first wireless access station by performing a predetermined procedure of packet transfer between the first and second wireless access stations via the memory of the at least one mobile terminal when the at least one mobile terminal moves between coverage areas of the first and second wireless access stations. The second wireless access station performs a predetermined data processing on the acquired source information, and provides the one or more users with the source information on which the predetermined data processing has been performed.07-19-2012
20120182966OUT-OF-BAND PAGING FOR PROXIMITY DETECTION IN A FEMTO DEPLOYMENT - Systems, methods, devices, and computer program products are described for using an out-of-band (OOB) radio integrated with the femtocell to implement various novel proximity detection techniques. Proximity detection of access terminals (ATs) in the femtocell's access control list (ACL) may be desirable to support femto connectivity and service provision, for example, in context of idle macro-to-femto handoffs, active macro-to-femto hand-ins, etc. When multiple ATs are in the ACL, and particularly when the ATs have different OOB implementations, optimizing proximity detection may involve balancing reliability against latency. Embodiments implement OOB proximity detection according to techniques that address reliability, efficiency, and/or fairness of proximity detection, even across unmanaged OOB networks and for ATs having different OOB implementations.07-19-2012
20120182965FEMTOCELL BEACON INTERFERENCE MITIGATION WITH OUT-OF-BAND LINKS - Systems, methods, devices, and computer program products are described for mitigating macrocell interference during femtocell discovery in a wireless communications system. In one example, a mobile device may be camped on a macrocell. A femtocell transmits out-of-band (OOB) discovery signals to, or receives OOB band discovery signals from, the mobile device to facilitate presence detection. The femtocell may also be configured to use various techniques to transmit in-band beacon bursts (e.g., low or high power beacon bursts) to the mobile device in the macrocell frequency range to trigger the mobile device to perform an inter-frequency scan for cell reselection. The femtocell may transmit communications signals to the mobile device in a femtocell frequency range (different from the macrocell frequency range) after the mobile device has discovered and selected the femtocell.07-19-2012
20120182971BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION METHOD AND REORDERING METHOD - A mobile station, that includes a receiving means for receiving first PDCP PDU from a source base station and a receiving means for receiving second PDCP-PDU from a target base station, in which the second PDCP-PDU being created using sequence number and PDCP SDU that are transferred from the source base station to the target base station and a storage means for storing PDCP SDU conforming to the first PDCP PDU and the PDCP SDU conforming to the second PDCP PDU; and a reordering means for performing in order delivery of the stored PDCP SDUs based on the sequence numbers.07-19-2012
20120182970METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR NETWORK HANDOVER - A method, a system and a device for network handover are provided, which are applied to the field of communications technologies. The method includes the following steps that: a terminal first obtains information of a handover manner of handover from a virtual base station to a target base station, and then sends a corresponding message to the virtual base station according to the information of the handover manner, so as to perform network handover, so that in a procedure that the terminal is handed over from a non-WiMAX network to a WiMAX network, the terminal may be directly handed over according to the handover manner supported by the virtual base station. Compared with the conventional art in which handover manners require handover attempts, the adoption of the method for network handover reduces handover time and increases network handover efficiency.07-19-2012
20120182969MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention is summarized in that it includes: a step in which a mobile station UE sends “Measurement Report” including location registration area information “TAI” and identification information “ECGI” on a cell subordinate to a radio base station HeNB, to a radio base station eNB; a step in which the radio base station eNB sends “(X2) HO Request” including the identification information “ECGI” on the cell subordinate to the radio base station HeNB to an IP address of a gateway apparatus HeNB-GW corresponding to the location registration area information “TAI”; and a step in which the gateway apparatus HeNB-GW transfers the “(X2) HO Request” to the IP address corresponding to the identification information “ECGI” on the cell subordinate to the radio base station HeNB.07-19-2012
20120182968METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR POWER CONTROL DURING TD-SCDMA BATON HANDOVER - A method for wireless communication comprises switching an uplink (UL) from a source cell to a target cell; and receiving an uplink transmit power control (TPC-UL) command from the source cell, wherein the TPC-UL command is generated by the target cell.07-19-2012
20100111032METHOD FOR HANDLING RANDOM ACCESS RESPONSE RECEPTION AND AN E-UTRAN AND USER EQUIPMENT THEREOF - A method for handling Random Access Response reception in a user equipment (UE) when communicating with a E-UTRAN includes transmitting a RA preamble to the E-UTRAN for initialing a random access (RA) procedure according to a received trigger event; receiving a RA response from the E-UTRAN corresponding to the RA preamble; and determining whether a MAC PDU or another RA preamble need to be transmitted according to an UL grant in the RA response and the trigger event.05-06-2010
20100111041COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD THEREOF - A communication system and data transmission method thereof are provided. The method includes adding an end marker to the end of source data and transmitting the source data and the end marker for a Packet data network GateWay (PGW) to a source evolved Node B (eNB) if a handover is carried out from the source eNB to a target eNB while the PGW is transmitting the source data to the source eNB, forwarding the source data and the end marker from the source eNB to the target eNB, transmitting target data immediately following the source data from the PGW to the target eNB, and transmitting the source data and the target data, which is classified into the source data by the end marker and immediately follows the end of the source data, from the target eNB to user equipment.05-06-2010
20100111033MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH DEDICATED CONTROL CHANNEL - A multiservice communication device includes a plurality of transceivers that wirelessly transceive data with a corresponding plurality of networks in accordance with a corresponding plurality of network protocols. A control channel transceiver transceives control channel data with a remote management unit including local control data sent to the management unit and remote control data received from the management unit. A processing module processes the remote control data and generates a least one control signal in response thereto, the at least one control signal for adapting at least one of the plurality of transceivers based on the remote control data.05-06-2010
20120263146MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO CONTROL APPARATUS, CORE NETWORK APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - The first communication system is configured to determine whether or not to provide information that instructs the UE 10-18-2012
20080310367METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PDCP REORDERING AT HANDOFF - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate management of data delivery and processing in a wireless communication system and, more particularly, that support Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) reordering of packets during a handoff operation. Various aspects described herein can mitigate processing delays associated with PDCP reordering of packets at handoff by determining, communicating, and/or otherwise identifying one or more indicators during handoff that facilitate lossless communication of packets to a terminal with minimal delay. These indicators can include sequence number information for a source Node B, information regarding a step or jump size applied to a sequence number by a target Node B, a reset command, and/or other suitable indicators.12-18-2008
20090154424METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A HANDOVER THAT SWITCHES CONNECTION FROM A SOURCE BASE STATION APPARATUS TO A DESTINATION BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND CONTROL APPARATUS AND TERMINAL APPARATUS UTILIZING THE SAME - An interface unit receives a scheduled timing with which to execute a handover and a transmission delay time present in a communication with a terminal apparatus, from the terminal apparatus via a source base station apparatus. A switching control unit sorts out original data, to be transmitted to the terminal apparatus, into first data to be transmitted via the source base station apparatus and second data to be transmitted via a destination base station apparatus, based on the scheduled timing and the transmission delay time received. The interface unit outputs the sorted-out first data to the source base station apparatus and outputs the sorted-out second data to the destination base station apparatus.06-18-2009
20090154421METHOD FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS USING LINK TRIGGER SIGNAL IN MULTI-INTERFACE MOBILE ROUTER - Provided is a method for handover between heterogeneous networks using a link trigger signal in a multi-interface mobile router. The method includes: maintaining a state of a second network access interface in a sleep state, activating a first network access interface, receiving and transmitting the first network service to a subordinate node in the mobile router located in a first network; when the mobile router senses a second network link-up trigger signal while moving to the second network, changing the state of the second network access interface into an active state and performing handover; and receiving a second network service through the activated second network access interface in the mobile router performing the handover and transmitting the second network service to the subordinate node.06-18-2009
20090154420METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING NEIGHBOR NODE HAVING SIMILAR CHARACTERISTIC TO THAT OF ACTIVE NODE AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM HAVING RECORDED THEREON PROGRAM FOR EXECUTING THE METHOD - A method and apparatus for managing a neighbor node having a similar characteristic to that of an active node, the method including: generating a neighbor list containing information about at least one neighbor node; selecting at least one parent node from among the at least one neighbor node; determining fitness parameters using a characteristic value of the active node, characteristic values of the at least one neighbor node included in the neighbor list of the active node, and characteristic values of at least one neighbor node included in a neighbor list of each parent node; and updating the neighbor list of the active node according to values of the determined fitness parameters.06-18-2009
20090257397Method for proactive coordinator appropriation for wireless personal area network - Provided is a method for switching a piconet device to a coordinator in a piconet. The method receives the latest order of precedence as the next PNC information from the current PNC. Thereafter, the method detects a P-CTA allocated to devices of the piconet using a beacon of a superframe received from the PNC. On failing to receive a beacon from the PNC, the method detects whether “beacon non-receipt” indicating information that is transmitted between piconet devices during the detected P-CTA. If the “beacon non-receipt” indicating information is not detected, the method does not perform a PNC appropriation operation. If the “beacon non-receipt” indicating information is detected, the method determines that the PNC has left the piconet without performing a normal PNC handover procedure and thus performs a PNC appropriation operation according to the order of precedence information.10-15-2009
20100040025METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EXTENDED NETWORK ACCESS NOTIFICATION VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method supporting extended network access notification via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. A representative embodiment of the present invention may comprise a wireless interface and may be capable of exchanging multimedia communication between the wireless interface and a broadband network. The gateway may support multimedia communication via access devices that may seamlessly hand off from a wireless wide area network to a personal area network supported by the wireless interface. The hand off may be coordinated by the gateway and the wireless wide area network via the broadband network. A user of an access device may be notified when such a hand off has been automatically initiated, and a user may configure aspects of such hand offs.02-18-2010
20100040024METHOD, SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS FOR REGISTRATION PROCESSING - A registration processing method, a handover processing method, a system, and an apparatus are disclosed herein to enable the network to distinguish between different registration processing types. The method includes: receiving information about a processing type of registering a UE into a network, where the information is reported by the UE in the process of the registration; and identifying the processing type of the registration according to the information about the processing type. The system includes: a UE, adapted to report information about the processing type of registering the UE into a network in the process of the registration; and a network, adapted to identify the processing type of the registration according to the received registration processing type information reported by the UE.02-18-2010
20100040022Random Access Aligned Handover - A method and apparatus for reducing handover interruptions when a mobile device executes handover including a random access procedure is described herein. When handover is desirable, a time offset associated with a random access opportunity is determined. The time offset relates the timing of the next random access opportunity to the frame timing of a target access point. Based on the time offset, a network element, e.g., the mobile device, a serving access point, or a mobility management entity, determines a handover start time. Handover is executed at the determined start time to generally align the beginning of the handover execution with the beginning of the next random access opportunity, and therefore, to reduce handover interruption.02-18-2010
20100040020METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOFF OF A USER EQUIPMENT - A communication system is provided that implements an inter-technology SRVCC handoff without the need for an SRVCC indicator. A user equipment (UE) establishes a communication session that comprises a voice component in a packet data network. In response to determining to handoff the session to a target network, the communication system determines that the session comprises a voice component based on a call-type identifier, preferably a QoS Class Identifier (QCI), that is associated with a voice call and further determines that a target network is a circuit switched network based on configuration information maintained in association with the target network. In response to determining that the session comprises a voice component, that the target network is a circuit switched network, and, based on a profile of the UE, that the UE is capable of operation in single radio mode, the communication system determines to implement a SRVCC handoff procedure.02-18-2010
20100040019WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS WITH FEMTO NODES - Systems and methods for performing a handoff of an access terminal from a macro node to a femto node are disclosed. In one embodiment, the femto node is configured to transmit a predetermined signal for determining signal quality and an identifier that uniquely identifies the femto node to the access terminal. The access terminal is configured to transmit the identifier to the macro node. The femto node is identified as a hand in target based on the transmitted identifier and the macro node is configured to hand in the access terminal to the femto node.02-18-2010
20100040018Apparatus and Method for Personality Modification During Handoff - A method and apparatus for facilitating access terminal handoff between access networks is provided. The method may comprise: receiving, at a first access network (AN), an access channel message from an access terminal, wherein the access channel message includes information corresponding to a communication session between a second AN and the access terminal, wherein the communication session includes at least an active personality negotiated with the second AN, obtaining at least one personality, associated with the access terminal, previously negotiated by the first AN, determining if one of the at least one personalities is substantially similar to the active personality, and upon a determination that one of the at least one personalities is substantially similar to the active personality, transferring the communication session to the first AN with the substantially similar personality as the active personality.02-18-2010
20100040017METHOD OF CONTROLLING HMIPV6 NETWORK-BASED HANDOVER, AND ACCESS ROUTER AND MOBILE NODE THEREFOR - Disclosed herein are a method of controlling Hierarchical Mobile IPv6 (HMIPv6) network-based handover and an Access Router (AR) and Mobile Node (MN) therefor. The method include the steps of a first AR, to which a MN is connected, receiving an L3 handover initiation message, including a Media Access Control (MAC) address of the MN and the ID of a target Base Station (BS); the first AR creating a Local Care-of Address (LCoA) based on the MAC address of the MN and the ID of the target BS, and performing Binding Update (BU) on a Mobility Anchor Point (MAP) using the created LCoA; when an L2 handover completion message is received from the target BS of the MN, a second AR creating an LCoA and transmitting the LCoA to the MN; and the MN receiving the LCoA from the second AR and configuring the received LCoA as its own LCoA.02-18-2010
20100040016Wireless Network Handoff Method and Mobile Device Using Same - In a method for wireless network handoff a mobile device scans for candidate wireless networks and authenticates for a access session with discovered networks as soon as the networks are discovered regardless of the presence of a handoff condition.02-18-2010
20090190555Handover Method in Wireless Communication System, Mobile Station, and Wireless Communication System - A handover method, in a wireless communication system having a mobile station and a plurality of base stations, for performing handover of the mobile station from a connected base station to a neighbor base station, the method having the steps of: deciding that neighbor base station information non-reception handover is establish; searching a connectable neighbor base station; acquiring identification information for the neighbor base station; transmitting a handover request including the acquired identification information; transmitting, in the connected base station received the handover request, to the mobile station, service level information included with in a handover response, and deciding a handover destination based on the service level information.07-30-2009
20100118832Method for connection termination in mobile IP - A method is provided for optimizing the sending of a Mobile IP Revocation Reply. According to the invention methodology, a Foreign Agent operating as the care-of address for a given mobile unit will send to the Home Agent for that mobile unit a Revocation Acknowledgement message immediately after receiving a Revocation message from the Home Agent, without awaiting the conclusion of the Foreign Agent's tear-down steps. After sending that immediate acknowledgement to the Home Agent, the Foreign Agent independently proceeds with its regular procedures of forwarding the Revocation message to the client (as needed), waiting for a response from the client (including retransmitting the request to the client on a timer if no response received), and tearing down the user plane. With the method of the invention, the latency of the latter procedures would not result in a delay in sending the Revocation Acknowledgement from the Foreign Agent to the Home Agent.05-13-2010
20100150110Seamless Handoff Across Heterogeneous Access Networks Using a Handoff Controller in a Service Control Point - In a telecommunications network in which a mobile handset is capable of communicating in both an IP domain and a non-IP domain, the handoff of an existing communications session between the mobile handset and a fixed user is facilitated by a handoff controller implemented in a service control point. The handoff controller implements different handoff methods depending on the status of the fixed user and the transition of the mobile user. Additionally 802.21 Media Independent Handover Function in conjunction with SIP is used to facilitate handover between IP and Non-IP points in the system.06-17-2010
20120213200HEADER COMPRESSION OPTIMIZATION METHOD DURING AND AFTER HANDOVERS IN CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention concerns a method for optimizing ROHC RTP (Robust Header Compression Real Time Protocol) compression applied to IP header of data packets stream so as to use more compact formats enable to remain in a steady state, to never discard received packet, and to serve radio resources without requiring to modify ROHC specification. In the method, when handover or mobility procedure is started, new reference values are normally added to a sliding compression window, but no reference value is removed from the window as long as the handover or mobility procedure is on going. After the handover or mobility procedure is complete, when the number of values transmitted on the new radio link are appropriate to cope against the error properties on the new link, all older values can be removed at once from the compression window, thereby reverting to normal window operation.08-23-2012
20100091733METHOD FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENOUS RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - A method for handover between heterogeneous radio access networks is disclosed. When a multi-mode mobile station performs Inter-RAT handover, pre-authentication is performed before implementing a link layer handover procedure with a target access point. The pre-authentication method has as little an effect on currently served quality of service as possible and the handover is efficiently performed using the pre-authentication method. The pre-authentication is performed through medium independent handover (MIH) and various MIH primitives for pre-authentication are provided.04-15-2010
20130083775METHOD FOR PROCESSING DATA ASSOCIATED WITH LOCATION AREA UPDATE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The technical features of this document provide a method and wireless apparatus for performing UE's location area update in a communication system comprising two different radio access network (e.g., E-UTRAN and GERAN/UTRAN). In the communication system, various entities such as MME, VLR, RNC and VLR are included. This document provides a condition when a location area update (LAU) procedure is initiated. In particular, the LAU is performed when the UE which has first performed a combined TAU to the MATE and VLR moves from an E-UTRAN cell to a GERAN/UTRAN cell both belonging to a same location area (LA).04-04-2013
20130083776Methods and Devices for Configuring Uplink Transmission Diversity - Methods and devices are described whereby the UE and the Node-B are configured to align the UL CLTD status of the UE and the NodeB during serving cell change involving a new Node-B.04-04-2013
20130083774METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SHORT HANDOVER LATENCY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING BEAM FORMING - Beam selection is provided. A method for handover in a mobile station includes sending a scan request message for scanning a downlink (DL) beam with respect to a serving base station (BS) and a neighboring BS, to the serving BS, and receiving a scan response message; determining the DL beam for the MS by performing scanning with the serving BS and the neighboring BS based on the scan response message; sending a scan report message comprising a result of the scanning to the serving BS; when receiving an air-HO request message from the serving BS, generating an air-HO response message comprising information of a neighboring BS to which the MS hands over based on the air-HO request message; performing beam selection with the neighboring BS of the handover based on the air-HO request message; and performing the handover.04-04-2013
20130083773METHODS, APPARATUS AND SYSTEMS FOR ENABLING MANAGED REMOTE ACCESS - Methods, apparatus, and systems are disclosed for handover of a Wireless Transmitter/Receiver Unit (WTRU) moving between a local network and another network. The WTRU established a local IP access (LIPA) session in the local network via a first Access Point (AP). The method includes receiving, by a second AP in the other network, a request to connect to the other network; and transitioning the LIPA session in the local IP network to a managed remote access (MRA) session in the other network. The transitioning includes establishing a path between the first AP and the second AP via a gateway, and informing the gateway of the transition to the MRA session.04-04-2013
20100067485Cache With Variable Lifetime For Storing Overhead Messages For Femto Deployments - Aspects describe separate caches that can be utilized to retain overhead information while device is in idle mode. A first cache can be associated with a first timer and can be utilized when a device is performing idle handoff. A second cache, associated with a second timer can be utilized when a device is not performing idle handoff. Second timer can have a longer period of validity than first timer. The separate caches can be utilized in networks that include femto cell topography, wherein re-use of pilot PN codes are at a greater frequency than the re-use frequency in macro cell topography.03-18-2010
20100067484BASE STATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND INTER-STATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station apparatus includes a determining unit that determines whether a direct link has been established between the base station apparatus and another base station apparatus, when a mobile device makes a request to switch a communication recipient from the base station apparatus to the other base station apparatus; a link information acquiring unit that acquires, indirectly from the other base station apparatus, link information necessary for establishing the direct link to the other base station apparatus, when the determining unit determines that no direct link to the other base station apparatus has been established; and a link requesting unit that requests the other base station apparatus to establish the direct link to the base station apparatus, based on the link information of the other base station apparatus acquired by the link information acquiring unit.03-18-2010
20100067483HANDOVER HANDLING - A system is proposed to provide handover in a mobile telecommunications environment, particularly applicable to 3GPP networks, which does not increase signalling overhead but minimises user data loss during handover. In the modified system, PDCP SDUs with Sequence numbers are buffered and retransmitted as necessary. At the time of handover, SDUs not received by the user device are forwarded to the target base station for forward transmission to the UE. The handover procedure is designed to minimise packet loss whilst keeping to a minimum the duplication of packet transmission over the air interface.03-18-2010
20100067482Method And Apparatus For Estimating A Position Of An Access Point In A Wireless Communications Network - The present invention describes a method for estimating a position of an Access Point in a wireless communications network. The Access Point, used for connecting wireless networks to a core network, is being equipped with a User Equipment module, UE module. The UE module is used for scanning, for example upon a triggering event, a surrounding environment of the Access Point to identify neighbour Radio Base Stations. The Access Point then creates a neighbour list including information relating to neighbour Radio Base Stations. The Access Point forwards the neighbour list to the Network Control Node, wherein the Network Control Node uses the information in the neighbour list to estimate a position of the Access Point.03-18-2010
20100067481DATA RETRANSMISSION METHOD, NETWORK CONTROLLER, MOBILE STATION AND BASE STATION - An RNC creates a packet of a desired size from a data packet and transmits the packet to a BTS that controls a UE as a destination of the packet. The BTS transmits the received packet to the UE and notifies the RNC of a packet reception result received from the UE. The RNC determine whether a data packet corresponding to a packet transmitted to the BTS has correctly reached the UE based on the received reception result. When the UE performs handover from the BTS to a handover-destination BTS, the RNC retransmits a data packet that has not correctly reached the UE via the handover-destination BTS.03-18-2010
20100329215Multi-Beam Cellular Communication System - A cellular communication system comprising a plurality of geographically spaced base stations (12-30-2010
20100329214DATA TRANSFER MANAGEMENT IN A RADIO COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A mobile communications system including a network with a source network node and a target network node that supports a handover procedure, and a mobile terminal that is allowed to access the source network node and access the target network node according to the handover procedure, in which information related to a reception status of user data is delivered between at least two among a group including the mobile terminal, the source network node, and the target network node such that the target network node may receive status information from the source network node and the target network node may receive a status report from the mobile terminal.12-30-2010
20100329212METHOD OF COMMUNICATING IN WIRELESS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a handover method that a current coordinator transfers a coordinating function of controlling a network to a different device configuring the network. The present invention relates to a method of selecting an optimal device as a coordinator in selecting the different device using priority information decided by a prescribed evaluation reference. And, the present invention relates to a method of simplifying a procedure in a manner of transmitting relevant information together with a handover request message. In a wireless network including a coordinator, a secondary coordinator is decided in advance. If the coordinator is suddenly unable to perform a function, the present invention relates to a method of enabling the function of the coordinator to be performed by the decided secondary coordinator. Thus, a process for transferring the coordinating function without the handover process is called a recovery process. The present invention relates to the recovery method and a method of deciding a secondary coordinator to perform a recovery. In the method of deciding the secondary coordinator, a method of deciding a more proper coordinator using information on coordinator priority is provided.12-30-2010
20110002306A Bearer Establishing Method and System Based on Handover - The present invention discloses a bearer establishing method and system based on handover, wherein the method comprises: an MME transmits the handover required message to the target base station, and carries aggregate maximum bit rate information, namely AMBR information of the UE in the handover required message. In virtue of the above technical scheme, the AMBR information is transmitted to the target base station through the interface S01-06-2011
20110002301Handover in Core-Edge Separation Technology in Wireless Communications - In one embodiment of the invention, a method for wireless communication includes receiving a packet destined to a destination node at a first egress router. The destination node is supported by a second egress router. A destination address of the packet is the first egress router. The received packet is redirected to the second egress router.01-06-2011
20130051368Method for Handover from Circuit Switched Domain to Packet Switched Domain, Device, and Communications System - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method for a handover from a circuit switched domain to a packet switched domain, a device, and a communications system. One of CS to PS handover methods includes receiving, by a target mobility management entity, a CS to PS handover request message that corresponds to a first UE and is from an MSC; triggering setup of a dedicated VoIP bearer that corresponds to the first UE and is between an SGW and an MGW; sending a handover request message to a target access network to instruct the target access network to prepare a handover resource for the first UE; and sending a CS to PS handover response message corresponding to the first UE to the MSC.02-28-2013
20130051367Support for Continuity of Tunnel Communications for Mobile Nodes Having Multiple Care of Addressing - The present invention solves communication disruption problems during the hand-off transition period by using a pre-handoff registration of a new foreign agent on behalf of the mobile node The pre-handoff registration message should: (1) identify itself as a pre-hand off registration message, (2) indicate direction of traffic for the pre-handoff registration time period, and (3) specify a lifetime or time period when the pre-handoff registration request will continue to be considered valid The local mobility anchor will accept traffic using the pre-handoff registration care-of address depending on the directionality indicator, but the communication traffic to or from the mobile node will not be disrupted during the transition period. Because the care-of address for the mobile node on the new foreign network can be used to direct communication traffic to or from the mobile node during this transition time period, no disruption of service will be encountered.02-28-2013
20130051362SELECTING A TARGET CELL FOR CS FALLBACK - Described embodiments provide a method of effectively selecting a target cell to hand over user equipment from a LTE network to a non-LTE network when the user equipment requests a CS service. A LTE cell may determine a CS fallback hysteresis parameter in advance. The LTE cell may receive signal quality measurements of at least two candidate non-LTE cells from the user equipment. The LTE cell may select one target cell among the at least two candidate non-LTE cells based on the CS fallback hysteresis parameter and the received signal quality measurements of the at least two candidate non-LTE cells.02-28-2013
20130051361WIRELESS BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless base station includes a first receiving section which receives data from a plurality of terminals positioned within a wireless area in which data communication with a processing section on a network is performed by the wireless base station via a core network, a multiplexing controller which shares, with the processing section, first identification information allocated to a group and second identification information allocated to each of a plurality of member terminals constituting the group, and controls to determine whether a terminal serving as a source of the received data is a member terminal belonging to the group, based on the second identification information, and to multiplex, of the received data from the plurality of terminals, data from the terminal determined to be the member terminal belonging to the group, based on the first identification information, and a first sending section sends the multiplexed data to the core network.02-28-2013
20080267132METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTIVE EXAMINATION OF PPP PACKETS FOR RENEGOTIATION OF A PPP LINK ON A Um INTERFACE - A method and system that provides for efficient re-synchronization of a PPP link on a Um interface is provided. When the PPP link is connected, if an indication that the communications of the mobile station is associated with a new network server is detected, only the Um interface will undergo PPP configuration renegotiation. The method and system does not require the examination of all data packets for determining whether PPP configuration renegotiation is required.10-30-2008
20130089071SMALL CELLS IMPLEMENTING MULTIPLE AIR INTERFACES - A communication networks including a plurality of small cell providing air interface infrastructure functionality is provided. Aspects of the present disclosure relate to the management of inter-small cell communication in accordance multiple air interfaces supported within individual small cells. Additionally, aspects of the present disclosure relate to the management of intra-small cell communication in accordance with communication networks implementing multiple small cells. In other aspects, small cells coordinate handovers through the use of a controller, or by leveraging wireless connections created between the small cells. In further aspects, the small cells enable the utilization of multiple air interface standards within a small cell.04-11-2013
20130089073MOBILE TERMINAL AND HANDOFF METHOD THEREFOR - A mobile terminal and handoff method are provided herein. The handoff method for a mobile terminal includes: obtaining a Basic Service Set (BSS) IDentifier (ID) of an Access Point (AP) during a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) mode in which communication is performed through a Wi-Fi network; determining whether the obtained BSS ID is assigned to an edge AP near to a mobile communication network; and performing a handoff to the mobile communication network, when the obtained BSS ID is assigned to the edge AP.04-11-2013
20130089075METHOD FOR TRANSCEIVING A SIGNAL TO/FROM A MOBILE FEMTOCELL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present application relates to a method in which a terminal processes a signal in a wireless communication system in which communication between the terminal and a mobile femtocell is being performed via a first communication link. More particularly, the method comprises the following steps: disconnecting the first communication link and establishing a second communication link to a neighbor cell in the event the terminal and the mobile femtocell enter the coverage area of the neighbor cell; delivering information, relating to the first communication link, to the mobile femtocell during communication with the neighbor cell, performed via the second communication link; and reestablishing the first communication link to the mobile femtocell on the basis of the information relating to the first communication link in the event the mobile femtocell and the terminal leave the coverage area of the neighbor cell.04-11-2013
20130089074MOBILE NODE, HANDOVER ADDRESS ACQUISITION METHOD AND SYSTEM THEREOF, AND DHCP SERVER - The disclosure discloses a mobile node, a handover address acquisition method and system thereof, and a DHCP server. the present invention relates to the field of mobile communication technology and addresses a problem that a correspondent node (which can communicate with a mobile node normally before the mobile node roams) cannot communicated with the mobile node during link handover of the mobile node.04-11-2013
20130089072SMALL CELLS IMPLEMENTING MULTIPLE AIR INTERFACES - A communication networks including a plurality of small cell providing air interface infrastructure functionality is provided. Aspects of the present disclosure relate to the management of inter-small cell communication in accordance multiple air interfaces supported within individual small cells. Additionally, aspects of the present disclosure relate to the management of intra-small cell communication in accordance with communication networks implementing multiple small cells. In other aspects, small cells coordinate handovers through the use of a controller, or by leveraging wireless connections created between the small cells. In further aspects, the small cells enable the utilization of multiple air interface standards within a small cell.04-11-2013
20130089070SMALL CELLS IMPLEMENTING MULTIPLE AIR INTERFACES - A communication networks including a plurality of small cell providing air interface infrastructure functionality is provided. Aspects of the present disclosure relate to the management of inter-small cell communication in accordance multiple air interfaces supported within individual small cells. Additionally, aspects of the present disclosure relate to the management of intra-small cell communication in accordance with communication networks implementing multiple small cells. In other aspects, small cells coordinate handovers through the use of a controller, or by leveraging wireless connections created between the small cells. In further aspects, the small cells enable the utilization of multiple air interface standards within a small cell.04-11-2013
20130089069SMALL CELLS IMPLEMENTING MULTIPLE AIR INTERFACES - A communication networks including a plurality of small cell providing air interface infrastructure functionality is provided. Aspects of the present disclosure relate to the management of inter-small cell communication in accordance multiple air interfaces supported within individual small cells. Additionally, aspects of the present disclosure relate to the management of intra-small cell communication in accordance with communication networks implementing multiple small cells. In other aspects, small cells coordinate handovers through the use of a controller, or by leveraging wireless connections created between the small cells. In further aspects, the small cells enable the utilization of multiple air interface standards within a small cell.04-11-2013
20090323639FAST SERVING CELL CHANGE METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A serving cell change method and apparatus is provided for efficiently performing the serving cell change in a mobile communication system. The UE receives a cell change control information including an activation time from a serving cell, when a downlink channel status of the serving cell is inferior to a downlink channel status of a target cell, reports a measurement result to the serving cell while performing data communication with the serving cell, monitors receipt of a cell change indicator transmitted by the target cell before the expiration of the activation time while performing the data communication with the serving cell, and when the cell change indicator is received, communicates data with the target cell by sending an acknowledgement in response to the cell change indicator and switching to the target cell.12-31-2009
20090323637Radio Communication Method, Base Station Controller and Radio Communication Terminal - The present invention is summarized as a radio communication method including the steps of: calculating a transmission power difference between a transmission power value of a first carrier and a transmission power value of a second carrier; determining whether or not the transmission power difference exceeds a threshold set on the basis of a maximum transmission power difference allowable between the first carrier and the second carrier; and when the transmission power difference exceeds the threshold set on the basis of the maximum transmission power difference, transmitting a handoff instruction for one of the first carrier and the second carrier that has a higher transmission power value.12-31-2009
20090323631METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR CREATING A MESH NETWORK OF WIRELESS SWITCHES TO SUPPORT LAYER 3 ROAMING IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (WLANs) - Techniques are provided for techniques are provided for creating a mesh network in wireless local area network comprising a plurality of wireless switches. An IP address of the registration server can be configured on each of the wireless switches and used to open an IP socket from each of the wireless switches to the registration server. Each of the wireless switches register with a registration server by communicating configuration information about each of the wireless switches to the registration server. In one implementation, the configuration information for each switch comprises a switch IP address and a list of subnets the switch supports. The configuration information can be used by the registration server to create a wireless switch list which includes a listing of each of the wireless the switches in the wireless local area network. The configuration information about each of the wireless switches and the wireless switch list can then be communicated to each of the wireless switches. Each wireless switch can use the configuration information from each of the other wireless switches to create a mesh network of wireless switches. In one implementation, each of the wireless switches can use the configuration information and the wireless switch list to open a UDP/IP socket to each of the other wireless switches.12-31-2009
20090316649SELF-CONFIGURATION FOR FEMTOCELLS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate automatically configuring femtocells based at least in part on signals transmitted by other femtocells and macrocells. In particular, a femtocell can receive signals from neighboring cells, much like a mobile device, and determine communications parameters used. The parameters can be channel identifiers, pseudo-noise (PN) offsets, and the like. The femtocell can subsequently configure its communication parameters to vary from those detected in the neighboring signals, or to match those of neighboring signals where the parameters relate to the communications environment, for example. Thus, the femtocell self-configures to mitigate interference with surrounding femtocells and/or macrocells.12-24-2009
20100103905METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SERVICE LINK HANDOVER - A method and a system for service link handover are provided. The method and the system are in a communication technical field. The method is as follows. Apply for service processing resources of a second service processing unit. A service link establishment message is sent to the second service processing unit, in which the message carries link address information of a first service node and a second service node, such that the second service processing unit binds link addresses of the first service node and the second service node. A response message from the second service processing unit is received, and a link handover indication message is sent to the first service node and the second service node, such that the first service node and the second service node hand over link connections to the second service processing unit. Thus, an efficiency of a rolling upgrade is improved and a service interruption possibly caused by the rolling upgrade is avoided when units in the same resource pool perform the rolling upgrade.04-29-2010
20090303967USER EQUIPMENT (UE) ASSISTED SYSTEM DATABASE UPDATE - A wireless communication system includes a base station that receives information regarding neighboring wireless systems and updates and stores this information for use in handover of user equipments (UEs).12-10-2009
20090303965RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A radio communication method for performing radio communication in a terminal apparatus and a base station apparatus, including: allocating a first access slot to each of the terminal apparatus, and a second access slot to a plurality of the terminal apparatuses, out of access slot to be used when the terminal apparatus is connected to the base station apparatus, in the base station apparatus; transmitting an information of the allocated access slot to the terminal apparatus, in the base station apparatus; an receiving the information of the allocated access slot sent from the base station, and sending a signal to establish connection to the base station apparatus based on the received information of the access slot, in the terminal apparatus.12-10-2009
20090303966METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-NETWORK HANDOFF - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate inter-network handoff in a wireless communication system. Various aspects described herein provide for handoff techniques that enable a target system to be prepared by an access terminal via a source system in order to minimize specific changes required to source system and/or target system. Techniques are described herein in which the protocols of a source system can be utilized with an interworking unit to tunnel signaling messages which are in a format understood by a target network.12-10-2009
20090303964Switching of Multimedia Sessions from a Mobile Terminal - A method of switching a multimedia session from a mobile terminal (12-10-2009
20090303963Method for providing seamless transition between networks following different protocols - Example embodiments provide methods for handling the transition of a mobile device from a first network to a second network, the second network operating according to a different communications protocol from the first network. One example embodiment includes terminating forwarding of the data packets from the first network to the mobile device; rebuilding headers of unforwarded data packets at the first network; and sending the rebuilt data packets from the first network to the second network. Another example embodiment includes resetting a header compression state at the second network; receiving unforwarded data packets from the first network at the second network, the unforwarded data packets being data packets the first network had not yet forwarded to the mobile device; and sending the unforwarded data packets from the second network to the mobile device.12-10-2009
20090303962Method and a Network Node for Managing Handovers in a Packet Data Communication Environment - The invention deals with managing handovers between access networks in a packet data communication environment. According to the invention, the possibility to control access network resources will improve by having a mobility manager node (12-10-2009
20120218975CONTROL STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, GATEWAY APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A control station apparatus is set with a path for performing communication of a plurality of flows with a mobile station apparatus through a transfer path of a first access network. When receiving a position register request for performing communication via a transfer path of a second access network, from the mobile station apparatus, the control station apparatus continues communication with the mobile station apparatus through the first access network when it has been determined that the communication requested by the position register request includes a flow for which handover of the transfer path is prohibited. Accordingly, a control station apparatus is provided that can perform handover control such as to enable communication of a connection including a specific flow via one of the access networks while performing communication of a connection that does not include any specific flow without limitation via the other access network.08-30-2012
20120218974Method and Device for Managing Internet Protocol Offload Connection - The disclosure discloses a method and a device for managing Internet Protocol (IP) offload connection. The method comprises the steps of: determining that a target Mobility Management Entity (MME) supports IP offload or identifies information of two Serving Gateways (S-GWs); the target MME receiving IP offload connection information from an source MME; the target MME processing the IP offload connection according to the IP offload connection information, wherein the process comprises one of the following: establishing, updating and activating the IP offload connection. With the disclosure, the experience of the user is enhanced in the wireless communication system.08-30-2012
20120218973Terminal and handover method - The present invention discloses a handover method and a terminal. The method comprises the following steps: a terminal receiving a handover command, wherein the handover command is used to indicate that the terminal should be handed over to a target cell; the terminal performing a handover process so that it is handed over to the target cell and keeping a data communication with a source cell until a success of the handover process is determined. The present invention can reduce and even eliminate the interruption time of the handover in the mobility management so as to achieve a seamless handover and improve the service experience for the users.08-30-2012
20120218972BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND REORDERING METHOD THEREOF - A communication system wherein a base station sends packets having sequence numbers attached, to a mobile station, the mobile station rearranges the packets by sequence number, and hard handover is performed. A handover source base station having a controller decides whether the handover source base station forwards packets which were not sent to the mobile station, out of packets received from a host station, to a handover target base station, controls forwarding of the packets to the handover target base station and sends forwarding execution information from the handover source base station to the mobile station to notify whether the forwarding of the packets has been executed, the mobile station including a receiver that receives the forwarding execution information from the handover source base station; and a controller that executes reordering of the received packets based on the forwarding execution information at the handover.08-30-2012
20120218971METHODS AND APPARATUS TO REDUCE A TIME TO TRANSFER MULTIPLE PDN CONTEXTS DURING INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY HANDOFF - Aspects of the present disclosure provide apparatus and methods to reduce the time taken to perform multiple packet data network (PDN) context transfers during inter-radio access technology (IRAT) scenarios. Certain aspects provide methods and apparatus for wireless communication by a device capable of communicating in at least a first and second RAT networks. The device may have multiple PDN contexts established in the first RAT network. As part of a transition to the second RAT network, the mobile device may transmit a single signaling message that indicates at least two of the PDN contexts to be transferred. In some aspects, the single signaling message may also indicate a new PDN context to be established as part of the transition.08-30-2012
20120218970Caching in Mobile Networks - There is described a system and method of handing over a connection to a terminal from a source network element (e.g. base station) to a target network element (e.g. base station) in a packet data network when the source base station is acting as a caching server and sending content data towards the terminal in a session. A handover request is sent from the source base station to the target base station. A context data message (e.g. CXTP message) is sent from the source base station to the target base station, the context data message including session state parameters identifying the state of the session. At the target base station, the session state parameters are retrieved from the context data message and used to identify the state of the session. Content data packets are then sent from the target base station towards the terminal so as to continue the session.08-30-2012
20090092099Method and Apparatus of Shifting Functional Entity In Wimax Network - A method and apparatus for shifting functional entity in WiMAX network is disclosed. A functional entity at the network side is set to be master functional entity or slave functional entity. The method includes: setting a binding relationship between a master functional entity and at least one slave functional entity; triggering the master functional entity to shift, combining a context of the slave functional entity bound with the master functional entity and a context of the master functional entity to form a context message that is required by the master functional entity for the shift, and forwarding the context message according to the course of shifting the master functional entity.04-09-2009
20090092097METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The described technology generally relates to method(s) and arrangement(s) for access control during relocation of a user equipment (UE) into a femto base station (FBS) and dynamic triggering of the relocation into the FBS. A white list is maintained in the UE. The white list includes information on a list of FBSs that the UE is allowed to relocate. The UE detects a target FBS and reports target FBS to a source macro base station (MBS). The source MBS makes a relocation request to a mobility controller. The mobility controller grants or denies the requests or allows the target FBS to make the decision. Upon grant, the UE is relocated to the target FBS. Otherwise, the white list is updated in the UE.04-09-2009
20090092096AUTOMATIC PROVISIONING OF FEMTOCELL - Automatic provisioning of an access point base station or femtocell. The method may include the femtocell transmitting first information (e.g., location information, signal measurement information, capability information, etc.) to a service provider (e.g., over an IP network). The femtocell may receive second information from the service provider, where the second information includes one or more operational parameters. The operational parameters may include hand-off parameters, admission policy information, PN or scrambling codes, power parameters, and/or other parameters. The femtocell may operate according to the received parameters to provide access for a plurality of access terminals in a local area.04-09-2009
20090092095COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE AGENT DEVICE, AND HOME AGENT DEVICE - In a communication system including a MN, a MFA connected to the MN, and a HA connected to a home network of the MN, the HA holds a layer 04-09-2009
20090092094METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING MOBILE NETWORK PROTOCOL CAPABILITIES - A method and apparatus for improving handover in an IEEE 802.21 compliant communication network. A query is transmitted from a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) to a media independent handover (MIH) server (MIHS). The WTRU includes a target point of attachment (PoA) and/or a preferred mobile inter protocol (MIP) method. The WTRU receives a response from the MIHS indicating the MIP method supported by the target PoA. Based on the received response, the WTRU may make an informed decision regarding handover.04-09-2009
20130070731WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN SUCH A SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for performing handover in a wireless communication system, and the handover method of the present invention includes checking, when a Path Switch Request message associated with a terminal is received from a base station, whether a list of terminal security information values which has been saved exists; generating, when the list exists, a Path Switch Request acknowledge message including an unused terminal security information value selected form the list; and transmitting the Path Switch Request acknowledge message to the base station. Through this procedure, it is possible to reduce the terminal handover signal load generated by the base station.03-21-2013
20130070730HANDOFF OF A MOBILE STATION BETWEEN PACKET-SWITCHED AND CIRCUIT-SWITCHED WIRELESS DOMAINS - A first mobility management entity (MME) is configured to cooperate with a first access network controller to provide a circuit switched service to a mobile station while the mobile station is attached to a packet switched wireless access network in a first coverage area. A second MME is configured to cooperate with the first access network controller to provide a circuit switched service to the mobile station when the mobile station has moved from the first coverage area to the second coverage area. A home subscriber system is configured to provide, to the second MME, information identifying the first access network controller as serving the mobile station to enable the second MME to initiate handoff of the mobile station from the packet switched wireless access network to the circuit switched wireless access network.03-21-2013
20130070729HANDOFF OF A MOBILE STATION BETWEEN PACKET-SWITCHED AND CIRCUIT-SWITCHED WIRELESS DOMAINS - A first mobility management entity (MME) is configured to cooperate with a first access network controller to provide a circuit switched service to a mobile station while the mobile station is attached to a packet switched wireless access network in a first coverage area. A second MME is configured to cooperate with the first access network controller to provide a circuit switched service to the mobile station when the mobile station has moved from the first coverage area to the second coverage area. A home subscriber system is operated to provide, to the second MME, information identifying the first access network controller as serving the mobile station to enable the second MME to initiate handoff of the mobile station from the packet switched wireless access network to the circuit switched wireless access network.03-21-2013
20130070728METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING A CALL FALLBACK USER EXPERIENCE - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for improving a circuit-switched fallback (CSFB) user experience. In aspects, methods and systems for autonomously returning a user equipment (UE) from a 2G (203-21-2013
20130070726Method And Arrangement In A Wireless Communication System - The present invention relates to a method and a device for time synchronization of an RBS which has lost its GPS signal. The method in the time synchronization device comprises retrieving from the first radio base station a first timing advance value (03-21-2013
20130070727MECHANISM TO IMPROVE HANDOVER SPEED IN SMALL CELLS - In a method for performing handover of a user equipment, a small cell base station formats a handover request message for the user equipment. The handover request message includes permission information of the user equipment, including LIPA permission information.03-21-2013
20110038351Mobile Station Device and Transmission Power Control Method - A mobile station which performs a handover from a base station to a base station calculates the transmission loss of a broadcast control channel sent from the target base station, and corrects the transmission power of an uplink ANCH to the target base station, based on a known base station desired receive power and the calculated transmission loss. Alternatively, the mobile station may correct the transmission power of the uplink ANCH to the target base station, based on the transmission power of an uplink signal to the serving base station, the transmission loss of a downlink signal sent from the serving base station, and the transmission loss of a broadcast control channel sent from the target base station.02-17-2011
20110038350METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RF HANDOFF IN A MULTI-FREQUENCY NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for RF handoff in a multi-frequency network include selecting an RF channel from wide and local seamless and partially seamless handoff tables. A method includes generating seamless and partially seamless handoff tables RF channels, and selecting an RF channel for a handoff so that RF channels with common wide content are given higher priority over RF channels with common local content.02-17-2011
20110038349Multiple Simultaneous Wireless Connections In A Wireless Local Area Network - Multiple simultaneous associations with Wireless Access Points (WAPs) may be formed by a given wireless client to enable handoffs between the WAPs to be accelerated and, optionally, to enable both WAPs to provide simultaneous wireless services to the wireless client. Upon forming a primary association with one WAP the wireless client scans for beacon signals from other WAPs. Upon detecting another WAP, the wireless client transmits a Request To Send (RTS) message to the new WAP indicating the identity of the primary WAP. The wireless client may also identify the new WAP to the primary WAP using a RTS message. The primary and secondary WAPs exchange information so that, in the event of a handoff, the required information has already been shared with the new WAP. Optionally, the several WAPs may provide simultaneous service to the wireless client.02-17-2011
20110038348METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION - Methods and apparatus for controlling discontinuous reception (DRX) in mobile devices are disclosed. An example method for controlling discontinuous reception includes entering a packet transfer mode, receiving a network message that indicates that the mobile station is to utilize an optimized DRX mode, and entering DRX mode immediately upon leaving packet transfer mode.02-17-2011
20110058533METHOD OF ALLOCATING RESOURCE AND METHOD OF FORMING RANGING CHANNEL - An access point allocates a resource for ranging to an access terminal included therein, and receives a ranging channel that includes an identifier of the access terminal and a plurality of pilots. The AP checks the access terminal by using the received identifier, and measures a round trip delay of the access terminal based on the received pilots.03-10-2011
20110058531SINGLE RADIO WIMAX INTERWORKING - In some embodiments a method comprises establishing a layer 2 tunnel between a mobile station coupled to a E-UTRAN and a WiMAX base station, implementing a first signaling interface through the layer 2 tunnel between a mobility management entity (MME) and the WiMAX base station, and preregistering the mobile station with the WiMAX access service network gateway at least in part via the layer 2 tunnel. Other embodiments may be described.03-10-2011
20110038347SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF MAINTAINING CORE NETWORK STATUS DURING SERVING RADIO NETWORK SUBSYSTEM RELOCATION - A system and method enable wireless user equipment (UE) to undergo a serving radio network subsystem (SRNS) relocation to a radio network controller (RNC) that does not support a fast dormancy feature while maintaining synchronization with the packet-switched domain of the core network. The UE is made aware of whether the target RNC supports the fast dormancy feature by way of an indication provided to the UE in a reconfiguration message provided by the source RNC, that is, the RNC to which the UE was connected prior to the SRNS relocation. In this way, the UE can behave accordingly whether or not the target RNC supports the fast dormancy feature.02-17-2011
20130058313Inter-Base-Station Interface Enhancement for Multi-Operator Core Networks - In one aspect, the teachings herein provide an enhanced inter-base-station interface and associated processing in which a base station receives a message from a neighboring base station that zero served PLMNs are available in a neighboring cell. In response to receiving that message, the base station removes the neighboring cell from its neighbor list, or otherwise marks the neighboring cell as unavailable, but advantageously does not discard any network performance data accumulated or otherwise generated for that neighboring cell. Correspondingly, should the base station receive a subsequent message indicating that one or more served PLMNs have become available in the neighboring cell, it restores the neighboring cell to its neighbor list and reinstates links or associations, as needed, to the retained network performance data.03-07-2013
201300583083G LTE Intra-Eutran Handover Control Using Empty GRE Packets - Empty GRE packets are used to ensure in-order delivery of data packets for a session to a UE during intra-EUTRAN handover involving SGW relocation. In particular, a PGW sends an empty GRE packet per PDN session of the UE to a source SGW upon handover execution to indicate the end of pre-handover data packets delivered to the source SGW. Upon receipt of the empty GRE packet, the source SGW generates an end marker packet, and sends it to the source eNodeB. The source eNodeB forwards buffered, pre-handover data packets not delivered to the UE, followed by the end marker packet, to the target eNodeB, either directly (X2 interface) or indirectly (GTP-U tunnel between source and target SGWs). The target eNodeB then sends the pre-handover data packets, and post-handover data packets delivered to it by the PGW, to the UE in order, in reliance on the end marker packet.03-07-2013
20130058311M2M DEVICE WHICH PERFORMS COMMUNICATION DURING NETWORK ENTRY AND HANDOVER, AND CORRESPONDING METHOD FOR PERFORMING COMMUNICATION - Disclosed is a machine to machine (M2M) device which performs communication during both network entry and handover, and a corresponding method for performing communication. The M2M device which performs communication during handover according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises a receiver and a transmitter, wherein the receiver receives, from a serving base station, a first message containing information on M2M features or M2M requirements supported by at least one neighbor base station or neighbor cell, and the transmitter transmits, to the serving base station, a second message containing information for requesting the support of M2M features or M2M requirements necessary for the M2M device based on the first message.03-07-2013
20130058310APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SETTING CHANNEL IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and apparatus are configured for setting up a channel in a wireless network. The method includes receiving a signal comprising channel information that at least one neighbor AP is using, from the at least one neighbor AP and, setting up the channel of the AP based on the channel information that the at least one neighbor AP is using.03-07-2013
20130058312METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING LOCAL ADDRESS IN SHUNT CONNECTION - The disclosure discloses a method, an apparatus and a system for processing local address in an offload connection. The method includes the following steps: a local gateway or a mobility management entity sends a local gateway identifier to a wireless side network element (S702); the wireless side network element obtains the local address of the local gateway by using the local gateway identifier (S704). The disclosure avoids potential safety hazard.03-07-2013
20130058309METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING TIMING ADVANCE (TA) GROUP CHANGE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed to perform timing advance (TA) group change in a wireless communication system. The method includes configuring a Scell (Secondary Serving Cell) to a User Equipment (UE), wherein the Scell belongs to a first TA group. The method further includes sending a TA group change command from an eNB (evolved Node B) to the UE to change the Scell front the first TA group to a second TA group, wherein the eNB provides information together with the TA group change command so that the UE could derive an initial TA for the second TA group based on the information.03-07-2013
20080259874FLOW BASED LAYER 2 HANDOVER MECHANISM FOR MOBILE NODE WITH MULTI NETWORK INTERFACES - A method for handing-off a mobile node (MN) from one network interface to another network interface, the network interfaces being connected to a same level 10-23-2008
20110013597METHOD AND ENTITIES FOR INTER-DOMAIN HANDOVER - Aspects of the present invention relate to methods and entities involved in enabling and improving inter-domain handover. A PS based RAN such as eUTRAN can identify which potential handover to prepare and which handover to initiate, PS-PS or SR-VCC based on: (1) the UE's SR-VCC capabilities, (2) “SR-VCC indication” from the MME, (3) active VoIP bearer, and (4) target cell capabilities.01-20-2011
20110013596METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER TO REDUCE INTERRUPTION TIME - A method for performing handover to reduce an interruption time is disclosed. A method for performing handover using a variable uplink grant time comprises transmitting a handover request message to a base station, receiving a handover response message from the base station, the handover response message including an uplink grant time, and receiving an uplink grant from the base station if the uplink grant time comes, and transmitting a handover indication message to the base station. Thus, an unnecessary interruption time during hard handover can be reduced by efficiently improving use of an action time, and an action suitable for a frame structure of the IEEE 802.16m can be performed.01-20-2011
20110013595METHOD FOR REDUCING HANDOVER INTERRUPTION TIME IN TERMINAL - A method for reducing handover interruption time in a mobile station is disclosed, in which a mobile station performs a ranging procedure using a dedicated ranging code previously allocated from a target base station. The dedicated ranging code allocated by the target base station may be provided through the serving base station, or may directly be provided from the target base station.01-20-2011
20110013594Handoff Between Base Stations of Different Protocol Revisions in a CDMA System - Techniques for supporting handoff of a terminal between base stations of different protocol revisions (P_REVs) in a CDMA system. The terminal is handed off from a first base station (with a first P_REV) to a second base station (with a second P_REV) while it is in an active (data or voice) call with the first base station. The second P_REV is later than the first P_REV. The active call may be maintained between the terminal and second base station using a first service configuration previously established via the first base station for the active call. A second service configuration may be established via the second base station for the active call. This may be achieved by (01-20-2011
20110013593MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes: the steps of: (A) transferring, from a first radio base station (S-eNB) to an upper level node (S-GW), consecutive uplink data received from a mobile station (UE) with their sequence numbers being consecutive, by use of a resource allocated by the upper level node (S-GW), when the first radio base station (S-eNB) determines that the mobile station (UE) is to perform a handover; (B) transmitting, from the first radio base station (S-eNB) to the upper level node (S-GW) transfer completion notification data after the transfer of the consecutive uplink data to the upper level node (S-GW) is completed; and (C) releasing, at the upper level node (S-GW), the resource when receiving the transfer completion notification data.01-20-2011
20110013592MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication system includes a mobile station device and a base station device. The base station device includes a cell identification information transmission unit which transmits cell identification information of base station devices transmitting radio signals of the same synchronization channel, to the mobile station device when there are at least two base station devices transmitting radio signals of the same synchronization channel within a predetermined communication area. The mobile station device includes a measurement result transmission unit which performs a measurement process based on the cell identification information of the base station devices and transmits the measurement result acquired by the measurement process to the base station device.01-20-2011
20110013591WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, METHOD, PROGRAM, RECORDING MEDIUM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication terminal (01-20-2011
20110013590METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF TERMINAL, NETWORK ELEMENT, BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for handover of a mobile terminal from a first network to a second network, a network element, a mobile terminal, a base station and a communications system as well as a computer program product and a storage medium. The method comprises the steps of: determining a WDP including an unnecessary handover probability and a missing handover probability according to conditions of the first network and the second network; detecting at least of the following: whether the unnecessary handover probability is greater than the missing handover probability, whether the unnecessary handover probability is greater than a specific threshold and whether the missing handover probability is smaller than a specific threshold; and making a handover decision based on the detection result. The present invention can select a more suitable target network for handover at a more suitable time, thus ensuring the continuity of a mobile user's call.01-20-2011
20110013589Method of Handling Long Term Evaluation Positioning Protocol Data and Related Communication Device - A method of handling long term evaluation positioning protocol (LPP) data for a communication device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises setting that a first message of a non-access stratum (NAS) layer has higher transmission priority than a second message of a long term evaluation positioning protocol (LPP) layer.01-20-2011
20110013588METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SWITCHING FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for FA switching in a wireless communication system are provided. The apparatus includes a base station for broadcasting a neighbor list, which includes a base station identifier, an FA identifier, and a preamble index corresponding to a first FA, and neighbor base station information, to mobile stations that the base station provides a service for, one of, unicasting a scanning indication message for the first FA to each of the mobile stations and broadcasting the scanning indication message to the mobile stations, for temporarily switching a second FA, which is being currently used, to the first FA, for transmitting a preamble signal corresponding to the first FA to the mobile stations by using the FA identifier and the preamble index during a preset scanning time interval, and for switching the second FA to the first FA according to a scanning result received from the mobile stations in response to the scanning indication message.01-20-2011
20110013587INTER-NETWORK HANDOVER SYSTEM AND METHOD - There is described a method of facilitating handover of a user device between a source base station component in a first communications network of a first network type and a target base station component in a second communications network of a second network type. The method includes determining an identifier of at least one target gateway component connected to the target base station component in the second communications network. A handover request message is then generated in the first communications network, the handover request message incorporating the identifier of the at least one target gateway component. The handover request message is then transmitted to the second communications network. Apparatus for performing this and other related methods is also described, for example eNodeB, gateway and user device components.01-20-2011
20110013586METHOD FOR LOSSLESS HANDOVER IN VEHICULAR WIRELESS NETWORKS - A lossless handover method in vehicular wireless networks is disclosed which is capable of reducing a handover delay and reducing overhead caused by duplicate address detection (DAD) for a new Care-of-Address (CoA) by dividing a handover process into handover at road-sections and handover at intersections. In the handover method, a vehicle continues to use an original CoA configured at an original access router at road-sections even though an AR is changed, thereby reducing a handover delay. A new CoA is configured only at intersections to reduce a binding update time of a home agent which is remotely present in an external network at road-sections. When performing the DAD for a new CoA at intersections, since the vehicle performs the DAD as a background process while performing communication using an original CoA, overhead caused by the DAD can be reduced.01-20-2011
20110064051CLUSTERED MULTI-CELL MULTI-USER MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CELL-EDGE USER SELECTION SCHEME - Provided is a control method of a control apparatus for a multi-cell communication system including a plurality of cells, the method including determining a cell edge terminal or an inner cell terminal from each of terminals included in each of the cells, and selecting, from base stations included in the plurality of cells, a first base station and a second base station. The first base station may serve all of a corresponding cell edge terminal and a corresponding inner cell terminal, and the second base station may serve only the corresponding inner cell terminal between the corresponding cell edge terminal and the corresponding inner cell terminal.03-17-2011
20110064049METHOD OF HANDOVER BETWEEN COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND BROADCAST NETWORK FOR PROVIDING BROADCAST CONTENT, COMMUNICATION NETWORK HANDOVER CONTROLLER, AND BROADCAST NETWORK HANDOVER CONTROLLER - Provided is a method for performing handover between a communication network and a broadcast network by a handover controller of a first network corresponding to either the communication network or the broadcast network. The method for performing handover includes: searching for a second network capable of providing the same broadcast content broadcasted over the first network; performing a handover preparation procedure between the communication network and the broadcast network with a handover controller of the second network; delivering the broadcast content broadcasted over the first network to the handover controller of the second network; and sending a message requesting a terminal to watch, over the second network, the broadcast content broadcasted over the first network.03-17-2011
20120188984MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes: a step in which a mobile station UE transmits “Measurement Report” including identification information “ECGI” on a cell subordinate to a radio base station eNB, to a radio base station HeNB; a step in which a radio base station HeNB transmits “(X2) HO Request” including the identification information “ECGI” of the cell subordinate to the radio base station eNB, to an IP address of a gateway device HeNB-GW; and a step in which the gateway device HeNB-GW transfers the “(X2) HO Request” to the IP address corresponding to the identification information “ECGI” on the cell subordinate to the radio base station eNB.07-26-2012
20120188982APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING HANDOFF BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - A portable terminal is configured to support a handoff between heterogeneous networks. The portable terminal includes a first communication unit, a second communication, a coverage identifying unit, and a switching unit. The first communication unit communicates with a mobile communication network. The second communication unit communicates with a heterogeneous network. The coverage identifying unit identifies entry of the portable terminal into a heterogeneous network area while performing a call connection through the mobile communication network. The switching unit attempts call connection through the heterogeneous network while maintaining the call connection through the mobile communication network when the entry of the portable terminal into the heterogeneous network area is identified. When a response to the call connection through the heterogeneous network is received, the switching unit terminates the call connection through the mobile communication network and maintains the call connection through the heterogeneous network.07-26-2012
20090290554SYSTEM, METHOD AND COMPUTER ACCESSIBLE MEDIUM FOR DETERMINING ACTION TIME IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Exemplary embodiments of system, method and computer accessible medium are provided for determining an action time in a communication network is described. For example, it is possible to estimate, in a target network arrangement, a value for an action time, with the value for the action time corresponding to the value for a handover time interval related to the target network node. The handover time interval can be a time interval starting substantially at the time when a first signal is received by a serving network node, which includes information about the value for the action time. For example, the handover time interval can have a duration during which the target network node is prepared to receive a handing over user equipment and the first signal. Further, the first signal can include information about the value for the action time, and such signal may be transmitted from a target network node to a serving network node.11-26-2009
20090052397OPTIMIZING IN-ORDER DELIVERY OF DATA PACKETS DURING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION HANDOVER - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate processing service data units (SDU) in-order during communication handover in wireless networks. In particular, for mobile devices using re-transmission schemes, SDUs can be processed in-order by indicating to a target base station an index of a last SDU received in-order before handing off communication to the target base station. Additionally, SDUs received subsequent to one or more non-acknowledged SDUs can be forwarded to the target base station. Utilizing this information, the target base station can determine one or more SDUs the mobile device is preparing to re-transmit and can wait for this SDU before processing subsequently received SDUs. Also, a timer can be utilized to end a waiting period for the SDU.02-26-2009
20090268688ACTIVE SET THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT METHOD FOR USE IN WIRELESS INTERNET SYSTEM - Provided is an active set threshold adjustment method for use in a wireless Internet system. The method includes: calculating a resource utilization RU of a base station; calculating an average resource utilization RU10-29-2009
20090268687METHOD OF SUPPORTING HANDOVER IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of supporting handover at a user equipment in a mobile communication system is disclosed according to the present invention. The method comprises receiving, from a source network node, first identification information identifying at least one data block transferred from the source network node to a target network node during handover, transmitting, to a target network node, second identification information identifying at least one data block to be received from the target network node during the handover, and receiving a data block from the target network node, the data block being transmitted by the target network node based on the second identification information.10-29-2009
20090059865Seamless Handover Method and System - The present invention provides a communication system for performing the seamless handover of a mobile station between at least a first wireless access point and a second wireless access point within wireless LAN. The mobile station is in the coverage of at least the first wireless access point for receiving and/or sending the data from and/or to the first wireless access point. The system comprises a first server for storing data from a data source; a switch for exchanging the data between the first server and the first and second wireless access points; and a second server coupled to the switch, for receiving the data from the first server via a switch when the mobile station roams from one access point to another one, and transferring the stored data to the mobile station through the switch after the roaming.03-05-2009
20120224564METHOD AND SYSTEM TO SUPPORT SINGLE RADIO VIDEO CALL CONTINUITY DURING HANDOVER - A method and system for managing a plurality of network bearers in a wireless communication network is provided. The method includes identifying at least one of an initiation or an update of an instance of an application session. The method then generates an identifier associated with said instance of the application session. Further, the method assigns said identifier to each of the plurality of network bearers established as a result of said identified initiation or identified update of said instance of the application session. In an embodiment, the method uses the said identifier for managing communication during handover from a first communications network to a second communications. The method manages both video bearers and the voice bearers during the handover based on the said identifier.09-06-2012
20120224563SELECTIVE ENABLING OF USER EQUIPMENT CAPABILITY - User equipment for use in a wireless network, the wireless network including a first radio access network supporting communication using a first radio access technology in first service areas and a second radio access network supporting communication using a second radio access technology in second service areas, the user equipment having a capability to communicate using the first radio access technology, and a capability to communicate using the second radio access technology that may be disabled or enabled, wherein the user equipment is arranged to disable the capability to communicate using the second radio access technology in response to a determination that a preferred mode of voice communication cannot be provided using the second radio access technology in a said second service area, and wherein the user equipment is arranged to enable the capability to communicate using the second radio access technology, on the basis of communications, using the first radio access technology, in a selected one of said first service areas.09-06-2012
20120224562WIMAX R6 CONTROL ARCHITECTURE - Within an access services network (ASN) providing wireless access services to an access terminal and a base station communicatively coupled to an ASN gateway, a new functional process identified as an “R6 controller” is provided within the framework. The R6 controller includes both a controlling entity process residing and executing within the ASN gateway and an agent entity process residing and executing within the base station. The R6 controller entities monitor the R6 reference point therebetween and may execute a keep-alive procedure for determining the status of the R6 interface. If a problem is detected, interested client applications are notified and further actions (e.g., initiate handover process, notify ATs, etc.) may be taken. Optionally, the R6 controller entities function as gateways enabling centralized processing for messages transmitted between peer instances of other client application processes spanning the base station-ASN gateway pair.09-06-2012
20120224561METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RADIO CONFIGURATION INDICATION - Techniques for facilitating wireless communication include receiving a message from a mobile station, the message comprising a service option field indicative of an advanced radio configuration capability of the mobile station and establishing a radio link between the mobile station and the serving base station, by using the indicated advanced radio configuration capability. In some implementations, in a CDMA2000 network, a Revision E compliant mobile station is able to operate in Revision E mode with a Revision E base station and a legacy mode with a legacy base station, without being affected by a handoff and without a need to modify bit length of the revision field in the paging response message from the mobile station.09-06-2012
20130064222NETWORK SELECTION - A wireless user device, in radio communication with a first access point of one or more networks with which it could communicate via at least one of a plurality of access points, sends a network selection request to the first access point. If the network wishes to initiate a response from another access point in the same or another network, the first access point forwards the network selection request to one or more neighboring access points, in the same or another network. If any of the neighboring access points is able to communicate with the user device, that neighboring access point sends a response directly to the wireless user device and the wireless user device chooses the most suitable network from the responses sent.03-14-2013
20130064225METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SECURITY ACTIVATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Systems and methodologies are provided that facilitate security activation for wireless communications. In an aspect, a method for wireless communication is provided which includes determining a first security key for communicating with a source access point and receiving, from the source access point, a handover command that includes an indication of whether to apply a second security key upon handover. The method also includes handing over communication from the source access point to a target access point, where the second security key is applied for communicating with the target access point upon the handover when the handover command indicates to apply the second security key.03-14-2013
20130064224METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING A HANDOVER IN AN EVOLVED UNIVERSAL TERRESTRIAL RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method and an apparatus for performing a handover in an evolved universal terrestrial radio access network (E-UTRAN) are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) sends a measurement report to a source evolved Node B (eNB), and receives a handover command from the source eNB. The WTRU initiates reception and processing of a primary broadcast channel (P-BCH) at the target cell after receiving the handover command. The WTRU then sends a random access preamble to the target eNB, receives a random access response from the target eNB, and sends a handover complete message to the target eNB. The reception and processing of the P-BCH may be initiated immediately after receiving the handover command or after sending the handover complete message. The WTRU may apply default configuration or source cell configuration in the target cell until a target cell SFN and/or P-BCH information are acquired.03-14-2013
20130064223SUPPORT FOR MULTI-HOMING PROTOCOLS - The present invention solves the problems with a new proxy binding update request and proxy binding acknowledgement messages having new indicators and identification information. Namely, the home agent/local mobility anchor will exchange proxy binding update messages and proxy binding acknowledge messages that include information such as mobile node identification (MN-ID), home network prefix (HNP), but can also include selective information fields such as, access type, handover indicator (HO), and interface identification (interface ID). By including new access type, indicator, and identification information, the local mobility anchor can respond to a binding update request message with a better understanding of the new connectivity request from the mobile node.03-14-2013
20130064221SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING AN ACCESS NETWORK RE-SELECTION - The present disclosure relates to a system for managing an access network re-selection. The system comprises providing means, establishing means and executing means. Said providing means may be configured to provide a first indication indicating a target access network to be re-selected in case of a handover event and a second indication for establishing a certain context on the target access network. Further, said establishing means may be configured to establish the certain context on the target access network dependent on the provided second indication, said established context including a first part of the access network re-selection. Said executing means may be configured to execute a second part of the access network re-selection due to the provided first indication and the received handover trigger triggering said handover event.03-14-2013
20130064219Methods and Network Nodes for Signalling of Complementary Assistance Data - A positioning node (03-14-2013
20130064220HANDOFF OF A MOBILE DEVICE MOVING AT A HIGH RELATIVE VELOCITY TO BASE STATIONS FOR A WIRELESS NETWORK - Examples are disclosed for handoff of a mobile device moving at a high relative velocity to a plurality of base stations for a wireless network.03-14-2013
20080259873Method and Apparatus for Providing Gateway Relocation - An apparatus and method for providing gateway relocation to an external network wherein a user equipment (UE) includes an initial external network connection via a source core node, comprises initializing a mobility event, reallocating the initial external network connection from via the source core node to via a target core node to create a new external network connection, allocating the new IP address to the UE for the new external network connection, and using the new IP address.10-23-2008
20090245205APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING REVERSE-LINK DATA TRANSMISSION RATE DURING HANDOFF - Method and apparatus for controlling data transmission rate in a wireless communication system during handoff comprises a terminal recognizing an active set comprising a serving base station and at least one non-serving base station with respect to the terminal communicating with the network at a first data transmission rate, receiving a first rate control parameter from the serving base station and a second rate control parameter from the at least one non-serving base station, wherein the first and second rate control parameters are associated with determination of a second data transmission rate of the terminal during the handoff and determining the second data transmission rate in response to the first and the second rate control parameters, wherein the second data transmission rate is one of increased rate, decreased rate and same rate from the first data transmission rate.10-01-2009
20130163559METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REINITIATING SESSION MANAGEMENT PROCESS OF EPS SYSTEM - The present invention discloses a method and device for re-initiating EPS session management procedure. The application of technical solution proposed through embodiment of this invention can enable PGW to determine whether handover operation on MME side is completed through timing by timer and/or instruction message on MME side; if it is completed, re-initiate session management process of corresponding EPS system, thus enabling PGW to timely re-initiate EPS session management procedure, reducing the time for unnecessary waiting, and avoiding resource waste caused by repeated rejection of EPS session management procedure re-initiated when handover procedure is not completed, so as to improve reconnection efficiency of session management process of EPS system and reduce waste of communication resource.06-27-2013
20090238146OPTIMIZED DATA RECONNECT - A method of optimizing reconnection of a point to point protocol link layer in a mobile device comprising the steps of: monitoring whether the mobile device has entered a new zone; starting a stabilization period when the mobile device enters a new zone; checking whether the mobile device enters a different zone during the stabilization period; if the mobile device enters a different zone during the stabilization period, restarting the stabilization period and performing the checking step; and if the mobile device does not enter a new zone during the stabilization period, determining whether the mobile device is in a new zone, reconnecting to the new zone if the mobile device is in the new zone, and otherwise performing no reconnection.09-24-2009
20090238145METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION WITH LOW-OVERHEAD MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - A method and apparatus for supporting handover of mobile communications is provided. A router performs routing services in a service area. The router maintains a location table configured to store current router addresses of mobile nodes that have the router as a home router. The router receives data intended for mobile nodes that are listed in the location table and are in the routers service area. The router receives a user datagram protocol (UDP) message from a mobile node when it leaves the service area. The UDP message includes an IP address of a new router in the mobile node's new service area. The router updates the location table with the new IP address and transmits data intended for the mobile node to the new router until the data is redirected at the source.09-24-2009
20090238144METHOD AND APPARATUS OF FEEDBACK SIGNALING - A method and apparatus of feedback signaling using a high speed dedicated physical control channel (HS-DPCCH) includes transmitting to a first cell a first uplink feedback signal that includes channel quality information (CQI) associated with the first cell. A second uplink feedback signal that includes CQI information associated with a second cell is transmitted to the second cell.09-24-2009
20090238143METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ENABLE FALLBACK TO CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN FROM PACKET SWITCHED DOMAIN - A method and apparatus are used to perform a Circuit Switched (CS) fallback in wireless communications. The Non-Access Stratum (NAS) of the apparatus determines whether to perform a CS fallback based on an Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) registration status, and sends a service request indicating a request to perform the CS fallback when the WTRU is attached to a CS domain. The apparatus also includes an Access Stratum (AS) that receives the CS service request from the NAS, sends an indication of the CS service request in a Radio Resource Control (RRC) message to an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN), wherein the RRC message includes CS service information, and receives a handover command in response to the CS service request.09-24-2009
20090238141METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate system frame number (SFN) indication and identification during a random access procedure (e.g., associated with a handover). As described herein, a target cell can configure one or more Random Access Responses (RARs) designated for transmission to a terminal during the access phase of a handover to include the SFN of the target cell. Techniques are further described herein by which the target cell can include SFN information in a sub-header associated with a RAR, in the payload of a RAR, and/or in other appropriate manners. In addition, the target cell can configure one or more flags of the RAR to indicate the presence of SFN information. Upon receiving a RAR with embedded SFN information, a terminal can utilize the SFN for operations such as frequency hopping or uplink resource configuration as described herein.09-24-2009
20090238140Gateway apparatus and handover method - A gateway apparatus for exchanging packet between a home agent and a mobile station, and being a destination gateway apparatus to which the mobile station is connected by handover, having a transmission unit which transmits to the home agent a simultaneous registration request requesting simultaneous registration of a bi-directional tunnel at both an old route via a source gateway apparatus to which the mobile station is connected before handover, and a new route via the destination gateway apparatus; and a packet control unit which discards one downlink packet of a duplicated downlink packet addressed to the mobile station, when the simultaneous registration is maintained.09-24-2009
20090238139Apparatus and Method for Providing Service for Media Independent Handover - A service providing method and apparatus provides a service for a media independent handover (MIH). A first node receives a first message from a second node, the first message including information about whether the second node supports a service through first layer and whether the second node supports a service through second layer, and the first node selects a service transport layer for providing a service from the first and second layers and provides a service to the second node through the service transport layer. Accordingly, the first node may effectively perform an MIH because it may easily understand the MIH capability of the second node.09-24-2009
20130100932Method, Apparatus, and System for Selecting Public Land Mobile Network - The embodiments of the present invention relate to a method, an apparatus, and a system for selecting a public land mobile network. In an embodiment method an eNodeB acquires PLMN information about a CSFB. The eNodeB then determines a target cell of a packet switching handover according to the PLMN information about the CSFB.04-25-2013
20090232095METHOD FOR RESOLVING COLLISION OF UPLINK SIGNALS - A method for processing data in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes receiving a first uplink scheduling command indicating a first radio resource, receiving a second uplink scheduling command indicating a second radio resource through a random access response, and stopping a procedure associated with the second uplink scheduling command when the first radio resource and the second radio resource collide.09-17-2009
20090232094METHOD AND FUNCTION FOR MAINTAINING MAPPING BETWEEN MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER FUNCTIONS AND TRANSPORT ADDRESSES - A media-independent handover (MIH) environment supports a MIH function that uses a mapping table to communicate with other MIH functions using a MIH transport protocol. The MIH function updates the mapping table upon receipt of a message having fields to invoke an operation. The operation can update an existing mapping or delete a mapping. The operation also can update a lifetime value for a mapping for a particular address. The mapping table includes mappings. A mapping includes a MIH function identifier, a list of transport addresses, and a lifetime value.09-17-2009
20090232093HEADER COMPRESSION OPTIMIZATION METHOD DURING AND AFTER HANDOVERS IN CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention concerns a method for optimizing ROHC RTP (Robust Header Compression Real Time Protocol) compression applied to IP header of data packets stream so as to use more compact formats enable to remain in a steady state, to never discard received packet, and to serve radio resources without requiring to modify ROHC specification. In the method, when handover or mobility procedure is started, new reference values are normally added to a sliding compression window, but no reference value is removed from the window as long as the handover or mobility procedure is on going. After the handover or mobility procedure is complete, when the number of values transmitted on the new radio link are appropriate to cope against the error properties on the new link, all older values can be removed at once from the compression window, thereby reverting to normal window operation.09-17-2009
20090232092METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING TRANSMISSION RELIABILITY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - There is provided a method and apparatus for allocating transmission resources in a wireless network in which some of the terminals communicate with the base station by exchanging communication frames that are compatible with a first communication protocol while other terminals receive communications from the base station that are compatible with a second communication protocol by using non-standardized communication frames or communication frames that are compatible with another standardized protocol. The base station transmits a plurality of frames, some of which are compatible with the first communication protocol while others—with the second communication protocol. The terminals that are operative to receive frames of the second communication protocol are capable of decoding frames that are compatible with both communication protocols, whereas terminals that are operative to receive frames of the first communication protocol are capable of decoding only standardized communication frames of the first communication protocol.09-17-2009
20090232091PRECEDENCE AND PREEMPTION EXTENSION FOR REMOTE TERMINALS - Precedence and preemption may be extended for remote terminals. In an example embodiment, a communication node implements a method with respect to a communications system that implements an enhanced multi-level precedence and preemption (eMLPP) scheme. The method includes acts of receiving, mapping, and transmitting. An incoming connection establishment communication having a priority-header value that indicates a priority for a connection to be established is received at the communication node. The priority-header value is mapped to an eMLPP value that indicates a precedence and preemption level for the connection to be established. An outgoing connection establishment communication having the eMLPP value is transmitted from the communication node.09-17-2009
20090232090Performing Handovers For Fixed Mobile Convergence Networks - According to one embodiment, an anchor access gateway receives packets from a home agent. The packets are destined for an access terminal, and the anchor access gateway serves the access terminal. The packets are forwarded to the access terminal. The anchor access gateway receives a handoff request from a target access gateway. The handoff request requests a handover from the anchor access gateway to the target access gateway. The packets are forwarded to the target access gateway in accordance with the handoff request.09-17-2009
20090232088Network Selection - A mobile station MS09-17-2009
20090046663METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTIVITY - Methods and apparatus which allow a wireless terminal (02-19-2009
20090046659Message transfer for in-band signaling messages in radio access networks - A method and apparatus for handling in-band signaling messages in radio access networks is provided. The method and apparatus may setup a logical channel, where the logical channel provides packet data control protocol in-band signaling for radio bearers, provide a unique logical channel identifier for the logical channel, receive a packet with a logical channel identifier tag and identify a packet data unit of the packet as a signaling packet data unit.02-19-2009
20090046658HANDOFF AT AN AD-HOC MOBILE SERVICE PROVIDER - An ad-hoc service provider is configured to support pre-authentication with a server for the purpose of receiving a handoff of a mobile client from another ad-hoc service provider. The ad-hoc service provider is further configured to enable the mobile client to maintain a session with the server while receiving the handoff from said another ad-hoc service provider.02-19-2009
20090046656DELIVERY OF HANDOVER COMMAND - A delta configuration is transmitted to a UE requesting a handover wherein the delta configuration details changes that are required for the current UE configuration in order to execute the handover. The handover is initiated via a measurement report transmitted to a currently serving source eNode B from the UE. The measurement report can comprise one or more of current radio conditions, current UE configuration or a preferred target eNode B if the handover is a inter eNode B handover. In a inter eNB handover, the current UE configuration is forwarded to the preferred target eNode B by the source eNode B. The target eNode B generates the delta configuration and transmits it to the source eNode B in a transparent container which is subsequently forwarded to the UE.02-19-2009
20130182680METHOD FOR MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION USER EQUIPMENT TO CONNECT TO EVOLVED NODE-B AND APPARATUS EMPLOYING THE SAME - Provided are a method for machine type communication (MTC) user equipment (UE) to connect to an evolved Node-B (eNB) in a random access procedure, and an apparatus employing the method. The method for MTC UE to connect to an eNB includes receiving, at the MTC UE, system information or a handover command from the eNB, transmitting, at the MTC UE, a random access preamble to the eNB, receiving, at the MTC UE, a random access response message from the eNB, and transmitting, at the MTC UE, a connection request message or a handover confirm message including information about a dedicated bandwidth of the MTC UE to the eNB such that the MTC UE can be allocated the dedicated bandwidth. Using this method, an eNB is notified of a dedicated bandwidth of MTC UE, and thus can effectively utilize radio resources.07-18-2013
20130182681METHODS TO CONTROL MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS BEARERS IN A WIRELESS DEVICE - A method to control multiple radio access bearers is performed at a mobile wireless communication device when the mobile wireless communication device is connected to a radio network subsystem in a wireless communication network by first and second bidirectional radio access bearers. The mobile wireless communication device transmits a data packet on an uplink of the first bidirectional radio access bearer to the radio network subsystem. When the data packet is not correctly received by the radio network subsystem, the mobile wireless communication device retransmits the data packet repeatedly. After N retransmissions of the data packet, the mobile wireless communication device releases the first bidirectional radio access bearer while maintaining the second bidirectional radio access bearer. The first bidirectional radio access bearer provides a channel to transport packet switched data, and the second bidirectional radio access bearer provides a channel to transport circuit switched data.07-18-2013
20090022106CROSSOVER NODE DETECTION METHOD AND CROSSOVER NODE DETECTION PROGRAM FOR CAUSING COMPUTER TO EXECUTE THE METHOD - There is disclosed a technique that provides a crossover node detection method, etc., that enables a mobile node that performs a handover to quickly find a CRN, so that, after the handover is completed, the mobile node can still receive quickly and continuously additional service that was received before the handover. This technique includes the steps of: a mobile node 01-22-2009
20090010225Methods and Apparatus for RF Handoff in a Multi-Frequency Network - Methods and apparatus for RF handoff in a multi-frequency network. In an aspect, a method includes generating a content preserving handoff table that includes a current LOI and neighboring LOIs carrying at least the same wide and local content multiplexes as the current LOI, and determining that handoff conditions are met for a content preserving handoff, selecting a selected LOI from the content preserving handoff table and a selected RF channel associated with the selected LOI, and performing a handoff to the selected RF channel in the selected LOI if the selected LOI is different than the current LOI. An apparatus includes means for generating a content preserving handoff table, means for determining that handoff conditions are met for a content preserving handoff, means for selecting a selected LOI and a selected RF channel, and means for performing a handoff to the selected RF channel in the selected LOI.01-08-2009
20090010224CHANNEL DEPENDENT CREDIT ACCUMULATION FOR MOBILE HANDOVER - Channel dependent credit accumulation for determining a mobile handover is provided herein. In some aspects, a characteristic(s) of a source channel(s) serving a mobile device and of one or more target channels can be evaluated. Magnitudes of the evaluated characteristics can be utilized to generate handover credits associated with the target channel(s) (e.g., based on some function of a difference in the magnitudes). If a concurrent number of credits associated with a target channel equals or rises above one or more threshold levels, a mobile device can initiate a handover. As described, disparity in source and target channel quality, signal strength, etc., can be determined to increase probability of a handover based on channel degradation over one or more time intervals.01-08-2009
20090010223Communication Management Method and Communication Management Device - The avoidance of congestion between a mobile node (MN) and an access router (AR), connected to each other through radio communication, is achieved by reducing the volume of information to be transmitted between the MN and the AR. In particular, for the purpose of realizing the reduction of the information volume to be transmitted between a mobile router (MR) and an access router and the avoidance of congestion, an MR 01-08-2009
20100080191MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS BASE STATION, AND TRANSMISSION RATE ALLOCATION METHOD - In the present invention, a base station comprises: an RTWP measurement unit that measures RTWP of the base station; a monitoring unit that monitors the start and the removal of the Gating state by each of a plurality of mobile stations; a threshold setting unit that lowers a threshold by the amount of an offset, which is equivalent to the difference in the transmission rate of the mobile station that is decreased as the mobile station starts the Gating operation, if any of the plurality of mobile stations starts the Gating operation; and a scheduling unit that allocates a transmission rate, which is equivalent to the difference between the RTWP of the base station and the threshold, to a mobile station other than the mobile station in the Gating state among the plurality of mobile stations if the RTWP of the base station is less than the threshold.04-01-2010
20120113956MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL SUPPORTING MULTI-MODAL COMMUNICATIONS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING SEAMLESS SERVICE UPON HANDOVER TO THE MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A method of providing a handover service to a mobile communication terminal supporting multi-modal communications, and a mobile communication terminal for performing the method are provided. More particularly, a method of eliminating an interruption of a data transmission service occurring during a handover between different communication networks, and a terminal for performing the method are provided. A method of providing a handover service of a mobile communication terminal supporting multi-modal communications can include: transmitting and receiving data to/from a corresponding node via a first access network and a second access network while simultaneously maintaining an association with the first access network and the second access network, determining a point in time of completing a handover registration, and releasing an association with the first access network after the point in time of completing the handover registration.05-10-2012
20100085935METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SHORT BURST MESSAGES OVER WIRELSS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A multi-mode mobile station may include an extended preferred roaming list (PRL). The extended PRL may include an extended system table. The extended system table may include at least one WiMAX extended system record and at least one CDMA extended system record. The extended PRL may also include an extended acquisition table. The extended acquisition table may also include at least one WiMAX extended acquisition record and at least one CDMA extended acquisition record.04-08-2010
20100085936METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING NETWORK ENTRY DURING HANDOFFS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for optimizing network entry during handoffs in a wireless communication network (04-08-2010
20100085937SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INBOUND ROAMING IN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM NETWORKS - A system and method for enabling a UE to roam to a visited IMS-based network from a home network that does not have an IMS infrastructure. A visiting UE sends to an Intelligent Roaming Application Server (I-RAS) in the visited network, a first SIP Registration message that includes a SIP URI identifying the UE as a visitor from a home network that does not have an IMS infrastructure. The I-RAS rejects the registration, but includes a temporary Tel URI in the rejection message. The UE sends a second Registration message using the temporary Tel URI, which is forwarded to a Visited S-CSCF for authentication. The S-CSCF returns authentication vectors, which the UE uses to compute ciphering parameters and establish an IPSEC connection with a Visited P-CSCF. The UE then sends a third Registration message, which is accepted, and registration in the visited network is complete. The I-RAS acts as a pseudo Visited MSC/VLR and performs an update location procedure with the visiting UE's home network.04-08-2010
20100085940HANDOFF PROCEDURES AND INTRA-NETWORK DATA ROUTING FOR FEMTOCELL NETWORKS - The present invention is directed toward a system and method for enabling handoffs of a connected mobile device between an external macrocell access point and a local femtocell access point without interrupting data communication sessions occurring on that connected mobile device. In some embodiments, this entails maintaining an IP address assigned to the connected mobile device during and after the handoff procedure. In further embodiments, this process is enabled by providing a virtual private network link between the external support node and a local access point controller.04-08-2010
20110019645METHOD OF EXCHANGING MESSAGE AND DEVICES IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of exchanging messages at a device in a wireless network comprises transmitting a change request message for requesting a change of a beacon position among configuration parameters of the wireless network to a coordinator; and receiving a response message in response to the request message from the coordinator.01-27-2011
20130163562PSEUDO WIRES FOR MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - Embodiments describe mobility management utilizing neighbor discovery and at least two pseudo wires. When a wireless device desires to handoff to a detected access router, such handoff may not be configured until such time as a current access router receives routing information of the target access router. In order to minimize handoff time, communication between the target access router and the wireless device can be through the current access router utilizing least two pseudo wires. Bidirectional neighbor discovery and create is conducted by the access routers allow subsequent wireless devices to automatically handoff between the access routers.06-27-2013
20120236830USER EQUIPMENT, METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER, BASE STATION, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station in a wireless communication network. The mobile station including a radio communication unit that communicates with a first base station via a plurality of component carriers, and a control unit that controls the radio communication unit to initiate a handover procedure to a second base station after receiving at least one handover command.09-20-2012
20120236829METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER, USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to embodiments, a base station includes a radio communication unit configured to establish communication with a mobile communication terminal using a plurality of component carriers. The base station further includes a control unit configured to transmit a command to the mobile communication terminal to reduce the plurality of component carriers to one prior to handover of communication between the mobile communication terminal and the base station to another base station.09-20-2012
20120236828MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE STATION, AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile station UE according to the present invention includes a determination unit 09-20-2012
20120236827MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND HANDOVER EXECUTION METHOD - A mobile communication system includes a plurality of base stations, an upper node, and a mobile station. In this mobile communication system, while a first base station that is currently connected via radio to the mobile station is receiving a first downlink signal from a second base station that was previously connected via radio to the mobile station and that received the first downlink signal from the upper node for transmission to the mobile station, when the mobile station is connected via radio to a third base station as a result of a handover, the first base station sends a redirection request signal requesting the second base station to redirect the first downlink signal to the third base station. Then, in response to the redirection request signal, the second base station redirects the first downlink signal to the third base station.09-20-2012
20120236826METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RESELECTING AN ACCESS POINT - A method for use in an access point includes receiving a request for a reselection message from a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). The reselection message is generated in response to the request and includes: at least one first identifier of one or more candidate basic service sets (BSSs) that may be considered for reselection; a preference indicator associated with each candidate BSS, to indicate the BSS selection preference; an expiration time indicator associated with each candidate BSS, to indicate a time period that the BSS may be considered for reselection; an indication of a measurement to be taken on a BSS and used in a target BSS reselection determination; and a margin by which the measurement must exceed a corresponding value for a currently selected BSS. The reselection message is transmitted to the WTRU. A reselection response message is received from the WTRU, indicating the target BSS reselection determination.09-20-2012
20120236825COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE, HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM FOR HANDOVER CONTROL PROGRAM - A communication terminal device to be connected to an access point to conduct communications using voice/sound packet data, the communication terminal device includes a jitter monitor monitoring a jitter of the voice/sound packet data received from a connecting access point; and a handover cause generator generating a handover cause to change a connection from the connecting access point to another access point based on a number of jitters exceeding an allowable value in a predetermined time period.09-20-2012
20120236824METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR DIAMETER-BASED STEERING OF MOBILE DEVICE NETWORK ACCESS - According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a method for Diameter-based steering of mobile device network access. The method includes receiving a Diameter message associated with a mobile device. The method also includes determining, based on the Diameter message, whether the mobile device should be steered to access a radio access network or a radio access network type that is different from a radio access network or radio access network type currently supporting network access of the mobile device. The method further includes, in response to determining that the mobile device should access the different radio access network or radio access network type, steering the mobile device to access the different radio access network or radio access network type.09-20-2012
20120236823SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FAILOVER HANDLING AT GEO-REDUNDANT GATEWAYS - A method, system and apparatus for reversion of UE sessions from a backup SGW or protect node to an operationally restored primary SGW or working node.09-20-2012
20120236822INTER-OPERATION BETWEEN BASE STATIONS HAVING DIFFERENT PROTOCOL REVISIONS - Techniques for the inter-operation of base station having different protocol revision numbers include broadcasting a first message that includes a protocol revision field indicating a same revision as a legacy network, transmitting a second message over a forward link common control channel, the second message indicating advanced radio configuration (RC) capabilities beyond radio control capabilities implied by the protocol revision field broadcast in the first message, receiving, in response to the second message, a third message from a mobile station, indicating that the mobile station supports the advanced RC capabilities and establishing, with the mobile station, a radio link having the advanced RC capabilities.09-20-2012
20130163563Method and Device for Inter-System Handover for Packet Switch Service in Dual-Mode Radio Network Controller - A method and device for an inter-RAT handover for a PS service in a dual-mode RNC are disclosed in the present invention, which are used to support an inter-RAT handover optimization flow of the PS service in the dual-mode RNC, thereby solving the problem that the current inter-RAT handover optimization flow does not support the PS handover. With the present invention, in the inter-RAT handover optimization flow, an inter-RAT relocation flow and a radio resource allocation flow of a destination system are executed in parallel, and an encryption indication is sent to a central network through inter-RAT relocation required message; a BSC forwards user data to the central network according to the encryption indication.06-27-2013
20130163558METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DATA TRANSFER IN A PACKET-SWITCHED DATA NETWORK - Apparatus for and methods of enabling a gateway node of a first packet-switched data network to select a first channel for transferring a data packet to a destination packet data protocol address of a correspondent node provided service in the first network are disclosed. The gateway node is configured to select the first channel from a plurality of channels configured to transfer data packets to the destination packet data protocol address of the correspondent node, wherein the data packet is sent from a mobile node of a second packet-switched data network external to the first network, and wherein the mobile node has been in a communication session with the correspondent node while provided service in a third packet-switched data network different to the second network.06-27-2013
20130163561FAST HANDOVER METHOD USING L2/L3 COMBINATION - Provided is a fast handover method using a layer 2 (L2) and layer 3 (L3) combination. When a mobile node moves from a present region to another region, fast handover of the mobile node is provided using a location update function between handover control agents (HCAs), and data bicasting from an old HCA wherein the mobile node performs handover to a new HCA.06-27-2013
20110026492Method and Arrangement for Handling Handover Related Parameters in a Mobile Communications Network - The invention relates to methods and arrangements for handling handover-related parameters. A radio base station of a mobile communications network is arranged to serve at least a first cell, and to make handover decisions based on handover-related parameters. The radio base station comprises means for receiving handover related feedback from a radio base station serving a second cell after handover of a UE from said first cell to said second cell; means for using the handover related feedback received from the base station serving said second cell to adjust the handover-related parameters; and further by means for sending handover related feedback to a radio base station serving a second or another cell after handover of a UE to said first cell from said second or another cell.02-03-2011
20110026489OPTIMIZED DATA RECONNECT - A method of optimizing reconnection of a point to point protocol link layer in a mobile device comprising the steps of: monitoring whether the mobile device has entered a new zone; starting a stabilization period when the mobile device enters a new zone; checking whether the mobile device enters a different zone during the stabilization period; if the mobile device enters a different zone during the stabilization period, restarting the stabilization period and performing the checking step; and if the mobile device does not enter a new zone during the stabilization period, determining whether the mobile device is in a new zone, reconnecting to the new zone if the mobile device is in the new zone, and otherwise performing no reconnection.02-03-2011
20110026486LOCATION INFORMATION ACQUISITION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - Provided is a mobile communication method including: a step in which a first radio base station S-eNB transmits a handover instruction which instructs a mobile station UE performing communication via a first cell under control of a first radio base station SeNB, so as to perform a handover to a second cell under control of a second radio base station TeNB; a step in which the mobile station UE performs a handover from the first cell to the second cell in accordance with the handover instruction; a step in which the mobile station UE acquires a global cell ID which can uniquely identify a second cell in at least one mobile communication system; and a step in which the mobile station UE reports a global cell ID which can uniquely identify the acquired second cell, to a position information management server.02-03-2011
20120269169METHOD FOR PERFORMING ZONE SWITCHING IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method and mobile stations for performing a zone switch, are discussed. According to an embodiment, the method includes: receiving, at the mobile station and from a target base station configured to operate in accordance with a first and a second protocol, a ranging response message of the first protocol including zone switch parameters used to perform zone switch from a first zone of the target base station corresponding to the first protocol to a second zone of the target base station corresponding to the second protocol; and performing, at the mobile station, the zone switch from the first zone to the second zone using the zone switch parameters10-25-2012
20080304451METHOD TO ALLOW HAND-OFF OF A CDMA MOBILE FROM IMS FEMTOCELL TO CIRCUIT MSC - A method for hand-off of a cell division multi-access mobile from an internet protocol base network to a circuit mobile switching center is disclosed. The system includes determining whether a hand-off is appropriate based at least in part on signal strength of a call for a mobile unit. The method continues with sending a message indicating that the mobile identification of the mobile unit and a target cell locating the circuit identification of a circuit that is available to support a hand-off. The method continues on with allocating the circuit and reconfiguring the mobile unit to a macrocell (CDMA access network) and legacy MSC via the circuit.12-11-2008
20110110335INTER-DOMAIN CONTEXT TRANSFER USING CONTEXT TRANSFER MANAGERS - A method and apparatus for improved context transfer in heterogeneous networks is presented. Context information is collected from source entities in a first access network by a context transfer manager and transmitted to a context transfer manager of a second access network which forwards the context information to target entities therein. In one of the context transfer managers at least a part of the context information is translated from a format supported in the first access network to another format supported in the second access network. The method may be carried out proactively preceding a handover or reactively following a handover. In one embodiment, context transfer within one access domain is performed directly between access routers, whereas context transfer between different access domains is performed via the context managers. In another embodiment, beacons from access points are counted in order to determine candidates for a pending handover.05-12-2011
20120039300METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF A MOBILE NODE IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method for handover of a mobile node (MN) in a communications network from a previous point of attachment (p-PoA) associated with a previous mobility access gateway (pMAG) to a new point of attachment (n-PoA) associated with a new mobility access gateway (nMAG), where the pMAG and nMAG are associated with a mobility anchor (LMA), comprises the nMAG receiving a handover indicator concerning the MN from the pMAG. After receiving the handover indicator at the nMAG, the nMAG establishes a transient binding with the LMA. Following establishment of the transient binding, the nMAG receives downloaded data for the MN from the LMA prior to establishment of a connection between the MN and the n-PoA. The method may be used with PMIP Mobile Internet Protocol (PMIP).02-16-2012
20120155429Minimizing Call Drops During a Serving Cell Change - A method for minimizing call drops during a serving cell change is disclosed. A first measurement report message is received from a user equipment (UE) requesting to change an active set of the UE. A second measurement report message is received from the UE indicating a change of a best cell and requesting a change of a serving cell to a target cell. The second measurement report message is processed before the first measurement report message is completely processed.06-21-2012
20120063419Mobility Mechanism for Service Continuity with Core Element Failure - A system comprising an inter-RAT/inter-network redundancy controller (IRC) is provided. The IRC is configured to communicate with a source gateway in communication with a source radio access network (RAN) using a first radio access technology (RAT). The IRC is further configured to communicate with a target gateway in communication with a target RAN using a second RAT. The IRC is further configured to promote a handover of a user equipment from the source RAN connected to the source gateway to the target RAN connected to the target gateway when the source gateway fails.03-15-2012
20120134340METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING BREAK DURATION IN HANDOVER OF VOIP CONVERSATION - The invention proposes a method and an apparatus for reducing break duration in handover of a VoIP conversation from a packet switch domain to a circuit switch domain. The main idea is that a synchronization mechanism is introduced between the session handover procedure at IP multimedia subsystem IMS layer and a cell handover procedure at layer 05-31-2012
20120076112METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER CAPABILITY DISCOVERY - A first media independent handover function (MIHF) receives a media independent handover (MIH) capabilities discovery request from a second MIHF and generates a MIH capabilities discovery response message, including one or more parameters. Then the first MIHF then sends the MIH capabilities discovery response to the second MIHF. Based on the information contained in the MIH capabilities discovery response, the first MIHF may receive a handover request message from the second MIHF. The one or more parameters included within the discovery response message indicates the specific technologies for which the first MIHF supports a MMB handover. The one or more parameters may include a list of the technologies for which a make-before-break (MMB) handover is supported. For example, a parameter may use a specific bit structure wherein each bit is a Boolean representation of whether MMB handover is supported for a specific type of technology.03-29-2012
20120087339Method of Handling Call Transferring And Related communication device - A method of handling call transferring for a communication device during a SRVCC handover procedure is disclosed. The method comprise switching a plurality of IP Multimedia System (IMS) calls to a plurality of corresponding circuit-switched (CS) calls according to reception of a handover command when a mobile device has the plurality of IMS calls; and setting a plurality of transaction identifier (TI) values for each of the plurality of corresponding CS calls according to the plurality of IMS calls. The plurality of IMS calls share a packet switched (PS) configuration.04-12-2012
20120140731DETERMINING A NON-ACCESS STRATUM MESSAGE COUNT IN HANDOVER - Techniques for deriving message counts based at least in part on a locally stored message count and at least a portion of a message count received from a remote network node are disclosed. The message counts can relate to downlink (DL) non-access stratum (NAS) counts. In one aspect, a device can receive a number of least significant bits of the DL NAS count in a handover message. The device can derive a DL NAS count by utilizing a remaining portion of most significant bits of a locally stored DL NAS count, and can determine whether to increment or decrement the most significant bits based at least in part on a parameter to handle cases where the least significant bits of the locally stored DL NAS count have wrapped due to overflow and/or underflow.06-07-2012
20100309884Methods for surreptitious manipulation of CDMA 2000 wireless devices - Techniques for generating an interloping beacon which can control the behavior of a target wireless device on a CDMA frequency channel without noticeably altering the behavior of non-target wireless devices which share the frequency channel of the target wireless device's live beacon. The interloping beacon is an override beacon which overrides the live beacon's pilot channel and a control message on a code channel on which control messages may be addressed to the target wireless device. The override beacon provides the overriding pilot and the overriding control message only as long as is required for the target wireless device to respond to the overriding control message. The period of time during which the overriding pilot and the overriding control message are generated for the override beacon is so short that only the target wireless device responds without noticeable effect on collateral wireless devices.12-09-2010
20080267128Handover from E-UTRAN to UTRAN/GERAN CS - The present invention relates to a method for a handover of a UE (User Equipment) currently engaged in a voice call. More particularly, the invention relates to a handover from 1) a packet based radio where Voice Service is provided via VoIP over the radio and is controlled via Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) based signalling (e.g. LTE, E-UTRAN or WIMAX radio) to 2) a radio access network where Voice Service can be only provided via circuit switched (CS) domain (a visited mobile switching centre (VMSC) is needed) such as legacy 3GPP UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN)/GSM/Edge Radio Access Network (GERAN) coverage. A MSC-S entity acting as a Packet Core Control Node on a Packet Switched (PS) network and as an Anchor Visited Mobile Switching Centre (VMSC) for a handover to a Circuit Switched (CS) network on the CS domain side is proposed, the MSC-S preparing a new path with a remote UE-B and a CS domain handover towards a target legacy radio coverage before requesting a UE-A to execute the handover.10-30-2008
20090154422METHOD OF PROVIDING SEAMLESS QOS GUARANTEES IN INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) NETWORK WHEN IP-BASED MOBILITY SERVICE IS PROVIDED - Provided is a method of providing an Internet Protocol (IP)-based mobility service, particularly, a method of providing seamless quality of service (QoS) guarantees when an IP-based mobile service is provided. The seamless QoS management method includes: a method of providing seamless QoS guarantees when an Internet Protocol (IP)-based mobility service is provided, including: determining whether a terminal is newly registered in a network connecting unit; and providing QoS information of the newly registered terminal to the network connecting unit. Therefore, a user can successively receive a Service Level Agreement (SLA)-based service for which he or she subscribes, while moving to other places.06-18-2009
20100265913INTER-FREQUENCY INDICATION OF ASSOCIATION DATA FOR MULTI-CARRIER WIRELESS DEPLOYMENTS - Providing for user equipment mobility in a multi-carrier wireless network deployment is described herein. By way of example, data pertinent to mobile cell selection can be shared among base stations operating on different carrier frequencies either over-the-air or via a wired backhaul, and distributed by a base station to mobile terminals served by the base station. In one aspect, the data can be distributed over a wireless channel reserved for inter-carrier association data, whereas in other aspects, the data can be unicast to particular mobile terminals served by the base station. This can reduce or avoid a need for individual mobile terminals to tune away to a non-serving carrier for inter-carrier association or handover determinations. Accordingly, gaps in signal analysis on a serving carrier can be reduced or avoided, improving overall quality of wireless communication in a multi-carrier environment.10-21-2010
20100215021ACCESS NETWORK HANDOVER FOR A MOBILE TELEVISION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are described for content delivery, including receiving content from a first network, moving into a coverage area of a second network, performing a handover, receiving content from the second network and dropping any duplicate content packets. Also described are a method and apparatus for content delivery including receiving content from a first network, performing a handover, receiving content from a second network, determining if any content is missing and requesting the missing content.08-26-2010
20100215020METHOD OF PACKET REORDERING AND PACKET RETRANSMISSION - A packet reordering method and a packet transmission method to implement reliable data communication are disclosed. The method of transmitting packets at a serving base station in case of a mobile station performing handover include, receiving a series of packets from an upper layer entity, and transmitting the series of packets one after the other to a target base station, wherein a packet of the series of packets includes an information field which represents whether the packet is the last transmitted packet. When the mobile station performs the I-RAT handover, the target serving station pre-reorders PDU packets, and transmits the reordered PDU packets to the mobile station, such that the mobile station can quickly transmit data without reordering the packets.08-26-2010
20090168722HANDOVER PROCEDURE - Various example embodiments are disclosed. One example embodiment may include determining, by a serving base station in a wireless network, to hand a mobile station over to a target base station. This example may further include receiving a base station-to-base station handover message from the target base station, the base station-to-base station handover message including at least one connection identifier (CID) associated with the target base station. This example may further include sending a base station-to-mobile station handover message to the mobile station based on the determining, the handover message including the at least one CID.07-02-2009
20100054205HANDOFF MANAGEMENT FOR MULTIMODE COMMUNICATION DEVICES BASED ON NON-TRAFFIC STATE UPLINK SIGNALS - An access node receives a non-traffic state WWAN uplink signal transmitted from a multimode wireless communication device to a base station. In response to the reception of the non-traffic state uplink signal, the base station transmits a search message to the multimode wireless communication device to adjust a searching scheme. The WWAN can be notified of the reception of the non-traffic state WWAN uplink signal by a device proximity message that is sent by the access node to the WWAN in response to the reception of the non-traffic state WWAN uplink signal.03-04-2010
20090310567Global network neighborhood: Scheme for providing information about available networks in a geographical location - A method and apparatus supporting a discovery technique of multiple available networks is disclosed. A global network neighborhood data depository contains attributes of multiple networks that are available in a geographic region. The attributes aid in network discovery and selection of an optimum network for communication for devices capable of communicating via multiple networks.12-17-2009
20090310563Scanning and handover operation in multi-carrier wireless communications systems - A comprehensive solution is provided for multi-carrier scanning and handover operations in OFDM wireless systems. A multi-carrier scanning is any scanning operation that involves multi-carrier radio frequency carriers. In one embodiment, a mobile station communicates with a serving base station over a primary carrier, and performs scanning over one or more determined carriers. A multi-carrier handover is any handover operation that involves multiple radio frequency carriers. In a first embodiment, a break-before-entry (BBE) handover procedure with fast synchronization is provided. In a second embodiment, an entry-before-break (EBB) handover procedure through unavailable intervals is provided. In a third embodiment, EBB handover procedures for both inter-FA and intra-FA using multiple carriers are provided. Finally, in a fourth embodiment, intra-BS handover procedures are provided. The multi-carrier handover procedures may be applied to 2-to-2 or N-to-N carriers handover situation. The overall scanning time and handover interruption time may be reduced through the provided procedures.12-17-2009
20090040982Handover In A Wireless Data Packet Communication System That Avoid User Data Loss - An apparatus, method, processor(s), and computer program product avoids user data loss by network-controlled, user equipment assisted handover in a wireless data packet communication system. A wireless receiver receives radio link control (RLC) packet data units (PDUs) from user equipment (UE) being served by a source node. A wireless transmitter commands the UE to handover. A network communication interface transmits RLC Uplink (UL) context from the source node to the target node, and transmits RLC Downlink (DL) initialization message and buffered in-transit DL RLC PDUs from the source node to the target node.02-12-2009
20100238900Wireless Handover Optimization - Aspects of the present invention relate to improved systems and methods for handing over a UE from a source node to a target node. In some embodiments, the target node receives UL and DL count information directly from the UE being handed over, rather than from the source node or from a core network node.09-23-2010
20100040023Method and Apparatus for Inter Home Node B Handover in a Home Node B Group - A method of handing over in a communication system that includes a first wireless communications system that has a core network and a second wireless communications system that includes several short range access points using licensed wireless frequencies and a network controller for communicatively coupling a user equipment to the core network. The method receives a relocation required message when a first access point determines to handover the UE to a second access point. The UE has at least one ongoing session with the core network through the first access point, the relocation required message includes a domain identifier for the session. The method sends a relocation request message including the domain identifier to the second access point. The method sends a relocation command message to the first access point for sending to the UE to handover from the first access point to the second access point.02-18-2010
20110103344Neighbor Discovery Message Handling to Support Roaming of Wireless Mobile Client Devices - Techniques are provided herein to support roaming of wireless mobile client devices from one wireless local area network access point device to another wireless local area network access point device. Neighbor discovery messages are received from wireless mobile client devices. A neighbor discovery message specifies a target address for a neighbor discovery function. A response to a neighbor discovery message is sent to a wireless mobile client device such that the response message appears to have been sent by a wireless mobile client device that has an address that corresponds to the target address of the neighbor discovery message.05-05-2011
20100165948FAST COMBINATIONAL VOICE CALL CONTINUITY FROM LTE TO 2G/3G CS DOMAIN - The invention proposes a method for handing over a session between a source network which provides a first connection type domain and a target network which provides the first connection type domain and a second connection type domain, comprising informing a network node (e.g., a user equipment (UE)), before performing forming a handover from the source network to the target network, a preferred transfer domain in the target network. The invention also proposes a corresponding network node and a network control element.07-01-2010
20090016301PACKET DATA CONVERGENCE PROTOCOL OPERATIONS - The application discloses techniques for determining where to locate and how to fit the duplicate detection functionality within the PDCP architecture as well as determining when to activate or deactivate various PDCP functions, such as the PDCP reordering function. These mechanisms can be implemented in wireless devices such as a WTRU, or in any wireless network nodes.01-15-2009
20090109925COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND GATEWAY APPARATUS - A relay gateway apparatus HO-GW is provided between heterogeneous access networks (a WiMAX access network and a UMB access network). The HO-GW performs conversion of a movement control signal (an Inter-AGW handover control signal) and relay of communication data. When the relay is performed, user data from a CN reaches a wireless terminal MN through an HA of a core network, an access router ASN-GW, the HO-GW, and a base station eBS.04-30-2009
20080304450Inter-Mode/Inter-Rat Handover - There is disclosed a method of packet switched handover in a communications system having at least two modes of operation, the method comprising, at a terminal of the system, associating identifiers of each mode of operation, and responsive to a packet switched connection handover to a new mode, allocating the connection from an identifier of the existing mode to the associated identifier of the new mode.12-11-2008
20090016297HARD HANDOVER PROTOCOL TO ACHIEVE EARLY MAC READINESS - A technique to reduce the service disruption time of a mobile station (MS) when the MS performs a hard handover (HHO) is provided. An MS receives MAC context information that is necessary to connect to the target base station (BS) through the serving BS during the HHO preparation time instead of HHO execution time. The HHO preparation phase refers to the stage where a handover is initiated but the MS is still connected with the current serving BS. On the other hand, once the HHO execution begins, the MS must disconnect from the serving BS in order to establish the communication with the target BS.01-15-2009
20110299504Packet Transferring/Transmitting Method And Mobile Communication System - A packet transferring/transmitting method is provided for use in a mobile communication system 12-08-2011
20110299502METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for enabling a mobile terminal to perform a handover in a mobile communication system. A serving base station which supports both a first communication scheme and a second communication scheme can transmit, to the mobile terminal, a neighbor base station list broadcast message containing time offset information indicating the point of time to transmit information on a second base station which uses the second communication scheme and supports only the second communication scheme via a specific zone using the second communication scheme. The mobile terminal which has received the message can receive, from the serving base station, the information on the second base station via the specific zone on the basis of the received time offset information.12-08-2011
20110299503WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - To provide a wireless terminal device that can control so that the size of RWIN of an electronic device on a receiving side changes to an optimum value when hand-down (hand-off) from high speed communication to low speed communication occurs, and a method for controlling the same. A wireless terminal device 12-08-2011
20090103491LINK LAYER QUALITY OF SERVICE PARAMETER MAPPING - A detailed QoS parameter mapping of 3GPP QoS parameters to IEEE 802.21 MIH link QoS parameters. The detailed mapping includes an IEEE 802.21 Supported Number of Class of Service (CoS) parameter to indicate supported 3GPP QoS classes (conversational, streaming, interactive, and background). IEEE 802.21 MIH capable networks may use the detailed mapping to improve access-independent mobility management. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU), an access point, and other network infrastructure capable of performing the detailed QoS parameter mapping are also disclosed.04-23-2009
20100054209System and Method for SR-VCC of IMS Emergency Sessions - Methods and apparatuses for enabling Single Radio (SR)-Voice Call Continuity (VCC) of emergency calls are provided. More specifically, the methods and apparatuses provide continuity of IMS emergency sessions established in 4G access for mobility to 3G/2G access. Generally, a Mobility Management Entity (MME) in the packet switch (PS) domain provides a handover request to a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) Server in the circuit switch (CS) domain. The handover request includes an indication that the call is an emergency call and may include an indication that a Packet Switched Network Induced Location Request (PS-NI-LR) or similar location reporting procedure is required and/or a Gateway Mobile Location Center (GMLC) address. The MSC Server facilitates the handover to the CS domain via the Mg and/or Mw interface.03-04-2010
20110274088MEDIA GATEWAY SELECTION AT INTER-MSC HANDOVER - The invention relates to a method for handing over a mobile entity related call from a first call control node to a second call control node, wherein identification information of a switching point seized by the first call control node is contained in a handover request message, the second call control node selecting a switching point for the call to be handed over based on the identification information contained in the handover request message.11-10-2011
20090207808METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOFF OF A MULTI-MODE MOBILE STATION - A communication system reduces set up time for an inter-technology handoff of a multi-mode mobile station (MS) from a source network associated with a first radio frequency (RF) technology to a target network associated with a second RF technology by pre-establishing, prior to a determination to handoff the MS, a registration state of the MS and an authentication of the MS in association with the target network and second RF technology. In order to pre-establish the registration state and authentication, the MS exchanges messaging of the second RF technology with the second network via the first network and first RF technology. To facilitate the exchange, the MS includes shims in a second protocol stack associated with the second technology, which shims intercept second protocol stack signaling and redirect the intercepted signaling to a first protocol stack of the MS, associated with the first technology, for tunneling to the source network.08-20-2009
20090207809APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REDUCING HANDOVER DELAY IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for reducing a handover delay in a broadband wireless communication system are provided. In a method for operating a terminal to reduce a handover delay in a broadband wireless communication system, a handover procedure is performed with a serving Base Station (BS) to obtain a dedicated ranging code and a Connection ID (CID). The dedicated ranging code is transmitted to one or more target BSs using the CID. Whether the dedicated ranging code is received is determined. Therefore, a handover delay and a chance of malfunction can be reduced.08-20-2009
20110299501Mobility in IMS based Home Node B - The invention relates to a method for handing over an IP multimedia Subsystem, IMS, anchored session of a mobile device (12-08-2011
20110286433METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN MULTI-CARRIER CELLS - The present invention relates to the radio communication field and discloses a method, an apparatus, and a system for handover between multi-carrier cells, so that a user equipment (UE) can be handed over to carriers of different cells on multiple target evolved NodeBs (eNBs). The handover method includes: after performing handover request acknowledge, receiving serial numbers (SNs) of data to be transferred and identifier information of target eNBs of other carriers to which the UE is handed over sent by a source eNB; and transferring scheduling information to the target eNBs of other carriers to which the UE is handed over.11-24-2011
20110286432Support for Handoffs in High Rate Packet Data Systems - The invention supports two types of handoffs. The first handoff is for an inter-AN cell selection where the source AN allows the AT to add a cell under the control of a different AN to its active set and then allows the AT to switch to the target AN. A bearer path is established between the source and target AN to transfer the packet data traffic using an exchange of messages to register the AT's movement from one BTS to another BTS. The A8/A10 connections remain anchored at the source AN and, hence, a bearer path is needed between the source and target AN to transfer the packet data traffic. The second handoff occurs when the source AN specifies a move of the AT to a new AN proactively. New connections are established at the target AN to support the AT, and the AT is subsequently moved to the target AN via the relevant air-interface messaging.11-24-2011
20110286429GATEWAY CONFIGURED TO PROVIDE A HANDOVER, CONVERTING AND ROUTING FUNCTION - In one aspect, the invention provides an improved procedure for handing over a connection from a source network node to a target network node. In some embodiments, this procedure includes the following steps: (a) receiving, at a gateway, a handover required message transmitted from the source network node; (b) generating, at the gateway, a handover request message in response to receiving the handover required message; and (c) transmitting, from the gateway, the handover request message to the target network node. In another aspect, the invention provides an improved gateway that is configured to intercept and handle handover signaling.11-24-2011
20110286431WLAN Roaming and Selection Using Managed WLAN Handover Process - A method for providing information to a first terminal system and/or a second terminal system which connected to each other through a network and are subject to a potential or actual handover, provides convenience information about the execution of the potential or actual handover to at least one of the first and the second terminal systems, prior to or with the start of the handover, and provides in addition to at least one of the first and the second terminal systems a commercial communication relating to a commercial measure, whereby the commercial communication is provided in correlation with the provision of the convenience information.11-24-2011
20110286430COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached.11-24-2011
20110286428SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AN INTELLIGENT MOBILE MEDIA SERVER - An Intelligent Mobile HotSpot (IMHS) comprises a local area network radio interface; an in home display interface; a user interface comprising one of a switch, button, or input (collectively an input); non-transitory memory configured to store instructions; and a processor coupled with memory, the instructions configured to cause the processor to perform the following in response to an activation of the input: automatically establish a data connection with a vehicle display over the local area network, or automatically establish a data connection with a television over the in home display interface, and automatically cause a landing page to be displayed on the in vehicle display or the television.11-24-2011
20110286427Methods and Apparatus for Calling Party Number Display Solutions for 1xCSFB - Controller and method for Handover (HO) based 1×CSFB communicates Calling Party Number (CPN) to User Equipment (UE) a in a cellular communication system. A first solution provides Interworking Solution (IWS) adding CPN sent to target Base Station Controller (BSC) via Mobile Switching Center (MSC) in Interoperability Specification (IOS) HO messages. A second solution provides that IWS sends CPN with Air Interface HO message and stores the CPN until UE transition to the target Radio Access Network and acquires a traffic channel. A third solution provides that IWS receives CPN from MSC with a paging message and stores the CPN until UE transition to the target Radio Access Network and acquires a traffic channel. A fourth solution provides sending AWI message to the target Radio Access Network from the MSC. A fifth solution provides that IWS sends CPN via Feature Notification Message (FNM) data tunneled to UE before the paging message to let user decide whether to accept a call before leaving 3G/4G cellular communication.11-24-2011
20110142005METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FAST LAYER 3 HAND-OVER - The present invention relates to a method of seamlessly providing a satellite multimedia Internet service to a fixed subscriber belonging to a lower user network even in a satellite shadow environment and shortening a hand-over processing time between heterogeneous networks by applying a fast layer 3 hand-over technology between satellite and wireless networks in a mobile satellite terminal device.06-16-2011
20090086675Handover processing system in mobile communication system - A handover processing system in mobile communication system, implemented in gateway connected to subscriber network including base station in the mobile communication system, public network and IP network and accompanied by movement of radio terminal in the mobile communication system, wherein the gateway comprises line exchanger performing line exchange processing, VoIP connection unit controlling communication function to transmit/receive IP-packetized data to make communication and call control function for the VoIP communication function, handover detector determining whether or not call originating request from the base station is handover call, communication call detector determining whether or not communication source call of handover is present, call information storage unit storing call information, handover source call retriever retrieving handover source call in IP network, and handover processor taking over communication call from communication partner to continue the communication, and performing handover processing of VoIP communication call.04-02-2009
20090245202TUNNEL HANDOVER BETWEEN A WLAN AND A CELLULAR NETWORK - A method, dedicated to the management of the interworking between a wireless local area network and a mobile network, consists, in case of reception by an SGSN node (S10-01-2009
20110317663SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOFF BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF NETWORKS BY USING A SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE - A system and method for handing off from a first network to a second network. A determination may be made as to whether an accessible base station of the second network is located in the vicinity of a user equipment based on information on a current location of the user equipment in the first network. An activation message may be generated with a first telephone number as a caller number when an accessible base station of the second network is located in the vicinity of the user equipment based on the determination result. The activation message indicates an initiation of a search for an accessible base station of the second network, and an accessible base station of the second network may be searched for when the activation message with the first telephone number is received. A handoff from the first network to the second network may then be executed when the accessible base station of the second network is located.12-29-2011
20110317659SYSTEM, APPARATUS, AND METHOD FOR CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK RELIABILITY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - In accordance with aspects of the disclosure, a method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for wireless communication. The method, apparatus, and computer program product may be configured to determine that a device is switching from a first cell and a first location to a second cell and a second location to implement a mobile terminated circuit switched fallback process, generate a routing area update message including a flag indicating a pending data packet for communication, and transmit the generated routing area update message.12-29-2011
20120106516METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING NEIGHBOR BASE STATION INFORMATION PERFORMED BY MACRO BASE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method for requesting neighbor base station information by user equipment in a wireless communication system. The method includes: searching neighbor base stations targeted for a handover; transmitting a list request message including preamble information about a neighbor base station searched by the user equipment among the neighbor base stations and a neighbor base station list request indicator indicating a request for information about the neighbor base station to a serving base station; and receiving a list response message including an identification information and system information of the neighbor base station from the serving base station.05-03-2012
20120106510METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SECONDARY CELL RELEASE DURING HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and an apparatus for Secondary Cell (SCell) release during User Equipment (UE) handover comprises including information by a source eNB in a HandoverPreparationInformation message for a target eNB to control SCell release in the UE during handover, or including an indicator by a target eNB in a handover command for the UE to distinguish whether or not to release all configured SCells.05-03-2012
20120106508Method and System for Deleting Redundant Information of Home Policy and Charging Rules Function - The present invention discloses a method and a system for deleting redundant information of a home Policy and Charging Rule Function (PCRF). The Bearer Binding and Event Report Function (BBERF) in a visited network indicates gateway control session termination to the home PCRF through a visited PCRF after receiving a termination session triggering for determining to terminate a gateway control session between the BBERF in the visited network and the visited PCRF, and the home PCRF deletes policy control information related to the BBERF in the visited network. With the method of the present invention, the invalid session information in the home PCRF is cleared in time, which eliminates the redundancy of the home network resources and saves the home network resources.05-03-2012
20090279503SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTIMODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION HANDOFF - Methods and apparatus for base-station-assisted handover between WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access) and CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) EVDO (Evolution-Data Optimized) or 1xRTT (one times Radio Transmission Technology, or 1x) networks during normal operation of a dual-mode mobile station (MS) are provided. By having a base station (BS) using one radio access technology (RAT) broadcast information about a BS in a neighboring cell employing a different RAT, the methods and apparatus may improve service continuity during handover.11-12-2009
20090274120SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTICARRIER UPLINK CONTROL - An uplink control method for use in a communication system based on multiple carriers. The method includes allocating different types of random access channels for different types of uplink operations.11-05-2009
20110280218METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING NETWORK ACCESS DURING HNB HANDOVER - The present invention discloses a method and a system for controlling network access during HNB handover. The method comprises the following steps: a core network acquires target HNB information to determine whether to allow access of User Equipment (UE) and sends the target HNB information to an HNB GW to which the target HNB belongs if the access of the UE is allowed and the target HNB is connected with the core network via the HNB GW, and the HNB GW determines whether to allow the access of the UE according to the received target HNB information. The present invention can prevent the occurrence of illegal accesses and improve the security of network access.11-17-2011
20110280217SUPPORT OF CS DOMAIN SERVICES OVER A PACKET ONLY MOBILE SYSTEM - In an embodiment, there is provided an architecture for the support of CS domain services over a Packet only mobile system such as the Evolved Packet System access, in a mobile communication system comprising an Evolved Packet System (EPS) and a CS domain in turn comprising at last one Mobile Switching Center MSC, said architecture comprising at least one Interworking Function IWF, such that IWF is perceived as a Radio Network Controller RNC or a Base Station Controller BTS by a MSC, and as an Application Server by the EPS.11-17-2011
20110280216System, Apparatus for Content Delivery for Internet Traffic and Methods Thereof - In one embodiment, a method of serving media includes receiving a request to serve a cacheable media content to a user equipment at a second media server deployed in a second layer2 access network. The request is received around when the user equipment is handed-off from a first layer2 node in a first layer2 access network to a second layer2 node in the second layer2 access network and when a streaming session of the cacheable media content to the user equipment from a first media server is terminated. The method further includes determining if the cacheable media content is stored in a cache of the second media server, and serving the cacheable media content from the cache of the second media server to the user equipment if the media content is stored in the cache of the second media server.11-17-2011
20110280215COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD, AND GATEWAY - To realize a handover in which a gateway connecting to the access networks using different protocols is an anchor.11-17-2011
20110280214TERMINAL FOR A CONTENT CENTRIC NETWORK AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATION FOR A TERMINAL AND A HUB IN A CONTENT CENTRIC NETWORK - A method of communication for a terminal in a content-centric network is provided. The method includes suspending a data message associated with a content from being provided to a face before a handover when the handover is expected to occur in the terminal that requests the content, and transmitting, to a hub, a new interest message after the handover associated with the content so that the hub may provide the data message associated with the content to the face after the handover.11-17-2011
20110280213Guest Access Support for Wired and Wireless Clients in Distributed Wireless Controller System - Techniques are provided to enable a support for guest access of devices in a network. At a controller apparatus in a first mobility sub-domain of a network comprising a plurality of mobility sub-domains, a request message containing a request for guest network access for a device is received from a first access switch in the first mobility sub-domain. The controller apparatus forwards the request message to a guest controller. At a tunneling endpoint apparatus in the first mobility sub-domain, a tunnel is established to the guest controller to carry traffic between the device and the guest controller. Traffic for the device passes in a tunnel between the first access switch and the tunneling endpoint apparatus in the first mobility sub-domain, through the tunneling endpoint apparatus in the first mobility sub-domain and in the tunnel between the routing apparatus in the first mobility sub-domain and the guest controller.11-17-2011
20110286434ENHANCED WIDE AREA NETWORK SUPPORT VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A wireless broadband access gateway having a wireless interface compatible with any of a number of commercial wireless wide area network standards provides enhanced wire area network coverage via a broadband network. The gateway may function as a wireless wide area network base station having a small coverage area, and may be communicatively coupled via a broadband access provider to a broadband wireless controller that cooperatively coordinates call management for access devices comprising cellular or mobile multimedia handsets. The broadband network may comprise cable, digital subscriber line, satellite, T1, or T3 type networks, and may carry traffic unrelated to the signaling, control, voice, and multimedia information of associated with wide area network calls. The wireless broadband access gateway may comprise a set-to-box, and may operate to convert from air interface protocols used to communicate with mobile handsets of the wireless wide area network, to/from the packet-based protocols that may be used in the broadband network.11-24-2011
20090201878Low latency handover between wireless communication networks using different radio access technologies - A communications system for providing a user's mobile station (MS) with an Internet Protocol (IP) connectivity, has an IP network gateway for allocating an IP address to the MS to enable it to access an IP network. First and second base stations are respectively configured to support communications of the MS over first and second radio access networks using different radio access technologies. A first access gateway provides an interface between the IP network gateway and the first radio access network, whereas a second access gateway provides an interface between the IP network gateway and the second radio access network. A handover interface is provided between the first access gateway and the second access gateway for enabling the MS to switch between the first and second radio access networks with minimum latency.08-13-2009
20090232097METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for performing handover by wireless User Equipment (UE) is provided. The UE includes a Long Term Evolution-Mobile Extreme Convergence (LTE-MXC) application processor, a LTE processor and a Digital Signal Processor (DSP). The UE buffers a set of IP packets when a Radio Access Technology (RAT) indicator is less than a pre-defined threshold and sends the set of IP packets to the LTE processor and the DSP. The LTE processor transmits the set of IP packets to the LTE network and sends acknowledgement signals to the LTE-MXC application processor and the DSP. When the handover is complete, the LTE processor sends the transmission status of the set of IP packets to the DSP. The UE also includes multimode Radio Resource Control (RRC) and Non-Access Stratum (NAS) modules.09-17-2009
20100208701High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) Idle State Handout From Femto Access Point to Macro Access Network - Systems and methods for identifying an address of a femto node during handoff of an access terminal from a femto node to a macro node. In one embodiment, the femto node assigns a unique identifier to the access terminal. The access terminal passes the unique identifier to the macro node. The macro node partitions the unique identifier to determine the address of the femto node. In another embodiment, the femto node registers its address with a domain name system. The macro node queries the domain name system to obtain the address of the femto node. In another embodiment, the macro node sends the unique identifier to a proxy. The proxy partitions the unique identifier to determine the address of the femto node.08-19-2010
20110134887APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING MOBILE RELAY STATION - An apparatus and a method for handover in a broadband wireless communication system supporting a Mobile Relay Station (MRS) are provided. The method includes transmitting a Connection ID (CID) of Mobile Stations (MSs), the CIDs pre-allocated by a target BS, to the MSs; sending a resource allocation message comprising uplink resource allocation information for bandwidth request of the MSs, to the MSs; receiving a bandwidth request message which comprises security authentication information of each MS, from the MSs using an uplink resource allocated through the uplink resource allocation information; and aggregating bandwidth request messages of the MSs and sending a ranging request message comprising the security authentication information and bandwidth request information of the MSs to the target BS. Thus, the handover delay time, which is inevitable for the bandwidth request in the conventional connection set-up procedure, can be reduced, and the handover with the reliability guaranteed can be achieved by allowing the security related processing in the network re-entry procedure.06-09-2011
20090116447METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILITY SUPPORT BETWEEN NETWORK DOMAINS - Described aspects provide for improving the mobility of wireless communication devices between one network domain and another network domain, specifically, but not limited to, between a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) and a cellular network and the like. Present aspects provide for services to be moved seamlessly and in a reliable manner between the cellular and WLAN domains in order to minimize service disruption for the end user and provide the requisite Quality of Service (QoS) for the different applications. The aspects herein presented provide for various mechanisms that serve to improve the decision points related to when and what technology each service is expected to be associated with and provides better techniques to move the wireless communication device between cellular and WLAN domains when in-traffic and when idle.05-07-2009
20110292909Alternate Transmission Scheme for High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) - Post-hard handover processing in a Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) network may be improved to allow operation of High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) in hard handover. For example, uplink synchronization may be completed concurrent with HSPA to quickly resume HSPA operation in hard handovers. User Equipment (UE) may receive downlink data while completing uplink synchronization. In another example, a unique SYNC_UL code may be assigned to a UE for hard handover. The unique SYNC_UL code allows Node Bs of the TD-SCDMA network to know which UE is performing hard handover. When a Node B is receiving the unique SYNC_UL, the Node B may begin to allocate UL data grants. After receiving UL data from the UE, the Node B may resume High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA).12-01-2011
20110292913METHOD, SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS FOR REGISTRATION PROCESSING - A registration processing method and an apparatus are disclosed herein to enable the network to distinguish between different registration processing types. The method includes: identifying, by a user equipment, UE, a registration type when registering into a network; reporting, by the UE, a registration processing type information corresponding to the identified registration type to a network-side network element during registering into the network. The UE reports the registration processing type information to the network in the process of registering into the network, and therefore, the network distinguishes between different registration processing types accordingly.12-01-2011
20110292910METHOD OF GENERATING SIGNAL FOR SUPPORTING VEHICLE COMMUNICATION HANDOVER - When supporting the handover from first road side equipment of a plurality of sets of road side equipment and second road side equipment that is adjacent to the first road side equipment to a vehicle, the first road side equipment generates a first channel seizing signal that is longer than that of the second road side equipment in a control channel of an N-th sync interval. The second road side equipment generates a second channel seizing signal that is longer than that of the first road side equipment in a control channel of an (N+1)-th sync interval.12-01-2011
20110292908Additional Service Type Setup in Mobile Terminals Having Multiple Radio Access Network Accessiblity - In an area covered by multiple different radio access networks, a user equipment (UE) capable of accessing each of the multiple networks at the same time may provide additional service type setup for different call types. The UE registers each of the available call types with a first radio access network. Calls of one of the registered call types may be established, whether UE-originated or UE-terminated, with the first radio access network. When initiating a call of another type, the UE may initiate a different-typed call with another radio access network in the area, while maintaining the call of the first call type with the first radio access network.12-01-2011
20110292907METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GROUND STATION SIGNAL HANDOVER FOR AIRCRAFT - A method and system for ground station signal handoff for an aircraft. The method comprises receiving signal quality data and position data from each of a plurality of ground stations as a signal from each of the ground stations becomes detectable onboard the aircraft, while the aircraft is in communication with an active ground station. A position of the aircraft is determined each time a signal quality from one of the ground stations reaches a predetermined threshold indicating that the signal quality is suitable for handoff. A set of ground stations potentially suitable for handoff is identified based on their signal quality data when an insufficient signal quality of the active ground station is detected. The set of potentially suitable ground stations is evaluated based on their position and signal quality, and a trajectory or speed vector of the aircraft, to determine an optimal ground station for handoff. A handoff request is then transmitted to the optimal ground station.12-01-2011
20090274118METHOD FOR PREVENTING PIN-PONG HANDOVER EFFECT IN MOBILE WIMAX NETWORKS - To prevent a handover ping-pong effect between base-station in WiMAX-compliant networks, a priority level is firstly assigned to the trigger causes for handover, and the prioritized causes are coded. Then codes are subdivided into a first class of unrestricted handovers and a second class of handover subjected to restriction. The first class includes the highest priority handovers. The second class includes a given subset of handovers with a high or normal priority intended for optimizing resources. Outside this subset the second class also includes handovers for power budget having a normal priority level. When an outgoing handover is decided, the actual serving BS either permits or selectively suppresses the Handover Request to the target BS when the latter is corresponding to the preceding serving BS for that mobile. The selection mechanism operates on the second class of restricted handovers, during a penalty time triggered by the occurrence of handover causes included in the given subset of the second class.11-05-2009
20100020761COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE TRANSCEIVER STATION, MOBILE STATION, AND DATA TRANSFER METHOD - A communication system that includes a plurality of base transceiver stations and a mobile station, the communication system including a second base transceiver station that broadcasts identification information to be used to specify the second base transceiver station itself, a mobile station that receives and transfers the identification information that has been broadcasted from the second base transceiver station, and a first base transceiver station that specifies the second base transceiver station as a handover target of the mobile station based on the identification information transferred from the mobile station.01-28-2010
20110019639Enterprise Level Management in a Multi-Femtocell Network - Aspects of a method and system for enterprise level management in a multi-femtocell network are provided. In this regard, one or more endpoint devices may receive traffic management information from a hybrid network controller for enabling handoff of calls and/or communication sessions among femtocells and/or access points. The received traffic management information may comprise set-up instructions, handoff instructions, transmit power, neighbor list information, signal quality thresholds, frequency assignments, transmission time, code assignments and/or antenna pattern assignments. The endpoint device may control handoffs between a communication device external to the communication system and the femtocells, access points and/or end-point devices.01-27-2011
20090168724USER APPARATUS, BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR USE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user apparatus includes a handover request signal transmission unit configured to transmit a request signal to a source base station for handover to a target base station, a handover command reception unit configured to receive a handover command from the source base station, a PDCP reordering function execution unit configured to execute a PDCP reordering function of determining sequence of packets in a PDCP sublayer and deferring to deliver the packets to an upper layer until the packets become in-sequence, a handover complete signal transmission unit configured to report completion of the handover to the target base station, a PDCP reordering function activation unit configured to activate the PDCP reordering function, and a PDCP reordering function inactivation unit configured to inactivate the PDCP reordering function in response to expiration of a predefined time period or in response to receipt of a notification from the target base station.07-02-2009
20090040981METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IN-ORDER DELIVERY OF DATA PACKETS DURING HANDOFF - Methods, apparatus, systems and computer program products are defined that provide for in-order deliver of data packets during hand-off. The aspects provide for in-order delivery at Forward Link Serving eBS/Data Attachment Point (FLSE/DAP) switch and Reverse Link Serving eBS/Data Attachment Point (RLSE/DAP) switch. As such, present aspects provide for significant improvement in the throughput of applications, such as applications relying on Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), during handoff, in such networks as Ultra Mobile Broadband (UMB) and the like.02-12-2009
20120269166Method and Apparatus for Power Correction in Uplink Syncronization During a TD-SCDMA Handover - A method and apparatus for adjusting and offsetting a power level of uplink transmissions from user equipment in a wireless communication system. In an aspect of the disclosure, a handoff from a source base station to a target base station includes the target base station determining a suitable power offset value and communicating this offset to the source base station. The source base station transmits a handover instruction including the offset to the user equipment (UE), and the UE transmits a synchronization code. The target base station then calculates a further power correction and transmits the correction with an acknowledgment of the synchronization code. The UE then sets the power for future transmissions based in part on the offset and correction values.10-25-2012
20120269167ENHANCED ATTACHMENT PROCEDURE FOR ATTACHING A UE TO A 3GPP ACCESS NETWORK - The invention relates to methods for (re)attaching a UE to a 3GPP access network and for storing bearer context information of a UE upon handover from a 3GPP access network to a non-3GPP access network. Furthermore, the invention relates to 3GPP network nodes, such as mobility management entity, serving gateway and packed data gateway, and a UE that are specially adapted to perform these methods. In order to decrease of the delay time during (re)attachment of a UE to a 3GPP access network, the invention proposes to maintain context information on data bearer(s) of a UE within the 3GPP access network and the UE, while the UE is not attached to the 3GPP access network, so that data bearer context information for this UE is available and can be used for the (re)activation of data bearer(s) once the UE is attaching to the 3GPP access network again.10-25-2012
20100103904ENHANCED FORWARD LINK TRANSMISSION - A method for processing forward link channel signals generated by a CDMA base station includes time sharing by several mobile stations of spreading codes, which are orthogonal codes such as Walsh Code, and code-combining soft/softer handoff across sectors in the mobile station active set to increase dimensions on the CDMA2000 and WCDMA downlink while minimizing intra-sector interference. Since different parts of a packet or frame are transmitted to the user by the different base stations in the active set, earlier decoding and therefore early packet termination is enabled.04-29-2010
20090034469METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SEARCHING TARGET CELL BY USING MULTIMODE-MULTIBAND TERMINAL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - Disclosed is a method for searching for a target cell by using a multimode-multiband terminal in mobile communication environments, in which a mobile communication system improves a handover success rate and communication quality by reducing time required for searching for the target cell, the mobile communication system including a CDMA-2000 system and a WCDMA system, the CDMA-2000 system including a base-station transmission system and a base station controller and providing a CDMA-2000 service to a terminal requesting access, the WCDMA system including an RTS and an RNC and providing a WCDMA service to the terminal requesting the access. The method including: (a) receiving WCDMA signals transmitted from the WCDMA system through a WCDMA modem in order to measure an E02-05-2009
20100098023MAINTAINING CIRCUIT SWITCHED CONTINUITY IN AN ENHANCED UNIVERSAL TERRESTRIAL RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method for implementing a fallback procedure from a packet switched (PS) radio access technology (RAT) to a circuit switched (CS) RAT is disclosed. A paging message is received at a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) via the PS RAT, the paging message including a WTRU identifier and a domain indicator, wherein the domain indicator indicates whether the paging message is related to a service on the CS RAT. If the WTRU identifier in the paging message matches a stored identifier of the receiving WTRU, then a fallback procedure to the CS RAT is performed. The WTRU responds to the paging message using a CS RAT-based identifier assigned to the WTRU.04-22-2010
20110007710COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE START OF A HANDOVER AND RADIO APPARATUS USING THE METHOD - A notification unit conveys a transmit timing of a signal to a target radio apparatus. A receiver receives the signal transmitted from the target radio apparatus with a neighborhood of the transmit timing conveyed. A demodulation unit derives a difference between the receive timing and an estimated timing. A determining unit determines a new transmit timing for the target radio apparatus, based on the difference and outputs the new transmit timing determined to the notification unit. When a state in which the receive timing lags the estimated receive timing occurs more than a predetermined frequency, the determining unit instructs the target radio apparatus to start a handover.01-13-2011
20110007706RADIO ACCESS NETWORK (RAN) CAPACITY/RESOURCE DETERMINATION - A device receives code division multiple access (CDMA) capacity/resource information via a first direct interface with a radio network controller (RNC) associated with a CDMA radio access network (RAN), and determines, based on the CDMA capacity/resource information, a capacity associated with the CDMA RAN. The device also determines, based on the CDMA capacity/resource information, a resource availability associated with the CDMA RAN, and determines, based on the capacity and the resource availability associated with the CDMA RAN, a CDMA RAN resource allocation.01-13-2011
20090190557METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR SENDING A RESET MESSAGE SEQUENCE NUMBER DURING SWITCHING - A method of sending reset message sequence number is provided. During a connected state handoff of an access terminal (AT) between a source access network (AN) and a target AN, the source AN sends a reset message sequence number of the AT to the target AN. The source AN adds the reset message sequence number of the AT to the message sent to the target AN. Thereby, the problem in the existing systems that, the source AN cannot send the reset message sequence number of the AT to the target AN, and thus the target AN cannot perform a reset process on the AT when the AT is switched from the source AN to the target AN is thus solved. An access network (AN) and a communication system are also provided.07-30-2009
20090190552FLEXIBLE MOBILE IP FOREIGN AGENT ARCHITECTURE FOR ENABLING CONVERGED SERVICES - A method and apparatus for flexible Mobile IP foreign agent architecture for enabling converged services are described herein. According to one embodiment of the invention, a packet is received over a circuit bound with a converged services domain of a network element. The converged services domain enables forwarding of wired and wireless traffic to a plurality of destination network elements. Upon determining that the circuit is capable of carrying Mobile Internet Protocol (IP) packets, the packet is processed according to an entry ma Mobile IP forwarding information base upon determining that the packet has a corresponding entry in the Mobile IP forwarding information base, and the packet is processed according to a different entry in an IP forwarding information base upon determining that the packet does not have an entry in the Mobile IP forwarding information base. Other methods and apparatuses are also described.07-30-2009
20090073936METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOFF OF A USER EQUIPMENT - In order to facilitate a handoff of a communication session between a legacy circuit switched network and a packet data network such as a 3GPP LTE, 3GPP2 UMB, or WiMAX network, which communication session is anchored in an IMS Voice Call Continuity Application Server (VCC AS), a Circuit Switched Proxy (CS Proxy) is provided in the packet data network that communicates with a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) of the circuit switched network. The CS Proxy allows the packet data network to communicate with the VCC AS, the MSC to communicate with the packet data network, and the MSC to communicate with the VCC AS via the packet data network, thereby allowing an exchange of handoff-related information between the packet data network and the VCC AS, the packet data network and the circuit switched network, and the circuit switched network and the VCC AS via the packet data network.03-19-2009
20080310365METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CACHING CONTENT ON-DEMAND IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention provides methods and systems for caching content in a wireless communication network. The method includes receiving a request for a content at a first base station from a mobile station. In response to receiving the request for the content, the first base station caches a first fragment of the content. The first fragment includes a plurality of packets. Further, the first base station transmits one or more packets of the plurality of packets corresponding to the first fragment to the mobile station. The method further includes initiating a handover of the mobile station to at least one second base station. The at least one base station caches a remaining plurality of packets corresponding to the first fragment of the content in response to the handover.12-18-2008
20080310368DOWNLINK PACKET DATA CONVERGENCE PROTOCOL BEHAVIOR DURING HANDOVER - The present invention relates to maintaining an order of received data units during a handover procedure in a wireless communication system. The present invention includes receiving a plurality of data units from a source station according to a sequence prior to handover to a target base station, wherein each data unit includes a sequence number, receiving at least one data unit having a sequence number after handover from a target base station, and delivering to a higher layer all data units received from the source base station prior to handover and having sequence numbers smaller than a sequence number of the at least one data unit received from the target base station after handover.12-18-2008
20100034167MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - According to one aspect of the present invention, a mobile communication system is used for transmission and reception of a data PDU (Protocol Data Unit) in a radio link control (RLC) sublayer between a radio base station and a mobile station. The present system includes a function of feeding back a control PDU to a transmitting side, the control PDU indicating a decoding result of a data PDU at a receiving side. In the present system, in response to an instruction from an upper layer of the RLC sublayer, the transmitting side triggers the receiving side to feed back the control PDU.02-11-2010
20090196254METHOD OF PERFORMING HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a handover method of a mobile station in a wireless communication system, and a base station and a mobile station for the same. A list of neighboring base stations that can accept a handover of a mobile station is shared by the mobile station and a serving base station before the mobile station performs the handover so as to reduce handover delay time in a high speed environment through addition, the active base station set managed by the mobile station and the serving base station can be managed with consideration of radio signal quality and resource state of each of the neighboring base stations included in the active base station set, and thus when the mobile station attempts a network re-entry process to a target base station that is not ready for the handover of the mobile station due to a loss of a handover control message, a handover failure due to a lack of radio resources can be prevented, thereby increasing a handover success rate.08-06-2009
20090196253Location based femtocell device configuration and handoff - Methods and apparatus for configuring femtocell devices for performing handoffs in a communication system. The communication system is provided with a plurality of macrocell base stations, a femtocell device, a wireless softswitch and a mobile node. In the communication system, each macrocell base station serves a macro cell, and the femtocell device serves a femto cell and is disposed in one of the plurality of macro cells. The wireless softswitch is communicatively connected with the plurality of macrocell base stations and the femtocell device, and stores geographic coverage area information for each of the plurality of macrocell base stations. The mobile node is originally disposed within the femto cell and moves out of the femto cell. The mobile node transmits a registration message to the femtocell device. The femtocell device forwards the registration message and geographical location information for the femtocell device to the wireless softswitch. The wireless softswitch determines which one of the plurality of macrocell base stations covers the macro cell where the femtocell device is disposed, in dependence upon the received geographical location information for the femtocell device and the stored geographic coverage area information for each of the plurality of macrocell base stations. Then, the wireless softswitch forwards the registration message to the macrocell base station determined.08-06-2009
20090296652METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING SCANNING RATES IN A MULTI-MODE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method and system for selecting scanning rates in a multi-mode communication device is disclosed herein. The method can include the step of—at a multi-mode communication device—measuring at least one parameter associated with an interaction between a first network and the multi-mode communication device. The method can further include the step of—in response to measuring the parameter—selecting a scanning rate of the multi-mode communication device for a second, different network that interacts with the multi-mode communication device. In the method, the first network and the second network can have independent synchronization procedures.12-03-2009
20100014484HANDOFF CONTROL METHOD AND A MOBILE STATION EMPLOYING THE SAME - There is disclosed a handoff control method for registering a CDMA mobile station in such a way that battery power wastage is prevented if successive attempts to register the station fail. If it is judged that registration fails (step S01-21-2010
20110080894MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE STATION, AND WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS - When a mobile station (UE) is camping on a system of the LTE scheme, a function (EMM) is configured to transmit a service request signal including a “CSFB” to an MME; the NNE is configured to transmit setup information including a “CSFB” to an eNB in response to the service request signal transmitted by the function (EMM); the eNB is configured to transmit, to a function (AS) , instruction information instructing to select a cell in a system of the WCDMA/GSM scheme in response to the setup information transmitted by the MME;04-07-2011
20110268085LTE FORWARD HANDOVER - Techniques for performing forward handover in a wireless communication system are disclosed. In one aspect, a user equipment (UE) transmits a connection request to a target eNodeB. The connection request may be transmitted when the UE detects a connection failure in a communication with a source eNodeB. The UE receives a connection response from the target eNodeB in response to the target eNodeB requesting handover preparation information from the source eNodeB. In another aspect, a target eNodeB may receive a connection request from a user equipment (UE) and transmit a radio link failure (RLF) recovery request message to a source eNodeB to prompt the source eNodeB to initiate handover of the UE from the source eNodeB.11-03-2011
20100034170Network Node and Mobile Terminal - Disclosed in a technique for more accurately checking a network condition such as a transmission delay generated in packet transmission between two nodes and other network conditions. A buffering node 02-11-2010
20100034169PACKET DATA CONVERGENCE PROTOCAL END OF HANDOVER INDICATION - Explicit signaling of End of Handover (EoH) advantageously indicates when user equipment (UE) has stopped using Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) handover mode. Radio Link Control (RLC) Acknowledge Mode (AM) delivers in order ensuring that all reordered packets have been received with no risk of delivering a gap packet when no longer in handover mode that would otherwise cause Hyper Frame Number (HFN) to be out of synchronization. Substantially at a time evolved Base Node (eNB) determines a gap will not be filled, eNB can convey an EoH indication to a served UE and can then deliver the PDCP Service Data Units (SDUs) with gaps to upper layers without delay.02-11-2010
20090285180METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING A RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL BY SELECTIVELY USING DEDICATED OR CONTENTION-BASED PREAMBLES DURING HANDOVER - A method and apparatus for accessing a random access channel (RACH) during handover are disclosed. A handover procedure is initiated and a maximum handover interruption timer is activated. A dedicated preamble is transmitted in an attempt to access the RACH on a condition that the dedicated preamble is reserved in a current random access opportunity and the maximum handover interruption timer has not expired. A contention-based preamble is transmitted in an attempt to access the RACH on a condition that a dedicated preamble is not reserved in a current random access opportunity. If the maximum handover interruption timer has expired, a contention-based preamble is transmitted in an attempt to access the RACH.11-19-2009
20100027506WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND CELL STATION, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system for TDMA communication with use of one or more communication channels among at least one of a plurality of cell stations and a wireless communication terminal. The wireless communication terminal includes a link-channel-allocation requesting unit that transmits a link-channel allocation request signal upon handover without specifying a destination cell station, using a handover control channel included in the communication channels which is used for transmitting control information concerning handover and has a unique channel number in the wireless communication system. The one of the cell stations includes a link-channel allocating unit that transmits, to the wireless communication terminal, a link-channel allocation signal including link-channel allocation information using the handover control channel upon receiving the link-channel allocation request signal.02-04-2010
20120294278 THROUGHPUT FOR INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY HANDOVER - Aspects describe renegotiation of quality of service parameters to resolve maximum bit rate mismatches and/or other quality of service parameter mismatching issues that might arise during an inter-radio access technology handover. At about the same time as a mobile device moves from a source network to a target network, the target network dynamically initiates a quality of service modification procedure. The quality of service modification procedure can help resolve the maximum bit rate mismatches and/or the other quality of service parameter mismatching issues.11-22-2012
20120294283METHOD FOR DATA FORWARDING - The present invention provides a method for data forwarding. The method includes: transmitting, by a source system, Selected IP Traffic Offload (SIPTO)/Local Internet Protocol Access (LIPA) indication information to a destination system, the SIPTO/LIPA indication information indicating that the source system adopts an optimized user plane network structure; performing, by the destination system, an optimized data forwarding mechanism after receiving the SIPTO/LIPA indication information. According to the present invention, it can be ensured that a system sets up an optimized data forwarding mechanism during a handover process of a terminal.11-22-2012
20090285177METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ACCELERATING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION HANDOVER - Methods and apparatus for ranging with one or more neighboring sectors during normal operation of a mobile station (MS) with its serving sector are provided. The ranging results may be frequently updated in an effort to accelerate the handover process to another base station (BS) providing coverage for one of the neighboring sectors.11-19-2009
20090274117Handover Method in Mobile Phone Network - The invention provides for a handover method for use in relation to a mobile radio communications device arranged for communication with an access service gateway by way of an eNodeB arrangement and comprising the steps of, subsequent to the receipt of a handover request at the mobile radio communications device from a eNodeB, delivering a handover indication message to the access service gateway and prior to completion of the handover, the handover indication serving to prevent transmission of downlink data from the access service gateway and at least until further eNodeB messaging is received, and the invention also providing for a related mobile radio communication network arrangement and a eNodeB arrangement.11-05-2009
20100027507HANDOVER PROCESSING METHOD, ENB AND NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM THEREOF - Embodiments of the present invention includes a handover processing method, a source eNB, a neighboring eNB and a network communication system. In one embodiment of the handover processing method, a source eNB selects a target eNB from neighboring eNBs that can accept a handover request from a mobile terminal, and notifies a selection result to the mobile terminal; if handover information corresponding to the mobile terminal is received by an neighboring eNB that can accept the handover request of the mobile terminal within a preset handover waiting time, the neighboring eNB determines that it is a target eNB and cooperates with the mobile terminal to perform a handover; otherwise, the neighboring eNB determines that it is a prepared eNB and reduces its resources reserved for the mobile terminal. The present invention can effectively improve the successful handover probability.02-04-2010
20100027504Method and Apparatus for Throttling Persistent Always On Applications - An apparatus and method for facilitating inter-technology handoff from a home wireless network comprising comparing a parameter of a home signal to a threshold, wherein the home signal is from the home wireless network where the data session of a persistent always ON application is established; throttling the persistent always ON application; and attempting to acquire a first alternative signal acceptable to the persistent always ON application from a first alternative wireless network using a single RF chain.02-04-2010
20100260141LOCATION REPORTING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Location reporting in long term evolution (LTE) wireless networks is provided. Systems and methods are disclosed to provide support of location reporting and messaging at a mobility management entity (MME) to allow location updates to serving gateways (SGWs) and packet data network gateways (PGWs), and for the SGWs and PGWs to activate and de-activate location reporting. The MME also supports detection and communication with the LTE radio access network to provide location reporting back to the communication network. The MME and the accompanying messaging can provide location reporting including enhanced cell global identity (ECGI) and tracking area identity (TAI) information.10-14-2010
20090185538MOBILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INTERNET PROTOCOL BASED LOW POWER WIRELESS NETWORK - A mobility management system and method is provided for efficiently support mobility to an IPv6 based LoWpan. The mobility management method for Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) based personal area network (PAN) moving with a mobile router according to the present invention includes detecting, at a mobile terminal, movement of the mobile router; determining whether the movement is an intra-network movement or an inter-network movement, transmitting, when the movement is an intra-network movement, a neighbor discovery request message to a gateway of a currently attached network and receiving a neighbor discovery response message containing a temporary address transmitted by the gateway in response to the neighbor discovery request message. When the movement is an inter-network movement, the gateway receives the binding acknowledgement message from a home agent and establishes a bidirectional tunnel with the home agent.07-23-2009
20120294285METHOD FOR PERFORMING UNCONTROLLED HANDOVER - A device, system and method for performing an uncontrolled handover in a mobile station, a ranging request message including an identifier of a serving base station and a first identifier used in the serving base station is transmitted to a first target base station to perform network (re)entry to the first target base station, and a ranging response message including security information and a second identifier for identifying the mobile station is received from the first target base station.11-22-2012
20090161625SEAMLESS MOBILITY FOR NON-MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOL CAPABLE WIRELESS DEVICES IN A TIME DIVISION DUPLEX SYSTEM - A method, base station, and wireless communication system provide seamless mobility in a time division duplex system. The method includes determining a mobility capability of the wireless communication device (06-25-2009
20090161630WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication apparatus holds information concerning a second network reported from a specific wireless terminal that has left a first network. In accordance with predetermined criteria, the communication apparatus decides a wireless terminal that is to be allowed to join the second network and notifies this wireless terminal so as to cause the specific wireless terminal to return to the first network. This wireless terminal uses the held information concerning the second network to discriminate the communication status of the second network and requests the specific wireless terminal to return in accordance with the communication status discriminated.06-25-2009
20090109921Content-Based Handover Method and System - A handover of a wireless communication device is performed between a first wireless band and a second wireless band when a detected feature occurs within a content stream being communicated with the wireless communication device.04-30-2009
20100091732SYSTEM AND METHOD TO PROVIDE FAST WIDE-AREA MOBILE IP HANDOFFS - A system, device, and method for real-time handoff in a mobile IP network is provided. In an embodiment, an indication that a mobile device is in a new network is sent out more often in a beacon than in an IRDP message in order to provide an effective seamless connectivity between service areas for wireless communications.04-15-2010
20100091735APPARATUS AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN SOFT HANDOFF OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method of transmitting and receiving data in soft handoff of a wireless communication system. According to an aspect of the present invention, in the method of receiving data in soft handoff of a wireless communication system, a mobile station receives a first sequence being generated by interleaving transmission data using a first interleaver pattern, and also receives a second sequence being generated by interleaving the transmission data using a second interleaver pattern. Then, the mobile station combines and decodes the first sequence and the second sequence before receiving an entire frame having the first sequence allocated thereto.04-15-2010
20090122763COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE AND METHOD - Included are a communication control device applied to a wireless communication system 05-14-2009
20100091736SYSTEM FOR PACKET DATA SERVICE IN THE MIXED NETWORK OF ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND HAND-OVER METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed herein is a mobile communication terminal and handover method therefor, which enable handover of a mobile communication terminal that is using a packet data service or is in a dormant state in a mobile communication network in which asynchronous and synchronous networks coexist. In the handover method, if a channel is assigned between a mobile communication terminal and a synchronous mobile communication system in response to a request from an asynchronous mobile communication system as a mobile communication terminal using packet data service in the asynchronous mobile communication system moves into an area of the synchronous mobile communication system, call setup is performed. A node B of the asynchronous communication releases a connection to the mobile communication system and assigns a new mobile IP to the mobile communication terminal, thus providing continuous packet data service to the mobile communication terminal.04-15-2010
20100091738Methodology for base station assisted channel selection for interference handling in mobile networks - A mechanism is disclosed where a Base Station provides assistance to a mobile device in the channel-switch process because a mobile device might have to perform frequent channel switches to overcome adverse channel conditions due to interference in the 900 MHz ISM band. The Base Station broadcasts channel-specific information that will be used by all mobile devices to accurately select prospective channels for future channel-switches, thereby cutting down the latency that is experienced during an actual switch.04-15-2010
20090154423METHOD OF ACCESSING OPTIMAL ACCESS NETWORK USING ACCESS GATEWAY IN MOBILE TERMINAL - Provided is a method of causing a mobile terminal to access an optimal access network using an access gateway. By searching for neighboring access network nodes periodically to select an optimal access network node when the mobile terminal accesses a serving access network node or when the mobile terminal performs handover, and accessing the selected optimal access network node through the access gateway to communicate with the optimal access network, it is possible to reduce communication costs and provide high-quality communication services to users without installing any additional apparatus require for heterogeneous networking. Furthermore, by performing authentication, registration, and QoS control in advance before accessing the optimal access network node, it is possible to reduce a time consumed to access the optimal access network node.06-18-2009
20080240036Method For Resource Management and Method For Traffic Guidance in the Multimode Radio - The application discloses a method for resource management and a method for traffic guidance in a multimode radio network comprising a plurality of mobile communication networks of different modes that share wideband transmission links and sites of centralized base stations, the centralized base stations of the plurality of mobile communication networks being connected to a common base station controller or a common radio networks controller. A mobile terminal is made to perform real-time handover among different mobile communication networks, or, the allocation of the resources among the plurality of mobile communication networks is adjusted in real time, according to at least one of the following factors or the combination thereof: the multimode supporting capability of the mobile terminal, traffics of cells, operation policies and real-time operating conditions of the plurality of networks.10-02-2008
20100208690Fast Handover Protocols for Wimax Networks - A method performs handover of a mobile station (MS from a current base station (BSC) connected to a target base station (BST) via a backbone in a Worldwide interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) mobile communication network. The MS, before handover, transmits a Connection Identifier Request (CID-REQ) to the BST via the BSC, and receiving a Connection Identifier Response (CID-RSP) from the BST via the BSC. The MS, before handover, transmits a Subscriber Station (SS) Basic Capability Request (SBC-REQ), and receives a SS Basic Capability Response (SBC-RSP) from the BST via the BSC. Then, the MS transmits a Ranging Request (RNG-REQ) to the BST, and receives a Ranging Response (RNG-RSP) from the BST. During the handover, the MS transmits a Registration Request (REG-REQ) to the BST, and receives a Registration Response from the BST to establish the connection between the MS and the BST.08-19-2010
20110170516SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COORDINATED MULTI-POINT NETWORK OPERATION TO REDUCE RADIO LINK FAILURE - A system and method for implementing call handover (HO) is disclosed. A user equipment (UE) is configured to communicate with a wireless communication network. The UE is configured to transmit a measurement report to at least one of a serving cell and at least one cell of a coordinated multi-point (CoMP) cell set. The UE is also configured to listen for control channel transmissions from at least one of the serving cell and a first cell in the CoMP cell set, receive a resource allocation from at least one of the serving cell and the first cell in the CoMP cell set, and receive an HO command jointly from the serving cell and the first cell in the CoMP cell set. The HO command identifies a target cell. The UE is also configured to perform handover to the target cell identified in the HO command.07-14-2011
20090147754USER EQUIPMENT, CALL CONTINUITY APPLICATION SERVER, AND NETWORK HANDOVER METHOD - A network handover method applicable to network handover in ringing/ring back tone (RBT) or call hold is provided. According to this method, in ringing/RBT, one party performs a session negotiation with an Other End Point (OEP) via a call continuity application server, and then sends an off-hook signal to the OEP via the call continuity application server after the negotiation succeeds. Further, a call continuity application server and a user equipment (UE) are provided. According to the present disclosure, in ringing/RBT or call hold, even if the network coverage is not good, the UE may also be handed over to another network through call continuity, so as to effectively prevent the UE from dropping a call in ringing/RBT or call hold and thus improve the conversation quality of the user.06-11-2009
20090147751METHOD OF APPLYING FAST MOBILE IPV6 FOR MOBILE NODES IN MOBILE NETWORKS, MOBILE ROUTER THEREFOR, AND MOBILE NETWORK THEREFOR - Provided are a method of applying fast mobile IPv6 (FMIPv6) to a mobile node in order to prevent loss of packets transmitted during a handover of a mobile router from a first access router to a second access router, and a mobile router and a mobile network therefor. Specifically, the mobile router receives, from the first access router, a message containing a prefix corresponding to the second access router, transmits, to the mobile node, a message containing the prefix and information indicating that the prefix is received from the first access router, transmits, to the first access router, a message for FMIPv6, and transmits, to the mobile node, a message to set a zero lifetime for a prefix corresponding to the first access router. Furthermore, the mobile node transmits a message for FMIPv6 to the first access router when the mobile node receives the message containing the prefix.06-11-2009
20090080381PACKET COMMUNICATION ROAMING METHOD AND SYSTEM - A method of roaming in a packet communication system during a call is disclosed. The method of roaming has a scanning process and a connection process. During the scanning process, one or more available access points (AP's) are scanned-for. The one or more available AP's are prioritized into a prioritized AP list based on at least one criterion in addition to a received signal strength indicator (RSSI). During the connection process, a decision is made to roam from an existing AP to a new AP. A connection is made to the new AP, wherein the new AP is selected from the prioritized AP list. Associated methods, systems, and data signals are also disclosed03-26-2009
20110261786RESTRICTING HANDOVER OF A MOBILE STATION - A base station communicates, with a mobile station, data associated with a packet-switched session in which the mobile station is involved. In response to a handover request from the mobile station, the base station accesses information provisioned for the mobile station to determine whether the mobile station is to be subjected to mobility restriction. Based on the accessed information, the base station determines whether to allow handover of the mobile station. A message is sent to the mobile station to indicate that the requested handover is not allowed if the base station determines that the requested handover is not allowed.10-27-2011
20110122840METHOD FOR CONTROLLING INTER-FREQUENCY HAND-OFF IN COGNITIVE RADIO BASED CELLULAR RELAY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - There is provided a method for controlling inter-frequency hand-off in a cognitive radio based cellular relay communications network, the method including: receiving the inter-frequency hand-off request from mobile stations and receiving information on RS-signal strength and BS-signal strength, from the mobile stations; when the base stations receive the inter-frequency hand-off request, acquiring empty channel information receiving cognitive radio band information including the empty channel information by requesting the cognitive radio band information to the relay stations having the empty channel information based on a cognitive radio technology; calculating RS-throughput corresponding to data throughput between the relay stations and BS-throughput corresponding to data throughput between the base stations by using the information on the RS-signal strength and the BS-signal strength and empty channel state information in the cognitive radio band information; and when the RS-throughput is higher than the BS-throughput, instructing the mobile station to perform the inter-frequency hand-off.05-26-2011
20110170518MULTI-MODE TRAFFIC ENGINEERED HANDOVER MANAGEMENT DEVICE AND METHOD FOR A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK - A handover management device (D07-14-2011
20110170517SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENABLING SESSION CONTEXT CONTINUITY OF LOCAL SERVICE AVAILABILITY IN LOCAL CELLULAR COVERAGE - Local IP Access (LIPA) allows an IP-capable user equipment (UE) connected via a femto cell direct access to other IP-capable devices in the local IP network. Selected IP Traffic Offload (SIPTO) is used to offload selected types of IP traffic towards a defined IP network close to the UE's point of attachment to the access network. LIPA PDN Connectivity indicates a PDP Context or a PDN Connection that gives access to services located in the local IP network of the femto cell subsystem. SIPTO PDN Connectivity indicates a PDP Context or PDN Connection that allows offload of selected types of IP traffic towards a defined IP network close to the UE's point of attachment to the access network. Systems, devices and methods are described herein that enable the identification of the type of connectivity available to a UE and enable session continuity for local cellular coverage.07-14-2011
20120140736COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached.06-07-2012
20110243097Interface Setup for Communications Network with Femtocells - A method of operating a communications network comprises determining that an interface needs to be established between a femto radio base station gateway (10-06-2011
20100040021COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE NODE, PROXY NODE, AND MANAGEMENT NODE - A technique of acquiring a binding ID when a mobile node performs handover is disclosed. According to the technique, when an MN 02-18-2010
20110261789METHOD OF IMPLEMENTING PACKET-BASED RESOURCE ALLOCATION AND PERSISTENT RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method of allocating resources in a wireless communication system. The method includes requesting persistent allocation of resources for a data spurt in response to detecting the beginning of the data spurt and performing non-persistent resource allocation for at least one packet in the data spurt. The non-persistent resource allocation is performed in response to determining that persistent resources are not available for allocation. The method also includes transmitting the packet using the allocated non-persistent resources.10-27-2011
20110261785COMMUNICATION METHOD OF A VEHICULAR MOBILE TERMINAL, A MACRO BASE STATION, A NEIGHBOR MICRO BASE STATION, AND A SERVING MICRO BASE STATION IN A MULTI-CELL GROUP - A communication method of a serving micro base station is provided. The method includes a handover of a vehicular mobile terminal based on uplink broadcast information including a unique access code allocated to the vehicular mobile terminal within a multi-cell group. The multi-cell group includes a macro base station and a plurality of micro base stations within a cell coverage of the macro base station. The handover is performed based on a determined preparation level of the handover that is based on the uplink broadcast information.10-27-2011
20090310560Provisional hand-off mechanism in a heterogeneous mac protocol for wireless networks - This disclosure describes a provisional hand-off mechanism to transfer handsets between base stations for a MAC protocol that combines contention-free and contention-based MAC protocols for use in wireless VoIP systems with multiple base stations that reduces packet overhead thus allowing for transmission of high bit-rate data to multiple users over wired and wireless means.12-17-2009
20100124203CONDITIONAL ACCESS TERMINAL INITIATION OF DELAYED HANDOVER - The number of handover-related failures that occur in a communication system may be reduced by taking target access point conditions into account when declaring radio link failure and/or by delaying certain handover operations. In some aspects, criteria for radio link failure detection and access terminal-controlled mobility may take into account access point parameters related to neighboring cells that may be available as mobility targets. For example, filtering mechanisms for detecting radio link failure based on radio layer problem reports may also take into account the availability of various neighbor access points and their measured signal strengths. In addition, a handover command may be sent earlier than in conventional systems (e.g., the handover command may be sent even though the target access point is weaker than the source access point) and include an indication that instructs the access terminal to delay handover until a specified condition is met. For example, handover may be delayed until the target access point becomes stronger than the source access point.05-20-2010
20100098021POLICY-DRIVEN LAYER 3 HANDOFF FOR MOBILE SERVICES - In one embodiment, an apparatus can include an input configured to receive a request for available layer 3 points of attachment from a mobility anchor, and logic configured to provide a list of layer 3 points of attachment based at least upon a set of dynamic network conditions.04-22-2010
20100098022METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING A PACKET IN MOBILE IP SYSTEM - The invention relates to a method, apparatus and system to preferably route a packet via an IP network, and more particularly to a routing entity having a buffer storing packets from/to a mobile entity. An initiation unit (04-22-2010
20100124202RTP voice packets for base station hand-off in mobile IP telephony - In wireless networks where the goal is to support a large number of VOIP based cellular calls, large overhead headers in RTP voice packets are not acceptable. In wireless networks where multiple base stations are deployed, handsets may handoff from one base station to the other while in a voice call creating a large overhead. This disclosure describes an efficient way to extend a header compression algorithm and lower the overhead when the handset is in a voice call and hands off from one base station to another.05-20-2010
20100265914SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND DEVICES TO ENABLE SELECTION OF RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - In some embodiments, an access terminal is configured to select a first set of system resources, and communicate a message to acquire access to the first set of system resources, wherein the message conceals that the access terminal is capable of communication with a second set of system resources. In one embodiment, the first set of system resources includes circuit-switched system resources, the second set of system resources includes packet-switched system resources, and an access terminal conceals from the network that it is operable using the packet-switched system resources in order to acquire and/or maintain connected mode access to the circuit-switched system resources. Such embodiments allow an access terminal to use circuit-switched system resources even if the network does not support CS fallback or has refused a CS fallback request.10-21-2010
20100128695AIR INTERFACE SELECTION BETWEEN NODES IN PEER-TO-PEER/AD-HOC NETWORKS - Aspects describe pairs of nodes negotiating air interfaces in a peer-to-peer and/or ad hoc network. The negotiation can take into account the capability of each node. The negotiation can be performed on a default link and after negotiation, the nodes can facilitate a communication handoff to the negotiated link. Further, one or more nodes can support multiple air interfaces, wherein nodes that support multiple air interfaces can establish more than one air interface with peer nodes over similar air interfaces or over different air interfaces as a function of negotiation between the nodes.05-27-2010
20090310564FAST HANDOVER SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed are a fast handover system and a method thereof. The fast handover method can include: allowing a mobile node (MN) to transmit a handover information message to a previous mobile access gateway (PMAG); allowing the PMAG to transmit a fast proxy binding update (FPBU) message to a local mobility anchor (LMA) on the basis of the handover information message received from the MN; allowing the LMA to transmit a handover initiation (HI) message including MN-ID and proxy-care-of address (CoA) of the PMAG to a new MAG (NMAG); transmitting a position update message to the NMAG if the MN is attached to a target BS that is connected to the NMAG; and allowing the NMAG to deliver a buffered packet to the MN.12-17-2009
20090310565System And Method For Selecting Parameters In Wireless Communication - According to one embodiment, a method for wireless communication comprising coupling a base station to a network access device. The network access device provides the base station access to a wireless service provider network via an Internet service provider network. The method includes determining, at the base station, a plurality of available communication channels of the wireless service provider network that may be utilized to communicate with an endpoint. The method also includes determining, at the base station, a plurality of segment power measurements for at least one channel of the plurality of channels. In addition, the method includes automatically selecting, at the base station, a channel and segment index for communication with the endpoint in response to determining the plurality of segment power measurements. Further, the method includes providing, by the base station, the endpoint access to the wireless service provider network utilizing the Internet service provider network via the selected channel and segment index.12-17-2009
20090310562Wireless subscriber inter-technology handoff - Embodiments for a method and apparatus of a wireless subscriber unit triggering an inter-technology handoff are disclosed. One method includes estimating a signal quality of first technology communication signals received from a serving base station. Information of neighboring base stations is received from the serving base station. Based on the information of the neighboring base stations, a signal quality of first technology communication signals received from each of the neighboring base stations is estimated. An inter-technology handoff is triggered based on a function of the signal quality of communication signals received from a serving base station and the signal quality of communication signals received from each of the neighboring base stations.12-17-2009
20120033641METHOD AND ENODEB FOR FORWARDING DOWNLINK AND UPLINK PACKETS BASED ON S1 HANDOVER - A method for forwarding downlink packets based on S1 handover is disclosed. The method includes: numbering a packet not processed by using PDCP according to a message that comprises PDCP Serial Number (SN) information if downlink packets to be forwarded include the packet not processed by using PDCP; and sending the downlink packets to the UE according to the PDCP SN corresponding to the packet included in the downlink packets. A method for forwarding uplink packets based on S1 handover is disclosed. The method includes: receiving state report information of the packet sent by the target eNodeB; and sending the packet according to the state report information of the packet. Another method for forwarding downlink packets based on S1 handover and an eNodeB are disclosed. Through the embodiments of the present disclosure, the packets are forwarded without loss in the case of S1 handover.02-09-2012
20120033639SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR CONVERGING WIMAX AND WIFI NETWORKS - A system for converging Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) and Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) networks is provided. The system includes an interworking adaptor (IWA) or interworking control function (IWCF). The IWA or IWCF is configured to communicate with an access point (AP)/access controller (AC) of the WiFi network, and also configured to communicate with an entity in a connectivity service network (CSN) of the WiMAX network, where the IWA or IWCF is further configured to perform access control on a terminal STA/MS accessing the CSN from the WiFi network. By using the system for converging the WiMAX and WiFi networks disclosed in the foregoing embodiments of the present invention, convergence of one or more functions between the WiFi and WiMAX networks may be implemented conveniently.02-09-2012
20090207807INTER-SUBSYSTEM TRANSFERS - In general, the present invention provides for a direct inter-subsystem transfer of an active communication session, such as a call, between a packet subsystem (PS) and a circuit-switched subsystem (CS) in an efficient and effective manner while maintaining service control and continuity. Further, the inter-subsystem transfer may take place between a PS of one generation and a CS of another generation.08-20-2009
20090207810METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR FORWARDING RETRANSMISSION PROTOCOL RELATED DATA - The present invention relates to a method for controlling a radio cell change of a communication terminal from a first radio cell to a second radio cell, wherein the first and the second radio cell is controlled by at least one base station of a mobile communication system. The present invention further provides a base station and a communication system comprising a plurality of base stations and a communication terminal adapted to execute the control method. To overcome negative impacts of data loss and delay during a cell change procedure the protocol context of a retransmission protocols are transferred from a source base station to a target base station upon an cell change of a communication terminal in issue.08-20-2009
20090207806IP mobility multihoming - The present application relates to a method for arranging IP mobility multihoming. A plurality of IP mobility configuration parameter sets is accessed, each of the sets being associated with a destination network. One of the IP mobility configuration parameter sets is selected for an IP data connection, the selected IP mobility configuration parameter set being associated with a destination network of the IP data connection. An IP mobility protocol instance associated with the destination network is activated on the basis of the selected IP mobility configuration parameter set.08-20-2009
20090207804Handover Method for Communication Networks - A method of performing a handover process in a wireless multi-hop communication network, the method comprising requesting neighborhood communication information regarding channel condition among access stations in the neighborhood of a mobile station, the neighborhood communication information including communication information related to a link between a first station and a second station in the wireless multi-hop communication network, obtaining the communication information related to the link between the first station and the second station, sending the communication information from the first station to a mobile station in the wireless multi-hop communication network, and configuring the mobile station based on the communication information so as to switch the mobile station to the second station.08-20-2009
20100085939METHOD FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY FOR VERTICAL HANDOVER OF MOBILE NODE - A method for supporting mobility for a vertical handover of a mobile node (MN) includes dividing service domains of respective first and second networks in different layers when an external correspondent node (CN) and the MN communicate with each other through the first network. When the MN moves to the second network, a care of address (CoA) newly allocated from the second network and a home address (HoA) of a home agent 04-08-2010
20110200008MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER FOR MOBILITY - A method and apparatus for establishing a wireless communication link using a radio access technology selected from a plurality of radio access technologies are provided. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may include a plurality of network devices, each configured to communicate via a different radio access technology. The WTRU may transmit measurement information including measurement reports for the plurality of radio access technologies to a network device. The WTRU may receive a link selection decision from the network device and may establish a wireless communication link in response to the decision. The link may be established for handover of a communication session from another radio access technology.08-18-2011
20100080190HANDOFFS IN HIERARCHICAL MOBILITY LABEL-BASED NETWORK - A system establishes a communication path between a mobile node and a first label edge router, registers the mobile node at the first label edge router, and creates a mobility binding at the first label edge router. The system also establishes a label switched path between the first label edge router and a second label edge router by propagating the mobility binding in the system, and establishes communication between the mobile node and a corresponding node over the label switched path. The system further maintains the communication between the mobile node and the corresponding node over the system when the mobile node moves from one physical location to another physical location and causes a handoff of the mobile node between two layer 2 grooming networks.04-01-2010
20090086679Apparatus and method for supporting vertical handover on a wireless communication system - A broadband wireless communication system is provided. An apparatus for an information server (IS) comprises an event module for determining whether updating the network information of at least one access network (AN) is needed, a generator module for generating at least one Information_Get_Request packet for requesting the network information of the at least one AN when the updating is needed, a communication module for transmitting at least one Information_Get_Request packet to the at least one AN, and a database (DB) module for storing network information within an Information_Get_Response packet received from the at least one AN.04-02-2009
20090086677SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IN-ORDER DELIVERY IN DOWNLINK DURING HANDOVER - Systems and methods that manage effects of discarded SDUs during handover. Aspects of the subject innovation maintain order for arrival of PDCP SDUs when a UE encounters a lost PDCP, which has resulted from a dropped SDU at the source eNB—before assignment of an associated PDCP SN. By initially assigning all SDUs corresponding PDCP SNs, a PDCP SN gap or hole can then be encountered upon dropping of a PDCP SDU. To manage PDCP SN gaps or holes thus generated, an internal time out can be designated to terminate an associated UE's delay for such SN hole(s) via a time out. Other aspects enable the source eNB to send a PDCP Status Message to the UE (via the target eNB) to abort the SN gaps or holes resulting from a dropped PDCP SN.04-02-2009
20090086678METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FEEDING BACK LINK PARAMETER CONFIGURATION RESULT - A method for feeding back a link parameter configuration result includes the following steps. After receiving a configuration request for at least one link parameter from the higher layer to the lower layer, a media independent handover layer instructs the lower layer to perform link parameter configuration, and the lower layer returns the configuration result for each link parameter to the media independent handover layer after the link parameter configuration completes; the media independent layer receives the configuration result for each link parameter, and feeds back the configuration result for each link parameter to the higher layer. The method overcomes the disadvantages in the prior art, and achieves the objective that the configuration results are fed back accurately when configuration requests to a plurality of link parameters is brought up simultaneously and the configuration of some parameters is successful, failed, or rejected, thereby enabling the higher layer to obtain the accurate configuration results for link parameters.04-02-2009
20090086676METHODS FOR INTRA BASE STATION HANDOVER OPTIMIZATIONS - The method and apparatus as described are directed toward techniques and mechanisms to improve efficiency in wireless communication networks through optimization of handover scenarios. Determining whether an intra-base station or inter-node-B handover is too performed, and determining the protocol layers to reset during the handover based at least in part on the type of handover to be performed increases the overall efficiency of the wireless network.04-02-2009
20090257400METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN A NETWORK SUPPORTING PROXY MOBILE IP AND A NETWORK SUPPORTING MOBILE IP - A method and an apparatus for supporting handover between a first network supporting proxy mobile Internet Protocol (IP) (PMIP) and a second network supporting mobile IP (MIP) are disclosed. A PMIP entity in the first network may perform home agent (HA) discovery such that the PMIP entity may select an HA that responds with a pre-determined code indicating that a binding entry for the WTRU exists in the HA. The PMIP entity may store the HA IP address in an authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server. The PMIP entity may retrieve the HA IP address for the WTRU from the AAA server when the WTRU is readmitted, and perform a binding update using the HA IP address. A media independent handover (MIH) client may trigger an HA discovery to obtain an HA IP address without performing MIP registration. The MIP client may retain the HA IP address when disabled.10-15-2009
20090252116Multiple Action Times in Mobile WiMAX Fast Handover - A base station and a method for handover of a mobile station from a serving base station to a target base station of a mobile telecommunication network. Invitations may be sent from a base station to the mobile station, and the invitations may be invitations to send a request for a fast handover procedure from the mobile station to a base station.10-08-2009
20100124201METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING SAME BASE STATION CARRIER HANDOFF FOR MULTICARRIER SUPPORT - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure provide a method for switching radio frequency (RF) carriers that serve communication between a base station (BS) and a mobile station (MS). The switching of carriers can be viewed as a handoff procedure between two different RF carriers within the same BS. A simplified handoff procedure for switching of RF carriers can be applied when the MS switches its physical connection from a primary RF carrier to a secondary RF carrier, as well as in the case when the BS decides to move the MS from one primary RF carrier to another primary RF carrier.05-20-2010
20110268083METHOD TRANSFERRING VOICE CALLS - In a method and system for transferring a voice call in the packet switched domain to a system supporting both packet switched and circuit switched voice calls, target system, i.e. the system to which an ongoing voice call is transferred is in control of deciding if an ongoing voice call in the originating system should continue in the circuit switched domain or the packet switched domain. In addition the system is enabled to reserve resources in the system to receive the voice call before handing over the voice call.11-03-2011
20110026491ALLOCATION METHOD AND BASE STATION APPARATUS USING THE SAME - A base station apparatus and an allocation method are provided. The base station apparatus includes an allocation unit and a communication unit. The allocation unit allocates, in a frame, different channels for data between a base station apparatus and a terminal device and control information about the data, the frame formed with a plurality of time slots being time-multiplexed, each time slot formed with a plurality of channels being frequency-multiplexed. The communication unit performs communication with the terminal device by using the control information and the data, to which a channel is allocated. The allocation unit, while securing at least the control information, releases at least one data which is not secured, and instructs the terminal device to perform handover process by using a time slot, in which no data is allocated.02-03-2011
20110026490METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING AND RADIO STATION THEREFOR - The present invention relates to method for communicating between a primary station and a secondary station comprising (a) at the secondary station, upon arrival of a data packet to be transmitted to the primary station, buffering said data packet in a buffer, and transmitting to the primary station a request for an uplink transmission resource if a request condition is satisfied, said request condition being based on at least one previous grant of uplink transmission resource, (b) at the primary station, granting to the secondary station an uplink transmission resource to be used.02-03-2011
20110026488METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ACHIEVING ROUTE OPTIMIZATION AND LOCATION PRIVACY IN AN IPV6 NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for performing proxy registration on behalf of a node with a Home Agent supporting Mobile IP are disclosed. A first registration request is composed on behalf of the node and transmitted to the Home Agent via a first Local Mobility Anchor, wherein the first Local Mobility Anchor is a regional controller via which registration is performed when the node moves within a region associated with the first Local Mobility Anchor. When the node moves within a region or between regions, the node is re-registered. Specifically, a second registration request is composed and transmitted to the first Local Mobility Anchor when the node moves within the region associated with the first Local Mobility Anchor. When the node moves into a second region associated with a second Local Mobility Anchor and outside the first region associated with the first Local Mobility Anchor, a second registration request is composed and transmitted to the Home Agent via the second Local Mobility Anchor, wherein the second Local Mobility Anchor is a regional controller via which registration is performed when the node moves within a region associated with second first Local Mobility Anchor.02-03-2011
20090285181IP Mobility - A method of forwarding IP packets, sent to an old care-of-address of a mobile node, to the mobile node following a handover of the mobile node from a first old access router to a second new access router. The method comprises, prior to completion of said handover, providing said first router or another proxy node with information necessary to determine the new IP care-of address to be used by the mobile node when the mobile node is transferred to the second access router. At said first router or said proxy node, the new care-of-address for the mobile node is determined using said information and ownership of the new care-of-address by the mobile node confirmed, and subsequently packets received at said first access network and destined for said old care-of-address are forwarded to the predicted care-of-address address.11-19-2009
20110026487SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING A MESH NETWORK USING A PLURALITY OF WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS (WAPs) - A first access point located in a first cell may be coupled to a second access point located in a second cell. Service may be initially provided to an access device by the first access point cell. The access device may subsequently be serviced by a second access point whenever a signal for the access device falls below a specified threshold level. The second cell may be a neighboring cell, which may be located adjacent to the first cell. A first signal may be transmitted from a first beamforming antenna coupled to the first access point, to the second access point via an uplink channel. Similarly, a second signal may be transmitted from a second beamforming antenna coupled to the second access point, to the first access point via a downlink channel. The uplink and downlink channels may be a backhaul channel.02-03-2011
20110026485MOBILE STATION HANDOFF WITH FLEX DUPLEX CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Disclosed is a method for mobile station hard handoff from a source base station to a target base station of a Flex Duplex call in a CDMA wireless communication network that includes a step of establishing Flex Duplex capabilities of the mobile station. A next step includes sending the Flex Duplex capabilities of the mobile station to the target base station. A next step includes configuring the mobile station and the target base station for the handoff of the call using the Flex Duplex capabilities.02-03-2011
20110026484MOBILITY MANAGEMENT IN TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A mobile telecommunications network includes a core network and a plurality of eNode Bs. A mobile terminal communicates with the core network via one of the eNode Bs. In an embodiment, when the mobile terminal is in a connected state and there is a pause in data transfer, during which the mobile terminal is handed over from one eNode B to another eNode B, the first eNode B informs the new eNode B of the pause in data transmission so that an optimal length of the pause in data transmission can be maintained before the idle state is entered. In another embodiment, an element of the telecommunications network stores a history of movement of the mobile terminal and passes this to a new eNode B. In another embodiment, when handover occurs, the first eNode B provides the new eNode B with radio quality information relating to the mobile terminal.02-03-2011
20090092098System and method for updating neighbor base station information in a communication system - A method is provided for updating neighbor base station (BS) information by a serving BS in a communication system. The method includes acquiring a neighbor BS list from a base station controller (BSC); sending a request message for requesting an update of information on a neighbor BS to the at least one neighbor BS included in the neighbor BS list; checking if a report message including the neighbor BS's information is received from the neighbor BS; when the report message is received, sending to the neighbor BS a confirm message indicating the normal receipt of the report message; and updating the neighbor BS's information according to the received neighbor BS's information. The neighbor BS list is a list of BSs with which a mobile station (MS) located in a cell of the serving BS can perform a handover.04-09-2009
20090046664PACKET TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE AND MOBILE NODE - A technique is disclosed, by which it is possible to perform retransmission control of a packet effective for a mobile node in a home agent. According to this technique, after being intercepted, among the packets encapsulated and transmitted and addressed to MN 02-19-2009
20090046661Handover method and apparatus in a wireless telecommunications network - In handover in a wireless telecommunications network, dummy packets, or data packets with a last used sequence number indicator are transmitted from a source node eNB 02-19-2009
20090046662Handover Method and apparatus in a wireless telecommunications network - In handover in a wireless telecommunications network, dummy packets, or data packets with an indicator bit, are transmitted from a gateway node MME/SAE GW 02-19-2009
20090046660Handover method and apparatus in a wireless telecommunications network - According to an aspect of the invention, a method for handover of a mobile terminal from a source node to a target node in a wireless telecommunications network includes the steps of making data forwarding of fresh data optional irrespective of the RLC mode, which may involve RLC-UM or RLC-AM bearers.02-19-2009
20090046657METHOD OF TRANSMITTING MESSAGES IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method of transmitting messages for acquisition of information related to a specific network entity or a link network during network selection in a mobile terminal is disclosed. The method of transmitting messages for acquisition of information related to a network entity or a link network during network selection in a mobile terminal comprises generating, in an upper management entity, a first primitive for requesting information related to the network entity or the link network through an access point (AP), delivering the first primitive to a media access control (MAC) layer, transmitting a first request message including contents of the first primitive to the access point to request the information, receiving a second response message from the access point, the second response message including information related to the specific network entity or the link network, and delivering a third primitive from the MAC layer to the upper management entity, the third primitive including contents of the second response message.02-19-2009
20090046655Mobility Mechanism for Service Continuity - A system comprising an inter-RAT/inter-network redundancy controller (IRC) is provided. The IRC is configured to communicate with a source gateway in communication with a source radio access network (RAN) using a first radio access technology (RAT). The IRC is further configured to communicate with a target gateway in communication with a target RAN using a second RAT. The IRC is further configured to promote a handover of a user equipment from the source RAN connected to the source gateway to the target RAN connected to the target gateway when the source gateway fails.02-19-2009
20090046654WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND HANDOVER METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus capable of shortening the handover time and preventing the connection from being interrupted during telephone communication. In this apparatus, an HO part (02-19-2009
20110200006HANDOVER METHOD OF MOBILE TERMINAL BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - The present invention relates to a handover method of a mobile terminal between heterogeneous networks. The present invention may provide a handover method ensuring service continuity between heterogeneous networks by transmitting an IP address of a mobile terminal to a mobile IP management server and activating or inactivating a PDP context when the mobile terminal connected to one of a mobile communication network or a wireless LAN is handed over to the other.08-18-2011
20110200012WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, GATEWAY APPARATUS, TERMINAL ALLOCATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A wireless communication system of the present invention includes: terminals; a base station that performs wireless communication with the terminals; a gateway apparatus that manages the terminals and the base station; and a server apparatus that authenticates the terminals. The gateway apparatus includes: at least one C-plane processor that processes C-plane; and N U-plane processors that process U plane. Each of the N U-plane processors notifies the C-plane processor of its own load status. The server apparatus notifies the C-plane processor of service levels of target terminals that try to perform entry to a network in which the base station and the gateway apparatus are located. The C-plane processor allocates, based on the load status of each of the N U-plane processors and the service levels of the target terminals, one of the N U-plane processors as an entry destination to the target terminals.08-18-2011
20110200010Method, System, and Device for Network Handoff - A method, a system, and a device for network handoff is disclosed. A first evolved Access Network (eAN) sends a session transfer request to the target eAN that corresponds to the network handoff request. The first eAN receives a session transfer response from the target eAN. The first eAN sends a Traffic Channel Assignment (TCA) message to a User Equipment (UE) based on the session transfer response, so that the UE can switch from a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network to an evolved High Rate Packet Data (eHRPD) network based on the TCA message.08-18-2011
20110200007INTERWORKING BETWEEN SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT IP MOBILITY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOLS - Systems and methods allow 3GPP and non-3GPP access with interworking between GTP-based networks and PMIP-based networks. For handover attachment of a UE, an IWP can be provided the address of the PGW which was used in the initial attachment of the UE so that, for example, an IP address can be maintained for an ongoing data connection established with the UE. Alternatively, the same IWP can operate as the proxy for all data connections with the UE such that the IWP is aware of the PGW used for the initial attachment and can reuse the same PGW for handover.08-18-2011
20120106515RANGING OF TERMINAL IN LEGACY SUPPORT MODE - The present invention relates to a broadband wireless access system, and more particularly, a ranging technique of a terminal using a legacy support frame in a mobile communication system including a legacy system and an advanced system. According to one form of an embodiment of the present invention, the ranging method of the terminal for a base station in the mobile communication system having the legacy system and the advanced system comprises the steps of: receiving secondary super frame header (S-SFH) information from the base station; determining whether a frame composition used in the mobile communication system supports the legacy system; acquiring ranging channel information for initial ranging, handover ranging, and periodical ranging from the S-SFH; and performing one or more ranging processes of the initial ranging, the handover ranging, and the periodical ranging in the base station by using the ranging channel information.05-03-2012
20110200005METHOD OF SUPPORTING MOBILITY USING SECURITY TUNNEL - Enclosed is a method of supporting mobility using a security tunnel. For the movement of a terminal in a local network and the movement of a terminal to an external network, an active tunnel and a standby tunnel are set to provide mobility to the terminal. When the local network moves, mobility for the local network is provided. The stability of a network is guaranteed using security connection.08-18-2011
20120106514A ROAMING METHOD FOR A MOBILE TERMINAL IN WLAN, RELATED ACCESS CONTROLLER AND ACCESS POINT DEVICE - A roaming method for a mobile terminal in a wireless local area network is disclosed. In the method, a target access point (AP) device receives an access request for roaming from the mobile terminal, and a target access controller (AC) obtains mobility information of the mobile terminal in an original extended service set based on the access request, wherein the mobility information include information of an AP device, an AC and a mobile agent server associated with the mobile terminal. Then the target AC determines whether the roaming for the mobile terminal is an inter-IP subnet roaming or an intra-IP subnet roaming based on the obtained mobility information. The target AC performs mobile IP based handover when the roaming is determined as the inter-IP subnet roaming and performs Inter Access Point Protocol based handover when the roaming is determined as the intra-IP subnet roaming.05-03-2012
20120106513METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNAL TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION IN A BROADBAND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a broadband wireless communication system, a spread spectrum signal is intentionally overlapped with an OFDM signal, in a time domain, a frequency domain, or both. The OFDM signal, which inherently has a high spectral efficiency, is used for carrying broadband data or control information. The spread spectrum signal, which is designed to have a high spread gain for overcoming severe interference, is used for facilitating system functions such as initial random access, channel probing, or short messaging. Methods and techniques are devised to ensure that the mutual interference between the overlapped signals is minimized to have insignificant impact on either signal and that both signals are detectable with expected performance by a receiver.05-03-2012
20120106512COEXISTENCE SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS NETWORK DEVICES - A network interface includes a radio frequency system and a media access controller. The media access controller includes first and second client modules and a control module. Each of the client modules wirelessly communicates with a network via the radio frequency system and the antenna. Each of the client modules is controllable to be in an active state or a sleep state. The control module determines priority levels of the first client module and the second client module. The control module also, based on the priority levels, (i) controls the first client module to be in the active state to permit communication between the first client module and the radio frequency system, and (ii) controls the second client module to be in the sleep state to prevent communication between the second client module and the radio frequency system.05-03-2012
20120106511Method of Handling Primary Serving Cell Change - A method of handling primary serving cell change for a network in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises configuring a first cell as a primary serving cell and at least a second cell as a secondary serving cell to a mobile device of the wireless communication system, including the second cell in a list for secondary serving cell configuration release in a message for changing the primary serving cell to the second cell, and transmitting the message to the mobile device to release secondary serving cell configuration of the second cell.05-03-2012
20120106509DATA REPROCESSING IN RADIO PROTOCOL LAYERS - A method for reprocessing data in a radio protocol layer is described. The method includes communicating using a first radio access technology. Data in a processed data buffer of a first radio access technology protocol layer is reprocessed. The reprocessed data is forwarded to an unprocessed data buffer. A trigger for a handover from the first radio access technology to a second radio access technology may be detected. A trigger for a radio connection release may also be detected.05-03-2012
20120106507SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING FLOWS IN A MOBILE NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method is provided and includes establishing a session for a mobile node, and evaluating a plurality of label switched paths (LSPs) in response to the mobile node experiencing a handoff between a source packet data serving node (SPDSN) and a target PDSN (TPDSN). The method can also include provisioning a sub-tunnel with a first tunnel, which is associated with a selected label switched path. The selected label switched path is associated with a high priority type of data having a low latency characteristic.05-03-2012
20120106506HANDOVER ARCHITECTURE FOR NON-INTEGRATED RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - An apparatus to support handover for non-integrated radio devices is presented. In one embodiment, the apparatus includes a peer interface and radio resource control logic. The radio resource control logic includes a proxy commutatively coupled to a second proxy via the peer interface. The second proxy is a part of other radio resource control logic. The proxies are operable to support handover between different radio access technologies.05-03-2012
20090161626SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DUAL-MODE HANDOFF - Exemplary embodiments include methods and systems for a deterministic facilitating for a dual-mode handoff between a local area network (LAN) and a wide area network (WAN). The hand-off method may include associating identification information with a mobile user device and locating the mobile user device within a local area network based at least in part on the identification information associated with the mobile user device. The hand-off method may also include moving the mobile user device outside a coverage area of the local area network, associating the mobile user device with a wide area network based at least in part on the identification information associated with the mobile user device, and updating a wide area network server of a location associated with the mobile user device.06-25-2009
20090274121METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY MONITORING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are provided for radio access technology (RAT) monitoring, in a wireless system environment having wireless communications equipment and at least two different RATs that coexist for providing to the equipment access to one or more communications networks. The equipment has at least two subsystems, each adapted for establishing and maintaining an active communications connection with a certain one of the different RATs. The equipment selects at least a first RAT, among all the RATs available in a certain geographical area, for establishing the active communications connection, according to a monitored characteristic of the first RAT. The method includes scanning a characteristic of a second RAT available for communication in the geographical area while the equipment maintains an active communications connection with the first RAT, and performing the scanning step when the equipment does not transmit signals through the active communications connection maintained with the first RAT.11-05-2009
20090201883METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF ACCESS SYSTEMS - A method for handover between different types of access systems in some embodiments consistent with the present invention includes: when the UE hands over between different types of access systems, the UE accesses the IASA connected with the UE in the source access system through the destination access system. Furthermore, the present invention discloses a handover system, and a UE that includes an IASA address storing module and an IASA address sending module. The handover system includes: a destination access system, and a source IASA.08-13-2009
20110170519Method and System for Intra Base Station Carrier Handover - A method and a system for intra-BS carrier handover are provided. The method comprises: a mobile station scanning predetermined carriers within the base station based on predetermined rules; obtaining a scanning report comprising channel quality information of part of or all of the predetermined carriers; and sending the scanning report to the base station; the base station obtaining the channel quality information in the scanning report; selecting a target carrier from the predetermined carriers; and informing the mobile station of the selected target carrier via a message; and the mobile station handing over to the target carrier in a predetermined manner in response to the message. By using the method, seamless handover of intra-BS carriers can be performed in a multi-carrier system for ensuring the service continuity of the mobile station to eliminate carrier handover time delay.07-14-2011
20090285178METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR MOBILE WIMAX THREE-WAY DOWNLINK CONCURRENT PROCESSING AND THREE-WAY HANDOVER - Methods and apparatus for establishing multiple connections between a wireless device and multiple base stations and transferring data using these connections via different segments of an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) frame are provided. The multiple connections may be used for multi-way (e.g., three-way) concurrent processing, multi-way (e.g., three-way) handover, or a hybrid between concurrent processing and multi-way handover in an effort to increase data throughput for the wireless device.11-19-2009
20090262706METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR CONVERTING SESSION CONTROL SIGNALING - A method, system, and device for converting session control signaling are provided. The method includes at least one of the following steps: a first adaptation unit converts a session control signaling message of a circuit switched (CS) session leg into a session control signaling message of an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) session leg; or the first adaptation unit converts a session control signaling message of an IMS session leg into a session control signaling message of a CS session leg. In embodiments of the present invention, an adaptation unit intercepts a CS signaling message after an inter-mobile switching center (MSC) handover, and converts CS signaling messages to IMS signaling messages and vice versa, so that the IMS domain may continue to control a session after the inter-MSC handover.10-22-2009
20090262704Method and Apparatus for Establishment of Asynchronous Transfer Mode Based Bearer Connection between a Network Controller and Core Network - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first communication system comprised of a licensed wireless radio access network and a core network, and a second communication system comprising a plurality of user hosted access points and a network controller. In some embodiments, each access point operates using short range licensed wireless frequencies to establish a service region. In some embodiments, the network controller communicatively couples the core network to the plurality of access points. The method establishes, at a network controller, a bearer connection between an access point and the core network indicating an asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) based bearer connection. The method also establishes an internet protocol (IP) based bearer connection. The method also establishes a user plane between the access point and the core network and routes user plane data to the core network through the ATM based bearer connection.10-22-2009
20090262705SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER IN BWA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - A handover method and system in a communication system. In the method, a serving Base Station (BS) broadcasts neighbor BS information including BS identifiers and preamble indices of a plurality of neighbor BSs, receives a handover request message from a Mobile Station (MS), the handover request message including a first set of at least one BS identifier and at least one preamble index for at least one neighbor BS among the plurality of neighbor BSs, and transmits a handover response message to the MS, the handover response message including a second set of at least one BS identifier and at least one preamble index for at least one recommended neighbor BS.10-22-2009
20090262703Method and Apparatus for Encapsulation of RANAP Messages in a Home Node B System - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first communication system comprised of a licensed wireless radio access network and a core network, and a second communication system comprising a plurality of user hosted access points and a network controller. In some embodiments, each access point operates using short range licensed wireless frequencies to establish a service region. In some embodiments, the network controller communicatively couples the core network to the plurality of access points. The method creates a data structure comprised of a header with a core network domain identity and a context identifier, and payload data which contains the RANAP message.10-22-2009
20090262702Method and Apparatus for Direct Transfer of RANAP Messages in a Home Node B System - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first communication system comprised of a licensed wireless radio access network and a core network, and a second communication system comprising a plurality of user hosted access points and a network controller. In some embodiments, each access point operates using short range licensed wireless frequencies to establish a service region. In some embodiments, the network controller communicatively couples the core network to the plurality of access points. The method establishes a communication through a Radio Access Network Application Part (RANAP) message from an access point to the network controller to explicitly indicate the start of a communication session. The method then passes a set of direct transfer messages, comprised in part of the RANAP message, to the core network.10-22-2009
20090262701DATA TRANSFER METHOD AND BASE STATION - The present invention relates to a data transfer method which transfers user data of a mobile station, which is stored in a buffer of the handover source base station, from a handover source base station to a handover target base station, when the mobile station performs a handover. The data transfer method according to the present invention includes: determining, at the handover source base station, a transfer order of the user data; and transferring, at the handover source base station, the user data to the handover target base station based on the transfer order.10-22-2009
20090290557CALCULATION OF A DESTINATION TIME ALIGNMENT VALUE TO BE USED BY A USER EQUIPMENT IN A DESTINATION CELL AFTER A HANDOVER - The invention relates to a method and arrangement for managing a calculation of a destination time alignment value TA11-26-2009
20090290555Autonomous anonymous association between a mobile station and multiple network elements in a wireless communication system - A novel and useful autonomous association mechanism for use in user equipment (UE) network connections in one or more cellular communications systems. The handover process is optimized by improving the selection of target base stations and optimizing the discontinuity period from the time of disconnection from a serving base station and connection to a target base station and by establishing anonymous bidirectional communications with base stations. The mechanism facilitates multiple cell association in a network unaware manner while preserving single endpoint connectivity. The UE does not need to negotiate for or receive pre-allocated opportunities from the network for making associations with neighboring base stations. Association opportunities are created by the UE autonomously in accordance with UE activity patterns. Association opportunities are used to exchange preliminary information needed for handover between the UE and candidate base stations over the same or a plurality of access technologies. The information includes any parameter that can affect the handover process, e.g., link quality, etc.11-26-2009
20090274119METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RF HANDOFF IN A MULTI-FREQUENCY NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for RF handoff in a multi-frequency network. A method includes detecting a mobility event associated with a detection of a new wide area operating infrastructure (WOI), updating a current WOI identifier to a new WOI identifier, acquiring control channel information associated with the new WOI identifier, determining if an active registered flow list has been updated based on the control channel information, and performing an acquisition procedure to acquire one or more registered flows if it is determined that the active registered flow list has been updated. Another method includes detecting a mobility event associated with a detection of a new local area operating infrastructure (LOI), updating a current LOI identifier to a new LOI identifier, acquiring control channel information, determining if an active registered flow list has been updated, and performing an acquisition procedure to acquire one or more registered flows.11-05-2009
20090274114METHOD FOR UPDATING DNS ADDRESS IN MOBILE IP TERMINAL - The present invention relates to a method for updating a domain name server (DNS) address by obtaining the DNS address when an IP address is allocated by using a mobile IP address in a mobile terminal using the portable internet based on a wireless mobile network. In the method at least one DNS address connected to the wireless mobile network is sampled (S11-05-2009
20090274115WLAN Roaming and Selection Using Managed WLAN Handover Process - This patent application discloses a “netsurfing” method for a terminal system A11-05-2009
20090296658Methods, Apparatuses and Systems Facilitating Client Handoffs in Wireless Network Systems - Methods, apparatuses, and systems directed to facilitating roaming and client handoffs in wireless networks. In one implementation, the present invention is directed to a coordination mechanism facilitating handoffs of wireless clients in a wireless network infrastructure. In one implementation, the coordination mechanism minimizes the use of group- or multi-casting to provide a scalable wireless network roaming infrastructure.12-03-2009
20090296657System And Method For Providing Remote Data Access And Transcoding For A Mobile Communication Device - A system for providing information content over a network to a mobile communication device includes a transcoding system and a first network device. The transcoding system includes a plurality of transcoders. Each transcoder is operable to transcode the information content from a respective input content type into a respective output content type. The first network device is in communication with the transcoding system and includes a connection handler system. The first network device is operable to receive a first connection request that includes transcoder request data and to select a corresponding connection handler. The connection handler is operable to select one or more transcoders from the plurality of transcoders based on the transcoder request data.12-03-2009
20090296653METHOD OF EXECUTING HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS AND METHOD OF SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method of executing a handover between heterogeneous networks and method of supporting the same are disclosed, by which the handover can be smoothly performed between a wireless mobile communication network and a wireless LAN. A method of executing a handover between heterogeneous networks, in which a user equipment communicating with a wireless mobile communication network performs the handover into a wireless LAN, includes the steps of making a request for information for at least one cell neighbor to the wireless LAN to a second mobile communication network node via a first mobile communication network node, receiving the information for the at least one cell via the first mobile communication network node from the second mobile communication network node, and executing the handover to the wireless LAN using the received information.12-03-2009
20090279506FIXED-MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS WITH MID-SESSION MODE SWITCHING - A method for performing mode-agile communications during a communications session is disclosed. A communications terminal device supporting multiple modes of access is configured to determine when, during a session involving a first mode of access communications, a second mode of access is available and is to be used for subsequent communications for the session. The communications terminal device initiates or controls switchover from one mode of access to another.11-12-2009
20090279504SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTIMODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION HANDOFF - Methods and apparatus for autonomous handover between WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access) and CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) EVDO (Evolution-Data Optimized) or 1×RTT (one times Radio Transmission Technology, or 1×) networks during normal operation of a dual-mode mobile station (MS) are provided. The methods and apparatus may improve service continuity during handover and need not require any changes to the WiMAX or CDMA standards.11-12-2009
20090285182METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND NETWORK ENTITY FOR GROUP NODES HANDOVER - A method, a communication system, and a network entity for group handover are provided. The method includes the following steps. A first tunnel connection is established between a mobile relay station (MRS) and a serving entity (SE). A target entity (TE) obtains group information about the group to be handed over, and the group information includes information about a first tunnel. According to the group information, the TE configures information about a second tunnel for the group, and the information about the second tunnel is required for group handover. The group nodes are handed over from the SE to the TE according to the information about the second tunnel. Thereby, the group information that needs to be transmitted in a handover process is reduced, and problems resulting from the number of handovers can be avoided.11-19-2009
20090285179Long-Term Evolution (LTE) Packet Data Network Gateway (PDN-GW) Selection - The current 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) long-term evolution reference architecture defines a packet data network gateway (PDN-GW) selection function which is responsible for allocation of a packet data network gateway that provides packet data network connectivity for 3GPP and non-3GPP access for a given session. Systems and methods are provided for moving the PDN-GW selection function to a centralized network element (the HSS network element) for both 3GPP and non-3GPP access.11-19-2009
20090285175Efficient Handover of Media Communications in Heterogeneous IP Networks - Methods and systems are provided for efficient handover of a media session between heterogeneous IP networks. A mobile device with Internet access can operate a software program to communicate with a corresponding node. The corresponding node may access the Internet through either (i) a NAT router or (ii) a public IP address. The mobile device establishes a media session with a corresponding node via the transmission of a first media stream and receipt of a second media stream, and a media control channel can optionally be implemented. The mobile device can acquire Internet access through a second IP address, and packets routed between the second IP address and the Internet may traverse a NAT router. A software routine can determine that handover of the media session from the first IP address to the second IP address is preferred. The mobile device may begin transmitting a third media stream to the corresponding node before the first media stream stops. The corresponding node can transmit a fourth media stream to the second IP address before terminating the transmission of the second stream to the first IP address. Software operating at the mobile device may include a handover predictive jitter buffer.11-19-2009
20110200009NAT TRAVERSAL FOR MOBILE NETWORK DEVICES - Traversal of a Network Address Translator (NAT) can be facilitated for a mobile device configured to communicate with one or more other devices over a network via one or more wireless access points. A direction of travel can be estimated for the mobile device. One or more wireless access points the mobile device is likely to encounter can be predicted using the estimated direction of travel. Information regarding behavior of one or more NATs associated with the predicted wireless access point(s) can be predicted. Such information can be stored in such a way that the information is retrievable by one or more other devices or using the information to traverse one or more of the NATs. Alternatively, information can be retrieved regarding behavior of one or more NATs associated with the predicted wireless access points. This information can be used to traverse one or more of the NATs.08-18-2011
20110170520Adaptive Beamforming Configuration Methods And Apparatus For Wireless Access Points Serving As Handoff Indication Mechanisms In Wireless Local Area Networks - In one illustrative example, a technique for use in operating a wireless access point (AP) for serving as a handoff indication mechanism in a first wireless network is described. The handoff indication mechanism is configured to communicate handoff indications in response to mobile devices leaving coverage of the first wireless network, via an RF coverage region of the AP, for mobile device handoff to a second wireless network. The AP is provided in an ingress or egress region of the first wireless network, where it receives RF signals from one or more communication devices and determines and sets wireless transceiver parameters for adjusting boundaries of its RF coverage region. The AP also operates with the adjusted RF coverage region to serve as part of the handoff indication mechanism in the first wireless network, so that the handoff indications are communicated in response to the mobile devices leaving coverage of the first wireless network, via the adjusted RF coverage region, for mobile device handoff to the second wireless network.07-14-2011
20100272067Carrier assignment with mobility support in multi-carrier OFDM systems - Carrier pre-assignment is applied in multi-carrier handover operation to mitigate the impact to the user experience during handover and to achieve various objectives of call admission control in wireless multi-carrier OFDM networks. With carrier pre-assignment, a mobile station communicates its multi-carrier information to a target base station. The target base station pre-assigns secondary carriers to fulfill the requirements of the mobile station. In a first embodiment, a break-before-entry (BBE) multi-carrier handover procedure with carrier pre-assignment is provided. In a second embodiment, an entry-before-break (EBB) multi-carrier handover procedures for both inter-FA and intra-FA with carrier pre-assignment are provided. The multi-carrier handover procedures with carrier pre-assignment may be applied to 2-to-2 or N-to-N carriers handover situation. Because target secondary carriers are pre-assigned before handoff, the mobile station is ready for data transmission over multiple carriers after handover without additional carrier assignment procedure.10-28-2010
20090103495METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR USER INITIATED INTER-DEVICE, INTER-SYSTEM, AND INTER-INTERNET PROTOCOL ADDRESS HANDOFF - Apparatus and method by which Internet Protocol (IP) traffic can be transferred (i.e. handoff) between two different terminals operating according to two different technology standards in two different systems with two different IP addresses. For example, a session handoff can be made between a terminal in Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) a terminal in a 3GPP UMTS or between a terminal in CDMA2000 and a terminal in a 3GPP UMTS. These terminals can be either physically separate entities or logical entities that are encapsulated within a common enclosure.04-23-2009
20090103489Arrangement and Method for Dual Mode Operation in a Communication System Terminal - An arrangement and method for discontinuous software FDD monitoring during TDD call allows removal of a conventional external notch filter in a dual mode WCDMA and PCS/DCS handset. The WCDMA RX frame is allowed to have a few slots corrupted by the PCS/DCS transmitter noise during DCS transmission, and a scheme is used to recover the required information by not considering the corrupted slots. Due to the fact that during WCDMA FDD RX monitoring, the processing required is performed in stages, and since the information that is measured during a WCDMA frame is repeated in every frame, the scheme of the invention is based on the idea that if a given slot is corrupted in a WCDMA frame, in the next WCDMA frame the slot will be no more corrupted due to the difference in timing between the PCS/DCS transmitter protocol and the WCDMA timing protocol.04-23-2009
20090296655MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A mobile communication system enables data reception in correct order, with regard to a reversed data order caused by a route change in data transfer from a source base station to a target base station and in direct transmission from a gateway to a target base station is provided. In the mobile communication system, at the time of handover processing performed accompanying a movement of the user equipment from the source base station to the target base station, the source base station transfers to the target base station, a part of packet data not yet transmitted to the user equipment, among packet data received from the upper-level device, and when transferring the part of packet data, the source base station assigns transfer start information, indicating a start of transfer, to a header in a top packet of the untransmitted packet data.12-03-2009
20090296654CALL CONTINUITY - A method is provided of transferring a call connection with a mobile terminal from a first network to a second network. The first network is capable of handling both circuit-switched and packet-switched modes of connection. The second network is capable of handling one of the packet-switched or circuit-switched modes of connection but not both. The terminal is capable of both packet-switched and circuit-switched call modes of connection. The method comprises the first network: identifying the location of the mobile terminal with respect to at least one of the networks, identifying the mobile terminal as being in a mode of connection not usable in the second network, instructing the mobile terminal to transfer the call connection to the other mode of connection, and transferring the call connection to the second network.12-03-2009
20090296656WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, SYSTEM, METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A wireless communication apparatus includes a first storage unit configured to store each of a plurality of upper limit values of absolute values of additional signals that are set for a corresponding one of a plurality of first wireless communication apparatuses and are added when a plurality of modulation symbols to be transmitted to the first wireless communication apparatuses are precoded, a coding unit configured to decide each of a plurality of first values of the additional signals for a corresponding one of the first wireless communication apparatuses within ranges defined by the upper limit values, and precode the modulation symbols using the first values to obtain a plurality of transmission signals, and a first transmission unit configured to transmit, using multi-user MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output), the transmission signals to the first wireless communication apparatuses.12-03-2009
20090168723METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING OUT-OF-ORDER PACKETS DURING HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for sending packets and maintaining synchronization during handover is described. A user equipment (UE) may be handed over from a source base station to a target base station. The source base station may forward packets for the UE to the target base station, which may receive the packets out of order. In one design, the target base station may determine whether each packet can be sent in order to the UE, send the packet if it can be sent in order, and discard the packet otherwise. In another design, the target base station may re-order packets received within a re-ordering window and may send the re-ordered packets to the UE. In yet another design, the target base station may process each packet received out of order as if the packet is in order, e.g., by incrementing a hyper-frame number (HFN) or re-assigning the packet with a later sequence number.07-02-2009
20090168719Method and apparatus for adding editable information to records associated with a transceiver device - Methods and apparatus for adding static information to records generated by an access point are disclosed. According to one aspect of the present invention, a wireless transceiver device that interfaces with a roaming device includes computer code for causing input information to be accepted from an external source, and a memory that includes an editable field and is arranged to store data. The computer code for causing the input information to be accepted from the source causes the input information to be stored in the editable field. The wireless transceiver device also includes computer code for causing a record associated with the roaming device to be generated. The record includes the input information stored in the editable field and the data, and the computer code for causing the record to be generated also causes the record to be stored on the memory.07-02-2009
20090268689Forwarding learnt state information to target node at mobility - A method for handover in a telecommunication system is disclosed. The method determines a traffic time pattern in a handover situation where a user equipment is handed over from a source cell to a target cell in the telecommunication system. History information relating to a traffic time pattern used in the source cell by the user equipment being handed over is forwarded from a controller node of said source cell to a controller node of said target cell. In the target cell, a traffic time pattern to be used by said user equipment in said target cell after the handover is estimated by taking into consideration at least said history information.10-29-2009
20120294280ADVANCED LMSD INTERSYSTEM HANDOFF - An Anchor Mobile Switching Center emulation (MSCe) and a Target MSCe are described herein that take part in an intersystem handoff of a Mobile Station (MS) which is in communication with a B-party. Upon the MS establishing a connection with the Target MSCe, the Anchor MSCe may perform SDP offer/answer exchange between the Target network and the B-Party for the purpose of codec renegotiation to correct a transcoding incompatibility or to enhance the voice bearer path characteristics or to minimize the number of transcodings in the bearer path, between the two parties. The Anchor MSCe and the Target MSCe both support Advanced Legacy Mobile Station Domain (ALMSD) implying that only the SIP transport is used for intersystem handoff communications.11-22-2012
20110206009METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-SYSTEM HANDOVER - An inter-system handover system for a wireless communication system supports hand-down and hand-up of user equipment (UE) to different radio access technologies, including synchronous and asynchronous systems. Latency and handover connection failures are reduced by an access node (nodeB) broadcasting information about neighboring systems (targets) when the UE reception (RX) capability is both inside or outside the reception range of the target. A single RX chain is sufficient, although transitioning between a wireless wide area network (WWAN) to a wireless local area network may (WLAN) may advantageously benefit from simultaneous operation on two Rx chains. Optimized list of neighboring RAT systems (targets) are broadcast from the network, including measurement parameters and reporting instructions. Thereby, UE-driven reporting minimizes latencies. UE reports other-system searches to network only if needed for a handover. In addition, handover requests can be bundled with other-system measurement information, if necessary, for additional efficiencies.08-25-2011
20110206008PACKET SWITCHED RADIO TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING HARD HANDOVER AND METHOD FOR HARD HANDOVER - A packet switched radio telecommunication system supporting hard handover adapts Always_on technology to a link between a target packet data serving node (PDSN) and a support PDSN. The support PDSN assigns a temporary IP address to a mobile terminal in its service area, and transmits handover data and the mobile terminal's temporary IP address to the target PDSN via a direct link when the mobile terminal leaves the service area. The target PDSN, upon receiving a registration request for the temporary IP address from the mobile terminal moved to its service area, temporarily registers the temporary IP address in an IP pool. The target PDSN receives down-link frame data for the mobile terminal at the temporarily registered IP address from the support PDSN via the direct link. A new temporary IP address is assigned by the target PDSN when data transmission/reception is complete to the mobile terminal.08-25-2011
20100284365Node And A Method Relating To Handover Within Mobile Communication - The present invention relates to a packet data support node (11-11-2010
20100111036BASE STATION, USER APPARATUS, AND METHOD - A base station comprises a transmission buffer configured to store a service data unit received from the access gateway; a retransmission buffer configured to store a packet data unit to be retransmitted in a radio downlink; a scheduler configured to determine assignment of radio resources to user apparatuses and supply scheduling information; and a transmitted signal processing unit configured to generate a transmitted signal including data stored in the transmission buffer or the retransmission buffer in accordance with the scheduling information. The scheduler is configured to determine the scheduling information to transmit data destined for a user apparatus requesting handover in priority to data destined for a user apparatus that does not request handover.05-06-2010
20100111039Method and apparatus for controlling discontinuous reception in mobile communication system - A method and apparatus is configured to control a discontinuous reception (DRX) in a mobile communication system. The method includes: interrupting the DRX operation when a radio resource control (RRC) connection reestablishment procedure is initiated; transmitting an RRC connection reestablishment request message from the user equipment to an evolved node B (ENB); receiving an RRC connection reestablishment message from the ENB to the user equipment; and resuming, if the received RRC connection reestablishment message contains new DRX setting information, the interrupted DRX operation according to the new DRX setting information. The DRX operation can be interrupted or resumed at a proper time point when an RRC connection is reestablished or reconfigured or a handover is performed, thereby reducing power consumption in the user equipment.05-06-2010
20100111040METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FAST BREAK-BEFORE-MAKE MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER - A method and apparatus may be used to perform a Media Independent Handover. Data may be received from a source node in a source network serving a WTRU. The WTRU may transmit a first message to an intermediary node and receive a second message in response. The WTRU may establish connectivity on a target network and receive data from a target node.05-06-2010
20100111038METHOD FOR MANAGING INTERNET PROTOCOL HANDOFF IN NETWORK SYSTEM - There is provided a method of processing Internet Protocol (IP) handoff of a mobile node in a network system, in which the IP handoff is processed distinguishing a signal packet path for the IP handoff from a data packet path the method including receiving a registration request message when the mobile node moves to an arbitrary mobile agent, the message received from the mobile node via the mobile agent to which the mobile node moves; transmitting the received registration request message to a mobile agent where the mobile node is previously located, without change, according to whether an entry with respect to the mobile node exists in preset visitor list; and transmitting a registration reply message with respect to the registration request message to the mobile agent without change.05-06-2010
20100111037Communication System, Base Station and Mobile Station Used in the Communication System, and Base Station Switching Method - There are provided an OFDMA communication system capable of reducing a time necessary for a handover without releasing a wireless communication with a base station as a handover source to search base stations, a base station and a mobile station used in the communication system, and a base station switching method.05-06-2010
20100111035LOCATION-BASED HANDOVERS FROM A MACROCELL TO A FEMTOCELL USING PERIODIC MEASUREMENT REPORTING - The present invention provides a method for implementation in user equipment that is configured to communicate with a wireless communication system that includes macro-cells femtocells. The method includes determining a distance between the user equipment and the femtocell(s). The method also includes periodically transmitting first measurement reports from the user equipment to the macrocell(s) at a selected time interval. The first measurement reports include information indicating the distance between the user equipment and the femtocell(s). The method also includes receiving a request to hand off from the macrocell(s) to the femtocell(s). The request is generated by a radio network controller based on the periodically transmitted measurement reports.05-06-2010
20100111034MANAGEMENT UNIT FOR FACILITATING INTER-NETWORK HAND-OFF FOR A MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A management unit allocates network resources to a plurality of multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The management unit includes a communication device interface for facilitating a bidirectional data communication with the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices, wherein the wireless control channel is separate from the communication between the plurality of multiservice communication devices and the plurality of networks. A network interface receives network resource data from the plurality of networks. A management processing unit generates the outbound control data in response thereto, wherein the management processing unit facilities the handoff of a real-time service accessed by the at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a first network of the plurality of networks to a second network of the plurality of networks.05-06-2010
20110200013HANDOVER CONTROL SYSTEM, USER TERMINAL, SIGNALING RELAY APPARATUS, AND SESSION CONTROL APPARATUS - The invention discloses a technique to adequately control a handover of a user terminal in a data communication network and to decrease the number of signalings. According to this technique, when address of a user terminal (UE (08-18-2011
20110200011METHODS, APPARATUSES AND COMPUTER SOFTWARE FOR EXTENDING THE MME-GANC INTERFACE TO REPORT WHICH UES HAVE REGISTERED FOR THE GAN TO TUNNEL CS VOICE OVER EVOLVED PACKET SYSTEM (EPS) - A system and method for handing over a User Equipment (UE) from a Packet-Switched network to a Circuit-Switched network. A Generic Access Network Controller (GANC) receives a registration message from the UE with a temporary UE identity (GUTI) and uses the GUTI to identify a Mobility Management Entity (MME) controlling a connection with the UE. The GANG informs the MME whether the UE is registered to use Circuit Switched over Long Term Evolution (CS over LTE) signaling using a Generic Access Network (GAN). If so, the MME selectively directs to the GANG, handover signaling relating to the handover of the UE. If not, the MME selectively directs the handover signaling to a Mobile Switching Center (MSC). If the UE changes to a new MME, the new MME is informed whether the UE is registered to use CS over LTE using the GAN.08-18-2011
20080212536Policy based mechanisms for selecting access routers and mobile context - In mobile IP networks, when a mobile node (MN) moves from one cell to another, handover occurs. The result of the handover is that the MN connects to the network through a new access router (AR). The handover may occur between access routers of the same or different administrative domains. In all cases, the information related to the mobile node has to be transferred from the old AR to the new AR in order to minimize the effect of the change of access routers.09-04-2008
20080212534DATA FORWARDING CONTROLLER, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS, DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A communication terminal apparatus of a mobile type performs data transmission/reception via a network and changes access points based on data receiving conditions. The communication terminal apparatus is configured to acquire a MAC address of a next access point to which a communication terminal apparatus is scheduled to be connected next, broadcast a handover start message containing the acquired MAC address of the next access point, and perform a handover process on condition that the communication terminal apparatus receives a handover setting completion message from a data forwarding controller as a response to the handover start message.09-04-2008
20100103903METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR HANDOVER USING INCREASED PROBABLITY FOR FAST RANGING SUCCESS - Techniques presented herein disclose handover using increased probability of the fast ranging success. Propagation delay of the RF signal transmitted from an MS to a target BS may be estimated based on a known propagation delay to a current serving BS and a relative difference in propagation delays to the current serving BS and the target BS, for example, as indicated by different receive times of preamble sequences transmitted from the current serving BS and the target BS.04-29-2010
20120294287METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING HANDOVER OF USER EQUIPMENT IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Defined is a handover procedure of a User Equipment (UE) for which multiple UpLink (UL) carriers requiring different UL Timing Advances (TAs) are aggregated in a mobile communication system. The handover procedure includes admitting execution of handover to a target cell of the UE at the request of a source cell, setting radio resource information to be used by the UE in the target cell and transmitting the set radio resource information to the source cell, determining whether a random access procedure, which is executed, among the multiple UL carriers, with a reference UL carrier or with an UL carrier to which the same UL TA as that of the reference UL carrier is applied, has been completed, and determining that a handover procedure of the UE has been successfully completed if the random access procedure has been completed, and determining that the handover procedure of the UE has failed if the random access procedure fails.11-22-2012
20120294277INTER-RAT HANDOVER CONTROL USING EMPTY GRE PACKETS - Empty GRE packets are used to provide in-order delivery of data packets for a session to a UE during inter-RAT handover. In particular, an empty GRE packet sent from a source gateway in a source RAN to a target gateway in a target RAN indicates to the target gateway the end of forwarded data packets from the source gateway. The target gateway sends data packets received from the source gateway to the UE until the empty GRE packet is received. Upon receipt of the empty GRE packet, the target gateway begins sending data packets received directly from a home network gateway to the UE.11-22-2012
20120294282SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HAND-OFF MAINTENANCE - A system and method for hand-off maintenance is disclosed. The present invention relates to communication networks and particularly, to network interfaces in communication networks. In existing hand-off mechanisms, when a restart occurs in a Media Gateway, the Media Gateway always tries to register back to the primary Media Gateway Controller, which is under maintenance. As the primary Media Gateway Controller cannot address the request, calls running on the Media Gateway will be affected leading to abrupt release of calls. The method provides a solution to the problem by rejecting service requests from the Media Gateway that are already handed off at the Media Gateway. Further, at Media Gateway level not to register requests to the primary Media Gateway Controller, when a primary Media Gateway Controller is under maintenance. When the primary Media Gateway Controller is under maintenance, requests are directed to the secondary Media Gateway Controller. The secondary Media Gateway Controller then serves the requests to the Media Gateway until the primary Media Gateway Controller is back to operation.11-22-2012
20120294281DATA DELIVERY METHOD PERFORMED IN RECEIVING APPARATUS OF MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a data delivery method performed in a receiving apparatus of a mobile communication system. Protocol data units (PDUs) are received, and service data units (SDUs) are extracted from the received PDUs and delivered to an upper layer in real time. Alternatively, it is determined whether a PDU gap, in which PDUs are not received in sequence, has occurred on the basis of sequence numbers (SNs) of received PDUs, a reordering timer (t_Reordering) is started when a PDU gap has occurred, and at least one SDU is extracted from at least one PDU, which have been received already, and delivered to an upper layer of radio link control (RLC) when the reordering timer expires and no PDU corresponding to the PDU gap is received.11-22-2012
20120294276INTER-RAT HANDOVER CONTROL USING SEQUENCE NUMBERS - An empty GRE packet along with a sequence number provides in-order delivery of data packets for a session to a UE during inter-RAT handover. In particular, an empty GRE packet sent from a source gateway in a source RAN (Radio Access Network) to a target gateway in a target RAN includes a sequence number to indicate to the target gateway the end of forwarded data packets from the source gateway. The target gateway sends data packets received from the source gateway to the UE until the empty GRE packet with the expected sequence number is received. Upon receipt of the empty GRE packet containing the expected sequence number, the target gateway begins sending data packets received directly from a home network gateway to the UE.11-22-2012
20120294275INFRASTRUCTURE-UNASSISTED INTER-DEVICE WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK HANDOFF - Aspects describe infrastructure unassisted inter-device handoff. A method performed by a wireless communications apparatus for inter-device handoff is disclosed. A wireless communications apparatus that performs a network unassisted inter-device handoff is disclosed. A computer program product comprising a computer-readable medium that includes codes for carrying out inter-device handoff is disclosed. At least one processor configured to perform a network unassisted communication handoff is disclosed.11-22-2012
20110206011RADIO TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING APPARATUS AND METHOD, TERMINAL APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A terminal apparatus (08-25-2011
20100135243POLICY MANAGEMENT IN MULTI-ACCESS SCENARIOS - The invention comprises methods and arrangements for Policy Decision Point discovery in a roaming or handover scenario in an IP network (IN) comprising a plurality of network elements. The invention introduces a Re-direct Policy Decision (RPDF) Function which can deliver addresses to PDPs associated to a certain Mobile Terminal. The RPDF comprises a memory for storing addresses (APDPA, SPDPA06-03-2010
20100220688DISTRIBUTED INFRASTRUCTURE FOR WIRELESS DATA COMMUNICATIONS - A mobile user terminal 09-02-2010
20100220689RESOURCE RELEASE CONTROL METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE - A resource release control method, a communication system, and a device are configured to delete a bearer context on an original-side heterogeneous-system management network element (NE) even if a target-side management NE does not support interaction with a serving gateway (S-GW) and does not support an idle mode signaling reduction (ISR) mechanism. The resource release control method includes: acquiring version information of a target-side management NE, when a user equipment (UE) activating an ISR mechanism is handed over from an original-side network to a target-side network; and deleting a bearer of an original-side heterogeneous-system management NE, if the version information indicates that the target-side management NE does not interact with an S-GW and does not support the ISR mechanism. Meanwhile, a communication system and a relevant device are also provided.09-02-2010
20110206006SIGNALING EXCHANGE FOR HANDOVER CONTROL FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Various example embodiments are disclosed herein. According to an example embodiment, a technique may include transmitting, from a mobile station to a base station in a wireless network, a message (e.g., a subscriber station basic capability (SBC) request message) indicating whether or not the mobile station supports base station-controlled handover for the mobile station. The technique may also include receiving, by the mobile station from the base station, a message (e.g., a subscriber station basic capability (SBC) response message) indicating whether or not the base station supports base-station controlled handover.08-25-2011
20100220687SPECTRUM MANAGEMENT ACROSS DIVERSE RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - A network management node may manage a network of base stations and wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) that operate using diverse radio access technologies. The network management node may communicate with other network management nodes to manage spectrum usage across their respective managed networks. The network management node may acts as a proxy for cellular-capable WTRUs that operate within the managed networks. The network management node may perform handovers of Peer-to-Peer (P2P) groups that operate within the managed networks. The WTRUs may include WTRUs that operate at Very High Frequency (VHF) or Ultra High Frequency (UHF) spectrum (“white space”) frequencies.09-02-2010
20110206007Active Set Management Enhancement for Reliable Soft Handoff in 1XEV-DO System - A method and system for connection management in a wireless data network, such as a 1×EV-DO network adds connections to new network sectors upon receipt of a connection request from an active terminal, but removes data connections that the active terminal requests to be dropped only after confirmation from the active terminal that a channel allocation message has been received and applied. The active network maintains an active set of connections that is at least as large as the active set maintained by the active terminal and does not initiate a connection termination if no confirmation of the channel allocation message is received. This allows for a reduction in the number of dropped connections.08-25-2011
20110206003METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING SRVCC IN AN INTER RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY HANDOVER - The techniques introduced herein provide a system and method for determining whether an inter-RAT handover is an SRVCC handover, and for performing the subsequent SRVCC handover. The techniques include receiving a handover command message that does not include SRVCC related information elements, for example “RAB info to replace,” but continuing with an SRVCC handover using a circuit-switched RAB provided in the information for setup. The techniques also include receiving a handover command message that does include SRVCC related information elements and performing the SRVCC handover by an alternative method.08-25-2011
20110206004METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HAND-OVER - A method of performing hand-over in a personal basic service set (PBSS) including a plurality of stations and one coordinator is provided. An association request frame comprising PCP capability information, and requesting to associate to the PBSS, is received from each of the stations. The PCP capability information comprises information regarding at least one of whether each of the stations supports a power source capability of continuous power supply, whether each of the stations supports a channel time allocation function, and whether each of the stations supports a network clustering function. An association response frame, indicating whether the association request received from each of the stations is approved, is transmitted to each of the stations, and a priority to be a coordinator of the stations is determined based on the PCP capability information. Hand-over is performed with one of the stations according to the determined priority.08-25-2011
20110206001Methods and Apparatus for Reliable Inter Radio Access Network Handover - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method comprises receiving at a first network node an inter-radio access technology (RAT) signaling message from a source node, a handover signaling message including inter-RAT handover information including a START packet switched (START PS) value; determining whether the START PS value is reliable prior to handing over to a second network node at least based in part on the source node from which the START PS value is received and inter-RAT handover information reliability indicator; building an inter-RAT handover information reliability indicator to indicate whether the START PS value is reliable and including the inter-RAT handover info reliability indicator in a second signaling message; and forwarding the second signaling message to the second network node.08-25-2011
20100061338System and method for performing a handover in an enhanced multicast broadcast system (E-MBS) - A wireless communication network comprising a plurality of base stations capable of wireless communication with a plurality of subscriber stations within a coverage area of the network, wherein at least one of the plurality of base stations is capable of transmitting an edge-zone indicator which indicates the proximity of the at least one base station to an edge of an enhanced multicast broadcast system (E-MBS) zone.03-11-2010
20100061342EFFICIENT WIRELESS TRANSMISSION OPPORTUNITY HANDOFF - Circuits, methods, and apparatus that provide high-throughput control fields that, among other functions, provide efficient TXOP handoffs in wireless networks. A handoff may be made by setting one or more bits in a field in a QoS frame, such as the HT control or other appropriate field. Various conditions may be placed on a handoff by a granting station. For example, conditions specifying where a station receiving a TXOP handoff may send data, what the receiving station may do with any remaining TXOP, or what types of data may be transmitted by the receiving station may be imposed. These various conditions may be combined or omitted in any logic combination.03-11-2010
20100061341INTRA-CELL COMMON REUSE FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - To avoid or reduce intra-cell interference, each sector of a cell is associated with a sector-specific set of system resources (e.g., subbands) and at least one non-overlapping common set of system resources. Each common set for each sector includes system resources observing little or no interference from at least one other sector in the cell. The channel condition for a terminal in a given sector x is ascertained based on forward and/or reverse link measurements for the terminal. The terminal is assigned system resources from a common set or a sector-specific set for sector x based on the terminal's channel condition. For example, if the terminal observes high interference from another sector y, then the terminal is assigned system resources from a common set that observes little or no interference from sector y. The techniques may be used for an OFDMA system that uses frequency hopping.03-11-2010
20100061336METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CONTROL INFORMATION OF MULTIMODE MOBILE TERMINAL - A multi-mode mobile subscriber station (MSS) composed of several interfaces, and a method for acquiring/updating information in the case of a handover between heterogeneous networks are disclosed. A method for transmitting/receiving control information of a multi-mode mobile subscriber station (MSS) including at least two interfaces, includes: a) requesting first control information, associated with a new access point detected by a link scanning, from a network entity for providing information associated with a specific network; b) acquiring the requested first control information and second control information supplied from the new access point; and c) performing a connection to the new access point according to the first control information and the second control information.03-11-2010
20090003279Method and Apparatus For Dynamically Creating and Updating Base Station Neighbor Lists - The invention includes a method and apparatus for creating a base station neighbor list at a target base station in a wireless network including a plurality of base stations. A method includes obtaining information for creating the base station neighbor list, creating the base station neighbor list using the obtained information, and storing the base station neighbor list. The obtained information includes at least one of geographic locations of ones of the base stations, network status information associated with the wireless network, and pilot signal strength measurement feedback information. The base station neighbor list includes a subset of the base stations of the network. The base stations of the base station neighbor list may be prioritized using at least a portion of the obtained information. The base station neighbor list may be updated periodically, or in response to changes to the obtained information. The base station neighbor list is distributed from the base station to wireless user devices served by the base station for use by the wireless user devices in making handoff decisions.01-01-2009
20090003278SYSTEM AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATING WITH A FIRST AND SECOND NETWORK BY A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The invention relates to a system and method for maintaining a first connection to a first network and a second connection to a second network by a communication device. The method comprises: conducting a first activity to maintain or establish the first connection in a series of spaced, timed segments, such that the segments represent a timeframe of an original activity that would span a continuous period that would cause a transmission conflict with the second connection; and conducting a second activity for the second network only between two of consecutive segments of the series of segments. The first network may be a 802.11-class network; the first activity may be a beacon scan for a channel of the 802.11-class network; the second network may be a Bluetooth network; and the second activity may be transmission of an Advanced Audio Distribution Profile data to a second device through the Bluetooth network.01-01-2009
20080240041Method and system of reducing handover time in mobile IP network - A method and system of reducing handover time in a mobile IP network. An Foreign Agent (FA), when a terminal carries out a handover between mobile Internet Protocol Version-4 (IPv4) sub-networks of the Foreign Agent (FA), identifies whether or not a registration request message from the terminal is transmitted from an entry of a visitor list of the Foreign Agent (FA). If the registration request message is transmitted from the entry of the visitor list, interface information of a corresponding one of the sub-networks, to which the terminal registered in the visitor list is connected, is updated. A registration reply message is generated in response to the registration request message, and is transmitted to the terminal.10-02-2008
20080232323METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND SYSTEM THEREOF - A method and apparatus for handover in a wireless communication system and a system thereof, in which a Base Station (BS) allocates Scheduling Request/Channel Quality Information (SR/CQI) transmission resources to a Mobile Station (MS), an SR/CQI being periodically transmitted from the MS to a target cell, determines whether control information has been received from the MS using the allocated SR/CQI transmission resources, and allocates radio resources to the MS, for transmission of a handover confirm message from the MS, upon receipt of the control information from the MS.09-25-2008
20100272060SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING CODE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS REGISTRATION ON A MULTI-TECHNOLOGY HANDSET - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to controlling CDMA registration on a multi-technology handset. By controlling CDMA registration on a multi-technology handset, efficient handoffs between different technologies can occur. In one embodiment, the multi-technology handset operates using CDMA and at least one second technology. The second technology can be wireless fidelity (WiFi) or worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX), for example. The multi-technology handset includes at least a dual mode controller (DMC), a CDMA controller, a second technology controller, as well as radios for the CDMA and the second technology.10-28-2010
20090168725COMMUNICATION HANDOVER MANAGEMENT - As a communication is engaged upon a mobile device, data can be relayed through a base station. Determining which base station the mobile device should use can be based upon location and velocity of the mobile device. Other factors can be taken into account in determining a base station, such as power output of the mobile device and base station, load balancing, mobile device trends, and the like. Based upon these various factors, a determination can be made if the mobile device should transfer base stations.07-02-2009
20080273497Handover for DVB-H - A method of wireless handover in a broadcast network (FIGS. 11-06-2008
20080273495Smooth Handover in a Wireless Local Area Network - A process for operation of a data link transmitting data packets between a base station and one or more mobile stations within transmission phases. A start signal indicates the start of each transmission phase that is managed by the base station. For preparation of a handover procedure the mobile station switches into a monitoring phase, wherein the radio traffic is listened to and another base station suitable for the data packet transmission is sought. The mobile station performs data packet transmission in every m11-06-2008
20080273500APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR VERTICAL HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing a vertical handover in a terminal of a wireless communication system includes generating a care-of-address (CoA) by using neighbor network information acquired from a media independent handover (MIH) server to perform the vertical handover, transmitting handover request information and the CoA to a serving network, confirming handover support information and CoA information of neighbor networks, which are received from the serving network, and determining a target network for performing the vertical handover by using the handover support information, and performing the vertical handover to the target network by using the CoA information.11-06-2008
20080273498METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING CONTENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention provides methods and systems for transmitting content in a wireless communication network. The method includes caching a content in each base station of a set of base stations in the wireless communication network. The content includes a plurality of packets. In response to caching the content, a first base station belonging to the set of base stations transmits a first group of packets of the content to a mobile station. The method further includes handing over the mobile station to a second base station. The second base station belongs to the set of the base stations. The second base station resumes transmission of a second group of packets of the content to the mobile station.11-06-2008
20080279152METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING POWER CONSUMPTION BASED HANDOVER BETWEEN HYBRID NETWORKS - Provided are a method and apparatus for performing power consumption based handover between hybrid networks. The method includes listing candidate networks based on a traffic class and terminal power consumption expected for each of the hybrid networks, and selecting a network for the handover according to the traffic class and a user preference from among the listed candidate networks. Accordingly, power can be saved, and simultaneously a network can be effectively selected.11-13-2008
20080279151METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING DATA AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM COMPRISING SUCH DEVICE - A method and a device for processing data are provided, the device includes a first network element sends a message to a second network element thereby informing the second network element about a change of attachment of a third network element.11-13-2008
20120294279METHOD FOR COMPLETING SMOOTH CUT-OVER, DEVICE AND EQUIPMENT FOR PERFORMING CUT-OVER OPERATIONS - The present invention provides a method for completing smooth cut-over and a device and equipment for performing cut-over operations. The method comprises: when the device for performing cut-over operations maintains a first connection with the first cut-over device via a first interface, establishing a second connection with a second cut-over device via a second interface, and transferring the services carried on the connection resources between the device for performing cut-over operations and the first cut-over device, that is, the first connection resources, to the connection resources between the device for performing cut-over operations and the second cut-over device, that is, the second connection resources. The present invention does not interrupt services during the cut-over procedure, without affecting the normal service usage by the user, thus improving the security and reliability of cut-over.11-22-2012
20110222509FAST RESELECTION TO OTHER RAT AFTER CSFB - A wireless apparatus having one or more first radios, one or more second radios, interface control, and a processor. The one or more first radios are coupled to one or more first communication links. The one or more second radios are coupled to one or more second communication links. The interface control is coupled to the radios, and selects and executes communications over a specific one of the one or more second communication links following termination of a fallback session over one of the one or more first communication links, where RAT information is employed by the interface control to select the specific one of the one or more second communication links. The processor receives, processes, and provides to the interface control the RAT information, where the RAT information is received prior to termination of the fallback session or as part of termination of the fallback session.09-15-2011
20080285516Transmitting Method, Receiving Method, Radio Base Station, and Mobile Station - A transmission method according to the present invention includes: concatenating CRC masking data and receiver identification information for identifying the receiver; generating CRC check bits by performing a CRC encoding processing against non-CRC masking data; masking the CRC check bits by the concatenated receiver identification information and CRC masking data; concatenating the masking result and the non-CRC masking data; generating a transmission signal by performing an FEC encoding processing against the concatenated masking result and the non-CRC masking data, which are added; and transmitting the transmission signal to the receiver.11-20-2008
20080285520METHODS, MEDIA, AND DEVICES FOR MOVING A CONNECTION FROM ONE POINT OF ACCESS TO ANOTHER POINT OF ACCESS - Systems, methods, media, and devices for providing cooperation among digital processing devices in wireless networks are provided. In some embodiments, methods for moving a connection from one point of access to another point of access are provided, sending a request for information from a first mobile node to at least one other node, wherein the request for information contains first information identifying at least one point of access; receiving a response containing second information identifying at least one point of access from the at least one other node; and establishing a connection between the first mobile node and a point of access identified in the second information. In some embodiments, devices that can move a connection from one point of access to another point of access are provided.11-20-2008
20080285519HANDOVER METHOD AND APPARATUS EMPLOYED BY MOBILE NODE TO REDUCE LATENCY IN INTERNET PROTOCOL CONFIGURATION - A method and apparatus perform a handover of a mobile node with a decreased latency that occurs when the mobile node performs an Internet protocol (IP) configuration. The method of performing a handover of a mobile node includes: when the mobile node is connected to a network before the handover is performed, receiving first information on an IP configuration method to be used in a new network after the handover is performed from an information server (IS); when the mobile node is connected to the new network, receiving second information on the IP configuration method of the new network from a point of attachment (PoA) of the new network; determining whether the first information and the second information are identical; and, if it is determined that the first and second information are identical, performing an IP configuration according to the first information.11-20-2008
20080285517Mobile communication terminal and content reception method therefor - It is determined whether the communication network to which a self terminal is currently connected is a subscribed-to first communication network or a second communication network at a roaming destination. When a communication signal for push delivery transmitted from the content delivery apparatus is received before downloading of the content data, if the communication network to which the self terminal is connected is the first communication network, content data downloaded from the content delivery apparatus is received via the first communication network. If the communication network to which the self terminal is connected is the second communication network, downloading of the content data is limited.11-20-2008
20080291874HANDOVER APPARATUS AND METHOD IN A HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a handover method, in which a call manager of a network having a Circuit Switching (CS) network, a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network, and an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network, provides handover, from the LTE network to the CS network, to a terminal that uses one radio channel. The handover method includes upon receiving a request for handover from the terminal via a node of the LTE network, establishing a line to a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) of the CS network; sending, to the call manager, a request for a change in a session to another party's terminal in communication with the terminal, to establish an Internet Protocol (IP) bearer between the call manager and the other party's terminal; and sending a handover command to the terminal during the establishment of an IP bearer, to establish a radio channel to the base station of the CS network.11-27-2008
20080291877Method of operating a mobile wireless network - A method of operating a mobile wireless network is provided, in which, when there is a relocation, the connection may be continued essentially directly from the latest state before the relocation. User data is transmitted between a mobile station and a first base station, the user data being combined into data units, for example, packet data units, before being transmitted. For transmission of data units, transmission-specific information describing an instantaneous state of the transmission is stored in the mobile station, as well as in a first network unit at a higher level than the first base station. With the relocation of the mobile station from the first base station to a second base station having a second higher-level network unit, the transmission-specific information stored in the first higher-level network unit is transmitted to the second higher-level network unit to continue the transmission after the relocation essentially directly from its latest state.11-27-2008
20080291875SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING NEIGHBOR BS INFORMATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a communication system, a base station transmits a message including neighbor base station information to a mobile station, wherein neighbor base stations in the base station include m first type neighbor base stations and n second type neighbor base stations, the message includes an identifier dedicatedly allocated to the mobile station when the mobile station can get a service from one of the n second type neighbor base stations, the first type is different from the second type, the neighbor base station information includes information on the n second type neighbor base stations, and each of m and n is an integer identical to or greater than 1.11-27-2008
20080304454HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A heterogeneous network includes a terminal side and a network side. The network side includes an original PoA and handover candidate PoAs. The terminal side is used to select the handover candidate PoAs, initiate a media independent handover request, terminate a connection with the original PoA, and establish a connection with the handover candidate PoAs. The original PoA is used to terminate the connection with the terminal side according to the media independent handover request initiated by the terminal side. The handover candidate PoAs is used to establish the connection with the terminal side according to the media independent handover request initiated by the terminal side. A method for handover between heterogeneous networks initiated by the terminal side and the network side based on the 802.21 architecture is also provided, which improves the processing of the handover process.12-11-2008
20080304452Method for a mobile phone to automatically adapt to different frequency bands - A wide area communication network includes a first and second local wireless communication network, each local network operating in a different frequency band. A mobile phone previously configured to operate in the frequency band of the first local wireless communication network is transported to the second local wireless communication network and after powered runs a reconfiguration routine to operate in the frequency band of the second local wireless communication network. The reconfiguration routine includes scanning the wireless medium for a signal that includes wireless LAN identification information and after receiving such a signal comparing this identification information to identification information stored in the mobile phone. If the comparison results in a match, the mobile phone can successfully associate with the second local wireless communication network.12-11-2008
20080219216HIERARCHICAL CELL DEPLOYMENT - A hierarchical cell structure that may be applicable to any wireless communications network utilizing cells. One or more characteristics associated with a mobile device configured to communicate with the base stations via a wireless communications protocol are determined while the mobile device is communicating with a base station. The one or more characteristics are utilized to determine a subsequent base station to be the target of a handoff procedure.09-11-2008
20080310370Communication terminal and recording medium - A communication terminal has a plurality of wireless communication units. An access control unit determines whether or not a selected wireless interface is in a state where a connection request is possible based on communication state information on the wireless interface selected beforehand in the plurality of wireless interfaces. When determining that a connection request using the selected wireless interface is not possible, the access control unit determines whether or not to change over the wireless interface used for a communication based on a changeover availability information table set beforehand. When determining that a changeover of the wireless interface is not possible, the access control unit idles without performing a connection request to establish a communication until it is determined that a connection request through the selected wireless interface becomes possible.12-18-2008
20080310366MIH Pre-Authentication - A system and method for performing MIH pre-authentication, which includes providing support for both direct and/or indirect pre-authentication and providing support for both network-initiated and mobile-initiated pre-authentication.12-18-2008
20120044907METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR MANAGING USER EQUIPMENT ACCESS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and arrangements in a node in a wireless communication system for managing user equipment access to the target node. The wireless communication system comprises the target node, a source node, a core network node and a user equipment. The user equipment is configured for wireless communication over a bearer with the source node and for performing a handover from the source node to the target node. The method comprises receiving a bearer request associated with the user equipment, obtaining a time information parameter associated with the queuing time of the bearer request in at least the source node, checking if communication resources are available for establishing a bearer with the user equipment. If communication resources are not available, the bearer request is placed in a priority queue, based on the received time information parameter.02-23-2012
20100265916TUNNEL MANAGEMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING PACKET LOSSES OF MOBILE NODE IN MOBILE IP ENVIRONMENT - Provided is a method of managing a tunnel to provide mobile node mobility when a mobile node moves from an existing visiting network to a visiting network which supports a mobile IP, the method comprising: (a) a mobile node detecting a movement of the mobile node and configuring a care-of address (CoA) and thereafter transmitting a location registration (Binding Update) message to a home agent; (b) the mobile node creating a second tunnel in the visiting network and setting the second tunnel as a receiving-only tunnel while maintaining a first tunnel which is already used in the existing visiting network; (c) the mobile node receiving a location registration completion (Binding Acknowledgement) message from the home agent; and (d) the mobile node changing the second tunnel to the tunnel capable of transmitting/receiving by modifying a routing table, and canceling the first tunnel.10-21-2010
20120033642Non-Carrier Dependent Femtocell and Related Methods - The methods and devices of the present disclosure may be used to enable non-carrier dependent, Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) femtocells for in-service use with one or more mobile handheld devices. The VoIP femtocell generally includes at least one Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver; and program logic that, at least in part, performs a broadcast channel selection protocol and a handheld reselection protocol, so as to enable one or more mobile handheld devices to select the VoIP femtocell for in-service use. In certain embodiments, the broadcast channel selection protocol includes a configuration phase and a broadcast phase.02-09-2012
20120294286APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR PERMITTING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM TRANSITION BASED UPON SIGNAL THRESHOLD DETERMINATION - A method and apparatus of optimizing transitioning between EVDO and CDMA 1X systems in a hybrid access terminal, the method having the steps of: preventing a reconnect data call from being sent from the hybrid access terminal. The preventing step including checking whether a transition between an EVDO and a CDMA 1X system is successful; and if not blocking the data call, and/or checking whether an EVDO received signal strength indication is greater than or equal to a receiver sensitivity on the hybrid access terminal; and if yes, allowing the hybrid access terminal to connect to the EVDO system, and/or delaying a connection timer for connecting to the EVDO system and/or applying fast dormancy to the hybrid access terminal in an EVDO state.11-22-2012
20110007708MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: (A) calculating, at the radio base station (eNB01-13-2011
20110007705MOBILITY ACCESS GATEWAY - A gateway for mobile access includes a foreign agent that receives user profile data and session state data from a home authentication, authorization and accounting (AAA) system of a mobile node, and a dynamic packet filter that performs multi-layer filtering based on the user profile data. The foreign agent transfers a session from a first network to a second network without session interruption, using the session state data, when the mobile node moves from the first network to the second network. The packet filter permits Internet access by the mobile node without passing Internet data requested by the mobile node through the first network.01-13-2011
20110007711Support for Multi-Homing Protocols Using Transient Registration and Expanded Binding Revocation Messages - The present invention solves these problems with a new proxy binding update request and proxy binding acknowledgement messages having new indicators and identification information. Namely, the home agent/local mobility anchor will exchange proxy binding update messages and proxy binding acknowledge messages that include information such as mobile node identification (MN-ID), home network prefix (HNP), but can also include selective information fields such as, access type, handover indicator (HO), and interface identification (interface ID). By including new access type, indicator, and identification information, the local mobility anchor can respond to a binding update request message with a better understanding of the new connectivity request from the mobile node. The invention also includes a binding revocation message with expanded trigger field information sent from the local mobility anchor to the mobile access gateways.01-13-2011
20110007709MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, METHOD OF HANDOVER BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF ACCESS NETWORKS, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND SERVER - Because attachment processing is executed as a trigger of handover between different types of access networks by the Proxy MIP, not only link set-up but also various processing including authentication processing and IP acquisition processing are required to make a handover time longer.01-13-2011
20080225796HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate handing over mobile device communications in a wireless network from a source base station to a target base station without using a random access channel (RACH). In this regard, the mobile device can monitor multiple base stations determining timing information related thereto and access scheduling request channels for the base stations. When ready for handover, the mobile device can request data resources over the scheduling request channel using the appropriate timing information.09-18-2008
20090310559Seamless Handover of a Mobile Station from a Macro Base Station to a Privately Accessible Femto Base Station - In an embodiment, a method is provided that includes receiving a handover request for a mobile station to be handed over to a macro base station. Identification information for the mobile station is received. The identification of the mobile station is compared with stored association information that includes identification information of a femto base station, and identification information for a particular mobile station. The method further includes identifying that the mobile station identification information matches the identification information for an associated mobile station using the stored association information. The information regarding the associated femto base station is transmitted to the associated mobile station.12-17-2009
20110268087APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIERS - A method of receiving a sounding reference signal (SRS) in a wireless communication system supporting multiple component carriers by a base station is provided. The method includes determining periodic SRS (P-SRS) transmission or aperiodic SRS (A-SRS) transmission about at least one serving cell (SCell) to be configured for a user equipment (UE), transmitting a triggering message including an activation or deactivation of the at least one SCell and indicating information for the A-SRS transmission according to the determination, and receiving an A-SRS from the UE through an activated SCell from among the at least one SCell configured in the UE. Uplink scheduling for an additional secondary serving cell and data communication through the uplink scheduling can be performed rapidly, as compared with a scheme using only a periodic SRS.11-03-2011
20080267131Pre-Synchronization Method for Hard Handovers in Wireless Networks - A pre-synchronization method in which the source cell chooses a signature for the user equipment (mobile) to use in the target cell for RACH access, and instructs the user equipment to perform RACH access and return to the current cell before a handover command (break command) is issued. This causes parallel execution of the UL synchronization process with the context transfer process among the two base stations.10-30-2008
20080267127METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for handover in a wireless communication system. A handover indication can be received from a source base station (10-30-2008
20080267129Uplink Cell Changes in a Mobile Communication Network - The present invention relates to a user equipment, UE, wirelessly connectable to a cellular mobile communication network adapted to perform uplink cell change of the UE from the first radio base station to a second radio base station. The UE comprises means for controlling the HARQ retransmissions and means for determining the time point for performing the cell change based on the controlled ongoing HARQ retransmissions of outstanding data.10-30-2008
20130010761METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - One method of wireless communication involves acknowledging that an anchor base station received a handover indication signal. Another method involves: receiving, from base stations of an active set, offset signals identifying a respective differences in time between a reference time and respective times when the base station received a ranging signal from a mobile station; and transmitting, to the mobile station, a ranging control signal in response to the respective offset signals. Another method involves transmitting, to a mobile station in response to an active set signal, a system configuration information signal including system configuration information of a base station in an active set. Another method involves determining an uplink control channel power parameter in response to channel condition signals received from base stations in an active set. Another method involves transmitting a control signal to base stations in an active set on respective control channels. Apparatuses are also disclosed.01-10-2013
20100142483GENERIC ACCESS NETWORK AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING SERVICES BY USING GENERIC ACCESS NETWORK - A Generic Access Network (GAN) and a method for implementing services by using the GAN are disclosed. The GAN is configured to connect a generic IP network with a target network, and includes a Generic Access Network Controller (GANC) configured to enable a User Equipment (UE) to access the target network via the generic IP network. The GANC includes: a user interface, configured to connect the UE; and a Policy and Charging Control (PCC) interface, configured to trigger a process of establishing bearers of the generic IP network.06-10-2010
20100142484CONTEXT TRANSFER IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK COMPRISING PLURAL HETEROGENEOUS ACCESS NETWORKS - The present invention relates to a method for a context transfer in a communication network including a plurality of heterogeneous access networks, wherein a mobile terminal is attached to one of the access networks. Further, the present invention relates to a context transfer manager performing the method. Moreover, the present invention relates to a mobile terminal specially adapted to perform the provided method for a context transfer. To facilitate a context transfer between heterogeneous access networks, the present invention introduces a context transfer manager generating at least one context based on capabilities and parameters associated to the mobile terminal and capabilities and parameters of the neighboring access networks taking into account the respective access technology. Further the context transfer manager is common to the heterogeneous access networks in the communication network and performs the context transfers related to a particular mobile terminal.06-10-2010
20090052392RETRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD, BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION - A base station, a mobile station and a retransmission control method for enabling communication to be more efficiently performed. In a communication system comprising a base station (02-26-2009
20100272063METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING A LOCAL BREAKOUT SESSION - A method and apparatus for handling a Local Break Out (LBO) session taking place in a first network between a user equipment and a corresponding node (CN) is provided. For the downlink packets, embodiments include: converting, in a node in the first or the second network, the IP address of the downlink packets from an LHoA to a Global Home Address (GHoA) and routing, from the first node to a second node in the second network, any downlink packets being sent from the corresponding node, so that the downlink packets will arrive at the user equipment having a GHoA. For the uplink packets embodiments include: converting, in a node in the first or the second network, the IP address of the uplink packets from a GHoA to an LHoA and routing, from the second node to the first node, any uplink packets being sent from the user equipment; so that the uplink packets will arrive at the corresponding node with a source address that is an LHoA.10-28-2010
20080240042High-Density Wireless Local Area Network - A data communication system includes an access point and a plurality of stations each for exchanging wireless data communication messages with the access point. At least some of the messages are in a format that includes at least one message header and a plurality of data units. Each of the data units includes a respective data unit header and a respective data frame. Each data unit header identifies a respective one of the stations as a recipient to receive the respective data frame of the data unit.10-02-2008
20090190556METHOD AND APPARATUS TO FACILITATE HANDOVER - A method and apparatus for handing over a mobile node from a source access point to a target access point is provided herein. During operation the source access point will create handover messages on behalf of the mobile node. When the source access point detects that handover is taking place, the source access point will transmit the appropriate handover message to the mobile node's anchor node. Because the source access point may not have the necessary security credentials to create messages on behalf of the mobile node, in an alternate embodiment of the present invention, the messages are created by the mobile node and stored at the source access point until needed.07-30-2009
20090190554METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER PROCEDURE AND CREATING DATA - A method and device for performing handover by a mobile terminal from a source base station to a target base station, the mobile terminal having a RRC layer, a RLC layer and an PDCP layer. The method includes receiving a handover initiation message; and performing handover from the source base station to the target base station, including reassembling RLC SDUs from at least one PDU when possible and delivering the reassembled RLC SDUs from the RLC layer to an upper layer.07-30-2009
20120195287COMMUNICATION METHOD USING DUPLICATED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT - Communication methods using duplicated acknowledgement (ACK) are provided. A communication method of a serving base station includes determining if a handover of a device attached to the serving base station is required, and, if the handover is required, transmitting two or more duplicated ACKs to a fixed host. The two or more duplicated ACKs have the same identifier as a final ACK transmitted from the device to the fixed host. This method can alleviate an unnecessary reduction in transmission rate caused by timeout that may occur during handover of the device.08-02-2012
20100272061Support for Multi-Homing Protocols - The present invention solves these problems with a new proxy binding update request and proxy binding acknowledgment messages having new indicators and identification information. Namely, the home agent/local mobility anchor will exchange proxy binding update messages and proxy binding acknowledge messages that include information such as mobile node identification (MN-ID), home network prefix (HNP), but can also include selective information fields such as, access type, handover indicator (HO), and interface identification (interface ID) By including new access type, indicator, and identification information, the local mobility anchor can respond to a binding update request message with a better understanding of the new connectivity request from the mobile node.10-28-2010
20090086674METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING VOICE CALL CONTINUITY - A method and system for providing circuit-switched to IP Multimedia Subsystem voice call continuity with a single radio are provided. The exemplary embodiment takes advantage of a standard RANAP signaling procedure called “directed retry” to perform a much better coordination between the change in radio mode and the transfer of the media path. With the use of “directed retry”, the transfer of the media path does not begin until the handover procedure is complete, thus significantly reducing the likely amount of media disruption.04-02-2009
20100142485METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for performing a handover by a user equipment from a serving base station to a target base station includes transmitting a random access preamble to the target base station, receiving a random access response in response to the random access preamble; after receiving the random access response, transmitting a handover confirm message for indicating completion of the handover between the user equipment and the target base station, and transmitting a packet data sequence number report message indicating packet data received from the serving base station in a process of performing the handover. Repeated transmission of downlink data or uplink data can be avoided during a handover procedure.06-10-2010
20090180443WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Upon handover, a mobile station receives, from the movement origin base station, information on the movement destination base station and information relating to a sequence to be used for transmitting a random access signal to the movement destination base station. The mobile station receives a synchronization channel signal transmitted from the movement destination base station. The mobile station transmits the random access signal to the movement destination base station at a timing offset by a prescribed period from a timing of receiving a synchronization channel and at a frequency corresponding to that of the synchronization channel. A position of the timing/frequency used for transmitting the random access signal for the handover is used exclusively by the random access signal transmitted from the mobile terminal for which a handover is being performed or is used exclusively at the same time by a plurality of mobile stations for which handovers are performed.07-16-2009
20090161631BROADBAND TELECOMMUNICATION SERVICE WITH PERSONALIZED SERVICE CAPABILITY FOR TERMINALS - Embodiments of a system and method of providing broadband telecommunication services over a packet-switched network enable enhanced personalization. A mobile terminal is registered in a first remote environment, where the mobile terminal has a home environment and a home service capability. The telecommunication services are provided to the mobile terminal in the first remote environment in accordance with the home service capability.06-25-2009
20090180437COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND HANDOVER METHOD - A communication apparatus controls the timing of switching data paths in an upper-layer apparatus so as to inhibit the data from being transferred from the network host of a handover source to the network host of a handover destination, thereby effectively utilizing the resource of the network host of the handover source, while eliminating the processing load accompanying the data transfer. In this apparatus, a handover deciding part (07-16-2009
20090180442SYSTEM AND METHOD OF HANDLING IP LAYER MOBILITY IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A system and method for facilitating the efficient operation of a mobile station as it transfers from communicating via one wireless data network to another. A session control node is coupled to the mobile node in such a manner that it selectively buffers data being transmitted to the mobile node, at least while the network transfer is being executed. When the mobile node had dropped its communication session with a first wireless network and established a new communication session with a second wireless network, the buffered data is read out and transmitted to the mobile node. The session control node may be coupled with a home network associated with the mobile node or a control node may be associated with the mobile node on an ad hoc basis.07-16-2009
20090180438WIRELESS TERMINAL AND WIRELESS BASE STATION - In a case where a switching source wireless communication system is a wireless communication system in which a transmission timing of a packet or data rate can be controlled in a wireless base station, the switching source wireless communication system, which notifies information on a timing when a wireless terminal communicates the switching destination wireless communication system with respect to the switching source wireless communication system in advance, starts time-division communication between switching destination and switching source wireless communication systems, and receives the timing information, controls a transmission timing or a data rate in accordance with the timing information.07-16-2009
20110268088Apparatus and Method For Improved Handover Performance - There is provided a method in a first base (Node_B_S) station adapted to receive media access control layer packet data units (MAC-d; PDU 101, 102, 104, 105) from a radio network controller (RNC) relating to at least a traffic flow relating to a given user entity (UE_Q) and forwarding (MAC-hs/MAC-ehs) such packet data units to said user entity. The transmission to the given user entity is adapted to be potentially handed over to at least a second radio base station (Node B_T), the method being characterized in the following steps:—the first base station (Node_B_S) continuously updating (12, 33, 335, 41) at least a data structure (UNACK_MACD_CNT) relating to media access control layer packet data units (MAC-d PDU's) of a priority queue of the user entity, which packet data units are recently transmitted from a protocol layer (RLC) in the radio network controller (RNC RLC) whereby at least some of said packet data units may not be received by a corresponding protocol layer (RLC) in the user entity (UE_Q) yet,—the first base station, upon receiving a predetermined signal (UNACK_MACD_REQ (108)) from the radio network controller requesting the data structure, transmitting (41, 110) a current value of said data structure (UNACK_MACD_CNT) to the radio network controller (RNC). Also, a method for a radio network controller is provided and corresponding entities.11-03-2011
20110268086APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING GATEWAY NODE RESELECTION IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for supporting gateway node reselection in a communication system during a process in which a UE hands over from a source base station to a destination base station are provided. The apparatus includes the source base station for providing the destination base station with information for access control determination, the destination base station for making an access control determination according to the information provided by the source base station, the UE or a network for initiating a gateway reselection process according to the result of the access control determination. With the method, the reselection of Packet Data Network Gateway (PDN GW) or GGSN is implemented in a simple and reliable way by optimizing the existing signaling processes, in the case of user plane node reselection because UE changes position or handover to another base station.11-03-2011
20110044289VOICE SYNCHRONIZATION DURING CALL HANDOFF - A method, mobile electronic device and system for synchronizing hand-off of a voice media session between a WAN/cellular network and a WLAN network. When a hand-off occurs, the connection with both networks is temporarily maintained and the voice data on both connections compared to determine differences in the delays experienced over both connections. The timing of one or both voice streams is adjusted to synchronize the voice streams, and then the handoff is completed.02-24-2011
20110206010Method and apparatus for SR-VCC Revocation procedure - The basic concept of the invention is to expand the capabilities of the MSC Server enhanced for SR-VCC and of the SCC AS to support a “session transfer revocation” procedure. To allow for such procedure it is envisaged that a MSC-Server enhanced for SR-VCC being involved in a Handover procedure for a call from a source RAN, e.g. E-UTRAN/UTRAN HSPA, to a target RAN, e.g. GERAN/UTRAN CS, sends an indication that a session transfer for said call should be performed towards the target RAN. Once the MSC-Server receives from a mobility management entity, such as MME or SGSN, of the source RAN an indication that a relocation request having initiated the session transfer indication is canceled, the MSC-Server may send an indication that the session transfer should be cancelled towards the SCC AS in the IMS which has performed the session transfer.08-25-2011
20110206005MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE SWITCHING CENTER, AND MOBILE STATION - Disclosed is a mobile communication method having: a step wherein, when the bearer status changes for a cell under the control of a WCDMA mobile communication system while the location of a mobile station (UE) is registered with a WCDMA mobile switching center (SGSN) and an LTE mobile switching center (MME), a synchronization process is performed on the bearer status of the mobile station (UE) between the WCDMA mobile switching center (SGSN) and the LTE mobile switching center (MME); and a step wherein the WCDMA mobile switching center (SGSN) notifies the mobile station (UE) that the synchronization process has occurred. If the bearer status has changed and the mobile station (UE) has received the aforementioned notification, the location of the mobile station (UE) is not registered with the LTE mobile switching center (MME) when moved from a cell under the control of the WCDMA mobile communication system to a cell under the control of the LTE mobile communication system.08-25-2011
20090161627Switching communication networks in a mobile device - Methods and corresponding systems in a mobile station for switching communication networks include scheduling an alternate network period during a first communication session between a mobile station and a first network transceiver in a first network, wherein the first network uses a first protocol. During the alternate network period the mobile station searches for a transmission from a second network transceiver in a second network, wherein the second network uses a second protocol. A second communication session is requested between the mobile station and the second network transceiver. A second communication session is initiated between the mobile station and the second network transceiver.06-25-2009
20120140740HANDOVER METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A radio base station according to the present invention comprising the radio base station eNB#06-07-2012
20120140737COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached.06-07-2012
20090129342Mapping quality of service for intersystem handover - In accordance with the exemplary embodiments of the invention there is a method, executable computer program, and apparatus for receiving information including at least one packet data protocol context of a target network, and based on the information, for mapping in a source network at least one bearer to the at least one packet data protocol context. In addition, in accordance with another exemplary embodiment of the invention there is a method, executable computer program, and apparatus for receiving from a source network device information comprising an indication of at least one bearer mapped to the at least one packet data protocol context of a target network, and storing the received information for use in a handover.05-21-2009
20090129339METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STATE/MODE TRANSITIONING - A method and network element for sending a transition indication to transition a user equipment to a different state or mode, the method receiving a configuration message from a network; and transmitting a transition indication from the user equipment, the transition indication only includes a cause if the configuration message contains an inhibit transition indication. Also, a method and user equipment for processing a transitioning indication from a user equipment indicating the user equipment desires a transition to a different state or mode, the method comprising: receiving the transition indication from the user equipment; if the transition indication contains a cause: releasing a signaling connection of the user equipment or transitioning the user equipment to a different state or mode; and if the transition indication does not contain the cause: releasing the signaling connection.05-21-2009
20090129338UTILIZING BROADCAST SIGNALS TO CONVEY RESTRICTED ASSOCIATION INFORMATION - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate transmitting access point types and/or restricted association parameters using broadcast signals, such as beacons, pilot signals, etc. The type or restricted association information can be indicated by one or more intrinsic aspects of the signal, such as specified parameters. In addition, the type or information can be indicated by one or more extrinsic signal aspects, such as frequency, interval, periodicity, etc. Using this information, a mobile device can determine whether an access point implements restricted association. If so, the mobile device can request an access point or related group identifier before determining whether to establish connection therewith. The identifier can be verified against a list of accessible access points and/or groups to make the determination.05-21-2009
20090129340COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING USE OF SERVICE - A communication apparatus, connected to a first network configured to control use of a service provided in the first network from a second network, sends a first signal to the second network for ending a data request from the second network issued to the service in the first network using a first protocol for connecting the first network with the second network if the type of the service is the data supply service when the service in the first network has ended. Furthermore, the communication apparatus sends a second signal for ending the service in the first network after sending the signal for ending the data request using a second protocol for controlling the service in the first network.05-21-2009
20090129335METHOD FOR HANDOVER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus is provided to enable a network to more efficiently determine whether additional reverse links can be assigned. Various methods are presented that allow a network to determine either the transmission power or power headroom of a mobile terminal based on information that is provided at session startup and information provided periodically. The number of additional reverse links that can be assigned to the mobile can then be estimated from the transmission power and head-room of the mobile terminal.05-21-2009
20090141685MOBILE STATION HANDOVER USING TRANSFERRABLE VIRTUAL ACCESS POINT ADDRESS FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Various example embodiments are disclosed herein. According to an example embodiment, an apparatus may include a wireless transceiver, memory and a controller. The apparatus may be configured to assign, by a first physical access point (AP), a unique transferrable virtual AP address to one associated mobile station address; and perform, in response to a network request for handover, a handover for the associated mobile station address including: transferring the transferrable virtual AP address assigned to the associated mobile station address from a first physical AP to a second physical AP; and providing association state information for the associated mobile station address to the second physical AP.06-04-2009
20120069822VOIP SERVICE THRESHOLD DETERMINATION BY WIRELESS ROUTER - A wireless router establishes a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) that supports wireless communications within a WLAN service area. The wireless router establishes broadband communications via a broadband connection with a Voice over IP (VoIP) service accumulator. The wireless router receives a query from the VoIP service accumulator requesting information regarding the prior servicing of, or ability to service, VoIP calls by the wireless router. In response, the VoIP service accumulator receives information regarding the prior servicing of, or ability to service, VoIP calls. The wireless router and the VoIP service accumulator subsequently service VoIP calls within the WLAN based upon the information regarding the prior servicing of, or ability to service, VoIP calls by the wireless router.03-22-2012
20090003282LEARNING-BASED SEMI-PERSISTENT SCHEDULING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods are provided for a learning-based determination of semi-persistent scheduling of data-packet flow wireless communication. A packetized data flow served to a wireless terminal is fully scheduled for an initial period of time in order to collect statistics associated with scheduled packet sizes (Ss) and inter-packet times (Ts). Analysis of a cumulative distribution of {S, T} pairs indicate whether a characteristic packet size (S01-01-2009
20120069820WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS HANDOFF METHOD AND SYSTEM EMPLOYING SUCH - A method for reducing a delay in a wireless communications system resulting from a handoff while mitigating a risk of premature termination of wireless communications, the method includes comparing data indicative of actual use of the wireless communications systems to at least one predetermined criteria. If the comparing determines a sector pairing in the wireless communications system to be statistically significant for purposes of recommending at least one search window setting, at least one value related with a distance associated with the sector pairing may be used to automatically determine a corresponding signal delay. If the corresponding signal delay exceeds a prior determined signal delay, a recommended search window setting may be determined using the corresponding signal delay.03-22-2012
20120069818Method and Device for Handing Off Between Base Stations - The present invention discloses a method and apparatus for handoff between base stations. A target base station bears its PILOT_INC information into a handoff request acknowledge message to inform a source base station when sending a handoff request acknowledge message to the source base station after receiving a handoff request from the source base station, thus, even if a UE requesting handoff reports PILOT_PN_PHASE under the target BS in a residual set, the source BS can determine PILOT_PN corresponding to the PILOT_PN_PHASE through the PILOT_INC information of the target base station, thereby completing cell handoff between the base stations successfully. The present invention is a supplement to the existing handoff between the base stations with configurations of the PILOT_INC information being different, and augments the success rate of handoff between the base stations of the UE, thereby improving the traffic service quality of a CDMA system.03-22-2012
20120069817METHODS AND APPARATUS TO PROVIDE PACKET SWITCHED SERVICE CONTINUITY DURING CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK OPERATION - Methods and apparatus to provide packet switched service continuity during circuit switched fallback operation are described. One example method includes determining that a target system does not support packet switched handover; determining if non-3GPP access for packet switched service is available; and triggering handover to the non-3GPP access.03-22-2012
20120069816Method and Apparatus for Controlling Cellular Reselection Attempts on a Computing Device - A method and apparatus for controlling cellular reselection attempts on a computing device is disclosed. A computing device performs an automated process to repeatedly check the adequacy of the serving cell that it is currently assigned to. The computing device performs the check to determine whether it should perform a neighbor search and cell reselection. If the computing device determines the presence of particular conditions, it can perform the reselection by a default automated process. On the other hand, if the computing device determines criteria based, at least in part, on past instances, the computing device can modify the default automated process and skip attempts at performing neighbor search and cell reselections.03-22-2012
20090185535DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In a wireless mobile communications system, a method of transmitting uplink data during a handover of a mobile terminal. When the mobile terminal changes its connection from a source base station to a target base station, either the source base station or the target base station transmits a reordering indication for performing a reordering process by the gateway while transmitting a received data unit from the mobile terminal to the gateway regardless of data unit sequence number, thereby optimizing data unit transmission efficiency.07-23-2009
20090185539Handover Method and Base Station - To provide a method for suitably enabling the resources of a handover-source base station to be released and the post-handover processes of a handover-destination base station to be executed by securely determining a transfer of Last Packet without increasing a packet transmission delay in a handover process in a mobile communication system where a mobile station makes a communication with packets, a base station is provided with a Last Packet determination timer, and the handover source base station or the handover-destination base station activates the timer upon receipt of a handover completion acknowledgment transmitted from an upper node station or according to a resource release instruction after the reception of the handover completion acknowledgment, and determines that Last Packet has been received, upon expiration of the timer.07-23-2009
20080316968FAST RELAY STATION HANDOVER - A method of signalling a handover condition to a mobile station in a network, comprising the steps of determining handover conditions based on the topology in the network; and signalling a handover condition to the mobile station. A base station and relay station operating in accordance with the method are also disclosed.12-25-2008
20080316974VERTICAL HANDOFF - Methods, Mobile Node and Mobility Access gateway for enabling vertical handoff of the Mobile Node between a first and second network interfaces using a pad translator.12-25-2008
20080316973Method and Apparatus for Supporting a Handover Using an Interactive Channel in a Dvb-H Cbms System - An apparatus and method for continuously providing a selected service being watched when a user moves out of a cell or network in a Digital Video Broadcasting-Handheld (DVB-H) Convergence of Broadcasting and Mobile Service (CBMS) system. Information required for a handover is provided to a terminal using an interactive channel. The handover for the terminal can be performed using a conventional scheme and an enhanced scheme even when the user moves to a new cell while watching the selected service. As the enhanced handover scheme is provided, the user can receive a seamless service. In a mobile environment, a handover scenario for the terminal can be efficiently provided.12-25-2008
20080316971METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN HANDOVER OPERATION - A method and apparatus for resource management during handover operation includes initiating a handover from a first access network to a second access network. A policy update message is sent and a policy update confirmation message is received. A general packet radio service (GPRS) tunneling protocol (GTP) message and a radio access bearer (RAB) release message is sent and a GTP and RAB release acknowledgment is received. Connectivity is established for uplink and downlink transmission in the second access network.12-25-2008
20080316970INTER-NETWORK PACKET TRANSMISSION METHOD AND SYSTEM - An inter-network packet transmission method and system in a vertical handover between the two different technology networks is provided. An inter-network packet transmission method includes tunneling between gateways of heterogeneous networks though an interface, updating a routing table of at least one of the gateways by exchanging information through the interface, and transmitting packets to a user equipment based the at least one updated routing table.12-25-2008
20080316969CARRIER SWITCHING IN A MULTI-CARRIER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for performing carrier switching in a multi-carrier access network are described. A terminal may be assigned to a carrier among multiple carriers having different transmit power levels, e.g., by the access network during system access or handoff. The terminal may receive a switch threshold from the access network. The terminal may periodically measure the received signal strength of the assigned carrier and may compare the received signal strength against the switch threshold. The terminal may refrain from switching to a stronger carrier if the received signal strength exceeds the switch threshold and may switch to the stronger carrier if the received signal strength is below the switch threshold. This carrier switching scheme may prevent the terminal from switching to the strongest carrier when the assigned carrier can provide satisfactory performance. The access network may also switch the terminal to another carrier by sending a carrier switch message.12-25-2008
20090010226Communication Terminal, Access Point Switching Method, and Access Point Switching Control Program - [Subject] To realize optimum handover in consideration of not only reception environment of a communication terminal itself but also situations on the other party of communication.01-08-2009
20090022103DUAL-MODE DEVICE AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF SESSION FROM VOIP INTERFACE TO CELLULAR INTERFACE - A method and dual-mode device for handing over an active call from the device's VoIP interface to its cellular interface. The active call is placed on hold and a second call is established from the VoIP interface to the cellular interface of the dual-mode device, wherein the second call includes a VoIP leg from the VoIP interface of the dual-mode device to a communications server. The remote device involved in the VoIP call is then instructed to initiate a new call to the communications server referencing the second call and causing the communications server to replace the VoIP leg of the second call with the new call, thereby joining the remote party to the second call connected to the cellular interface of the dual-mode device. The active call is then terminated.01-22-2009
20090052399System, Method and Computer-Readable Medium for Provisioning Dual-Homed Voice Call Continuity - A system, method and computer-readable medium for concurrent support of Voice Call Continuity (VCC) capabilities in both the enterprise space and the carrier space are provided. The enterprise VCC functionality is used when the user is located in the enterprise domain which does not impact the carrier's network while the carrier VCC capability is used when the user is located in the carrier domain to support seamless handover between the wireless networks that the carrier may offer. The carrier VCC anchoring point and the enterprise VCC anchoring point may communicate with each other to confirm and inform the other anchoring point that a call handover is occurring or will occur.02-26-2009
20090052396Telecommunication System and Method for Controlling Switching of User Terminal Between Two Networks - A user terminal is switched between a cellular network and a worldwide interoperability for microwave access radio network within a telecommunication system. An authentication, authorization and accounting (AAA) server which is designed for use with both of these networks is disposed in the telecommunication system in such a way that user data of the user terminal stored in the AAA server can be accessed from both of these networks, thereby advantageously ensuring uninterrupted switching between the two networks free of loss.02-26-2009
20090052394HIERARCHICAL MODULATION REVERSE LINK INTERFACE NODE PROVIDING MULTIPLE SERVICE LEVELS - A wireless communication device transmits a hierarchically modulated reverse link (RL) WWAN signal comprising a lower modulation order component corresponding to first service level data and a higher modulation order component corresponding to second service level data. An interface node receives and demodulates the hierarchical modulated signal to recover second service level data. The interface node sends second service level data to a recipient.02-26-2009
20090052393METHOD FOR SECURE TRANSFER OF DATA TO A WIRELESS DEVICE FOR ENABLING MULTI-NETWORK ROAMING - Disclosed is a method for secure transfer of data for enabling roaming of the wireless device between a plurality of wireless networks. The wireless device data from an authentication server via a first channel. The authentication server sends the request for the data to an information server using a second channel. The information server generates the data bases on parameters of the wireless device and provides the data to the wireless device through the authentication server. The secure transfer of data to the wireless device enables roaming of the wireless device in a plurality of wireless networks.02-26-2009
20090141688METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SECURING PROXY MOBILE IP - An invention is disclosed that enables proxy Mobile IP registration to be performed in a secure manner. Various security mechanisms may be used independently, or in combination with one another, to authenticate the identity of a node during the registration process. First, an Access Point receiving a packet from a node verifies that the source MAC address identified in the packet is in the Access Point's client association table. In addition, as a second mechanism, the Access Point ensures that a one-to-one mapping exists for the source MAC address and source IP address identified in the packet in a mapping table maintained by the Access Point. As a third mechanism, a binding is not modified in the mobility binding table maintained by the Home Agent unless there is a one-to-one mapping in the mobility binding table between the source MAC address and the source IP address. Similarly, the Foreign Agent may also maintain a mapping between the source IP address and the source MAC address in its visitor table to ensure a one-to-one mapping between a source IP address and the associated MAC address. The MAC address is preferably transmitted in a MAC address extension to the registration request and registration reply packets. In this manner, the Access Point, Home Agent, and Foreign Agent may ascertain the node's MAC address and ensure a one-to-one mapping between the IP address and the MAC address during the registration process.06-04-2009
20090141684Mobile communication system - A mobile communication system has a plurality of nodes, hierarchically connected to each other, including a source base station and a target base station. A U-plane management station includes detecting unit detecting a handover for the mobile terminal, and a Bi-casting unit redundantly transmitting, when detecting the handover for the mobile terminal, the same user data addressed to the mobile terminal toward both of the source base station and the target base station. The target base station includes a retaining unit receiving the user data addressed to the mobile terminal, which is transmitted by the U-plane management station, and retaining the user data, and a wireless transmitting unit wirelessly transmitting, when the mobile terminal is wirelessly connected after moving, the user data requested by the mobile terminal in the user data retained by the retaining unit and addressed to the mobile terminal.06-04-2009
20090141682METHOD AND APPARATUS TO CONTROL AUDIO SWITCH DURING CALL HANDOFF - A method and system of controlling an audio switch at a receiving unit during handoff is disclosed herein. The method can include the step of—at a receiving unit with an audio call active on a first network supporting a first audio protocol—setting up a second audio call on a second network supporting a different audio protocol. The method can further include the steps of monitoring for one or more events, detecting one or more of the events, and in response to the detection of one or more of the events, switching an audio path of the receiving unit from the first network to the second network.06-04-2009
20110222512METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR USE IN A CONNECTED STATE HANDOFF OF AN ACCESS TERMINAL - A method of sending reset message sequence number is provided. During a connected state handoff of an access terminal (AT) between a source access network (AN) and a target AN, the source AN sends a reset message sequence number of the AT to the target AN. The source AN adds the reset message sequence number of the AT to the message sent to the target AN. Thereby, the problem in the existing systems that the source AN cannot send the reset message sequence number of the AT to the target AN and, thus, the target AN cannot perform a reset process on the AT when the AT is switched from the source AN to the target AN, is solved. An access network (AN) and a communication system are also provided.09-15-2011
20110222510Wireless Network for Automation, Realtime and/or Industrial Applications - The present invention describes a wireless network, in particular for automation, realtime and/or industrial applications, having at least two access network nodes and at least one radio station for wireless communication with at least one of the at least two access network nodes, wherein each of the at least two access network nodes uses a data channel selected from a set of available selectable data channels for wireless communication with a radio station assigned to it in each case, wherein a control communication channel which is distinct from the selectable data channels is provided in addition, and each of the at least two access network nodes is embodied for wirelessly sending information messages over the control communication channel and the at least one radio station is embodied for receiving the control communication channel.09-15-2011
20090310566METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING MOBILITY INFORMATION SUPPORTING HANDOVER AND/OR ROAMING IN DIGITAL BROADCASTNG SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method and an apparatus for transmitting/receiving mobility information to support the handover and roaming in a digital broadcasting system. The transmission method includes the steps of setting mobility information including information elements for indicating at least one handover/roaming type according to whether or not support of an interactive network is available for handover/roaming; inserting the mobility information into at least one of an ESG regarding broadcasting services, a notification message, and an independent signaling message so that the mobility information is transmitted to at least one terminal; and conducting handover or roaming of the terminal according to the mobility information.12-17-2009
20090052400REPAIRING ERRORS IN DATA OF MBMS SERVICE - In order to guarantee service quality for a terminal for a particular point-to-multipoint service, a broadcast or multicast radio terminal system is characterized in that after the corresponding session is complete, information regarding the data that the terminal did not properly receive is informed to the UTRAN, and then the corresponding data is received upon re-transmission from the UTRAN.02-26-2009
20090052402TECHNIQUE FOR CONFIGURING LINK LAYER ENTITIES FOR A HANDOVER - A technique of configuring link layer entities for a handover is described. In a method embodiment, the technique includes receiving from a recipient of protocol data units a supplemental status report for an existing ARQ connection in context with an imminent handover, determining service data units corresponding to buffered protocol data units taking into account information included in the supplemental report, and transferring the determined service data units to a link layer entity which is to establish a new ARQ connection to the recipient. The forced status synchronisation that is based on the supplemental report prevents the transfer of service data units that have already been successfully received at the recipient.02-26-2009
20110222511Method, System, and Apparatus for Tracing User Equipment in a Network - A method, system, and apparatus for tracing a user in a network are provided. The method includes activating a task for tracing a user in a network according to a tracing task message sent by an Element Management System (EMS), and sending the tracing task to an Evolved NodeB (eNodeB) through an S1 link. Therefore, the activated task for tracing user in a network can be sent through the S1 link, so as to realize tracing the user in the network in the network.09-15-2011
20090103490Forwarding data path optimization in a distributed environment for achieving micro-mobility - A method and apparatus of updating a forwarding plane of a network element in response to receiving a mobility event is described. The network element receives a mobility message indicating a mobile node has coupled to a new access port associated with the network element. The message further indicates that the mobile node moved from an old access port to a new access port. The network element adds an entry in a forwarding table of the old egress engine to redirect a set of packets destined to the mobile node to a new egress engine, where the new egress engine is associated with the new access port. Furthermore, the network element redirects the set of packet from the old egress engine to the new egress engine.04-23-2009
20130121308COMMUNICATION CONFIGURATION - A base station method of communications configuration, a user equipment method of communications configuration, a base station, user equipment and computer program products are disclosed. The base station method of configuring communication between a target serving cell associated with a target base station and user equipment having preconfigured radio link configuration information specifying a preconfigured communications arrangement in which a predetermined set of radio carriers are to be utilised for communication with the target base station in accordance with a predetermined communication scheme on a serving cell change, comprises the steps of: determining whether the target base station associated with the target serving cell is able to support the preconfigured communications arrangement; and if not, providing a control message from the target base station to the user equipment on the serving cell change, the control message encoding an indication to cause the user equipment to establish an alternative communications arrangement.05-16-2013
20130121309METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING LOW-COST MTC (MACHINE-TYPE COMMUNICATION) DEVICES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed for improving low-cost MTC (Machine-Type Communication) devices in a wireless communication system. The method includes broadcasting, in a system information, a first information used for cell re-selection. The method further includes providing a second information, for a neighboring cell or a frequency, that is used for cell re-selection.05-16-2013
20130121310Method, Apparatus and System for Establishing S1 Signaling Connection in an Evolved Network - A method, apparatus and system for establishing S05-16-2013
20130121311Method and Apparatus for Automatic Switching Between Networks, Wireless Access Device, and Intermediate Device - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and an apparatus for automatic switching between networks, a wireless access device, and an intermediate device. The method includes: receiving, by the wireless access device, after a connection between the wireless access device and the intermediate device is established, an instruction message sent by the intermediate device, where the instruction message instructs the wireless access device to switch from a currently connected wireless network to a wired network; connecting, by the wireless access device, according to the instruction message, the wired network through the intermediate device, and breaking the connection with the wireless network; and switching, by the wireless access device, from the wired network to the wireless network when a connection between the wireless access device and the wired network is broken. The present invention is applicable to the automatic switching between the wireless network and the wired network.05-16-2013
20110142007COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING MULTIPLE WIRELESS RESOURCES DURING A SOFT HANDOFF - In a wireless communications system operating according to CDMA or the like, when one terminal simultaneously performs communication using multiple wireless resources (e.g., multiple carriers), there was a problem that when it was attempted to guarantee network mobility by the same soft handoff system as in the case where communication was performed using only one wireless resource, efficiency suffered from the viewpoint of network forwarding load, processing load and wireless resource occupancy time. Soft handoff termination is judged and soft handoff is forcibly terminated according to whether or not the data rate obtained for all resources on the network side satisfies a requested rate, based on a reception state notification from a terminal concerning wireless resources. By performing this processing, the soft handoff period is shortened, sufficient received strength in the terminal is maintained and terminal mobility is guaranteed, while at the same time network forwarding load, terminal processing load and wireless resource occupancy time are suppressed to the absolute minimum.06-16-2011
20110142004SMALL BASE STATION APPARATUS AND CELL SEARCH METHOD - A small base station apparatus includes: a communication unit for collecting system information of a neighboring cell through mobile communication terminals being connected to a cell of the small base station apparatus; a memory unit for storing the system information of the neighboring cell; and a controller for checking whether or not a mobile communication terminal is allowed a handover connection to the neighboring cell based on the system information of the neighboring cell, registering the neighboring cell in a handover candidate list of the mobile communication terminal if the mobile communication terminal is allowed the handover connection, selecting one of neighboring cells registered in the handover candidate list, and performing handover of the mobile communication terminal to the selected neighboring cell.06-16-2011
20090201880METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNALING IN MULTIPLE USER ONE-SLOT OPERATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Disclosed are multiple embodiments of method and apparatus to facilitate Multiple Users Reusing One Timeslot (MUROS) operation in wireless communications. A pair of wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) may be multiplexed onto a timeslot using a same pulse format. A WTRU may communicate on a network using MUROS technology both on the downlink (DL) and the uplink (UL), and may use a first pulse format on the DL and a second different pulse format on the UL. Pulse format support information to facilitate MUROS operation may be communicated between a network and a WTRU. The support information may be communicated in Radio Resource Control (RRC) messages. A network may allow for concurrent operation of WTRUs using different types of MUROS technology. For example, a network may include WTRUs using MUROS based on orthogonal sub-channels (OSC) while other WTRUs use MUROS based on an interference-canceling technology such as Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance (DARP) Phase I or Phase II.08-13-2009
20090232089Fast synchronised transparent handover method and system - A mobile communications system (09-17-2009
20090190551Route Setting Method and Route Management Device - A technology is disclosed in which a QoS path related to a mobile terminal is established via an aggregation domain. When the QoS path is modified in accompaniment to the movement of the mobile terminal, a crossover node present within the aggregation domain is discovered. According to the technology, when a new QoS path is established between a QNE (local terminal) 07-30-2009
20090190550Handover information sent over a public wide area network (e.g. internet) - A basestation (07-30-2009
20090097453METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FAST HANDOVERS USING DYNAMIC ROUTER ADVERTISEMENTS - The invention relates to a method for managing the movement of a mobile node from a first router in a first network to a second router in a second network, wherein the mobile node communicates with a corresponding node. In order to enable seamless communication between the mobile node and the corresponding node, the second router is dynamically configured by the first router to transmit a router advertisement message to the mobile node, the router advertisement message comprising a subnet prefix of an IP address of the mobile node, said subnet prefix belonging to the first network. A layer 3 link change as observed by the mobile node can be postponed and a default router of the mobile node can be changed to the new access router immediately after the layer 2 handover, thus enabling very fast handovers without requiring modifications to the mobile node implementations.04-16-2009
20090097452FEMTO CELL SYNCHRONIZATION AND PILOT SEARCH METHODOLOGY - A system, a method and computer product for synchronizing of a femto cell with a macro cell, the method comprising: placing a forward link receiver into the femto cell; receiving by a micro cellular network the femto cell transmission timing; and synchronizing the femto cell transmission timing with the macro cellular network transmission timing in reliance on the forward link receiver signal. Further, a system, a method and computer product for allocating pilot phases to femto cells, the method comprising: creating at least as many new potential pilot phases for femto cells as there are for macro cells; and allowing a mobile device on a macro cell to search and find a femto cell pilot without explicitly listing femto pilot phases in the neighbor list.04-16-2009
20090097448Methods for idle registration and idle handoff in a femto environment - In a method for configuring a wireless network, a radio access network establishes a first color code for a femto subnet and a second color code for a macro subnet. The femto subnet includes a plurality of femto cells, and the macro subnet includes at least one macro cell. The macro subnet borders the femto subnet. The radio access network identifies the plurality of femto cells bordering the macro subnet, and assigns the established first and second color codes to the identified border femto cells, while assigning only the first color code to non-bordering femto cells.04-16-2009
20090097451IDENTIFICATION OF TARGET NODE FOR WIRELESS HANDOFF - Identification of an access point to which an access terminal is to be handed-off involves, in some aspects, identifying one access point of a set of access points that may have been detected by an access terminal. For example, an access terminal may receive a signal having an identified characteristic (e.g., a particular phase offset) from an access point. Each access point of a set of access points associated with the identified characteristic may be directed to attempt to decode a signal from the access terminal. The access point of the candidate set to use for the handoff operation may then be determined based on the signal received from the access terminal, if any, by each of the candidate access points.04-16-2009
20110228745METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING A HOPPING PILOT BEACON AND METHOD FOR DIRECTING A TERMINAL HANDOFF - The present invention discloses a method for transmitting a Hopping Pilot Beacon (HPB). The method includes the following steps: an HPB cell selects one resource among remaining resources used to transmit a traffic carrier frequency; the HPB cell uses the selected resource to transmit information on each of HPB frequencies rotationally and periodically, where the information on each of HPB frequencies includes the same SYNC, PILOT, and PAGING channel parameters. The present invention also discloses a method for directing a Mobile Station (MS) in an idle state to complete an inter-frequency handoff, an HPB transmitting apparatus, and a communications system thereof. The present invention helps to reduce the system cost and can direct an MS in the idle state to complete an inter-frequency handoff quickly.09-22-2011
20110228746METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING PDCP STATUS REPORT - A method of transmitting PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) status reports, is performed by a mobile terminal by receiving, from an upper layer, a request for PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) re-establishment; detecting whether there are any out-of-sequence PDCP SDUs (service data units) stored; and if there is at least one out-of-sequence PDCP SDU stored, allocating a bitmap field of length in bits equal to the number of PDCP SNs from and not including the first out-of-sequence PDCP SDU up to and including a last out-of-sequence PDCP SDU.09-22-2011
20110228744Application Identification in Mobile Networks - An apparatus includes a unit configured to perform an application identification on a traffic flow, and a unit configured to generate identification information as a result of the application identification. A unit is configured to store identification information, and a unit is configured to provide identification information during a connection handover procedure.09-22-2011
20090103494SOFT HANDOFF FOR OFDM - The present invention relates to soft handoffs in an OFDM system. Each mobile terminal measures pilot signal strengths of transmissions from adjacent base stations. If the pilot signal strength for a base station exceeds the defined threshold, that base station is added to an active set list. Each mobile terminal notifies the base stations of their active set lists. By providing the set list to the base station controller and the servicing base station, the mobile terminal identifies the sole servicing base station or triggers a soft handoff mode when multiple base stations appear on the active set list. The soft handoff mode uses a combination of scheduling and space-time coding to affect efficient and reliable handoffs.04-23-2009
20090168721Telecommunications System and Method - A telecommunications system is arranged to provide a mobile communications session to a mobile node using an internet protocol. The telecommunications system includes a home packet data network operable to communicate internet packets to and from the mobile node to provide the communications session, when the mobile node is affiliated with the home packet data network. The home packet data network includes a home agent of the mobile node. The telecommunications system also includes a visited packet data network operable to communicate internet packets to and from the mobile node to provide the communications session, when the mobile node is affiliated with the visited packet data network. One of the home packet data network or the visited packet data network includes a packet data gateway operable to control the communication of the internet packets to and from the home packet data network from and to the visited packet data network. Upon receipt of a binding update internet packet providing a care of address of the mobile node following a change of affiliation from the home packet data network to the visited packet data network, the packet data gateway and the home agent are operable to establish a route for the internet packets between the home agent and the mobile node via the packet data gateway, to the effect that the packet data gateway can control the communication of the internet packets from the home packet data network to the mobile node when affiliated with the visited packet data network and internet packets received from the mobile node via the visited packet data network. As a result, if the mobile node roams from, for example, a 3GPP network to a non-3GPP network or to a 3GPP network from a non-3GPP network; the packet data gateway is able to control the communication of internet packets, using resources on the 3GPP network by the mobile node.07-02-2009
20090052398METHOD OF PERFORMING A HANDOVER - The invention concerns a method of performing a handover (02-26-2009
20090003281Location context service handoff - A location service providing system and method for repeatedly providing a location service.01-01-2009
20090141686MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A mobile communication apparatus includes a registration request part (06-04-2009
20090003277System, Method and Computer Program Product for Providing Increased Bandwidth in a Broadband Wireless Communication System - A system, method and computer program product is described that facilitates the provision of increased bandwidth in a broadband wireless communication system, such as a WiMAX communication system, by initiating and performing a hot handover of an active mobile communication session from a first base station to a second base station. The first base station may be a low-capacity base station and the second base station may be a high-capacity base station. The hot handover occurs even in instances where the mobile station is receiving a stronger signal from the first base station than the second base station. The hot handover is initiated by an entity separate from the mobile station. This entity makes the handover decision based upon inputs from the broadband wireless communication network and optionally from overlay Operations Support System (OSS) and/or Business Support System (BSS) components.01-01-2009
20090252121METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING A MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER MESSAGE - A method for transmitting a media independent handover (MIH) message includes the following steps: The MIH message is divided into segments and the segments are encapsulated into transmission control protocol (TCP) segments; the TCP segments are then encapsulated into Internet protocol (IP) data packets; the IP data packets is transmitted to a receiving end. The method, system, and device for transmitting an MIH message described herein provide flow controls for the MIH message transmission, thereby enhancing the transmission efficiency of the MIH message.10-08-2009
20090252113Radio Communication System, Base Station, Mobile Device, and Handover Control Server - A handover control server calculates a weight function of each peripheral cell of a cell to which a mobile device is currently connected, and notifies a cell list to the mobile device. The mobile device measures wireless-line qualities of peripheral cells registered in the cell list and the currently connected cell, calculates a peripheral-cell selection parameter of each cell based on a measured wireless-line quality, the cell list, weight function information, and a wireless-access capacity of the mobile device, and selects candidate cells of a handover destination based on a calculated peripheral-cell selection parameter.10-08-2009
20090219890METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING S1 SIGNALING CONNECTION IN AN EVOLVED NETWORK - A method, apparatus and system for establishing S1 signaling connections in an evolved network are disclosed. A source evolved NodeB (eNodeB) sends a HANDOVER REQUEST message that carries original S1 signaling connection parameter information to a target eNodeB to initiate a process that a user equipment (UE) is handed over to the target eNodeB. When the UE enters the target cell, the target eNodeB allocates a new S1 signaling connection parameter and sends a HANDOVER COMPLETE message that carries the original S1 signaling connection parameter and the new S1 signaling connection parameter of the new eNodeB to an evolved packet core (EPC). The EPC receives the HANDOVER COMPLETE message that carries the new S1 signaling connection parameter and the original S1 signaling connection parameter. With the present disclosure, the inability of the target eNodeB to establish an S1 signaling connection with the EPC in the related art is effectively solved.09-03-2009
20090219886Arrangements and Method for Handling Macro Diversity in UTRAN - The present invention relates to a Diversity Handover, DHO, node adapted to execute a macro diversity functionality in a mobile telecommunication system and a method and a computer program product thereof. The DHO node comprises means for performing an uplink combining of Dedicated Channel, DCH, frames wherein said DHO node comprises means for estimating the size of an adaptive receive window for receiving said DCH frames, the adaptive receive window comprises a starting point, denoted ref, and an end point for receiving a next DCH frame or a next set of DCH frames to be combined having a Connection Frame Number n, CFN09-03-2009
20090219888System and Method for Providing Connection Handoffs in Wireless Networks - System and method for providing connection handoffs from macrocell to femtocell in wireless networks. A method comprises determining a group identifier from a received pseudorandom number sequence, determining a list of access points from a plurality of access points, wherein the access points in the list of access points are all identified by a group identifier, transmitting a request for detecting an identifier of the communications device to each access point in the list of access points, receiving a positive acknowledgement from a locating access point in the list of access points, and locating the communications device in a coverage area of the locating access point. The acknowledgement indicates that the locating access point successfully detected the identifier.09-03-2009
20090219887METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PROCESSING NON-STICKY ASSIGNMENTS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for management of Non-Sticky Assignments in a wireless communication system comprising receiving Non-Sticky Forward Link Assignment block with matching broadcast or unicast MACID, determining value of FLImplicitDeassignEnabled and determining TunedAway indication.09-03-2009
20090245201BASE STATION, PATH CONTROL APPARATUS AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - A path control apparatus includes a sequence number assignment unit assigning successive sequence numbers to respective user data packets transmitted from an upper layer; and a transmission unit transmitting the user data packets with the assigned sequence numbers to a handover source base station or a handover target base station. A base station includes a sequence correction unit sorting at least one of a user data packet transmitted from a path control apparatus and a user data packet transferred from a handover source base station in a correct order in accordance with sequence numbers successively assigned to respective user data packets; and a transfer unit transferring one or more user data packets of the user data packets having the assigned sequence numbers, wherein the handover source base station has not transmitted the one or more user data packets or waits for transmission acknowledgement for the one or more user data packets.10-01-2009
20090245199WIRELESS HAND-OVER IN MOBILE DEPLOYMENTS - The network communication system includes a wireless interface to exchange wireless signals during at least one network connection, and a handover controller that uses a route profile identifying access points distributed over a given route or region that are capable of supporting the network connection, and to handover the network connection between access points as the device travels along the given route or through a region according to the route profile.10-01-2009
20090238142METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING PDCP STATUS REPORT - A method of transmitting PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) status reports, is performed by a mobile terminal by receiving, from an upper layer, a request for PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) re-establishment; detecting whether there are any out-of-sequence PDCP SDUs (service data units) stored; and if there is at least one out-of-sequence PDCP SDU stored, allocating a bitmap field of length in bits equal to the number of PDCP SNs from and not including the first out-of-sequence PDCP SDU up to and including a last out-of-sequence PDCP SDU.09-24-2009
20100265915METHOD TO FACILITATE USER EQUIPMENT HANDOFF WITHIN A PACKET DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method to facilitate user equipment (UE) handoff within a packet data communication system includes receiving at the Evolved NodeB (eNB) via a serving relay node an indication that the UE will undergo a handoff from the serving relay node to a target node; receiving at the eNB first packet data having a first payload and a first Internet protocol (IP) header identifying an address of the eNB; extracting, at the eNB, the first payload from the first packet data to form a first packet data unit (PDU) including the extracted first payload and a second IP header identifying the address of the eNB and an address of the target node; and transmitting, from the eNB to the target node, the first PDU to permit the target node to transmit the first payload of the first PDU to the UE, the target node being identified using the second IP header.10-21-2010
20090252118HANDOFF BETWEEN PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORK AND CIRCUIT-SWITCHED NETWORK - Techniques for supporting handoff of terminals between a packet-switched network and a circuit-switched network are described. In an aspect, handoff between packet-switched and circuit-switched networks may be facilitated by a designated network entity in the packet-switched network. The designated network entity may interface with both the packet-switched network and the circuit-switched network, perform circuit-switched call origination, and perform handoff procedure. In one design, a first terminal may communicate with the packet-switched network for a packet-switched call with a second terminal. The first terminal may initiate handoff to the circuit-switched network via the designated network entity. The first terminal may perform handoff from the packet-switched network to the circuit-switched network based on an inter-MSC handoff procedure. The first terminal may then communicate with the circuit-switched network for the circuit-switched call with the second terminal after the handoff.10-08-2009
20090252117MODULAR CELL PHONE FOR FIXED MOBILE CONVERGENCE - A communication system including a communication system, including a modular cell phone, including a baseband modem for connecting to a core mobile network via a cellular network, and a connector for physically connecting the modular cell phone to a port of a mobile electronic device, and a mobile electronic device, including a modem for connecting to the core mobile network via an IP access network, a port for physically connecting the modular cell phone to the mobile electronic device, and a connection enhancer for receiving a connection of an ongoing cellular phone call, between the modular cell phone and the core mobile network via the cellular network, and seamlessly handing over the ongoing phone call to a voice over IP connection, between the mobile electronic device and the core mobile network via the IP access network, in response to the modular cell phone being connected with the mobile electronic device port. A method is also described and claimed.10-08-2009
20090252115Handoff Preparation Method in a Radio Communication System - In a wireless communication system, signals within a connection on a wireless interface are transmitted exclusively in a packet-switched manner between a user station and an access device located on the network. The user station signals a need to measure signals to the access device, the access device sends measurement signaling to the user station, and the user station measures signals of at least one additional access device located on the network at a second frequency range while receiving data packets within the connection at a first frequency range based on the received measurement signaling, the second frequency range being disjunct from the first frequency range.10-08-2009
20080259869METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOFF BETWEEN ACCESS SYSTEMS - Systems and methods for switching among networks (e.g., heterogeneous) and inter-working between a source access system and a target access system, by implementing tunneling from the AT to the target access system via the source access system. An inter-system handoff control component can facilitate setting tunneling by the mobile unit to the target access and/or between the source access system and the target access system—wherein signaling/packeting associated with the target system can be transferred over the source system.10-23-2008
20090252120METHOD OF COMMUNICATION SUPPORTING MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER - The present invention relates to performing handover of a mobile terminal to a network. Preferably, the present invention generates a first heterogeneous protocol message from a heterogeneous network handover module to a medium access control (MAC) of the mobile terminal, wherein the heterogeneous network handover module is configured to provide convergence of information from at least one network interface module associated with one of a homogeneous and heterogeneous network into a unified presentation. A management request associated with a handover process is then transmitted to a serving network, wherein the management request comprises the first heterogeneous protocol message. Accordingly, messages can be remotely exchanged via a radio section between heterogeneous network handover modules of a mobile terminal and a serving network. Therefore, messages are transferred faster and media independent handover is performed more quickly.10-08-2009
20090141687METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - When a network pages the temporary user mobile identifier of a mobile station, the mobile station sends a response to the network. Next, the network checks the authenticity of the user using a ciphering key, corresponding to the temporary user mobile identifier and a random number. If the temporary user mobile identifier is authenticated, a normal incoming call acceptance procedure is executed. If the mobile station is authenticated although the temporary user mobile identifier is wrong, the network reassigns a new temporary user mobile identifier to the mobile station and stops the current communication. In communication, the network and the mobile station mutually notify encipherment-onset time and negotiate about encipherment manner with each other. In addition, diversity handover is commenced upon a call attempt. Furthermore, if a branch replacement is necessary, the current branch is replaced by new branches capable of executing the diversity handover. Additionally, when a new call occurs to or from the mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, the mobile station uses the same branch structure and the same communication frequency band for all of calls. Additionally, when a new call occurs to or from the mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, a branch structure and a communication frequency band, which can continue all of the calls, are selected and used. Therefore, the mobile communications system is suitable for transmission of various sorts of data in accordance with the development of multimedia.06-04-2009
20090252119PROCEDURE FOR NON SYNCHRONIZED RADIO ACCESS (NSRA) RESOURCE ASSIGNMENT - A procedure for RACH initial access in a mobile terminal is provided such that necessary information is conveyed the for the initial access procedure with less overhead. The method allow an accurate choice of the uplink transport format by allowing the mobile terminal to determine by itself whether a certain transport format may be used for the transmission of a message prior to the first preamble transmission and prior to the power ramping.10-08-2009
20090257398RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio communication system includes a plurality of base stations with supporting a plurality of radio access schemes. Two or more base stations support a predetermined radio access scheme in common. A mobile station makes initial connection to one of the two or more base stations according to the predetermined radio access scheme, to allow communication with the one base station.10-15-2009
20090257403METHOD OF COMMUNICATING IN WIRELESS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a handover method that a current coordinator transfers a coordinating function of controlling a network to a different device configuring the network. The present invention relates to a method of selecting an optimal device as a coordinator in selecting the different device using priority information decided by a prescribed evaluation reference. And, the present invention relates to a method of simplifying a procedure in a manner of transmitting relevant information together with a handover request message. In a wireless network including a coordinator, a secondary coordinator is decided in advance. If the coordinator is suddenly unable to perform a function, the present invention relates to a method of enabling the function of the coordinator to be performed by the decided secondary coordinator. Thus, a process for transferring the coordinating function without the handover process is called a recovery process. The present invention relates to the recovery method and a method of deciding a secondary coordinator to perform a recovery. In the method of deciding the secondary coordinator, a method of deciding a more proper coordinator using information on coordinator priority is provided.10-15-2009
20090257404GENERATING A PUBLIC LONG CODE MASK IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method of generating a public long code mask (PLCM) in a mobile station in a wireless mobile communication network is provided. The method comprises receiving a message in the mobile station from a base station when the mobile terminal is handed off, the message comprising a first field including a first value, a second field including a second value, and a third field including least significant bits of the PLCM; and generating the PLCM using the least significant bits included in the third field.10-15-2009
20090257402INTRA-SYSTEM HANDOFF METHOD - The present invention provides an intra-system handoff method, comprising the following steps: S10-15-2009
20090257401COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE ROUTER AND HOME AGENT - The present invention provides a new technique, according to which inefficient and redundant routing can be eliminated, which may occur when the fast handover is applied to network mobility and which may cause delay. According to this technique, a mobile router (MR) 10-15-2009
20090257399Method and Apparatus for Handling Handover Procedure - The present invention provides a method for handling a handover procedure for a Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer in a user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system. The method includes steps of indicating occurrence of a handover procedure to a Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer of the UE when receiving an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message for triggering the handover procedure, applying a new security configuration to the PDCP layer if the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message includes an information element (IE) for providing the security configuration, and requesting a Medium Access Control (MAC) layer of the UE to initiate a random access procedure for the handover procedure.10-15-2009
20100150111System and method for adaptive proactive scanning to support fast handoffs in mobile networks - A scanning technique to select the best channel a mobile handset needs when approaching handoff is described. More specifically a system and method for an adaptive proactive scanning mechanism in which the rate of scanning is determined by the necessity to handoff and battery power is disclosed.06-17-2010
20120195289BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND REORDERING METHOD THEREOF - A reordering method in a communication system where a base station sends to a mobile station, packets to which numbers indicating a sequence are attached, the mobile station rearranges the packets in order of the sequence numbers, and a hard handover is performed. The method includes deciding whether a handover source base station forwards packets which have not yet been sent to the mobile station, out of packets received from a host station, to a handover target base station; controlling forwarding of the packets at the handover based on the decision, and sending forwarding execution information from the handover source base station to the mobile station to notify whether the forwarding of the packets has been executed; and at the mobile station, receiving the forwarding execution information, and executing reordering of the packets received from the handover target base station based on the forwarding execution information at the handover.08-02-2012
20120195288METHOD, MEDIUM, AND APPARATUS CONTROLLING HANDOVER BETWEEN DIFFERENT NETWORKS - A method, medium, and apparatus controlling a handover between different network types, including the operations of transmitting a message requesting a transmission bandwidth change, so as to have a transmission bandwidth supported by a new network after movement of the mobile terminal, from the mobile terminal to the server after performing the handover, changing the transmission bandwidth of the server to be supported by the new network based on the transmitted message of requesting the bandwidth change, transmitting a message acknowledging the changed transmission bandwidth from the server to the router, and transceiving data through a new data transmission tunnel between the router and a new access point within the new based on the message acknowledging the changed transmission bandwidth. Accordingly, loss of data packets occurring when a handover is performed may be effectively prevented.08-02-2012
20120140742COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached.06-07-2012
20100002653Method for handoff during connected mode of a multimode mobile station in a mixed deployment - Methods for handoff of a multimode mobile station (MS). The MS, in connected mode, moves from a cell of a legacy base station to a cell of an ABS and scans base stations from a list of neighbouring base stations, wherein at least the ABS is listed as another legacy base station in the list of neighbouring base stations. The MS performs the handoff to connect to a legacy zone of the ABS. Further, the multimode MS switching from the legacy zone of the ABS to a advanced zone of the ABS based on a Zone Switch request or command is triggered by either the multimode MS or the ABS. The Zone Switch request is triggered after detecting capabilities of either the multimode MS or the ABS that they support advanced zone. The capabilities are detected by using MAC versions of the multimode MS and the ABS or an indicator for the advanced zone. The multimode MS can also performs handoff to the advanced zone from the cell of the legacy base station by receiving one or more information for ranging in the advanced zone from the ABS during the handoff.01-07-2010
20090129337METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING PICONET COORDINATOR HANDOVER IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - Provided are a method and an apparatus for performing a piconet coordinator (PNC) handover in a wireless personal area network (WPAN) in which devices using various PHY transmission modes coexist. A device that enters the WPAN transfers information about its PHY transmission mode to the PNC through an association request message so that a problem that conventional services are not provided to a user in the WPAN due to a difference in PHY transmission modes of the devices during the PNC handover can be solved.05-21-2009
20090129336SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR USER EQUIPMENT HANDOFF FROM A MACROCELLULAR NETWORK TO AN IP-FEMTOCELL NETWORK - A system, method, and computer readable medium for handoff of a user equipment from a macrocellular system to a femtocell system is provided. A micro-pilot assisted handoff routine may be implemented to facilitate handoff of a user equipment from a macrocellular system to a femtocell system. The femtocell system may transmit very low power pilot, paging, and synch channels on a common frequency used by the macrocellular system. In another embodiment, a mobile assisted handoff routine facilitates handoff of a user equipment from a macrocellular system to a femtocell system. The user equipment's preferred roaming list includes an entry for the femtocell system and specifies a SID/NID and pseudo-noise offset for the femtocell system. The user equipment is configured to periodically enter a search mode to attempt to locate the femtocell system by switching to a femto carrier that is specified in the preferred roaming list.05-21-2009
20100150108Network Mobility - In a wireless network environment comprising a mobile router serving a moving network, said mobile router for attaching to a packet-switched access network that uses a micro-mobility protocol and a Quality of Service (QoS) protocol to route packet data to and from said mobile router, wherein said mobile router has a QoS aggregate requirement generated by nodes attached thereto, a method of handover of said mobile router to a mobility agent in said access network, which method comprises the steps of: (i) said mobile router sends a QoS request message to said mobility agent, which QoS request message comprises a QoS parameter representing said QoS aggregate; (ii) upon receipt by said mobility agent, said access network takes a QoS admission decision on the basis of said QoS parameter; and (iii) said mobility agent sends a QoS acknowledgement to said mobile router whereby said mobility agent informs said mobile router of the outcome of said QoS admission decision; characterized by the step of (iv) if said QoS admission decision is that said mobility agent cannot handle all of said QoS aggregate, said QoS acknowledgement comprises an identity of one or more alternative mobility agent that might meet at least a part of said QoS aggregate that will not be provided by said mobility agent.06-17-2010
20100157945Apparatus and method for changing serving cell in a high speed wireless communication system - A Radio Network Controller (RNC) in a high speed wireless communication system includes an apparatus to perform method for changing a serving cell in the high speed wireless communication system. The RNC receives UpLink (UL) cell change determination information representing UL channel states from a serving Base Station (BS) and a target BS. The UL is received if a UL soft handover of a Mobile Station (MS) is initiated depending on a DownLink (DL) channel quality of the MS. The RNC can determine UL cell change timing of the MS using the UL cell change determination information. Thereafter, the RNC can send an instruction of a UL cell change of the MS to the serving BS and the target BS.06-24-2010
20100265912Method and Apparatus for Secure Handover in a Communication Network - In at least one embodiment taught herein, the point in a packet transmission sequence space at which hyper frame numbers are incremented is changed at least temporarily as part of handover processing, where a mobile station (10-21-2010
20090122761Personalised Heterogeneous Network Handover Alert Scheme - A communications system comprising a plurality of local area networks (LAN) within a wide area network (WAN). The mode of communication used in said LANs differs from the mode of communication within said WAN. One of the LANs comprises a home LAN which is associated with a user identity (e.g. a subscriber for that LAN in the communications system). The user identity is directly or indirectly also associated with a wide area network. The invention provides a method of configuring an alert to devices operated by other user identities which have performed a handover operation either into or from said home network of the subscriber. The alert is configured by said subscriber (e.g., by a user identity of the home network) either as a default to all ‘visitors’ or in dependence on one or more of the other user identities. In this way, each user identity visiting the subscriber's home network receives an alert which is capable of being specific to the visitor. The subscriber may select the form of alert to be provided to another user based individually on the other user's identity in the communications network or for a group of users. The method thus enables alerts to distinguish different users or groups of users. The form of alert provided may over-ride any personal preferences configured for the mobile communications devices of the visiting users.05-14-2009
20120243508METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING RRC CONNECTION PROCEDURE - The present invention provides a method for improving a Radio Resource Control (RRC) Connection procedure in user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system. The method includes steps of performing an RRC Connection procedure, and resetting or re-establishing a lower layer protocol entity for Signaling Radio Bearers (SRBs) when a cell reselection occurs.09-27-2012
20120243505METHOD AND APPARATUS TO IMPROVE APERIODIC SRS (SOUNDING REFERENCE SYMBOL) IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed for aperiodic SRS improvement. In one embodiment, the method comprises configuring a UE (User Equipment) with aperiodic SRS. The method also comprises transmitting a PUSCH (Physical Uplink Shared Channel) on a last SC-FDMA (Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access) symbol in a UE-specific aperiodic SRS subframe if a Msg3 in the subframe is transmitted on the PUSCH. Furthermore, the method comprises not transmitting a PUSCH on a last SC-FDMA symbol in a UE-specific aperiodic SRS subframe if a Msg3 in the subframe is not transmitted on the PUSCH.09-27-2012
20120243506METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ATTEMPTING TO ACCESS NETWORK - A method and an apparatus for attempting to access a network from among a plurality of networks by a mobile terminal is provided. The method includes attempting to access the network through at least one target channel determined by the mobile terminal, such that the at least one target channel has a measured signal quality value at least equal to a predetermined reference value among signal quality values measured for channels corresponding to network access provider identification information indicating a network having a highest priority among the plurality of networks.09-27-2012
20100150102ADAPTIVE HANDOVER MECHANISM FOR HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORK - The claimed subject matter provides a system and/or a method that facilitates optimizing handover in connection with an access network. An access network can include at least one device exchanges data therewith, wherein the device communicates with at least one access station within the access network to exchange data. A rules engine can create a user-defined rule based upon at least one of a resource requirement for a device application or a user input related to a quality of service (QoS) experience with the device. The rules engine can enforce the user-defined rule to employ handover related to the device and at least one of an access station within the access network or a disparate access network.06-17-2010
20100150103System and Method for Initial Access to Relays - A user agent (UA) in a wireless communication system. The UA is configured to transmit a preamble on a random access channel (RACH) to an access node in order to attach to the access node. The UA transmits a message to the access node, wherein the message contains an identity of one or more relay nodes to which the UA can be transferred. The UA requests the access node to hand-over the UA to one relay node of the one or more relay nodes.06-17-2010
20110228743HANDOVER FROM SERVING BASE STATION TO TARGET BASE STATION - The present invention relates to a method and system for performing a handover from a serving base station to a target base station. The method for performing handover includes: transmitting a signal for detecting a base station searching signal (BS-SS) from the serving base station to a user equipment, wherein the user equipment receives the signal for detecting the BS-SS and broadcasts the BS-SS to the plurality of base stations; receiving from a target base station a request for the signal for detecting the BS-SS, wherein the target base station is one of the plurality of base stations; transmitting the signal for detecting the BS-SS from the serving base station to the target base station; receiving a receipt signal of the BS-SS from the target base station; identifying the user equipment, which had broadcasted the BS-SS to the plurality of base stations, based on the receipt signal of the BS-SS; and performing a handover from the serving base station to the target base station based on the confirmation of the serving base station.09-22-2011
20090279502INTERNETWORKING BETWEEN WMAN AND WLAN NETWORKS - According to one general aspect, a method of using a base station (BS) comprising receiving, by the BS of a first wireless network, a notification that a mobile station (MS) is entering a semi-idle state with respect to the first network, wherein the semi-idle mode is also associated with the MS performing a handover from a first wireless network based upon a first networking standard to a second wireless network based upon a second networking standard. Further comprising storing a portion of a set of context information associated with the MS. Also comprising allocating uplink resources for the MS only to receive location update messages from the MS. And, maintaining at least some of the context information of the MS.11-12-2009
20100002652MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND ACCESS ROUTER - A technology is disclosed in which, when a normal mobile node (that does not newly provide a dedicated function) is used, signaling for reconfiguring a tunnel during a mobile node movement is reduced and, furthermore, packet loss is reduced. In the technology, when an MN moves from under the control of an AR01-07-2010
20100002650FACILITATING METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - In a method of facilitating handover of a mobile communication device from a source node to a target node, the method includes buffering received user data packets in the target node during handover prior to sending to the mobile device.01-07-2010
20100157944HANDOVER CONTROL BASED ON CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP SUBSCRIPTION INFORMATION - One or more nodes in a network provide access control for an in-bound handover of an access terminal to a closed subscriber group. For example, at least one of a source access point, a network node, or a target access point may determine whether handover is allowed based on whether a closed subscriber group identifier of the target access point is listed in closed subscriber group subscription information for the access terminal.06-24-2010
20100157942Method for FMIPv6 Handover in UMTS Network and Apparatus for the Method - The present invention is related to FMIPv6 handover method and apparatus for the method in UMTS network. The present invention comprises obtaining lower layer information about a target RNS from a current RNS; obtaining upper layer information about a target core network from a current core network; establishing a tunnel between a current core network and a target core network by using the lower layer information and allocating a target RNS; and after allocation of a target RNS, transmitting a message notifying a target core network of connection to the target RNS and receiving packet data from the target core network. The present invention supports efficient handover in UMTS network by using MIH service and reduces handover delay06-24-2010
20090285183METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE FOR CREATING AND DELETING RESOURCES - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for creating resources, a method for deleting resources, and a network device. The method for creating resources includes: notifying, by a first network element, a second network element at network side of a process type for creating resources for a UE; and performing, by the second network element, a process for creating resources for the UE according to the process type. With the embodiments of the present invention, a problem in the prior art that the network element at network side (i.e., the second network element at network side) cannot differentiate different access requests (i.e., initial access request and access request caused by handover between access systems) and thus corresponding resources cannot be created with respect to different access requests may be overcome.11-19-2009
20090109927Method and apparatus for updating network information using mobile terminal - An apparatus for updating network information in wireless networks includes a control module for, when a media independent handover (MIH) mobile terminal connects to an access network in the wireless networks, judging whether the access network is managed by a media independent handover information service (MIIS) server. The apparatus further includes a collection module for collecting network information on the access network if the access network is not managed by the MIIS server, and a communication module for sending the collected network information to the MIIS server to update network information being managed by the MIIS server.04-30-2009
20090109926METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IN-ORDER DELIVERY DURING HANDOFF USING A TIMER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods for managing packetized data handoff between base stations in a mobile communication system are described. In one aspect, a timer is utilized to decide when to perform path switch from serving traffic forwarded by the source station to traffic received by the serving gateway, and to preserve, to a large degree, the packet order from a gateway device to a terminal, during the handoff between base stations. When handoff is indicated, the timer is started and only packets that are received by the source base station is forwarded to the terminal, while the timer runs. When the timer expires, the target station switches to transmit fresh packets received from the serving gateway. The timer can be adjusted “on the fly” and has been demonstrated to maximize TCP throughput as compared to a fixed switch timer.04-30-2009
20090109924PACKET COMMUNICATION METHOD, PACKET COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND PACKET COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A packet communication system having a wireless terminal, a plurality of wireless access networks, and a packet communication device connected to the respective wireless access networks, that includes a unit controlling handover processing for handover of the wireless terminal to a different wireless access network. Also included is a unit checking whether a handover destination wireless access network supports a header compression or decompression method used in a first packet communication performed through a handover source wireless access network, at a time of the handover. Also included is a unit controlling an execution point for processing corresponding to the header compression or decompression method to be specified at the packet communication device for a second packet communication performed through the handover destination wireless access network, when the above network does not support the method.04-30-2009
20100189078SEAMLESS MOBILITY FOR A MULTIPLE INTERFACE DEVICE IN A CO-LOCATED WIRELESS ENVIRONMENT - Data packets are transmitted from a first access network to a first interface of a multiple interface device (MID), and identical data packets are transmitted concurrently from a second access network to a second interface of the MID. Some of the data packets that are transmitted to the MID from the first access network are not received by the first interface. The MID inspects identifiers of data packets from the first and second interfaces in order to send to the application a stream including all of the data packets. For example, the MID sends to the application the data packets from the first interface, buffers the data packets from the second interface, and sends data packets from the buffer to the application upon detecting that data packets in the buffer were transmitted to the first interface but not received by the first interface.07-29-2010
20100165949SPACE TIME TRANSMIT DIVERSITY FOR TDD/WCDMA SYSTEMS - A circuit is designed with a matched filter circuit including a plurality of fingers (07-01-2010
20090109928H.323 User, Service and Service Provider Mobility Framework for the Multimedia Intelligent Networking - The present invention provides a method and system for assuring H.323 alias address portability to an H.323 user in real-time H.323 multimedia communications where the H.323 user is registered with a home gatekeeper for the home zone of the H.323 user. Alias address portability may be obtained using a central database that is known to the administrative zones and is used for alias address mapping, or alternatively, may be obtained by using a distributed database. The method may be implemented by: sending, by the H.323 user, a message with a called H.323 entity's alias address, to the home gatekeeper to originate a call to the called H.323 entity; confirming that the alias address, services, and service providers are portable; converting the alias address to a called routable alias address for the called H.323 entity and sending the alias address to the H.323 user; and placing the call to the called H.323 entity.04-30-2009
20120033640COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR A MOBILE TERMINAL AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A technique for flexibly performing processes depending on the type of a path for providing an additional service when there are a plurality of paths for providing additional services for the same session between terminals communicating with each other over a network is disclosed. According to the technique, when a mobile terminal (MN 02-09-2012
20120033638MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, GATEWAY APPARATUS AND SERVER APPARATUS - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: (A) disconnecting a core network bearer when it is determined that a mobile station (UE) visits a radio access network of the W-CDMA scheme and communication is not performed via the core network bearer for a predetermined period; and (B) holding the core network bearer when it is determined that the mobile station (UE) visits a radio access network of the LTE scheme and communication is not performed via the core network bearer for the predetermined period.02-09-2012
20090316656Mechanism for 3rd Generation Partnership Project Multiple Inter-Network Quality of Service Continuity - A system to promote connectivity for inter-radio access technology (RAT) handover from a first radio access network (RAN) to a second radio access network (RAN) is provided. The system comprises a component configured such that for each access point name (APN) in communication with the first radio access network (RAN), the maximum bit rate (MBR) for each active non-guaranteed bit rate (non-GBR) bearer in the second radio access network (RAN) is determined based on each respective access point name's (APN's) used aggregate maximum bit rate (AMBR) and the number of active non-guaranteed bit rate(s) (non-GBR) bearers for the respective access point name (APN).12-24-2009
20090316654ACCESS TERMINAL ASSISTED NODE IDENTIFIER CONFUSION RESOLUTION USING A TIME GAP - Confusion resulting from assigning the same node identifier to multiple nodes is resolved through the use of confusion detection techniques and the use of unique identifiers for the nodes. In some aspects a network may provide a time gap (e.g., an asynchronous time gap) during which an access terminal may temporarily cease monitoring transmissions from a source node so that the access terminal may acquire a unique identifier from a target node. In some aspects an access terminal may commence handover operations at a target node after determining whether the access terminal is allowed to access the target node. In some aspects a source node may prepare several target nodes for potential handover in the event confusion is detected or likely. Here, the source node may send information relating to the preparation of the potential target nodes to the access terminal whereby the access terminal uses the handover preparation information to initiate a handover at that target node.12-24-2009
20090316652UTILIZING SYSTEM ACCESS SEQUENCES TO REQUEST RESOURCES FOR GCI REPORTING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate indicating global cell identifier (GCI) reporting in wireless communication to mitigate confusion caused by physical cell identifier (PCI) reporting in heterogeneous deployments. In particular, mobile devices can report GCI of access points to disparate access points to facilitate communication therebetween, such as during handover. Mobile devices can indicate GCI reporting during a system access request by selecting an access sequence corresponding to subsequent GCI reporting. Based on the access sequence, an access point can grant additional resources to receive the GCI, and the mobile device can communicate GCI over the resources. Using the GCI, the access point can communicate with a disparate access point related to the GCI.12-24-2009
20100189077SUPPORTING HANDOVER OF MOBILE TERMINAL - The present invention relates to supporting a handover of a mobile terminal. Preferably, the present invention performs a scan of a neighboring network different from a current network of the mobile terminal to determine the presence of an accessible link of the neighboring network for performing a handover, wherein the mobile terminal comprises a heterogeneous network handover module that is configured to provide convergence of information from at least one network interface module associated with one of a homogeneous and heterogeneous network into a unified presentation. An information message is then received from the neighboring network, wherein the information message comprises an information element associated with whether the neighboring network is capable of communicating with the heterogeneous network handover module of the mobile terminal.07-29-2010
20100189070METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR COMBINING SERVICE FLOW ADDITION/CHANGE WITH HANDOVER IN WIMAX SYSTEMS - The present disclosure proposes a method for incorporating a procedure of adding/changing a service flow of a mobile station into a handover process in order to avoid problem that the mobile station can handover to a neighbor base station that do not support the requested service flow operation. Furthermore, the proposed disclosure can reduce the processing delay by combining the handover process of the mobile station and the procedure of adding/changing the service flow.07-29-2010
20100189076APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING GTP IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system for processing General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) Tunneling Protocol (GTP) for a handover in a mobile communication system is provided. The system includes an Evolved Packet Core (EPC), a source base station, and a target base station. The EPC transmits an end data indication message to a source base station of a user terminal to inform of an update for a user plane when receiving an update request message for the user plane of the user terminal from the target base station. The source base station forwards the remaining data destined for the user terminal to the target base station when receiving the end data indication message from the EPC, and transmits the end data indication message to the target base station upon completion of the forwarding. The target base station transmits data destined for the user terminal and stored in a buffer to the user terminal when receiving the end data indication message from the source base station, and releases resources set for the forwarding with the source base station upon completion of the data transmission to the user terminal.07-29-2010
20090116453METHOD FOR CONTROLLING REGISTRATION OF MOBILE STATION AND GENERIC ACCESS NETWORK CONTROLLER - A method for controlling registration of an MS and a Generic Access Network Controller (GANC) is provided. The method includes a GANC receiving a registration message from an MS, when there is an ongoing service between the GANC and the MS, the GANC triggers a handover procedure, or the GANC does not respond to the registration message. The GANC includes a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a determining unit adapted to determine whether a registration request message should be redirected according to current network condition and registration information of an MS, and a cont rolling unit adapted to instruct the message transmitting unit, according to the determined result to send a notification message to the MS instructing MS's corresponding operation.05-07-2009
20090116450Method and apparatus for improving a mobile station cell change operation in the general packet radio system (GPRS) - A mobile station executed method, wherein upon changing from a current cell to a new cell in a wireless packet data network the mobile station enters the new cell; generates a cell change packet data unit (PDU) message for informing the network of the location of the mobile station in the new cell; buffers the cell change PDU message into a PDU transmit queue before any buffered PDUs that were present before the mobile station entered the new cell; and transmits the buffered cell change PDU before any of the buffered PDUs that were present before the mobile station entered the new cell. In accordance with another method for informing the wireless network of the MS cell change, the following steps are executed: (i) in response to the MS making access in a new cell, sending a Channel Request that indicates a Cell Update operation; (ii) establishing an uplink (UL) Temporary Block Flow (TBF) for transferring Logical Link Control (LLC) Packet Data Units (PDUs) from the MS to the network; (iii) in response to the network receiving an unknown Temporary Logical Link Identifier (TLLI) from the MS, sending a message to a Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) and (iv) based on the message, determining with the SGSN the new cell location of the MS.05-07-2009
20100189072Mobility for IMS Users - A method of selecting an access domain for sending information between a wireless terminal and a core network, sessions between the wireless terminal and the core network being established and controlled using an IP Multimedia Subsystem. The method comprises maintaining within the IP Multimedia Subsystem a database holding information on real-time packet-switched service capabilities of a plurality of access domains, and interrogating said database based upon currently used and/or available access domains and selecting an access domain for use by the wireless terminal based upon the results of the interrogation.07-29-2010
20100182977IMAGE DISPLAY DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention includes a receiving antenna receiving information while changing plural different wireless base stations; a seat information acquiring unit acquiring position information of a destination seat paired; a wireless base station selecting unit selecting a wireless base station to be connected on the basis of position information; and a directivity switching unit changing directivity of the receiving antenna on the basis of position information, which transmits at least one of video information and audio information from a wireless base station to a user seated on the seat.07-22-2010
20090116446CROSSOVER NODE DETECTING METHOD, CROSSOVER NODE DETECTING PROGRAM FOR EXECUTING THAT METHOD BY USE OF COMPUTER, AND MOBILE TERMINAL AND RELAY APPARATUS USED IN CROSSOVER NODE DETECTING METHOD - The present invention provides a new technique on a crossover node detecting method and the like, by which a mobile terminal (mobile node) to perform a handover can quickly find out CRN so that the mobile terminal can quickly and continuously receive additional services, which the mobile node has been receiving before the handover, even after the handover. According to this technique, the crossover node detecting method comprises a step where a mobile node 05-07-2009
20090109923Base Station of Mobile Communication System - A base station of a mobile communication system which allocates a bandwidth for handover ranging or bandwidth request ranging in response to a code transmitted from a mobile station that is selected by the mobile station from a plurality of codes includes a ranging allocating unit configured to allocate, to a mobile station performing handover, at least one of a dedicated ranging code and a dedicated ranging slot that are exclusively used and not used by any mobile stations other than the mobile station, and that are provided separately for each of a plurality of base stations to which the mobile station is to be possibly connected.04-30-2009
20100189075BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station for a mobile communication system includes a scheduling unit configured to obtain scheduling information of radio bearers at least for each user and to allocate radio resources to the radio bearers based on the scheduling information. When a user is handed over from a cell of the base station to a cell of a target base station, the base station reports a part of previous scheduling information of the user via an inter-base-station interface to the target base station.07-29-2010
20100260143RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio communication system includes an EPC 10-14-2010
20100260142METHOD FOR PERFORMING UNCONTROLLED HANDOVER - A device, system and method for performing an uncontrolled handover in a mobile station, a ranging request message including an identifier of a serving base station and a first identifier used in the serving base station is transmitted to a first target base station to perform network (re)entry to the first target base station, and a ranging response message including security information and a second identifier for identifying the mobile station is received from the first target base station.10-14-2010
20100157947System, Apparatus, and Methods for Proactive Allocation of Wireless Communication Resources - A system for communication between a mobile node and a communications network is provided for use with a communications network having one or more communications network nodes that define a foreign agents and that communicate with the mobile node in a predefined region. The system includes a ghost-foreign agent that advertises a foreign agent so that the mobile node is aware of the foreign agent when the mobile node is located outside the predefined region. The system further includes a ghost-mobile node that signals the foreign agent in response to the foreign agent advertising and based upon a predicted future state of the mobile node.06-24-2010
20100157939CROSSOVER NODE DETECTION PRE-PROCESSING METHOD, CROSSOVER NODE DETECTION PRE-PROCESSING PROGRAM FOR EXECUTING THIS METHOD BY COMPUTER, AND MOBILE TERMINAL USED IN THIS METHOD - A technology is disclosed providing a crossover node detection pre-processing method and the like in which, when a MN performs a handover and detects a CRN, a layer, among an aggregation overlapping such as to be nested (a plurality of network layers), up to which a process for detecting the CRN is performed is decided and a number of layers from the outermost layer of the aggregation to the decided layer is decided. As a result, the CRN detection is not time-consuming, double reservation can be kept to a minimum, and QoS failure can be avoided. The technology includes a step of deciding, by a mobile node 06-24-2010
20100177739METHOD AND ENODEB FOR FORWARDING DOWNLINK AND UPLINK PACKETS BASED ON S1 HANDOVER - A method for forwarding downlink packets based on S1 handover is disclosed. The method includes: numbering a packet not processed by using PDCP according to a message that carries PDCP Serial Number (SN) information if downlink packets to be forwarded include the packet not processed by using PDCP; and sending the downlink packets to the UE according to the PDCP SN corresponding to the packet included in the downlink packets. A method for forwarding uplink packets based on S1 handover is disclosed. The method includes: receiving state report information of the packet sent by the target eNodeB; and sending the packet according to the state report information of the packet. Another method for forwarding downlink packets based on S1 handover and an eNodeB are disclosed. Through the embodiments of the present invention, the packets are forwarded without loss in the case of S1 handover.07-15-2010
20100177733METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING STATUS REPORT OF PDCP LAYER IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND RECEIVER OF MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS - Disclosed is a status report transmission of the PDCP layer for a PDCP status report which can reduce radio resources, by transmitting the reception success or failure of a series of PDCP SDUs in the form of a bitmap when configuring the PDCP status report for reporting a reception status of the PDCP SDU to another party in the PDCP layer in the LTE system.07-15-2010
20090316657CONCENTRATOR FOR MULTIPLEXING ACCESS POINT TO WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate multiplexing communications from multiple downstream access points to one or more mobility management entities (MME). In particular, a concentrator component is provided that can establish a single transport layer connection with an MME along with multiple application layer connections over the single transport layer connection for each of multiple downstream access points and/or related mobile devices. The downstream access points and/or mobile devices can provide identifiers to the concentrator component, which can utilize the identifiers to track communications with the MME. In this regard, the MME can additionally include identifiers received from the concentrator component in subsequent communications to facilitate identifying the appropriate downstream access point and/or mobile device.12-24-2009
20090316655ACCESS TERMINAL ASSISTED NODE IDENTIFIER CONFUSION RESOLUTION - Confusion resulting from assigning the same node identifier to multiple nodes is resolved through the use of confusion detection techniques and the use of unique identifiers for the nodes. In some aspects a network may provide a time gap (e.g., an asynchronous time gap) during which an access terminal may temporarily cease monitoring transmissions from a source node so that the access terminal may acquire a unique identifier from a target node. In some aspects an access terminal may commence handover operations at a target node after determining whether the access terminal is allowed to access the target node. In some aspects a source node may prepare several target nodes for potential handover in the event confusion is detected or likely. Here, the source node may send information relating to the preparation of the potential target nodes to the access terminal whereby the access terminal uses the handover preparation information to initiate a handover at that target node.12-24-2009
20090316650FAST HANDOVER METHOD USING L2/L3 COMBINATION - Provided is a fast handover method using a layer 2 (L2) and layer 3 (L3) combination. When a mobile node moves from a present region to another region, fast handover of the mobile node is provided using a location update function between handover control agents (HCAs), and data bicasting from an old HCA wherein the mobile node performs handover to a new HCA.12-24-2009
20090116451MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND HAND-OFF METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal that ensures smooth, continuous communications sessions even when in transit, regardless of base station capabilities and functionalities, in a packet-switched data communications network. With this terminal, each of a plurality of lower interfaces 05-07-2009
20090116449CHANNEL TRANSMISSION METHOD AND BASE STATION - A channel transmission method of a base station used in a communication system employing orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) is disclosed. The channel transmission method includes the steps of selecting sectors where soft-combining is to be performed based on location information of a mobile station and/or the type of a channel to be transmitted; generating transmission signals each including a pilot signal for demodulation and data of the channel to be soft-combined and transmitting the generated transmission signals to the respective selected sectors; and causing the mobile station to receive and combine the transmission signals arriving from the selected sectors within a guard interval.05-07-2009
20090116448APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CHANGING ACCESS POINT IN WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - An apparatus and method of changing an access point in a wireless network system is provided. The wireless network system includes a first access point existing on a wireless network, and a user terminal accessing the first access point. The first access point transmits information on a second access point, which is one of a plurality of access points accessible by the user terminal, to the user terminal, and the user terminal determines whether to access the second access point and accesses the second access terminal in accordance with the determination result.05-07-2009
20100238899System and Method of Automatically Optimizing an Operational Radio Access Network - Systems and methods of automatically optimizing an operational radio access network are provided. Objective and operational cost functions for the radio access network are generated, and a deviation between the generated cost functions is determined. At least one aspect of the radio access network is adjusted in order to minimize the determined deviation between cost functions.09-23-2010
20100226338COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, HOME AGENT, MOBILE NODE, AND COMMUNICATION NODE - A new technique is disclosed, by which it is possible to prevent the occurrence of unnecessary traffic from a mobile node when a path is switched over by path selecting policy of a home agent itself or a correspondent node itself. According to this technique, in a communication system where a mobile node 09-09-2010
20100238897MOBILE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CARRYING OUT HANDOVER IN THE SYSTEM - When a strength of an electric field for receiving wireless in downlink is equal to or smaller than a predetermined strength, the mobile communication terminal device 09-23-2010
20100177737CONTEXT FETCHING AFTER INTER-SYSTEM HANDOVER - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate fetching a native security context between network nodes in a core network after an inter-system handover of a mobile device. For instance, a mobility message that is integrity protected by a security context (e.g., the native security context, a mapped security context, . . . ) can be obtained at a network node from the mobile device. Further, the network node can send a request to a disparate network node within a core network. The request can include information that can be used by the disparate network node to establish that the mobile device is authenticated. Moreover, the native security context can be received from the disparate network node in response to the request. Accordingly, the native security context need not be recreated between the network node and the mobile device.07-15-2010
20100177734COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - The communication device according to the present invention comprises a packet reception unit 07-15-2010
20130215869RESUME HANDLING AFTER TUNE-AWAY - Methods and apparatus for resuming operations with an LTE network are described. One example method generally includes suspending operations with a base station of a first radio access technology (RAT) network (e.g., LTE network), tuning to a second RAT network (e.g., 1x network) to monitor for paging messages targeting the UE, and determining whether or not to resume operations with the base station of the first RAT network without performing system acquisition based, at least in part, on how much time has elapsed since suspending operations.08-22-2013
20130215870COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, IDENTIFIER ASSIGNMENT DEVICE, BASE STATION, IDENTIFIER ASSIGNMENT METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM EMBODYING INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTROLLING A DEVICE - The communication system includes a first base station that forms a first cell, a second base station that forms a second cell, and an identifier assignment device that assigns an identifier for identifying the second cell, wherein the first base station transmits first neighbor cell information containing identifier information of neighbor cells of the first cell to the second base station, and the second base station transmits the first neighbor cell information received from the first base station to the identifier assignment device.08-22-2013
20130215871Handover Signaling in Wireless Networks - A base station receives a first radio resource control (RRC) message comprising parameter(s) indicating whether a wireless device supports an enhanced physical downlink control channel (ePDCCH). The base station selectively transmits second RRC message(s) configuring first radio resources of a first ePDCCH. The base station makes a handover decision for the wireless device. The base station transmits a third message to a target base station. The third message comprises at least one of: parameter(s) indicating whether the wireless device supports an ePDCCH, and configuration information of the first ePDCCH.08-22-2013
20100232391Method And System For Intra E-Utran Handover - The invention regards a handover method for a data packet based wireless mobile communications network. The network comprises a core network (CN) and a radio area network (RAN). The core network (CN) comprises a control plane node (MME) intercommunicating with a user plane node (UPE). The radio area network comprises a mobile user equipment (UE) intercommunicating with a source radio base transceiver station, eNOdeB, (source eNodeB), wherein payload data is routed via a tunnel between the user plane node (UPE) and the source eNodeB (source eNodeB), wherein the handover comprises the step of establishing a temporary tunnel between the user plane node (UPE) and a target eNodeB (target eNodeB), the handover being initiated by the target eNodeB (target eNodeB) transmitting an unreliable uplink data signal to the user plane node (UPE) comprising handover information.09-16-2010
20100238902Channel Structures for a Quasi-Orthogonal Multiple-Access Communication System - A channel structure has at least two channel sets. Each channel set contains multiple channels and is associated with a specific mapping of the channels to the system resources available for data transmission. Each channel set may be defined based on a channel tree having a hierarchical structure. To achieve intra-cell interference diversity, the channel-to-resource mapping for each channel set is pseudo-random with respect to the mapping for each remaining channel set. In each scheduling interval, terminals are scheduled for transmission on the forward and/or reverse link. The scheduled terminals are assigned channels from the channel sets. Multiple terminals may use the same system resources and their overlapping transmissions may be separated in the spatial domain. For example, beamforming may be performed to send multiple overlapping transmissions on the forward link, and receiver spatial processing may be performed to separate out multiple overlapping transmissions received on the reverse link.09-23-2010
20100238901SYSTEMS, APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems, apparatus, methods and computer program products are provided. In some embodiments, a method for facilitating interference management in an unplanned wireless communication system is provided. The method can include a non-serving base station obtaining information about a user equipment served by a serving base station; and determining signal information based, at least, in part, on the information. The method can also include the non-serving base station disallowing access to the user equipment due to restricted access rules for the non-serving base station. The method can also include the non-serving base station performing interference management of the user equipment served by the serving base station. The interference management can be performed based, at least, in part, on the determined signal information.09-23-2010
20100254347Support for Continuity of Tunnel Communications for Mobile Nodes Having Multiple Care of Addressing - The present invention solves communication disruption problems during the hand-off transition period by using a pre-handoff registration of a new foreign agent on behalf of the mobile node The pre-handoff registration message should: (1) identify itself as a pre-hand off registration message, (2) indicate direction of traffic for the pre-handoff registration time period, and (3) specify a lifetime or time period when the pre-handoff registration request will continue to be considered valid The local mobility anchor will accept traffic using the pre-handoff registration care-of address depending on the directionality indicator, but the communication traffic to or from the mobile node will not be disrupted during the transition period. Because the care-of address for the mobile node on the new foreign network can be used to direct communication traffic to or from the mobile node during this transition time period, no disruption of service will be encountered.10-07-2010
20120127959METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING CELL RESELECTIONS AND TRANSITIONS TO AND FROM AN ENHANCED CELL_FACH STATE - A method and apparatus for handling cell reselections and transitions includes executing a cell reselection. A medium access control (MAC)-ehs reset is performed.05-24-2012
20110058532HANDOFFS IN A HIERARCHICAL MOBILITY LABEL-BASED NETWORK - A system establishes a communication path between a mobile node and a first label edge router, registers the mobile node at the first label edge router, and creates a mobility binding at the first label edge router. The system also establishes a label switched path between the first label edge router and a second label edge router by propagating the mobility binding in the system, and establishes communication between the mobile node and a corresponding node over the label switched path. The system further maintains the communication between the mobile node and the corresponding node over the system when the mobile node moves from one physical location to another physical location and causes a handoff of the mobile node between two layer 2 grooming networks.03-10-2011
20110058530System and method for supporting robust header compression in wireless communication system - A system and method support robust header compression (ROHC) for a mobile station (MS) handover in a wireless communication system. If a mobile station (MS) accesses a base station (BS) controlled by the ASN-GW through a handover, ROHC parameter information is received from a previous ASN-GW controlling a previous BS accessed by the MS before the handover. An ROHC parameter for ROHC-based communication with the MS is determined on the basis of the ROHC parameter information received from the previous ASN-GW. The determined ROHC parameter is transmitted to the MS by using a path modification request message for an ROHC service flow.03-10-2011
20100238898METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR EXTENDING THE RESOURCE RETAIN TIME IN A HANDOVER - A mobile station may send a first handover indication message to a serving base station. The first handover indication message may include a first resource retain time. The mobile station may start a resource retaining timer using the first resource retain time. The mobile station may perform handover procedures. The mobile station may determine whether the resource retaining timer is within a threshold of expiring. The mobile station may send a second handover indication message to the serving base station if the resource retaining timer is within the threshold of expiring.09-23-2010
20110058529MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A mobile station apparatus acquires handover information when a handover instruction message is received and continues a reception process in a source cell until handover execution time when the handover is determined to be a synchronous handover. When it is handover execution time, the mobile station apparatus follows handover information to perform cell switch control and starts a downlink synchronization establishment process for a target cell. When downlink synchronization establishment has succeeded before the expiration of a handover protection time and when the mobile station apparatus determines that downlink synchronization establishment has succeeded within a downlink synchronization establishment expected time, the mobile station apparatus determines that uplink synchronization establishment is not necessary for the target cell and executes a synchronous handover process that does not require random access. On the other hand, when determining that the downlink synchronization establishment has not succeeded, the mobile station apparatus determines that uplink synchronization establishment is necessary for the target cell and executes a handover process that requires random access transmission.03-10-2011
20100254350Fast Handoff Using GPS Technology for Mobile Telematics - The present invention relates to the reduction of handoff delays for mobile telematics applications. In particular, the present invention provides a method employing GPS technology to define IP addresses in a mobile environment in order to reduce delays and transient data loss caused by handoff from one network to another.10-07-2010
20090022105SYSTEM FOR MANAGING SERVICES OF WiMAX BASE STATIONS - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) base station having a wireless transceiver, and a controller to manage the wireless transceiver. The controller can direct a communication device requesting wireless access to another WiMAX base station upon determining that granting wireless access to the communication device reduces an operating performance of the WiMAX base station below its operating threshold. Additional embodiments are disclosed.01-22-2009
20100208702High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) Idle State Handout From Femto Access Point to Macro Access Network - Systems and methods for identifying an address of a femto node during handoff of an access terminal from a femto node to a macro node. In one embodiment, the femto node assigns a unique identifier to the access terminal. The access terminal passes the unique identifier to the macro node. The macro node partitions the unique identifier to determine the address of the femto node. In another embodiment, the femto node registers its address with a domain name system. The macro node queries the domain name system to obtain the address of the femto node. In another embodiment, the macro node sends the unique identifier to a proxy. The proxy partitions the unique identifier to determine the address of the femto node.08-19-2010
20100208703High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) Idle State Handout From Femto Access Point to Macro Access Network - Systems and methods for identifying an address of a femto node during handoff of an access terminal from a femto node to a macro node. In one embodiment, the femto node assigns a unique identifier to the access terminal. The access terminal passes the unique identifier to the macro node. The macro node partitions the unique identifier to determine the address of the femto node. In another embodiment, the femto node registers its address with a domain name system. The macro node queries the domain name system to obtain the address of the femto node. In another embodiment, the macro node sends the unique identifier to a proxy. The proxy partitions the unique identifier to determine the address of the femto node.08-19-2010
20100208691COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS AND ROUTER USING NETWORK-BASED IP MOBILITY PROTOCOL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR THE SAME - When an MN is handed over from an MAGa to an MAGb, a network-based IP mobility protocol processor of an LMA transmits a header compression information forward command to MAGa, and a network-based IP mobility protocol processor of MAGa transmits header compression information to MAGb. MAGb having received the header compression information stores the information into a storage and performs a compression and extension process of the data associated with MN by referring to the information.08-19-2010
20100208695METHOD FOR PERFORMING BAND HANDOVER IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM AND MOBILE STATION SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method for performing band handover in a broadband wireless access system is provided. In this method, a terminal in a band AMC mode in which the terminal transmits and receives data through a band selected from among bands to which a modulation scheme and a coding rate are adaptively applied receives channel status information of each band of a neighboring base station. The terminal then performs handover to the neighboring base station while maintaining the band AMC mode if it is determined based on the received channel status information that a channel status of each band of the neighboring base station satisfies a predetermined condition. This band handover method enables handover to be performed for each specific frequency band of a mobile terminal.08-19-2010
20100208694MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, CORE NETWORK, USER EQUIPMENT, AND PROGRAM - A core network includes an external network reception section which receives data from an external network, a connection instruction processing section which transmits a paging request directed to user equipment upon receipt of the data and also transmits a connection instruction of a second radio communication type, a connection management section which registers a connection by the second radio communication type upon receipt of a connection request, and a transmission section which transmits the data. The user equipment includes a first radio communication type communication section which receives the paging request and receives the connection instruction, a second radio communication type connection section which uses the second radio communication type to transmit the connection request according to the received connection instruction and causes the communication state to transition to a reception enabled state, and a second radio communication type communication section which receives the data when the communication state of the second communication type is the reception enabled state. This makes it possible to provide the user equipment of an idle state with communication data using a radio communication type having no paging function.08-19-2010
20100208692Apparatus and method for supporting intra-base station handover in a multi-hop relay broadband wireless communication system - An apparatus is capable of supporting an intra-BS handover of a Mobile Station (MS) that can distinguish a Relay Station (RS) and a Base Station (BS) in a multi-hop relay broadband wireless communication system. A handover of an MS in a multi-hop relay wireless communication system includes receiving a neighbor advertisement message. When a handover command message that initiates a handover to a target node is received, information on a target node is acquired, and an upper BS of the target node is identified. When the identified upper BS of the target node is the same as an upper BS of the serving node, control information that has been previously used in a serving node is used in the target node, and communication with the target node is performed.08-19-2010
20100128694SELECTION OF PACKET DATA PROTOCOL CONTEXT FOR HANDOVER FROM CELLULAR NETWORK TO FEMTO CELL - System(s) and method(s) are provided to manage packet data protocol (PDP) contexts upon cellular-to-femto handover, wherein femto network has disparate capabilities to support applications with distinct access point names (APNs) and quality of service (QoS) profiles. Based at least on activity factors of applications associated with PDP contexts, a QoS-based ranking of PDP contexts, and subscriber input, cellular network platform selects active PDP contexts to retain and suspend upon handover. A group of active PDP contexts is handed off in accordance with femto coverage capability, with remaining active PDP contexts suspended during handover. When a suspended PDP context, and application associated therewith, is resumed through femto coverage, a PDP context modification is conducted with a new APN and the application is routed to a corresponding femto gateway node and application server. Additionally, femto network platform performs a radio access bearer reconfiguration to meet QoS requirements of the resumed PDP context.05-27-2010
20120140741RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - The present invention provides a radio communication system that enables handovers between radio base stations to be conducted at a short time using a mobile communication terminal having one radio communication part. A pseudo radio communication control part in a mobile communication terminal links with a packet transfer part and a remote radio control part in a radio bridge device to enable operation as though a radio communication part disposed in the radio bridge device were directly connected to the mobile communication terminal. Thus, even when radio communication parts are disposed in a plurality of terminals, by using the pseudo radio communication control part instead of a radio communication control part, an application can carry out control as though all the radio communication parts were connected in the same terminal.06-07-2012
20120140739COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached.06-07-2012
20120140738COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached.06-07-2012
20120140735COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached.06-07-2012
20090274116METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETECTING POSITION OF MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL BY USING PILOT STRENGTH MEASUREMENT MESSAGE - There is provided a system for detecting a location of a mobile station (MS) by using a pilot strength measurement message (PSMM) in a mobile communication system providing a location-based service in a mobile communication network, comprising: a position determination entity (PDE) for detecting the location of the mobile station, collecting PSMM information from the mobile station, the location detection of which is required, and obtaining the location of the mobile station by using collected PSMM information.11-05-2009
20100034166WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING CALL CONTINUITY - A method and system for supporting a handover between a circuit-switched (CS) domain and an Internet protocol (IP) multimedia subsystem (IMS) domain to provide call continuity are disclosed. The system includes a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and a wireless network. The WTRU includes a call continuity control entity for supporting call continuity between a CS domain and an IMS domain, and a media independent handover (MIH) entity configured to provide MIH services for providing information in a media independent manner. The wireless network includes an MIH entity for providing MIH services for collecting and forwarding information in a media independent manner. A handover between the CS domain and the IMS domain is triggered based on information obtained via MIH services from the MIH entities. The information may be exchanged via an MIH information server.02-11-2010
20090285176FRAMEWORK FOR INTERNETWORKING BETWEEN WMAN AND WLAN NETWORKS - According to one general aspect, a method of using a customer premises equipment (CPE) to represent a mobile station (MS) to a base station (BS) is described. Wherein the CPE and the BS are part of a first wireless network based upon a first networking standard, and the MS and the CPE are part of a second wireless network based upon a second networking standard. The method comprising associating the MS with the CPE. The method further comprising indicating to the BS that the CPE is acting as an agent for the MS on the second wireless network. Also comprising acting as an agent, on the second wireless network, for the MS. And comprising, storing context information related to the MS, wherein the context information includes MS context information related the first network and MS context information related the second network.11-19-2009
20090245200Method and apparatus for communication between wireless telecommunications networks of different technology types - For handover between wireless telecommunications networks of different technology types, an air interface is set up between a first node 10-01-2009
20090274122COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NETWORK ELEMENT AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING RESOURCE - A method for processing resource, a communication system, and a mobility management network element are provided. The method includes: receiving, by a mobility management network element in a packet switched (PS) network, a Release Request message sent by an access network of the PS network or a Handoff Complete message sent by a circuit switched (CS) network when a user equipment (UE) is handed over from the PS network to the CS network; and processing, by the mobility management network element of the PS network, resources of the UE in the PS network. Thus, the processing of resources of the UE in the PS network is achieved when the UE is handed over from the PS network to the CS network. A communication system and a mobility management network element are also provided.11-05-2009
20090279505SERVICE ZONE SWITCHING METHOD BASED ON LOAD CONSIDERING INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE IN 802.16/WIBRO SYSTEMS - There is provided a method of switching a zone through which services are provided to subscriber stations (SS) in an environment using an FRF-1 zone and an FRF-3 zone based on traffic load of each zone in order to reduce the inter-cell interference in 802.16/WiBro systems. The service zone switching method based on load considering inter-cell interference in 802.16/WiBro systems may be useful to minimize the inter-cell interference, enhance the capacity of cells and improve users' transmission quality in the cells by determining whether the services are provided through one out of an FRF-1 zone (a zone where users in 3 sectors of one cell can use all subchannels) and an FRF-3 zone (a zone where users in each of 3 sectors of one cell can use one third of all subchannels; 3 sectors of one cell use 3 channel group, respectively), which are present in one frame, based on the distribution and traffic load of subscriber stations (SS) present in one cell, which consists of 3 sector units, under the environment of the 802.16/WiBro systems, and providing services through the selected zone.11-12-2009
20090238147System and Method of Transitioning Between Cellular and Voice Over Internet Protocol Communication - A computer implemented method includes determining, at a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) base station, that a mobile device capable of communicating via a Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) and via the WLAN is within a range of the WLAN base station. The computer implemented method includes sending a registration message including an Internet Protocol (IP) address from the WLAN base station to the mobile phone device. The mobile device sends a call forwarding message from the mobile phone device to a network element of the WWAN after receiving the registration message. The call forwarding message redirects a call destined for the mobile phone device to the WLAN base station for transmission to the mobile phone device. The computer implemented method includes receiving the redirected call from the WWAN. The computer implemented method includes sending the redirected call to the mobile phone device when the mobile phone device is within the range of the WLAN base station, but not sending the redirected call from the WLAN to the mobile phone device when the mobile phone device is outside the range of the WLAN base station.09-24-2009
20090073938METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING CALL ANCHORING IN VOICE CALL CONTINUITY - The present invention provides a method and system for optimizing call anchoring in VCC, a VCC anchoring optimization function entity, and a routing control entity, with a view to correlating the call anchoring with the processing of a service potentially influential in anchoring a call. The method includes: the VAO function entity perceives the service information of a called party; and the VAO function entity optimizes the call anchoring when determining that the service subscribed to by the called party may affect anchoring of the current call. The present invention enables correlation between the call anchoring and the processing of the service influential in anchoring the call, and optimizes the call anchoring.03-19-2009
20090073937Method, Apparatus And System For Obtaining MIH Service Information - A method, an apparatus and a system for obtaining a Media Independent Handover (MIH) service information. The method including: receiving an MIH service information request message from a mobile node; obtaining the MIH service information requested by the mobile node; and sending a response message to the mobile node, with the obtained MIH service information carried in the response message.03-19-2009
20090073935APPARATUS AND METHODS OF PMIPv6 ROUTE OPTIMIZATION PROTOCOL - A network component is provided. The network component is configured to receive a handover context from a first access network device. The network component is capable of sending a first proxy binding update message to a second access network device to initiate a proxy care-of test; receiving a care-of keygen token from the second access network device in response to the first proxy binding update. The network component is configured to send a second proxy binding update message in response to the care-of keygen token to the second access network device to initiate a complete proxy binding update exchange. The network component is configured to receive a proxy binding acknowledge (PBA) message from the second access network device to establish a direct route between the network component and the second access network device.03-19-2009
20090252114Method and System for Supporting Seamless Handover of Mobile Node Using Mobile Stream Control Transmission Protocol - A method and system for supporting a seamless handover of a mobile node using a mobile Stream Control Transmission Protocol (mSCTP) to support the mobility of the mobile node are provided. In the method and system, a change in data link layer information, which occurs when the mobile node moves into a new sub-network, is detected and changed data link layer information is transmitted to a network layer. A new Internet protocol (IP) address for the new sub-network is acquired in the network layer using the changed data link layer information. The new IP address is transmitted to a transport layer and dynamic address setting is performed in the transport layer using the mSCTP.10-08-2009
20090245206METHOD FOR SEARCHING FOR RADIO NETWORK, AND SYSTEM, AND MULTIMODE DEVICE - A method for searching for a radio network, and system, and a multimode device, which shortens the delay of handing over the multimode device between networks and reduces the power consumption of the multimode device in searching for the network. In the embodiments of the present invention, the multimode device uses the second network as an area reference. A correlation is preset between each area in the second network and the radio network parameters of the first network in the area. Therefore, the multimode device searches the first network according to the radio network parameters of the first network correlated with the current area in the second network when it moves. The correlation information may be stored in the management device of the first network, or the management device of the second network, or stored in the multimode device directly.10-01-2009
20090185537Reestablishing Communication By A Mobile Node Upon Recovery From An Abrupt Shut Down - When a mobile node suffers an abrupt shut down while operating in a foreign network and recovers in its home network, the present invention enables the mobile node to reestablish communication capability, without time delay, with the nodes that had established one or more communication sessions with the mobile node prior to the abrupt shut down. The mobile node of the present invention includes an update module that determines whether additional information needs to be sent to the nodes in communication with the mobile node prior to the mobile node suffering an abrupt shut down. Based on that determination, the update module may provide additional information to such nodes.07-23-2009
20090185536Apparatus, system and method capable of pre-allocating and communicating IP address information during wireless communication - An embodiment of the present invention provides an apparatus, comprising a wireless station (STA) operable to communicate with a first access point (AP) and roam to a next access point (AP), wherein said next AP pre-caches a number of IP addresses from a backend Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server; and wherein said wireless station (STA) gathers IP layer address and sub-network information from said next Access Point (AP) during roaming.07-23-2009
20090323633FEMTOCELL HAND-OFFS - An exemplary method of facilitating hand-offs between Femtocells includes receiving an indication of a cell identifying code detected by a mobile station currently communicating with a serving Femtocell. A determination is made whether the received cell identifying code corresponds to a known Femtocell. The known Femtocell becomes a target Femtocell if a successful hand-off was previously made from the serving Femtocell to the known Femtocell. A hand-off is instigated to the target Femtocell.12-31-2009
20110032901System and Method for Communication Handoff - A system and method for performing a handoff is presented. A preferred embodiment comprises initiating a pre-handoff registration of a piece of user equipment prior to the actual handoff in order to pre-register the piece of user equipment with the new access network. During the handoff a tunnel may be created from the original access network to the new access network in order to tunnel data packets that would otherwise have been lost prior to the completion of the handoff.02-10-2011
20110032905MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE STATION PERFORMING DIVERSITY HANDOVER - A mobile station for communicating with base stations simultaneously in diversity handover. The mobile station monitors radio condition quality corresponding to a plurality of branches, selects one or more addition branch candidates based on the monitored radio condition quality. The mobile station arranges the addition branch candidates in order of the monitored radio condition quality; notifies a center of information on said plurality of branches including said addition branch candidates, the addition branch candidates being notified in the arranged order. Alternatively, the mobile station obtains a relative value of each of the addition branch candidates indicative of order of precedence to be used for the diversity handover based on the monitored radio condition quality of said addition branch candidates; and notifies a center of information on said plurality of branches including said addition branch candidates and their relative values.02-10-2011
20090147752Method, apparatus and system for assigning internet protocol address in communication system based on media independent handover - Provided is a method, apparatus and system for assigning an IP address in a communication system based on a Media Independent Handover (MIH). In the method, information about a neighbor network is obtained through an MIH service. In the event of a handover to a heterogeneous network, one or more New Care of Addresses (NCoAs) are generated using the information about the neighbor network. The generated NCoA is transmitted to a candidate network through the MIH service. A Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) operation is performed on the NCoA.06-11-2009
20090129343Mobile communication terminal, incoming data detecting method and incoming data detecting program - Included are a system information receiving unit for receiving, from a first base station or a second base station, system information including a PI within a PICH and a PCH, and a cell reselecting unit for executing a cell reselection process for switching from a wireless communication with the first base station to that with the second base station if a mobile communication terminal fails to obtain local incoming information due to unsuccessful reception of the PCH, which is made by the system information receiving unit, after receiving a notification that incoming data exists by receiving the PI within the system information received by the system information receiving unit within the first service area. Consequently, the mobile communication terminal and incoming data detecting method and program, which can securely receive incoming data even if the mobile communication terminal fails to receive the PCH although receiving incoming information with the PI.05-21-2009
20080310369METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FAST HANDOVER IN HIERARCHICAL MOBILE IPv6 - A method and system for fast handover in hierarchical mobile IPv6 includes: a mobile node which transmits a proxy route request message to a previous access router of the mobile node according to a handover expectation provided by the link layer, the previous access router transmits a network prefix information of a new access router of the mobile node to the mobile node; the mobile node which generates new care-of address according to the network prefix information; after the mobile node moves to a target network, an optimistic duplicate address detection is performed on the care-of address. The disclosure can simplify the handover procedure of hierarchical mobile IPV6 of the mobile node, reduce the signaling interaction in handover process, and shorten handover delay.12-18-2008
20080304453METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEQUENTIAL MESSAGES - A method and apparatus for sequential measurement reporting in media independent handover communications are disclosed. In a first embodiment a measurement time field is added to existing IEEE 802.21 measurement report messages. In a second embodiment a measurement sequence number field is added to existing IEEE 802.21 measurement report messages. Optionally, the measurement time field, or sequence number field may be included in an IEEE 802.21 message.12-11-2008
20130128862MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY (MME) SELECTION WITHIN A BORDER REGION - A system that includes an eNodeB device located in a border region between a first traffic area and a second traffic area, where the first traffic area includes a first pool of mobile management entities (MMEs), where the second traffic area includes a second, different pool of MMEs, and where the eNodeB is associated with the first pool of MMEs and the second pool of MMEs.05-23-2013
20130128864METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - Provided are a handover method between heterogeneous networks and an apparatus thereof. The handover method between heterogeneous networks includes receiving a handover request message indicating a handover request from an evolved Node B (eNB) to the heterogeneous network, transmitting a first indirect data forwarding tunnel request requesting generation of an indirect data forwarding tunnel between the heterogeneous networks to an enhanced Packet Data Gateway (ePDG) when the handover request message is received, receiving ePDG address information of a tunneling target ePDG from the ePDG, transmitting a second indirect data forwarding tunnel request including the ePDG address information to a serving gateway, receiving S-GW address information from the serving gateway, and transmitting a handover command including the S-GW address information to the eNB. The method can prevent data from being lost during handover procedure between heterogeneous networks.05-23-2013
20130128866METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR SECURITY PROCESSING IN HANDOVER PROCESS - A method, an apparatus, and a system for security processing in a handover process in the field of communication technologies are provided, including: in a handover preparation and handover execution processes performed by a user equipment UE and a source node and a target node on a network side, obtaining, by the target node, security capability information of the UE provided by the source node or a security verification entity, where the security verification entity includes a gateway in case of UE handover under a NodeB or a donor NodeB in case of UE handover under a relay node; and if the source node provides the security capability information of the UE.05-23-2013
20100278149APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING REVERSE-LINK DATA TRANSMISSION RATE DURING HANDOFF - Method and apparatus for controlling data transmission rate in a wireless communication system during handoff comprises a terminal recognizing an active set comprising a serving base station and at least one non-serving base station with respect to the terminal communicating with the network at a first data transmission rate, receiving a first rate control parameter from the serving base station and a second rate control parameter from the at least one non-serving base station, wherein the first and second rate control parameters are associated with determination of a second data transmission rate of the terminal during the handoff and determining the second data transmission rate in response to the first and the second rate control parameters, wherein the second data transmission rate is one of increased rate, decreased rate and same rate from the first data transmission rate.11-04-2010
20100278142Systems and Methods for Mobile Stations to Identify Radio Access Technologies - A mobile station capable of being served via a first radio access technology (RAT) and a second RAT. The mobile station includes a component configured to receive a permission to identify a cell of the first RAT in absence of a first radio access type neighbour cell list for a serving cell of the second RAT. The mobile station also includes a component configured to identify a cell of the first RAT after receiving the permission.11-04-2010
20100296484METHOD OF HANDLING CALL IN HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE USING THE SAME - A method of handling at least a call in handover in a wireless communication system and a communication device using the same are proposed. The wireless communication system includes at least a wireless communication network and a wireless communication device. The method includes the following steps. First, a wireless communication device receives a message for switching at least a packet-switched (PS) call to at least a circuit-switched (CS) call from the wireless communication network. Further, the wireless communication device sets a stream identifier of each of the CS calls to an identifier value. The method enables smooth single radio voice call continuity (SRVCC) handover from the PS call in one wireless communication network to the CS call in another wireless communication network. In addition, the method also enables SRVCC multicall handover from the PS call in one network operation mode to the CS call in another wireless communication network.11-25-2010
20100296486Method, Apparatus and Computer Program for Handover From A First Access Point To A Second Access Point - A handover method from a first access point to a second access point for a first node having a first original address in communication with a second node having a second original address, wherein the first and second nodes operate over a plurality of communication layers, each communication layer supporting one or more communication protocols. The method includes requesting a handover to the second access point from the first access point for the communication; determining a first new address for the first node based on the request for handover; routing the communication using the first new address, such that on reception of the communication the second node recognizes the first original address of the communication and can route the communication using the received first new address for one or more predetermined communication protocols.11-25-2010
20100296485MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS AND HARD HANDOVER PROCESSING METHOD - A mobile communication system includes a radio base station apparatus performing hard handover processing in synchronization with a mobile terminal under radio communication therewith; and a control apparatus transmitting first hard handover processing start timing to the radio base station apparatus, wherein the radio base station apparatus decides a possibility of handover processing delay according to the first hard handover processing start timing, and on deciding there is a possibility of delay, performs the hard handover processing at second hard handover processing start timing later than the first hard handover processing start timing.11-25-2010
20100278148CODE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system using a code division multiple access (CDMA) method, spreading code detection and frame/slot timing synchronization (cell search) is conducted by using a long code masked symbol. The spreading factor of the long code masked symbol is set to a value lower than spreading factors of other ordinary symbols. As a result, it becomes possible to reduce the circuit scale and power dissipation of the mobile terminal and raise the speed of cell search.11-04-2010
20100278141ACCESS CONTROL FOR MACROCELL TO FEMTOCELL HANDOVER - System(s) and method(s) are provided to control access to a femtocell as part of handover of a mobile device from macrocell to femtocell. Macro network platform issues a handover (HO) request towards femto network platform and a single virtual femto node, which represents a plurality of femto access points (APs). Location estimate(s) for the mobile device drives selection of a target femto AP. Selection of the target AP results in acceptance of the HO request. The mobile device also can request macro-to-femto (MTF) handover. HO neighbor list(s) is generated by decoding a network-issued identifier for each femto APs in a set of femtocells, and selectively ranking each femto AP based at least on channel quality; access privileges of the mobile device to each of the identified femto APs determines selectivity. Validation of mobile device's access right(s) drives acceptance of the MTF HO request to a top ranked femto AP.11-04-2010
20110128935APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF MS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for handover of a Mobile Station (MS) in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes, if a ranging request signal is received from the MS attempting access through a handover, determining if the BS and a serving BS of the MS are the same BS based on the ranging request signal, and, if the BS and the serving BS are the same BS, determining the effectiveness of a Cipher-based Message Authentication Code (CMAC) included in the ranging request signal using previous authentication information of the MS. The serving BS denotes a BS from which the MS has been serviced before the handover. The previous authentication information of the MS denotes authentication information that the serving BS has used for authenticating the MS.06-02-2011
20100296481METHODS IN MIXED NETWORK- AND HOST-BASED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - A first aspect of the invention relates to a method for improving security at a local mobility anchor implementing both a network-based and a host-based mobility management scheme for managing the mobility of a mobile node. It suggests a method for verifying an attachment of a mobile node (MN) to a network element in a network. A second aspect of the invention relates to a method to be implemented in a mobility anchor node, which detects whether a race condition between registration messages occurs and resolves the most recent location of a mobile node. A third aspect of the invention relates to a method for detecting whether a binding cache entry for a mobile at a correspondent node has been spoofed and to a method for registering a care-of address of a mobile node at a correspondent node.11-25-2010
20100303040MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - According to one embodiment, a mobile communication terminal comprises a first section which scans the access points to search for a targeted access point when activated and senses strength of signals received from the access points while scanning, wherein the first section is activated periodically, a second section which performs radio communication after the targeted access point is detected by means of the scanning by the first section, and a controller which specifies the home access point as the targeted access point upon identifying that the mobile communication terminal is out of a service area of the targeted access point from the signal strength sensed by the first section, and supplies the second section with power after the home access point is detected by means of the scanning.12-02-2010
20100309879ROUTING IN COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - When a connection is established between user terminals in a system supporting the separation of control traffic and user traffic into separate network nodes, the routing of user traffic is optimized by not reserving resources for the user traffic in the home network (H-MSC) of a user terminal if the user terminal is roaming (12-09-2010
20100309878MOBILITY ACCESS GATEWAY - A gateway for mobile access includes a foreign agent that receives user profile data and session state data from a home authentication, authorization and accounting (AAA) system of a mobile node, and a dynamic packet filter that performs multi-layer filtering based on the user profile data. The foreign agent transfers a session from a first network to a second network without session interruption, using the session state data, when the mobile node moves from the first network to the second network. The packet filter permits Internet access by the mobile node without passing Internet data requested by the mobile node through the first network.12-09-2010
20100177735AUDIOVISUAL SESSION SWITCHOVER FROM A FIRST ACCESS NETWORK TO A SECOND ACCESS NETWORK - The invention relates to a method of switching over an audiovisual session in a telecommunications network (07-15-2010
20090080382METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOFF OF A USER EQUIPMENT - In order to facilitate a handoff of a communication session between a legacy circuit switched network and a packet data network such as a 3GPP LTE, 3GPP2 UMB, or WiMAX network, which communication session is anchored in an IMS Voice Call Continuity Application Server (VCC AS), a Circuit Switched Proxy (CS Proxy) is provided in the packet data network that communicates with a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) of the circuit switched network. The CS Proxy allows the packet data network to communicate with the VCC AS, the MSC to communicate with the packet data network, and the MSC to communicate with the VCC AS via the packet data network, thereby allowing an exchange of handoff-related information between the packet data network and the VCC AS, the packet data network and the circuit switched network, and the circuit switched network and the VCC AS via the packet data network.03-26-2009
20130142166COLLAPSED MOBILE ARCHITECTURE - A collapsed or compact mobile architecture system includes connection nodes each comprising an access interface and at least one network interface; a backhaul network coupled to each of the connection nodes; and a mobility control unit coupled to the backhaul network. The mobility control unit comprises an Internet Protocol (IP) address server. Each of the connection nodes is configured to receive attachment requests from at least one user device. The mobility control unit is configured to receive first control plane signals from the connection nodes based on the attachment requests and transmit second control plane signals to the connection nodes based on the attachment requests. The mobility control unit is further configured to assign an IP address to each of the at least one user devices, based on the receive first control plane signals.06-06-2013
20130142168DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING AN RSRVCC PROCEDURE - Method for performing an rSRVCC procedure from UTRAN/GERAN to E-UTRAN/HSPA, comprising steps of:—receiving, a first network entity, a first message from a UE before an rSRVCC handover procedure from UTRAN/GERAN to E-E-UTRAN/HSPA involving the UE, the first message containing a pre-allocated transport address to he used for voice alter the rSRVCC handover,—sending a second message, during the rSRVCC handover procedure of a voice call, to a second network entity, the second message comprising information related to the transport address of the UE to give an instruction to send the voice media of the call to that transport address.06-06-2013
20100322193Mechanisms for Data Handling During a Relay Handover with S1 Termination at Relay - An access node, comprising at least one component configured to support forwarding of data packets to a user agent connected to a relay node, wherein the relay node is a termination point for a first tunneling path from a core network, and wherein the relay node is connected to the access node and the access node is on the first tunneling path.12-23-2010
20100322190MOBILE TERMINAL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION TIMING ADJUSTMENT APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING TRANSMISSION TIMING - A mobile terminal includes: a detection unit configured to detect reception timing of radio frames transmitted from first and second base stations; and an adjustment unit configured to adjust transmission timing of a radio frame transmitted from the mobile terminal to the first base station so that predetermined relationship between transmission timing of a radio frame transmitted from the first base station to the mobile terminal and the reception timing of a radio frame received by the first base station is satisfied, wherein the adjustment unit adjusts transmission timing of a radio frame transmitted from the mobile terminal to the second base station based on the adjusted transmission timing to the first base station and a difference between the reception timing of a radio frame transmitted from the first base station and the reception timing of a radio frame transmitted from the second base station detected by the detection unit.12-23-2010
20100322185SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMPONENT CARRIER SELECTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure relates to component carrier (CC) selection in a wireless communication system. A user equipment (UE) that is in idle mode may receive a reference signal (RS) from an evolved Node B (eNB), obtain signal quality measurements with respect to the RS, and switch to a new CC based on the signal quality measurements. For a UE that is in connected mode, an eNB may obtain uplink channel condition information corresponding to uplink CCs, obtain downlink channel condition information corresponding to downlink CCs, and select a CC pair for the UE to use based on the uplink channel condition information and the downlink channel condition information.12-23-2010
20100322194Mechanisms for Data Handling During a Relay Handover with S1 Termination at Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network Access Node - An access node comprising at least one component configured to support forwarding of data packets to a user agent connected to a relay node, wherein the relay node is connected to the access node, and wherein the access node is a termination point for a first tunneling path from a core network.12-23-2010
20100322191PHYSICAL CHANNEL ESTABLISHMENT - There is disclosed a method of controlling physical channel establishment in a wireless communication system, which method comprises: a.) determining if decoding of a system frame number is required as part of an initialization of a physical channel establishment procedure; b.) if decoding of the system frame number is not required, initializing a decoding of a system frame number for the channel to be established; and c.) if the decoding of the system frame number fails, terminating the channel establishment procedure.12-23-2010
20100322188PACKET PRIORITY CONTROL METHOD AND BASE STATION - A handover-source base station transfers a data packet destined to a mobile device received from a base station control device to a handover-destination base station as an inter-base-station transfer packet during a stopping period for which the handover-source base station stops a wireless transmission of a data packet to the mobile device. The handover-destination base station calculates a wireless transmission priority for the inter-base-station transfer packet based on a station retention time in the handover-destination base station and an estimated value of a retention time in the handover-source base station.12-23-2010
20100322187COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A base station divides a packet into a plurality of wireless transfer blocks, determines a priority of a wireless transfer block based on a delivery acknowledged amount accumulated value, allocates wireless resources to the wireless transfer blocks based on determined priority, and transmits generated wireless transfer blocks by using allocated wireless resources. A mobile station transmits a delivery acknowledgement to the base station when the wireless transfer block is properly received and a re-transmission request when the wireless transfer block is not properly received, and reproduces the packet from received wireless transfer blocks.12-23-2010
20100322192BASE STATION CONTROLLER AND WIRELESS PACKET PROCESSING DEVICE - Call connection processing is performed and a message is processed in a different subnet without UATI reassignment and takeover of a wireless session. RANs that belong to different subnets and are adjacent to each other use messages to exchange ColorCode, IP addresses of base station controllers, wireless resource information of base station transceiver subsystems and the like. When the RAN receives, from an AT, a message having ColorCode that is different from ColorCode of the RAN, the RAN transfers the message to a base station controller included in the RAN having ColorCode that matches the ColorCode included in the message.12-23-2010
20100322186IP HANDOFF METHOD IN MOBILE AGENT PLATFORM ENVIRONMENT - Provided is an Internet protocol (IP) handoff method in a mobile agent platform (MAP). Accordingly, when an IP address of a mobile node (MN) is changed while the MN moves from an MAP to an adjacent MAP, the two MAPs generate border lists so as to share information on the MN, so that it is possible to perform a rapid IP handoff.12-23-2010
20100254346METHOD FOR PERFORMING PROACTIVE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION HANDOFFS USING A MOBILE CLIENT'S ROUTE INFORMATION - A method of handing off radio resources from a first base station to a second base station includes transmitting route information and speed information associated with a client device from the client device to the first base station or to an application server. A time is selected at which the radio resources are to be handed off from the first base station to the second base station. The selection is performed by the first base station or the application server. The selection is performed dependent upon the route information and speed information.10-07-2010
20110243093Method and Apparatus for Pre-Uplink Synchronization in TD-SCDMA Handover - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose techniques and apparatus for pre-uplink synchronization in Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) handover.10-06-2011
20110007707Time-Alignment at Handover - Time-aligned handover for a mobile device is described herein. The time-aligned handover is achieved by determining a time difference between serving and target cells and determining a target propagation delay based on the time difference. In some cases, the target propagation delay may further be determined based on a serving propagation delay between the serving cell and the mobile device. A target transmission time is calculated based on the target propagation delay. The mobile device uses the target transmission time to time align transmissions to the target cell during handover.01-13-2011
20100189073Method for IP address management in networks using a proxy based approach in mobile IP telephony - A system and method for a mobile switching center to efficiently manage; assign; and reclaim the IP addresses is described. The procedure utilizes a mechanism that involves splitting the IP address assignment functionality into two parts, with the Base Station being responsible for assigning IP addresses to individual end user devices and the mobile switching center assigning a block of IP addresses to each Base Station and includes a methodology for the mobile switching center to efficiently manage; assign and reclaim the IP addresses.07-29-2010
20110128938HANDOVER PROCESSING IN MULTIPLE ACCESS POINT DEPLOYMENT SYSTEM - This disclosure relates to method, device and system for performing handover processing. A roaming list is configured at a receiver which includes multiple entries. Each entry of the roaming list includes receive parameters. A measurement operation is performed on an entry of the roaming list. A transmitter is set based on the measurement operation. Finally, an uplink signal is transmitted to an access point at a time based on a slot start time and a random timing offset. The uplink signal is transmitted while a second signal is transmitted from another node.06-02-2011
20110013598PERFORMING PROCESSING WITH RESPECT TO AN OVERHEAD MESSAGE FOR A MOBILE STATION IN TUNNEL MODE - A mobile station determines whether the mobile station is receiving an overhead message in tunnel mode during a handover procedure of the mobile station from a source wireless access network to a target wireless network. The source and target wireless access networks are according to different technologies. In response to determining that the mobile station is in the tunnel mode, tunnel mode processing of the overhead message is performed. In response to determining that the mobile station is not in the tunnel mode, different processing of the overhead message is performed.01-20-2011
20090067385Apparatus and method for obtaining information on neighbor network for vertical handover in a wireless communication system - A wireless communication system supporting Media Independent Handover (MIH) is provided. The system comprises an MIH Function (MIHF) for receiving an MIH query message requesting Layer-2 (L2) information from an MIHF of a neighbor network, and extracting the contents of the query from the MIH query message, a converter for transmitting a network specific request message which contains the contents of the query, and a point of attachment (PoA) for providing the L2 information which is requested by the network specific request message.03-12-2009
20110044286ATTACHMENT INDICATOR FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENOUS NETWORKS - In some embodiments a method comprises receiving, in a WiMAX Signaling forwarding function (SFF) node, a preregistration request for a mobile station, in response to the preregistration request, generating a flag to indicate whether the request is being processed by the WiMAX Signaling forwarding function node, and forwarding a preattachment request from the WiMAX Signaling forwarding function node to an access gateway, wherein the preattachment request comprises the flag. Other embodiments may be described.02-24-2011
20110032906Correlating Communication Sessions - The present invention relates to a session handling entity in a communication system, the session handling entity (S-CSCF) maintain a relationship between at least one public user identity, at least one private user identity and at least one contact address of a user of a communication system. Then receives from a subscription entity an indication of a correlation identity associated with the user, and stores the indication of the correlation identity as part of the relationship maintained by the maintaining means. When a session request of the user is received, determining the correlation identity for the user based on a contact address of the user included in the session request and the indication of a correlation identity associated with the user take place, and the correlation identity is included in the session request.02-10-2011
20110128936METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING IDLE MODE HANDOVER IN HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A method for supporting an idle mode handover of an Single Radio Mobile Station (SR MS) by a target Access Service Network GateWay (ASN_GW) in a heterogeneous wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes, upon detecting that an operation mode of the SR MS is to be changed from an idle mode to an active mode, acquiring an address of a Home Agent (HA) of the SR MS from a preregistered ASN_GW with which the SR MS has performed a preregistration operation, upon detecting that a Base Station (BS) is to set up a path with the preregistered ASN_GW, transmitting a message, including the address of the HA and requesting to set the target ASN_GW as a new Foreign Agent (FA) of the SR MS, to the preregistered ASN_GW, and upon receiving a message, requesting to register the target ASN_GW as the new FA of the SR MS, from the preregistered ASN_GW, setting up a data path with the HA, and then registering the target ASN_GW as the new FA of the SR MS.06-02-2011
20110019647COMMUNICATION SERVICE HANDOVER SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SERVICE HANDOVER METHOD - To achieve communication service handover in which a communication service used by a user by a certain device can be continuously used by another device, without adding functions on a network side. The system at least has: a service providing means for providing user with service; a move management means for managing move of client on the server side; a means installed in a device A for generating a file access log by a process; a means for determining a process to be handed over by user specification; a means for stopping a process and the like; a means for closing a socket and the like; a means for transmitting necessary data to a device B; a means for requesting the device B to update a socket; a means for transmitting, on a client side, a position registration message to the move management means; a means for constructing a session to use service with the service providing means; a file generation means for generating a file handled by the process; a means for communicating with outside of the device; a means installed in the device B for controlling the process; a file update means for applying a file received from the device A; a means for applying socket information received from the device A; a means for transmitting, on the client side, a position registration message; and a means for communicating with outside of the device.01-27-2011
20110019638Scrambling Code Allocation and Hand-In For Wireless Network Radio Access Points - Techniques are provided herein to allow more than a fixed number of radio access point devices to be deployed within a macro cell. At a controller apparatus, a registration request is received from a radio access point device configured to operate in a wireless network to serve one or more wireless client devices in the wireless network in respective relatively small coverage areas. The registration request comprises a macro cell identifier associated with a macro base station apparatus configured to operate in the wireless network to serve one or more wireless client devices in a relatively large coverage area, a radio access point cell identifier associated with the radio access point device, and a particular primary scrambling code selected for use by the radio access point device. When the particular primary scrambling code is not available for use, methods are provided to allocate it in a shared manner but without degrading handover service.01-27-2011
20110019640MOBILE NODE, TAKE-OVER POINT OF ATTACHMENT AND HANDOVER METHOD THEREOF FOR USE IN A HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A mobile node (MN), a take-over point of attachment (PoA) and handover methods thereof for use in a heterogeneous wireless network system are provided. The heterogeneous wireless network system comprises a gateway, a first wireless network and a second wireless network which is heterogeneous to the first wireless network. The first wireless network and the second wireless network comprise the take-over PoA and an original PoA respectively. The take-over PoA and the original PoA have an overlapping service area. The MN receives a network service from the gateway via the original PoA so far. As soon as the MN enters the overlap service area, the MN builds a link with the take-over PoA in the data-link layer immediately so that the original PoA may handover to the take-over PoA without interrupting the network service.01-27-2011
20110019641MOBILE NODE, WiMAX BASE STATION, Wi-Fi ACCESS POINT AND HANDOVER METHOD THEREOF FOR USE IN A HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A mobile node (MN), a WiMAX base station (BS), a Wi-Fi access point (AP) and a handover method therefore, for use in a heterogeneous wireless network system, are provided. The heterogeneous wireless network system comprises a gateway. The WiMAX BS and the Wi-Fi AP can interchange messages with each other via the gateway. There is an overlap service area between the WiMAX BS and the Wi-Fi AP. The MN accepts a network service, which is provided by the gateway, via the WiMAX BS. When the MN enters the overlap service area, it may handover to the Wi-Fi AP without interrupting the network service so that the gateway may provide the network service for the MN via the Wi-Fi AP.01-27-2011
20110019644METHOD FOR SWITCHING SESSION OF USER EQUIPMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SYSTEM EMPLOYING THE SAME - A system and method for switching a session of a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system are provided. According to the method, if the UE performs a handover from a macro base station of a macro cell to a femto base station of a femto cell, a femto base station transmits a path switch request message, which includes a serving gateway relocation Information Element (IE), to a Mobility Management Entity (MME) of the macro cell, in order to request a switching from an existing session of the UE to a new session managed by the femto base station. Then, in response to the path switch request message, the MME switches the existing session of the UE to the new session and transmits a path switch approval message to the femto base station. The serving gateway relocation IE includes information requesting relocation of a serving gateway of the UE to a femto serving gateway within the femto cell.01-27-2011
20110019646METHOD OF EXCHANGING MESSAGE AND DEVICES IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of exchanging messages at a device in a wireless network comprises transmitting a change request message for requesting a change of a beacon position among configuration parameters of the wireless network to a coordinator; and receiving a response message in response to the request message from the coordinator.01-27-2011
20110019642HANDOVER CONTROLLING METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A radio base station (01-27-2011
20110032902METHOD FOR DISPLAYING NETWORK NAME IN MOBILE TERMINAL AND SYSTEM THEREOF - A system and method for displaying a network name in a mobile terminal that can receive a message regarding a network name from a base station during a camp-on procedure of the portable terminal. The method for displaying a network name in a mobile terminal preferably includes receiving a specific message with a network name from a base station during a camp-on procedure; analyzing a field of the specific message to extract the network name; and displaying the extracted network name on an idle screen.02-10-2011
20110032903CONNECTION INITIATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS INCLUDING LOAD BALANCING - Disclosed embodiments include a method for establishing a wireless communication session between a base station unit and a mobile unit wherein a system controller determines which base station unit of multiple base station units is an optimal base station unit to establish the session. The method includes the system controller receiving commands from each of multiple BSUs that have received a request for wireless service from a mobile unit. The commands include information, such as a unique identifier for the sending BSU, signal strength information for the sending BSU, and channel availability for the sending BSU. The system controller directs the optimal BSU to respond to the request, and directs every other BSU to ignore the request. In at least one embodiment, Bluetooth commands are used.02-10-2011
20100177736METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INDICATING DATA RE-TRANSMISSION WHEN AREA SWITCHING IN LTE SYSTEM - A method and device for indicating data re-transmission when area switching in LTE system, wherein the method comprises the following steps: S_eNB sends PDCP-SDU CN report to T_eNB in order to announce PDCP-SDU SN received, and T_eNB announces PDCP-SDU SN received by S_eNB to UE. Thereby, UE would not re-transmit PDCP-SDU corresponding to received SN, which avoids re-transmission of useless PDCP-SDU, and saves radio resources comparing with prior solutions.07-15-2010
20110128934METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING CO-LOCATED COEXISTENCE MODE - A method and apparatus for reducing interference between systems when a plurality of wireless access systems are co-located are disclosed. To support CLC mode, an MS in the CRC mode transmits a handover request message to a first Base Station (BS) to initiate a handover process, receives a handover command message acknowledging the handover request message from the first BS, transmits a ranging request message to second BS at network reentry after handover, and receives from the second BS a ranging response message including CRC start time information that set by the second BS.06-02-2011
20110032904METHOD AND APPARATUS TO CONTROL HANDOFF BETWEEN DIFFERENT WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A wireless communications network includes a first base station system that performs wireless communications according to a first protocol (e.g., 1xEV-DO protocol) and a second base station system that performs wireless communications according to a second, different protocol (e.g., IS-2000). A link is provided between the first and second base station systems to enable a network-initiated handoff procedure. If a source base station system detects that a handoff of a mobile station to a target base station system is required, the source base station system exchanges messaging over the link with the target base station system to perform the handoff. In one example, the handoff is a hard handoff.02-10-2011
20100157941ACCESS TERMINAL HAND-OFF METHODS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - This description relates to access terminal hand-off methods in wireless networks.06-24-2010
20090034478METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING DATA TO A MOBILE DEVICE USING PLURAL ACCESS POINTS - A system and method for providing connectivity between mobile devices and access points of a network without redundant solicitation of communication by the mobile device at each access point is described. The method involves receiving a data packet at a first access point in a control group; transmitting the data packet from the first access point to the mobile device; determining if the mobile device acknowledges receipt of the data packet; responsive to determining that the mobile device failed to acknowledge receipt of the data packet, forwarding the data packet to a second access point; and transmitting the data packet from the second access point to the mobile device.02-05-2009
20090034477TERMINAL DEVICE AND METHOD FOR USE IN MEDIA ACCESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Terminal devices F and G store statistical information related to interference from an external communication system, and notify the stored statistical information to a master station E. The master station E determines the terminal device G as a candidate station for a master station capability handover destination based on collected statistical information. The master station E requests to hand over a master station capability to the terminal device G. If it is determined that the terminal device G accepts handover of the master station capability, the terminal device G starts to act as the master station.02-05-2009
20090034476PACKET DATA CONVERGENCE PROTOCOL PROCEDURES - Method and an apparatus for activating a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) reordering in a wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) which receives a handover command message, resets a radio link control (RLC) entity of the WTRU, collects a PDCP sequence number (SN) and a range of the SN of out-of-sequence service data units (SDUs), reports the PDCP SN to a radio resource control (RRC) layer of the WTRU, transmits a handover confirm message along with a first unacknowledged PDCP SN uplink (UL), and activates the PDCP reordering based on the PDCP-SN-UL is disclosed. The WTRU includes PDCP entity including a control plane (C-plane) and a user plane (U-plane). Also, a robust header compression (RoHC) entity, a user ciphering entity, and an entity for the user plane data/control is also described.02-05-2009
20090034475Soft Handoff Using A Multi-Beam Antenna System - A method for providing soft handoff between antennas in a multi-antenna system is provided according to some embodiments of the disclosure. A first packetized digital data stream may be received from a satellite using a first antenna and the data stream may include a plurality of packets that each include a header and data. The data may be provided, forwarded or stored in memory. In the meantime, a second packetized digital data stream is monitored. The second packetized digital data stream may be received from the satellite using a second antenna. The phase difference between the first packetized digital data stream and the second packetized digital data stream may be determined and added or subtracted from the second packetized digital data stream. The second packetized digital data stream may then be provided, forwarded or stored in memory.02-05-2009
20090034472System and Method for Handing Over Sessions Between Networks - A system comprising a component to assign a unique session identifier to each of a plurality of sessions between a wireless device and a correspondent node.02-05-2009
20090034473MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING MOBILE TERMINAL AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - A mobile communication system includes a plurality of base station apparatuses; and a mobile terminal configured to perform HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) communication between the mobile terminal and the plurality of base station apparatuses. The mobile terminal has a receiving section configured to receive HS-SCCH (High Speed Shared Control Channel) signals from the base station apparatus as a source of handover and the base station apparatus as a destination of the handover at a same time.02-05-2009
20090034471METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOFF BETWEEN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and system for operating a standalone client in a dual-mode mobile communications device to hand off a call between first and second wireless networks operating under different communications protocols, using SIP and ISUP signaling.02-05-2009
20100172323METHOD OF HANDOVER OF CIRCUIT-SWITCHED VOICE CALL TO PACKET-SWITCHED VOICE CALL - A method, for example, is described in the present application. Such a method can include detecting or establishing a circuit-switched call. The method can also include establishing a voice-over-internet-protocol standby call in parallel to the circuit-switched call. The method can additionally include activating the voice-over-internet-protocol standby call to become an active voice-over-internet protocol call when a handover situation is detected. The method can further include releasing resources of the circuit-switched call when the voice-over-internet-protocol standby call becomes the active voice-over-internet protocol call.07-08-2010
20100172320HANDOVER CONTROL DEVICE, METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A handover control device that conducts switching-over base station(s), in which a mobile station 07-08-2010
20110019643METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for minimizing data forwarding between Evolved Node Bs (ENBs) during handover. A User Equipment (UE) sends a status report for RLC PDUs that have suffered a change in status, to an ENB of a source cell immediately before handover occurs, thus preventing RLC PDUs which have been successfully transmitted, but for which ACK signals have not yet been received, from being forwarded.01-27-2011
20110044288WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - In order to perform handover from a first wireless communication network to a second wireless communication network, a handover control unit obtains a handover preparation time to handover, and by receiving data via the first wireless communication network and the second wireless communication network separately obtains a delay time difference between the networks based on reception times of the same data. Based on such information obtained and an amount of the data in a jitter buffer at a point to determine to start handover preparation, the handover control unit controls a reproduction speed of an application being executed. Thereby, it is possible to perform handover to a different wireless communication network without deteriorating reproduction quality and real-time property and causing packet loss.02-24-2011
20110044284Energy-Saving Mechanisms in a Heterogeneous Radio Communication Network - There is provided support mechanisms for at least one adding and removing a cell from operation in a heterogeneous radio network having a first type of basic cell for providing basic radio coverage and a second type of cell associated to a basic cell as a capacity enhancing cell. A capacity enhancing cell is selectively switched on and off (S02-24-2011
20110044285Apparatus and method for handover optimization in broadband wireless communication system - A method and apparatus optimize handover optimization in a broadband wireless communication system. Operations of a base station includes determining whether at least one of a plurality of time intervals included in a total time taken by handover, exceeds a threshold time. Whether to advance or delay a handover point is determined based on which at least one of the time interval exceeds the threshold time. And at least one handover parameter is changed to advance or delay the handover point.02-24-2011
20110116478METHOD AND MOBILE MANAGEMENT ENTITY FOR OBTAINING BEARER CONDITION DURING HANDOVER OF USER EQUIPMENT - The present invention provides a method for obtaining bearer condition during a handover of UE. The method includes: receiving, by a mobile management entity (MME), information of at least one bearer allowed to be accepted by a target base station (eNB) when the eNB makes an admission control for a UE based on received bearer information of the UE during handover of the UE; updating, by the MME, a UE-AMBR used by the target eNB based on the received at least one bearer. The present invention also provides an MME which enables the target side obtain actual bearer condition during handover of a UE.05-19-2011
20110116471METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TEMPORARILY SUSPENDING A NETWORK CONNECTION - Method for temporarily suspending a network connection is provided, which connection uses a Media Independent Handover Function (05-19-2011
20110116472HANDOVER PROCESSING IN MULTIPLE ACCESS POINT DEPLOYMENT SYSTEM - This disclosure relates to method, device and system for performing handover processing. A roaming list is configured at a receiver which includes multiple entries. Each entry of the roaming list includes receive parameters. A measurement operation is performed on an entry of the roaming list. A transmitter is set based on the measurement operation. Finally, an uplink signal is transmitted to an access point at a time based on a slot start time and a random timing offset. The uplink signal is transmitted while a second signal is transmitted from another node.05-19-2011
20110116470OPTIMIZED RESOURCE ALLOCATION FOR WIRELESS DEVICE IN PACKET TRANSFER MODE - A system and method allows a network, in response to a cell reselection notice, to serve a wireless, wireless device sufficient data to complete a pending data transfer instead of performing the immediate cell change. Appropriate allocation of radio resources to the wireless device in the current serving cell and before cell change allows reduced packet data transfer latencies for small data sessions, better load balancing and traffic resourcing between cells, appropriate allocation of uplink resources in the new target cell, and enhanced control over network congestion.05-19-2011
20100150105Apparatus And Method For Splicing Multimedia Session On Communication Networks - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method for splicing multimedia session on communication networks. The apparatus comprises a handoff manager, a session migration manager and a session splicing module. The handoff manager monitors whether a mobile host is roaming to other subnets or not, and acquires a new IP address and issues a control signal when a handoff event is triggered. When a user triggers a migration action, the session migration manager, based on the monitoring status of an ongoing session, sends a state message to a target host for performing session migration, enables a media player, and issues another control signal. The session splicing module respectively receives the two control signals, and performs a corresponding session splicing for each control signal to persist session connection.06-17-2010
20110116476HANDOVER PROCEDURE AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMITTER POWER OF FEMTO BASE STATION IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for controlling transmitter power of a femto base station in a broadband wireless communication system are provided. In the method, a femto base station receives a signal having an intensity of a threshold or more from UE and transmits a message reporting power-on of a transmitter to a femto base station controller. The UE transmits a message reporting downlink signal measurement results of femto base stations to the femto base station controller via a macro base station. The femto base station controller determines a femto base station which becomes a handover target of the UE using report messages of the femto base stations and the UE. The femto base station controller transmits a handover procedure start message to the macro base station and the determined femto base station.05-19-2011
20100034172PROVIDING AND MAINTAINING FORWARD LINK PACKET DATA SERVICE IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Various embodiments are described herein to address the need for providing and maintaining F-PDCH service to an MS (02-11-2010
20100034171METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING SERVING HIGH SPEED DOWNLINK SHARED CHANNEL CELL CHANGE - A method and an apparatus for serving high speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) cell change are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) receives pre-configured serving cell information for a target cell. The WTRU reports a measurement report and starts monitoring a high speed shared control channel (HS-SCCH) on the target cell. The WTRU may receive an HS-SCCH order over the target cell and/or a radio resource control (RRC) reconfiguration message over a source cell indicating a serving HS-DSCH cell change to the target cell. The WTRU may act upon all information elements of the RRC reconfiguration message in case that the RRC reconfiguration message is received prior to the HS-SCCH order, and act upon the pre-configured serving cell information in case that the HS-SCCH order is received prior to the RRC reconfiguration message.02-11-2010
20110128937MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes steps of: generating, at a HO-source radio base station, an intermediate key (K06-02-2011
20090207805Pre-registration, storing of pre-registration session information and session transfer in a wireless communication system - Example embodiments are directed to a system and methods of pre-registration, storing of pre-registered session information and session transfer, which may occur when an access terminal is in close proximity to a border area between a first radio access technology (RAT) area and a second RAT area. A method includes obtaining pre-registration session information if an access terminal enters a pre-registration zone, starting a pre-registration session information timer associated with the obtained pre-registration session information, and storing the obtained pre-registration session information until the associated pre-registration information timer expires. Further, both an access terminal and an access network include one or more memories configured to store more than one group of pre-registration session information and more than one timer. Each of the timers are associated with a corresponding set of pre-registration session information.08-20-2009
20110243094METHOD AND APPARATUS TO FACILITATE SUPPORT FOR MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - A method of wireless communication includes identifying at least one current resource for which a coexistence issue is present. The method also includes submitting a message to a base station that includes information indicative of the coexistence issue for the current resource(s). The handover request may include information indicative of the resource for which the coexistence issue is present and/or a desired future resource.10-06-2011
20110243095Facilitating Baton Handover in Multi-Carrier TD-SCDMA Communications Systems - Handover processes in multi-carrier carrier time division-synchronous code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA) systems include a two-step handover process. When handover of a user equipment is warranted, a hard handover is performed within a source cell of the system from a first frequency to a second frequency. A baton handover is then performed from the second frequency at the source cell to the second frequency at a target cell. In another aspect, a user equipment receives an assignment of an uplink time slot at a target cell that was selected to prevent the uplink time slot from being proximal to a downlink time slot of a source cell. The user equipment then performs the inter-frequency baton handover using the uplink time slot.10-06-2011
20090323632Efficient Handover of Media Communications in Heterogeneous IP Networks using LAN Profiles and Network Handover Rules - Methods and systems are provided for efficient handover of a media session between heterogeneous IP networks. A mobile device with Internet access can operate a software program to communicate with a corresponding node. The corresponding node may access the Internet through either a NAT router or a firewall. The mobile device establishes a media session with a corresponding node via the transmission of a first media stream and receipt of a second media stream, and a media control channel can optionally be implemented. The mobile device can acquire Internet access through a second IP address, and packets routed between the second IP address and the Internet may traverse a NAT router. The mobile device can evaluate the type of NAT at the second IP address from a stored LAN profile. A software routine can determine that handover of the media session from the first IP address to the second IP address is preferred. A software routine can determine efficient handover procedures according to Network handover rules. The mobile device may begin transmitting a third media stream to the corresponding node and the corresponding node can transmit a fourth media stream to the second IP address. A media control channel is optionally supported.12-31-2009
20100254348METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ENABLE MULTIPLE NEIGHBOUR ACCESS POINTS PREPARATION FOR HANDOVER ROBUSTNESS - Systems and methods are disclosed to enable multiple neighbour base stations or access points (APs) preparation for handover robustness. The systems and methods include generating a handover request message at a source base station (BS) for user equipment (UE) if the UE detects at least one neighbour BS. The handover request message may include a handover imminent flag. The handover request message is transmitted to the neighbour BS, wherein if the handover imminent flag indicates that the handover is not imminent, the neighbour BS does not reserve a radio network temporary identifier (RNTI) for the UE.10-07-2010
20090097449METHOD FOR HANDOVER USING RELAY STATION - A method for controlling handover using a Relay Station (RS) whose coverage includes at least one mobile station is provided. In the method, the RS monitors an uplink band allocated to a mobile station and obtains a Connection ID (CID) and a Medium Access Control (MAC) address the mobile station. The RS transmits a scanning request message including the MAC address of the mobile station to a base station. The RS then receives a scanning response message including scanning timing and scanning interval information from the base station and scans neighbor base stations using the information included in the scanning response message. This method more efficiently performs handover of mobile stations in the RS coverage.04-16-2009
20090323635METHOD OF MANAGING INTER WORKING FOR TRANSFERRING MULTIPLE SERVICE SESSIONS BETWEEN A MOBILE NETWORK AND A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK, AND CORRESPONDING EQUIPMENT - A method is dedicated to managing interworking between a WLAN network and a mobile network both connected to a core network comprising at least two GGSN nodes (G12-31-2009
20090323634METHOD OF PERFORMING PROCEDURES FOR INITIAL NETWORK ENTRY AND HANDOVER IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method of performing procedures for network entry of a mobile station in a broadband wireless access system. The method includes being allocated with transmission parameters from a base station, at least one time performing a request of an uplink band for transmission of an uplink management message to the base station, and receiving a downlink message for next procedure from the base station if the uplink band is not allocated even after the lapse of a preset time period.12-31-2009
20110085517METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETACHING USER EQUIPMENT - A method and device for detaching a user equipment (UE) are disclosed in the present invention. The UE is registered with a mobility management entity (MME) in a packet switched (PS) network and a mobile switching center (MSC) in a circuit switched (CS) network. When the UE needs to detach from the PS network, the MSC receives a Detach Request with a Detach Type indicating the detaching from the PS network only; after receiving the Detach Request, the MSC deletes the context of the PS core network entity and clears the connection between the MSC and the MME. An MME for performing UE detachment is also disclosed in the present invention. The present invention helps reduce the time delay during the subsequent handover and quickly provide users with communications services, so as to improve user's experience and meet the carriers' requirements.04-14-2011
20110134885ROUTE OPTIMIZATION METHOD AND SYSTEM - In the field of communication technologies, a route optimization method and system are provided, so as to improve the data transfer efficiency between a Mobile Node (MN) and a Corresponding Node (CN). The method includes: acquiring location information of a current access device of the CN, by a current anchor device of the MN (S06-09-2011
20110243096NETWORK APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A MESSAGE TO A TARGET NETWORK APPARATUS IN THE WIMAX SYSTEM - A network apparatus for transmitting a message to a target network apparatus is described, which may comprise a trigger device, a target profile determining device, a message preparation device and a message transmitting device. The trigger device may be adapted for determining and/or detecting a trigger for transmitting a message. The target profile determining device may be adapted for determining a profile of the target network apparatus. The message preparation device may be adapted for preparing a message for transmitting the message to the target network apparatus in accordance with the determined profile of the target network apparatus. The transmitting device may be adapted for transmitting the prepared message to the target apparatus.10-06-2011
20110211558HANDOVER METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL AND HOME AGENT USED IN THE METHOD - Disclosed is a technique to provide a handover method that can improve the communication efficiency by reducing tunnel overhead between a mobile node and a home agent. When the mobile node (UE) (09-01-2011
20110211556METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR CELL HANDOVER - A method apparatus and system for cell handover are provided. The method includes the following steps. User equipment (UE) initiates a cell handover. If the UE is not in a downlink discontinuous reception state, the cell handover is performed when the UE is not in the downlink discontinuous reception state. If the UE is in a downlink discontinuous reception state, the UE exits the downlink discontinuous reception state and performs the cell handover when the UE is not in the downlink discontinuous reception state. The embodiments of the present invention prevent the problem that the UE cannot receive a handover indication command during the cell handover in time because the UE is in the downlink discontinuous reception state, thus reducing time delay of the cell handover, avoiding longer service interruption, and reducing the call drop rate.09-01-2011
20100014482RADIO BASE STATION AND RADIO COMMUNICTION SYSTEM FOR STARTING INTER-SYSTEM HANDOFF - It is possible to forcibly cause a terminal to perform an inter-system handoff for system control in a region where service areas of a plurality of radio access systems are overlapped. When it is detected that communication resource of the radio base station is insufficient, a communication terminal which can be replaced by a communication using other system is selected and an inter-system handoff is started.01-21-2010
20100177738METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPERATING MOVING NETWORK IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for operating a moving network in a mobile communication system are provided. A method of a Base Station (BS) for operating a Moving Network (MN) includes determining an operation mode of the MN in a cell by collecting information of the cell, and transmitting the determined operation mode to the MN. The operation mode includes at least one of an Operation ON mode in which the MN maintains links to Mobile Stations (MSs) in a service coverage area of the MN, and an Operation OFF mode in which the MN turns off the links to the MSs in the service coverage area of the MN.07-15-2010
20110149912APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING HANDOVER IN A MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method for supporting handover in a communication system using a multi-carrier approach. The method includes transmitting a handover request message to a serving base station (BS) through a first carrier; receiving a handover response message including neighboring base station information and temporary carrier information capable of performing a handover procedure from the serving base station through the first carrier; selecting a target base station (BS) through the neighboring base station information received from the serving base station; transmitting a handover (HO) indication message indicating a handover to the target base station to the serving base station through the first carrier; transmitting a ranging request message for synchronizing an uplink channel with the target base station to the target base station through the temporary carrier; and receiving a ranging response message from the target base station.06-23-2011
20090323638METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATIC HANDOVER OPTIMIZATION - A method for wireless communications is provided. The method includes determining a set of handover parameters that facilitate a handover between cells in a wireless network and analyzing the set of handover parameters. The method includes dynamically adjusting the parameters to mitigate handover failures between the cells.12-31-2009
20090310561MOBILE DEVICES WITH FEMTO CELL FUNCTIONALITY - Aspects describe communications environments in which femtocell capability is provided to devices within the communications network. A non-femto enabled device and/or a femto enabled device can communicate with a femto enabled device in the same geographical area for femto-enabled peer-to-peer communication. Two non-femto enabled devices can be provided femto functionality through utilization of a femto enabled device, which operates as a hub between the two devices. Other aspects relate to enhanced position determination, adaptive coverage enhancement, local mobile networks, open access femtocells without a backhaul, and local broadcast of media though utilization of femto enabled devices.12-17-2009
20100054204SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SERVING GATEWAY HAVING MOBILE PACKET PROTOCOL APPLICATION-AWARE PACKET MANAGEMENT - Mobile protocol packets, with a header field and a payload field, are communicated from a user mobile equipment to an application-aware serving gateway. The application-aware mobile protocol serving gateway detects header information in the header field and application information in the payload field to manage the mobile protocol packets based on a policy.03-04-2010
20100046467METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER AUTHENTICATION - A handover authentication method includes performing, by a wireless network server, a first authentication between a client and the wireless network server via a first network gateway; obtaining first authentication keys for the wireless network server and the client based on the first authentication; determining, by the wireless network server, a need to handover the client from the first network gateway to a second network gateway; deriving, by the wireless network server and from the first authentication keys, a handover authentication key shared by the client and the wireless network server; obtaining, by the wireless network server, second authentication keys for the network server and the client; and serving, by the wireless network server, the client via the second network gateway.02-25-2010
20100061340ARRANGEMENT AND METHOD RELATING TO DIRECT TUNNELLING IN CONNECTION WITH HANDOVER IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a packet data support node (03-11-2010
20100067486HANDOVER METHOD IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM AND APPARATUS USED IN HANDOVER METHOD - When a mobile station moves from a communication area of a first access point to a communication area of a second access point, an information processing device provided for the second access point functions as an extraction device, a request device, and a communication device. The extraction device extracts first access point identification information identifying the first access point from a connection request message received from the mobile station. The request device requests the first access point to transmit the control information relating to the communication of the mobile station using the first access point identification information. The communication device establishes a link to the mobile station using the control information acquired from the first access point.03-18-2010
20100054207L2 Tunneling-based Low Latency Single Radio Handoffs - An example of this invention provides low latency handovers between Mobile WiMAX and 2G/3G/LTE networks with only a single radio transmitting at any given point in time, by establishing L2 tunnel between 3GPP MME and WiMAX ASN for control plane signaling to perform pre-registration, pre-authentication and context transfer to the target network, while UE maintains its connection to the source network, and by setting up bearer path for packet forwarding between Servicing Gateway and WiMAX ASN. An example of this invention uses a virtual eNB to facilitate low latency L2 handoffs to legacy 2G/3G networks with minimum impact to SGSN and MME.03-04-2010
20100054208BASE STATION AND SERVICE FLOW ESTABLISHMENT METHOD - A base station includes a determining unit that determines whether a competition occurs between an identifier of a first service flow established with respect to a mobile station and an identifier of a second service flow which is requested to newly establish with respect to the mobile station; a changing unit that changes the identifier of the first service flow or the identifier of the second service flow, when the determining unit determines that the competition of the identifiers occurs; and an establishing unit that establishes the second service flow by using the identifier of the second service flow with the competition being eliminated against the first service flow through the change by the changing unit.03-04-2010
20100054206HANDOFF MANAGEMENT BASED ON NON-TRAFFIC STATE UPLINK SIGNALS - A detecting base station receives a non-traffic state uplink signal transmitted from a wireless communication device to an originating base station. The originating base station transmits a search message instructing the wireless communication device to search for an alternate base station.03-04-2010
20100322195METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAPPING 3GPP SERVICE PRIMITIVES TO MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER EVENT SERVICES - A Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) media independent handover (MIH) service access point (SAP) is configured to provide MIH event services, (e.g., IEEE 802.21 event services), by mapping service primitives to the MIH event services. The service primitives may be 3GPP service primitives which originate from at least one of a radio resources (RR) layer, a logical link control (LLC) layer, a general packet radio service (GPRS) mobility management (GMM) layer, a session management (SM) layer, a non-access stratum (NAS), an access stratum (AS) and an evolved universal terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA)/evolved core network (E-CORE) system. The event services may include a link parameter change event service, a link up event service, a link going down event service, a link down event service, a handover complete event service and a link detected event service.12-23-2010
20090052401MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION CONTROLLER, MOBILE DEVICE, HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - The present invention provides a mobile communication system which can perform handover without deleting user data in an HSDPS system.02-26-2009
20110080890Handover Mechanisms With Synchronous PDCP Protocol Under Various Relay Architectures - A method is provided for handing over a user equipment (UE). The method includes a donor access node with which the UE is in communication via a relay node receiving UE handover context information. The method further includes the donor access node using the UE handover context information to identify data packets that belong to the UE and are to be forwarded from the donor access node to a target access node.04-07-2011
20110176509SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INFORMING SERVING CELL OF TARGET CELL HANDOVER CAPABILITY - Systems and methods of informing a serving cell of a target cell handover capability are provided. In some cases, a mobile station determines whether inbound handover is possible and communicates this to the serving cell. The mobile station may make this determination based on broadcast information from the target cell. Alternatively, the mobile station may make this determination based on a message generated by a target cell controller that is sent to the mobile station through the serving cell. In another example, the mobile station construes the absence of a response to a cell change notification as an indication that inbound handover to the target cell is not possible.07-21-2011
20110176513METHOD FOR PREPARING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURES AND TERMINAL THEREOF - A random access procedure between a mobile terminal and a network is performed based upon the characteristics of a RACH preamble. If the RACH preamble was explicitly signaled by the network, a downlink channel is monitored until a new transmission is indicated according to radio resource allocation information received from the network. If the RACH preamble was not explicitly signaled by the network, a contention resolution timer is started and the downlink channel is monitored until the contention resolution timer expires. Such monitoring of downlink channels in a more efficient manner, results in effective reduction in power consumption.07-21-2011
20110176514SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FAST NETWORK REENTRY IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and method for fast network re-entry in a broadband wireless access communication system. A mobile station transmits a first message requiring fast network re-entry to a base station and performs the fast network re-entry together with the base station when receiving a second message approving the fast network re-entry from the base station. The base station receives the first message, authenticates the first message using final session information of the mobile station that is previously stored in the base station, transmits the second message to the mobile station when succeeding in authentication of the first message, and performs the fast network re-entry together with the mobile station.07-21-2011
20110176511REDUCING RESOURCE ALLOCATIONS FOR INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOVER BETWEEN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Disclosed is a method for reducing resource allocations for inter-technology handover between heterogeneous wireless communication networks. The method includes a first step of completing network entry and new session registration procedures for a mobile station with a handover target technology network. A next step includes defining an activity mode of the new session. A next step includes waiting for the expiration of a resource timer at the target network. A next step includes assigning the resources for the new session upon the expiration of the timer.07-21-2011
20110176510METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER AND DOMAIN TRANSFER IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The invention relates to a method and a system for a packet switched handover and a domain switch for a wireless communications network comprising a user equipment (UE), a packet switched domain (07-21-2011
20100135255METHOD FOR DETACHING USER EQUIPMENT - A method for detaching User Equipment (UE) is disclosed to detach the UE in case of signaling reduction. The method includes the following steps: a UE detachment operation of a first network access control entity is triggered, where the detachment operation is a complete detachment operation; the first network access control entity detaches the UE according to the detachment operation type, and triggers the complete detachment of a second network access control entity; and the second network access control entity performs the detachment operation according to the trigger operation of the first network access control entity. Thus, after the UE is detached from a network access control entity, the network access control entity may notify another network access control entity by various means, so that another network access entity implements subsequent processes.06-03-2010
20100135254APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REDUCING SIZE OF RANGING RESPONSE SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for performing network re-entry of a terminal in a base station of a wireless communication system are provided. In the method, when a RaNGing-REQuest (RNG-REQ) signal is received from the terminal, a Connection IDentifier (CID) is assigned to at least one Service Flow (SF) whose service providing is accepted of one or more SFs that have been serviced by the terminal. A bit map sequentially representing CID assignment information of SFs according to an SF index is generated. A RaNGing ReSPonse (RNG-RSP) signal including the bit map and the assigned CID information is generated. The RNG-RSP signal is transmitted to the terminal.06-03-2010
20100135253METHOD OF PROVIDING SESSION MOBILITY AND USER TERMINAL - A method of providing session mobility and a user terminal are provided. The method includes, when a session is set through one interface, receiving a request for session transfer to a network corresponding to another interface, checking the available resource capacity of the network to which the session will be transferred, and determining whether or not to transfer the session based on the result of the check operation and establishing a session with the network. The method can improve the reliability of an Internet protocol (IP) multimedia subsystem (IMS) service continuity function.06-03-2010
20100135252METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR REDUCING MAC LAYER HANDOFF LATENCY IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - In accordance with the present invention, computer implemented methods and systems are provided for reducing handoff latency in a wireless network. In response to detecting that a handoff is necessary, the present invention uses a selective scanning algorithm that includes the use of a channel mask and/or a caching algorithm for detecting one or more new access points.06-03-2010
20100135251FAST UPLINK DATA TRANSMISSION USING E-DCH ENHANCED RANDOM ACCESS WITHOUT A UE SPECIFIC E-RNTI - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate communicating user plane data over common control resources by specifying a UTRAN radio network temporary identifier (U-RNTI). In this regard, a Node B or an RNC receiving the user plane data can associate the data to the UE based on the U-RNTI. The user plane data can be transmitted in a control message with the associated U-RNTI, such as a CELL UPDATE message or another message having a U-RNTI specified in a media access control (MAC)-i header or other header in the message. The control message can also include parameters regarding the existence and specifications of the user plane data. In this regard, a UE can communicate user plane data when in a (UTRAN) registration area paging channel (URA_PCH) or other relatively inactive state though it has not received an enhanced radio network temporary identifier (E_RNTI).06-03-2010
20100135246MOBILITY SOLUTION SELECTION FOR VOICE OVER EPS - A method and apparatus for determining handover (HO) signaling in a communications network. The method of the present invention examines the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) of a user equipment (UE) during HO and, based on the examination, determines whether Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) or circuit switched (CS) over Long Term Evolution (LTE) using a Generic Access Network Controller (GANC) should be used in the HO.06-03-2010
20100135248Mobile Communication Terminal and Communication Device - Disclosed is a technique for reducing delay when a mobile communication terminal starts communication and reducing consumption of a power resource of the mobile communication terminal. An MN (mobile node) (06-03-2010
20100135247System and method for base station assisted mobility detection for mobile handsets - In this disclosure a technique of base station assisted mobility detection of handsets is described. More specifically by transmitting the subnet ID in the Beacon, a base station simplifies the process of network detection. This also leads to a significant reduction in handoff latency by giving the handset ample time to prepare for the impending handoff.06-03-2010
20100135249Method and Apparatus for Seamless Handover in a Wireless Communication Network - In a wireless communication network where base stations receive protocol data units (PDUs) from mobile stations for decompression and deciphering for ordered, sequential transfer as service data units (SDUs) to an associated core network, the teachings presented herein provide a method of supporting seamless handover of a mobile station from a source base station to a target base station. By way of example, the teachings herein apply to a network based on the E-UTRA specifications, as promulgated by the 3GPP. However, that example is non-limiting, as the teachings herein apply to any network that employs in-sequence data delivery and duplicate data detection at handover. Broadly, the source base station forwards out-of-sequence SDUs and corresponding sequence number information to the target base station in support of seamless handover, and the target base station uses that information to request retransmissions as needed for packet reordering.06-03-2010
20100135245Method for Avoiding Resource Being Released Mistakenly during Tracking Area Update or Handover Process - A method for avoiding resource being released mistakenly during tracking area update or handover process comprising: determining, by a target Mobility Management Entity MME, whether to use an old System Architecture Evolution Serving GW or to reselect a new Serving GW; if the target MME determines to select a new serving GW, notifying the original MME, the original MME sending a request for deleting bearer to the old Serving GW. The technical scheme of the present invention can avoid that the original MME will still send a request for deleting subscriber context to the old Serving GW when the target MME still uses the old Serving GW rather than selects a new one during tracking area update or handover process of the subscriber, which results in the appearance of a problem that the resource related to the subscriber in the old Serving GW is released mistakenly.06-03-2010
20110149908GSM AND LTE MULTIPLEXING - In a method of operating a wireless terminal, the wireless terminal (06-23-2011
20090147753MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, GATEWAY, CONCENTRATOR, AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - According to this invention, there is provided a method applicable to the system which comprises a plurality of base stations each forming radio zones and storing a mobile terminal, and a gateway being connected to a packet communication network and relaying packet communication between the packet communication network and the mobile terminal. The method comprises buffering packets transmitted by a downlink to the mobile terminal in a packet buffer, requiring retransmission of unarrived packets in handover accompanied by movement among the radio zones, reading the packet required from the mobile terminal to retransmit the packet to the mobile terminal that is a request source, and assigning serial identification numbers to packets at least in a start to an end of the handover. When the identification numbers of the reached packets are discontinuous, the mobile terminal requires retransmission of packets needed to eliminate the discontinuity.06-11-2009
20090028111NODE B AND RNC ACTIONS DURING A SERVING HSDPA CELL CHANGE - An apparatus and method in accordance with the present invention reduce the amount of data that is stalled in a source Node B after a serving HS-DSCH cell change in a communication system that includes a serving RNC and at least one Node B. In a first embodiment, the RNC temporarily suspends data transmissions from the RNC to the Node B. In a second embodiment, the activation time is used in data scheduling. In a third embodiment, a more robust MCS level is selected. In a fourth embodiment flow control is employed for the data transmitted between the RNC and the Node B.01-29-2009
20110075632HETEROGENEOUS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CIRCUIT SWITCHED HANDOVER - A heterogeneous communication system of performing a handover from a WiMAX communication system to a LTE communication system includes a UE adapted to request a handover connection establishment to the LTE communication system while receiving a CS service from the WiMAX communication system, request an authentication to the first WiMAX system, preferentially perform the handover to the LTE communication system, and switch to the LTE communication system in response to a handover message; and a GANC adapted to deliver the request of the handover connection establishment to the LTE communication system, notify the procedure of the authentication to the LTE communication system and provide the handover command message to the UE to switch to the LTE communication system, thereby providing the CS service to the UE through the LTE communication system. A handover from an LTE communication system to a WiMAX communication system is also disclosed.03-31-2011
20110075630ENABLING INTER FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENT SCANNING WHILE REMAINING AT ONE FREQUENCY - Techniques for enabling inter frequency assignment scanning while remaining at one frequency are described. In one embodiment, for example an apparatus may include a wireless interface subsystem, a memory and a processor. The memory may include data and instructions to operate the processor to communicate with a first fixed device at a first frequency during a first communication session, scan for one or more first preambles at the first frequency from a second fixed device and scan for one or more second preambles at the first frequency from a third fixed device. In an embodiment, the second fixed device may operate at a second frequency and the third fixed device may operate at a third frequency. The apparatus may include a processor operative to perform a handover based on the one or more first preambles and the one or more second preambles for a second communication session.03-31-2011
20110096749Method For Simple Retrieval Of Network Access Selection Information - The invention relates to a method and system for network access selection comprising an Access Selection Server (ASS) (04-28-2011
20110249652Methods and Apparatuses for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) from CS to LTE - A method for a call control node (MSC Server) enhanced for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) allowing for a session transfer of a call involving a User Equipment (UE) of a handover party from a circuit switched (CS) access towards a target packet switched (PS) access is provided, the call involving said handover party and another party, said call being anchored in an Service Centralization and Continuity Application Server (SCC AS) of the IP-Multimedia-Subsystem (IMS), the method comprising the steps of receiving (10-13-2011
20110249651APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING COOPERATIVE HANDOVER IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for supporting a cooperative handover in a broadband wireless communication system. A method for operating a mobile station (MS) for a cooperative handover in a broadband wireless communication system includes determining a handover to a target BS and omitting a CID update process of the MS during the handover process to the target BS, wherein the CID of the MS is shared beforehand between a serving BS and the target BS.10-13-2011
20110249650METHOD FOR PERFORMING A RICH CALL CAPABILITY INDICATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention relates to a method for establishing a circuit switched call between a first electronic device and a second electronic device over a circuit switched communication system, exchanging of capabilities of the first electronic device and the second electronic device, establishing a media component between the first electronic device and the second electronic device over a packet switched communication system. In the method also radio access network information is obtained to the first electronic device. The first electronic device requests an in-band signal to the second electronic device for indicating an availability of a type of the media component. The second electronic device detects the in-band signal in the second electronic device and indicates the availability of the type of the media component on a user interface of the second electronic device.10-13-2011
20110080892Architecture For Termination At Access Device - A method is provided for handing over a user equipment (UE). The method includes a donor access node with which the UE is in communication via a relay node receiving UE context information from the relay node. The method further includes the donor access node using the UE context information to identify data packets that belong to the UE.04-07-2011
20110080893Methods and apparatus for wireless communication - One method of wireless communication involves acknowledging that an anchor base station received a handover indication signal. Another method involves: receiving, from base stations of an active set, offset signals identifying a respective differences in time between a reference time and respective times when the base station received a ranging signal from a mobile station; and transmitting, to the mobile station, a ranging control signal in response to the respective offset signals. Another method involves transmitting, to a mobile station in response to an active set signal, a system configuration information signal including system configuration information of a base station in an active set. Another method involves determining an uplink control channel power parameter in response to channel condition signals received from base stations in an active set. Another method involves transmitting a control signal to base stations in an active set on respective control channels. Apparatuses are also disclosed.04-07-2011
20090213812METHOD OF SCANNING CELLS BASED ON LBS INFORMATION AND SELECTING HETEROGENEOUS CELLS - A method of scanning cells based on location based service (LBS) information and selecting heterogeneous cells is provided. The method includes, at a mobile station, setting a supplementary field of a registration request message and notifying a base station whether or not handover based on location information is supported, while performing a network entry process, generating location based service (LBS) information while scanning is performed using the coordinates of base stations of an LBS advertisement message received from the base station, if channel quality measured by the mobile station is less than a threshold value, including the generated LBS information in a scanning report message and transmitting the scanning report message to the base station, receiving recommended base station information of the heterogeneous cells selected based on the LBS information from the base station, and performing the scanning on the basis of the recommended base station information. By this configuration, it is possible to reduce a time consumed for the scanning performed by the mobile station and reduce the latency of cell selection/reselection/handover, by reducing the number of target cells which will be scanned by the mobile station on the basis of the LBS information of the mobile station in the scanning process which is performed before the cell selection/reselection/handover between the heterogeneous cells.08-27-2009
20090213811Roaming encoded information reading terminal - A portable encoded information reading (EIR) terminal for incorporation in a data collection system having a host computer, a plurality of peer EIR terminals, and a plurality of interconnected networks including one or more wireless networks, can comprise a central processing unit (CPU), a memory, an encoded information reading (EIR) device configured to output raw message data containing an encoded message or decoded message data corresponding to an encoded message, and at least one wireless communication interface. The EIR terminal can provide IEEE 802.11-conformant wireless distribution system services, including association, disassociation, distribution, integration, and re-association, to the peer EIR terminals. The EIR terminal can be associated with a home network and have a home address belonging to the address range associated with the home network. The EIR terminal can participate in one or more communication sessions and exchange messages, at least one of which can include decoded message data corresponding to an encoded message, with the host computer. The EIR terminal can maintain active communication sessions using its home address when roaming between the interconnected networks.08-27-2009
20090213810TRANSFER OF COMMUNICATION SESSIONS BETWEEN BASE STATIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and devices are provided to enable continuing a communication session currently carried by a mobile subscriber station (MSS) while switching from a first base station to a second base station. During the communication session that is being held with the MSS, a first IP datagram is determined from among a plurality of IP datagrams associated with that communication session and received at a network gateway adapted to convey IP traffic received from the MSS. Following that determination, IP datagrams that will be received at that network gateway after that first IP datagram and which are addressed to the MSS are backed up. Upon establishing a connection between the MSS and the second base station, the first base station ceases to convey uplink traffic originated by the MSS, the IP datagrams that were backed up are forwarded to the MSS, and all further IP datagrams which are addressed to the MSS and received at that network gateway after establishing the connection between the MSS and the second base station, will be forwarded to the MSS through the second base station.08-27-2009
20090213809METHOD OF PERFORMING HANDOVER FOR A DUAL TRANSFER MODE IN A WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) handover by a mobile station (MS) in a wireless mobile communication system is disclosed. More specifically, the MS receives information of neighbor cells, wherein the information is a list of neighbor cells whose signal strengths the MS should measure and transmits a message including results of the measured neighbor cells. Furthermore, the MS receives a message from a network, wherein the message is a DTM Handover Command message which instructs the MS to perform a DTM handover procedure with one of the neighbor cells. Lastly, the MS performs the DTM handover procedure.08-27-2009
20090213808Maintenance of data connections during the changeover of a communication access network - A method for maintaining at least one data connection to a terminal during a changeover from a first communication access network to at least one second communication access network, comprising at least two private user identities and at least two IP addresses are allocated to the terminal in order to form a public user identity for the user of the terminal, wherein the terminal registers itself in an IP communication network in parallel per communication access network with in each case one private user identity and with the common public user identity and an IP address for the first communication access network and the at least one second communication access network.08-27-2009
20100124200METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PREDICTING HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for predicting a handover of a Mobile Station (MS) of a plurality of MSs to one or more target Base Stations (BSs) of a plurality of BSs in a wireless communication network. The method includes predicting a need for a handover of a MS to one or more target BSs selected from the plurality of BSs based on a handover threshold. The handover threshold is associated with a quality of a signal received by the MS. The method further includes transferring datapath associated with the MS to one or more of the one or more target BSs and one or more gateways prior to the handover of the MS. The one or more gateways are associated with one or more of a serving BS associated with the MS and the one or more target BSs. The plurality of BSs includes the serving BS.05-20-2010
20110069676INFORMATION SERVICE AND EVENT SERVICE MECHANISMS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A WTRU includes a transceiver and a media independent handover (MIH) function (MIHF), which transmits via the transceiver a request to set information in an external device. The MIHF receives a response to the request to store the information in the network node indicating that the request to store the information in the network node was successful.03-24-2011
20110069678WIRELESS METROPOLITAN AREA NETWORK ARCHITECTURE FOR MANAGING NETWORK RESOURCES AND MOBILITY - The present invention proposes an infrastructure to enable seamless mobility for wireless metropolitan area networks (WMANs) and to provide for management of spectrum and network resources. An WMAN reference model is introduced where the radio resource management (RRM) and handover (HO) sub-layer is introduced into the protocol stack. The WMAN management plane is responsible for the RRM and HO management. Several physical and logical network architecture options for WMAN management are proposed.03-24-2011
20110069679MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NODE APPARATUS, AND INTER-NETWORK HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - A mobile communication system includes at least one mobile terminal that can access a circuit switched network and a wireless broadband network, and a node apparatus. The node apparatus integrates, into one physical node, a first gateway node interconnecting the circuit switched network and an IP network and a second gateway node interconnecting a core network accommodating the wireless broadband network and an external packet data network. When the mobile terminal performs handover from one of the circuit switched network and the wireless broadband network to the other network, one of the first gateway node and the second gateway node, being a handover-destination node, allocates call connection path node identification information managed by the other gateway note being a handover-source node, as new call connection path node identification information of the handover-destination node.03-24-2011
20110069675METHOD FOR TRANSITIONING OF STATE MACHINES AFTER RADIO ACCESS NETWORK IS RESELECTED AND TERMINAL - A method for transitioning of a state machine after a radio access network (RAN) is reselected includes: generating first information when a mobile terminal reselects from an HRPD network to an LTE network; after receiving the first information, setting, by a Signaling Adaptation Protocol (SAP) of the HRPD module air interface protocol, the TunnelModeEnabled parameter to a first identifier, so that air interface related sub-protocols of an HRPD module know that the mobile terminal has reselected to the LTE network.03-24-2011
20110075633Data Forwarding During Handover in a Self-Backhauled Cell - A method is implemented in an anchor eNodeB of a network, where the anchor eNodeB communicates with a self-backhauled eNodeB via a radio interface and where the network further includes another eNodeB. The method includes determining whether a user equipment (UE) is being handed off from the first self-backhauled eNodeB to the other eNodeB. The determining is based on: receiving (03-31-2011
20110075634HANDOVER METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - It is determined whether or not to perform a handover to switch a destination of connection of a mobile terminal (03-31-2011
20110075631Method for improved handover in multiple interface application - A method is provided for establishing a backup interface among multiple interfaces serving a mobile node, for a handover that is undetectable in advance. The invention methodology operates to cause a Foreign Agent associated with the multiple interfaces to keep a binding record of each of the multiple interfaces for which the mobile node has successfully completed the registration process. A novel Mobile IP extension is also added to facilitate the backup FA binding of the invention methodology.03-31-2011
20080267130HANDLING CELL RESELECTIONS AND STATE TRANSITIONS FOR HIGH-SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS - A wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) is configured to operate in an high speed data packet access (HSDPA) mode in a cell and/or state and to clear HSDPA resources when moving out of the cell and/or state. The WTRU is configured to clear HSDPA resources when conditions to perform high speed downlink shared channel reception are not met.10-30-2008
20110069677Systems and Methods for Handoff in Wireless Network - Methods performed by a mobile node (MN) in a secured network for handoff of communication from a serving access point (AP) to a target AP are provided. In a bounded delay channel switching (BDCS) method, the MN periodically switches between a first channel and one of multiple other channels during handoff, utilizes the first channel to transmit/receive packets to/from a corresponding node (CN) via the serving AP and utilizes one of the other channels to perform the handoff procedure to the target AP. In a dual-MAC switching (DMS) method, the MN employs a first MAC (medium access control) address to transmit/receive packets to/from the serving AP and a second MAC address to perform the handoff procedure to the target AP. The BDCS and DMS methods may be used concurrently, and may be used in a secured network that complies with, e.g., the IEEE 802.11, IEEE 802.1x or IEEE 802.11i plus IEEE 802.11f standards.03-24-2011
20110069674ROUTING OF CALLS TO CORE NETWORK BASED ON THE LOCATION OF THE FEMTO CELL - A femto gateway maintains information about the location of femto cells and areas served by mobile switching centers. The gateway maintains a mapping so that it selects a desired mobile switching center (MSC) and SGSN that is likely to be used if the user equipment leaves the coverage area of the femto cell and enters a macro cell or vice versa.03-24-2011
20120201224INFORMATION OBTAINING AND NOTIFICATION, DATA MESSAGE FORWARDING AND HANDOVER METHOD AND ACCESS NODE - An information obtaining, information notification, data message forwarding and switch method and an access node during a terminal switch process are provided. The access node comprises an opposite end information storage unit, which is set to store identification and locator mapping information of correspondent nodes of all accessed terminals; an message transceiver unit, which is set to: after establishing a connection with the terminal that switches to the local access node, receive a data message sent by the terminal to the correspondent node, according to the identification of the correspondent node in the data message, initiate an inquiry to a home ILR or an original access node of the terminal before switch-in to acquire and locally store the mapping information of the correspondent node, if the identification and locator mapping information of the correspondent node cannot be locally searched out.08-09-2012
20120201223Method and Apparatus for Avoiding Physical Random Access Channel Collisions - A method and apparatus for avoiding Physical Random Access Channel collisions is provided. The method may comprise transmitting, by a first user equipment (UE), a first access request using a synchronization code in a subframe to a Node B, and receiving an acknowledgement from the Node B, wherein the acknowledgement indicates that a second UE has transmitted a second access request in the subframe using the synchronization code. Further, the method may comprise receiving, in a sub-frame, a first synchronization code from a first UE and a second synchronization code from a second UE, and preventing transmission of an acknowledgment to both the first and second UEs based on a determination that the received first and second synchronization codes are the same.08-09-2012
20110149911Method and System for Mobile Station Handover, and Mobile Station - In a method embodiment, the current serving BS of the MS obtains information about neighboring BSs, and broadcasts the information about the neighboring BSs. The MS scans the neighboring BSs according to the neighboring BS information broadcast by the current serving BS. If no neighboring BS having the same bandwidth as the current serving BS fulfills requirements, the MS scans and measures signal quality of neighboring BSs with a different bandwidth and selects several BSs compliant with signal quality requirements and suitable as target BSs to make up a target BS list. The MS performs handover to a target BS in the target BS list.06-23-2011
20110149907CALL SETUP FOR ACCESS DIVISION MULTIPLEXING - A wireless terminal (06-23-2011
20110149906METHOD FOR REDUCING PACKET ORDERING TIME OF LAYER 3 HANDOVER AND MOBILE SATELLITE TERMINAL USING THE SAME - There are provided a method for reducing a packet ordering time of layer 3 handover and a mobile satellite terminal using the same. The method for reducing a packet ordering time of layer 3 handover of a mobile router in a home agent of a satellite network connected with the mobile router includes: transmitting a first packet and a second packet to the mobile router through a satellite link of the mobile router; transmitting a sequence control packet to the mobile router through the satellite link; and transmitting a third packet to the mobile router via a wireless link of the mobile router. The sequence control packet provides a reference time for rapidly reordering the second and third packets which reach the mobile router in a reverse sequence.06-23-2011
20110149905HANDOVER METHOD BETWEEN eNBs IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for processing a handover procedure in a mobile communication system includes: receiving a message having radio access bearer information for radio resource re-establishment and packet forwarding from a target base station; searching uplink (UL) packet forwarding indicator information included in the message including the radio access bearer information; and forwarding UL/DL packets at a source base station when the UL packet forwarding information is set to ON. The method further includes, when UL packet forwarding indicator is set to ON, having bitmap information, which indicates whether or not to receive uplink (UL) packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) SDU packets, in an SN status transfer message transmitted to the target base station from the source base station.06-23-2011
20110149904HANDOVER SCHEMES FOR WIRELESS SYSTEMS - One method of wireless communication involves acknowledging that an anchor base station received a handover indication signal. Another method involves: receiving, from base stations of an active set, offset signals identifying a respective differences in time between a reference time and respective times when the base station received a ranging signal from a mobile station; and transmitting, to the mobile station, a ranging control signal in response to the respective offset signals. Another method involves transmitting, to a mobile station in response to an active set signal, a system configuration information signal including system configuration information of a base station in an active set. Another method involves determining an uplink control channel power parameter in response to channel condition signals received from base stations in an active set. Another method involves transmitting a control signal to base stations in an active set on respective control channels. Apparatuses are also disclosed.06-23-2011
20110002296Method and transcoder entity for tandem free operation in a telecommunication network - A method is described for engaging a first transcoder entity in a tandem free operation session with a second transcoder entity. The transcoder entities control the tandem free operation session and the insertion of transcoders into the session. They also perform a synchronization procedure of the first transcoder entity and the second transcoder entity and send tandem free operation frames. The tandem free operation frames are sent from the first transcoder entity to the second transcoder entity during execution of the synchronization procedure. A transcoder entity and a program embodying the invention is also described.01-06-2011
20110249653SECURE AND SEAMLESS WAN-LAN ROAMING - Systems and methods are described for secure and seamless roaming between internal and external networks. Double and triple tunnels may be used to connect a mobile node to a correspondent host. A mobile node may include the ability to connect to two networks simultaneously to enable seamless roaming between networks.10-13-2011
20100296482SELECTION OF A COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR A USER BY A BASE STATION IN RESPONSE TO RECEIVING A COMMUNICATION SESSION HAND-OFF - A first base station wirelessly transmits media to a first communication device for a communication session. The first base station hands off the communication session to a second base station. The second base station wirelessly transmits the media to the first communication device for the communication session. In response to the hand-off, the second base station selects a second communication device based on the type of media and transmits a prompt to the first communication device to transfer the communication session to the second communication device. In response to a user instruction, the second base station transmits the media to the second communication device for the communication session.11-25-2010
20130163560METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALL BACK OF A MOBILE STATION FROM E-UTRAN TO UTRAN/GERAN IN A FULL-MULTI-OPERATOR CORE NETWORK - Packet Switched (PS) handover based Circuit Switched Fall Back (CSFB) of a mobile station is controlled from an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) cell to a target Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) cell or a target GSM EDGE Radio Access Network (GERAN) cell in a PS domain. A network node receives a handover request from a SGSN. A PLMN ID associated with the SGSN is identified. A set of PLMN IDs transmitted as system information by the target UTRAN cell or the target GERAN cell is identified. A PLMN ID index is generated to indicate an association between the PLMN ID associated with the SGSN and one of the PLMN IDs of the set. The PLMN ID index is communicated toward the mobile station for use during PS handover based CSFB. The mobile station embeds the PLMN ID index in a Location Area Update (LAU) message, and transmits the LAU message to a target BSS/RNS of the GERAN/UTRAN cell for use during the PS handover based CSFB.06-27-2013
20080253332SELECTIVELY ACQUIRED SYSTEM INFORMATION - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided that improve mobility procedures between base stations based on rules configurable by the operator that govern both the mobile terminal and the base stations. A method is provided in which a mobile terminal obtains system information from a neighboring base station. The system information is stored at the mobile terminal such that the mobile terminal may thereafter participate in a handover or reselection to a respective neighboring base station at least partially based upon the stored system information, typically without further verification of the system information. If desired, the mobile terminal can further determine if one or more predefined validity criterion is met with respect to the stored system information. If the predefined validity criterion is not met, the mobile terminal can then obtain system information, e.g., updated system information, from the neighboring base station.10-16-2008
20110002295INFRASTRUCTURE ASSISTED NETWORK TRANSITION - An infrastructure assisted network transition scheme is provided. In a multi-mode wireless communication device, handover threshold data is received from a management server associated with a first wireless network comprising one or more wireless access points. The multi-mode wireless communication device receives signals from the one or more wireless access point devices of the first wireless network and generates data representing the received signals. The multi-mode wireless communication device analyzes the data representing the received signals with respect to the handover threshold data to determine when the multi-mode wireless communication device should initiate hand-in to the first wireless network and when to initiate hand-out from the first wireless network to the second wireless network. Functions are provided at the management server to enable the generation of the handover threshold data from network configuration information associated with the first wireless network.01-06-2011
20110002299 HANDOVER FOR CELLULAR RADIO COMMUNICATIONS - An improved handover process is described for a cellular wireless network. In one example, a method includes registering a mobile station to a first base station and a first gateway, handing the mobile station over to a second base station coupled to the first gateway, selecting a second gateway coupled to the mobile station, registering the mobile station to the second gateway, de-registering the mobile station from the first gateway, and handing the mobile station over to a third base station coupled to the second gateway and not coupled to the first gateway.01-06-2011
20110002304ENHANCED DELAY MANAGEMENT - A method to facilitate user equipment (UE) handoff within a packet data communication system includes determining, at a source relay node, that the UE is to undergo a handoff from the source relay node to a target entity and sending, by the source relay node, a first request to a network node serving the UE. The sending is performed responsive to the determination that the UE is to undergo the handoff, such that the first request is configured to cause the network gateway node to store packet data addressed to the UE. Further operations include sending, by the target entity, a second request to the network, such that the second request is configured to cause the network to forward the stored packet data to the target entity, and receiving, at the target entity from the network, the stored packet data for wirelessly transmitting to the UE.01-06-2011
20110002300METHOD OF PERFORMING HANDOVER AND NETWORK SYSTEM OF ENABLING THE METHOD - A method of performing a handover is provided. The method of performing the handover includes: a mobile terminal transmitting an access stop message to a first Access Point (AP) when the mobile terminal moves from a first AP area to a second AP area; the first AP transmitting a handover start message to a first Mobility Access Gateway (MAG) corresponding to the first AP in response to the access stop message; the first MAG transmitting the handover start message to a Local Mobile Anchor (LMA); and the LMA performing a buffering of a data packet to be transmitted to the mobile terminal.01-06-2011
20110002298Reducing Overhead in Wireless Communications - Stations in a wireless network may communicate directly using MAC management messages. As examples, servers may communicate using MAC management messages with mobile stations, base stations may communicate using MAC management messages, and relay cells may communicate using MAC management messages.01-06-2011
20110002303RANGING BY MOBILE STATION IN FEMTO SYSTEM - A ranging method in a mobile station of a femto system is disclosed. According to the present invention, a femto base station enables non-synchronized ranging channel (NS-RCH) information to be carried on S-SFH SP01-06-2011
20110002302NETWORK HANDOVER METHOD, COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, AND RELEVANT DEVICES - A network handover method, a communications system, and relevant devices are provided, so as to implement handover between a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) network and a Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) network. The method specifically includes the following steps. A user terminal determines a target network access point (AP) and acquires a tunnel destination address. A signaling transmission tunnel between the user terminal and the target network AP is established through a current network according to the tunnel destination address. The user terminal executes a network access operation with the target network AP through the signaling transmission tunnel. The communications system and the relevant devices are further provided. Thus, the handover between the WiFi network and the WiMAX network can be implemented.01-06-2011
20110002305METHOD FOR PERFORMING INTER-RAT HANDOVER - An Inter-RAT handover method is disclosed. A method for supporting an Inter-RAT handover by an IEEE 802.16m MS includes performing, by the MS, pre-registration in an Inter-RAT target BS using a tunneling, if a channel quality of an Inter-RAT neighbor cell is higher than a pre-registration threshold, and transmitting a handover request message for a handover to the target BS to a serving BS, if a channel quality of the neighbor cell is equal to or higher than a handover threshold during a time duration in a scanning of the neighbor cell and a channel quality of the target BS is equal to or higher than that of the neighbor cell. This handover method reduces a time required for a handover from an IEEE 802.16m network to a Non-802.16m network, provides a seamless service, supports a rapid recovery in case of a radio link failure, and increases handover reliability.01-06-2011
20100265917APPARATUS, AND AN ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR PRESERVING COMMUNICATION SERVICE QUALITY LEVELS DURING HAND-OFF OF COMMUNICATIONS IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station is configured to transmit a sequence of data packets over a wireless network. The station includes a data sequence expander. The expander receives an indication of a pending hand-off for the mobile station from a first network access point to a second network access point and estimates an amount of time prior to occurrence of the hand-off. The expander inserts a number of delay packets into the sequence of data packets in response to receiving the indication of the pending hand-off. The number of delay packets is determined based on the estimated amount of time prior to the occurrence of the hand-off such that the insertion of the delay packets into the sequence of data packets will cause a delay that corresponds to the amount of time prior to occurrence of the hand-off.10-21-2010
20100260145METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE OPERATION OF A BASE STATION OF A WIRELESS CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and a device for controlling operation of a base station of a wireless cellular telecommunication network including a network server. The network server: transfers a location request message to the base station; receives in response, a certificate originated by a third party; checks validity of the certificate; obtains information representative of the location of the base station; checks if the base station is located in a given geographical area; and transfers a command control message enabling the base station to transfer radio signals if the certificate is valid and if the base station is located in the given geographical area.10-14-2010
20100260139HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS NETWORK BACK TO A RESTRICTED LOCAL ACCESS POINT FROM AN UNRESTRICTED GLOBAL ACCESS POINT - The invention concerns methods, a device and computer program products for simplifying handover back to a restricted local access point from an unrestricted global access point as well as to a device implementing a restricted local access point for provision in a wireless network and a wireless network. In the network a restricted local access point hands over a mobile station to an unrestricted global access point and provides data enabling the restricted local access point to be identified as a candidate access point. A device for simplifying handover back determines that the restricted local access point is a candidate for further handover based on this data and informs the mobile station about the restricted local access point via the unrestricted glob access point. Thereby hand over may be considered also to the restricted local access point in addition to other surrounding access points.10-14-2010
20110211559DATA FORWARDING METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR VERTICAL HANDOVER - A data forwarding method and system is provided for avoiding data loss during a vertical handover by forwarding data through an IP tunnel established between a newly introduced network entity called a Data Forwarding Function of the serving network and a Forward Attachment Function of a target network. A data forwarding method of a data forwarding unit located in a serving network for a vertical handover according to the present invention includes receiving an address of a forwarding attachment unit located in a target network and a data forwarding preparation request that are transmitted by a user equipment; establishing an Internet Protocol (IP) tunnel to the forwarding attachment unit according to the data forwarding preparation request; and forwarding, when a vertical handover is initiated, handover packets to the forwarding attachment unit through the IP tunnel.09-01-2011
20100278146CELL SELECTION SYSTEM, CELL SELECTION METHOD, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A cell selection system is for selecting a cell to be used for communications by a mobile terminal (11-04-2010
20110149910METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION CHANNEL CONTROL - A base station designates an identification symbol section in each communication frame in order to identify a plurality of transceivers, transmits a predetermined transceiver identification signal through subcarriers granted to the plurality of transceivers by granting a combination of subcarriers to be used in an identification symbol section to each of the plurality of transceivers, generates and stores terminal connection information for each of the plurality of transceivers by receiving information on evaluation of reception quality for the transceiver from the terminal and using the received information, and allocates a communication resource so as to use the subcarrier of the transceiver connected with the terminal for communicating with the terminal.06-23-2011
20100260144METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE HANDOVER - Consistent handover can be provided between a plurality of objects by providing handover mode control information defining an object for initiating handover from among at least one object in a system environment including the at least one object, wherein the at least one object is able to initiate handover between heterogeneous networks.10-14-2010
20100260146SEAMLESS HANDOFF SCHEME FOR MULTI-RADIO WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - A mobile device communicates with a first mesh access point (AP) via a first radio frequency (RF) interface of the mobile device over a first wireless connection, where the first mesh AP is one of mesh APs of a first mesh cell of the wireless mesh network. It is detected that signal quality of the first wireless connection drops below a predetermined threshold as the mobile device moves from the first mesh cell towards a second mesh cell. In response to the detection, it is established via a second RF interface of the mobile device a second wireless connection with a second mesh AP of a second mesh cell of the wireless mesh network, while concurrently maintaining the first wireless connection with the first mesh AP via the first RF interface.10-14-2010
20110249649Methods and Systems for Transitioning a Communication Session from a Source Base Station to a Target Base Station without Terminating the Session - Methods and systems are provided for transitioning an active communication session of a mobile station from being conducted over a communication path that includes a source base station to being conducted over a communication path that includes a target base station, without terminating the communication session. A wireless communication device situated within a source coverage area of a source base station operates as a clone of the mobile station that is situated within a source coverage area of the source base station and also within a target coverage area of the target base station. The transition involves the clone relaying the communication session between the source base station and the mobile station; meanwhile, the target base station (i) establishes an air-interface connection with the mobile station and (ii) detects a handoff-completion trigger, and responsively serves the mobile station over the air-interface connection with respect to the communication session.10-13-2011
20110211557HANDOVER PROCESSING METHOD, AND MOBILE NODE, CONNECTION MANAGING APPARATUS AND BASE STATION USED IN THAT METHOD - Disclosed is a technique which provides a handover processing method and the like which enable a smooth handover without service interruption and allow a desired handover to be performed. The technique includes the steps of: generating by a mobile node 09-01-2011
20100098026PARTNER NODE MIGRATION CONTROL UNIT AND METHOD - Disclosed is a migration communication control device constructed to control a continuous communication between a mobile node and a node unaffected the mobile node's migration. The migration communication control device comprises a first migration control unit, a second migration control unit on the mobile node, and a third migration control unit on the partner node. The first migration control unit comprises a packet transfer unit and an address post unit. The packet transfer unit receives a packet which was destined for an outdated address of the mobile node, generates a conversion packet which holds an updated address instead of the outdated address, and then transmits the conversion packet, while an address post unit transmits an address post message which indicates the updated address to the third migration control unit. The second migration control unit comprises a migration post unit and a packet resumption unit. The migration post unit transmits to the first migration control unit a migration post message which indicates the updated address when the mobile node migrates to another network while a packet resumption unit receives the conversion packet from both the first migration control unit and the third migration control unit and resumes an original packet from the conversion packet. The third migration control unit comprises a packet conversion unit which converts a destination address of a packet into the updated address, then transmits it to the mobile node.04-22-2010
20100098028Communication System, Mobility Management Network Element and Method for Processing Resources - A method for processing a resource receiving, by a mobility management network element of a packet switched (PS) network, a Release Request message sent by an access network of the PS network when a user equipment (UE) is handed over from the PS network to a CS network. After receiving the Release Request message, resources of the UE are processed in the PS network.04-22-2010
20100098027Media independent trigger model for multiple network types - A media independent trigger model for multiple network types is disclosed. A change in communication environment trigger is communicated from a media dependent interface to an upper media independent application. The communication environment trigger may be from a local event detected by the interface or may be a remote trigger received from another device. The upper media independent application adjusts operations according to the communication environment trigger.04-22-2010
20100098024BASE STATION AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A packet storage unit stores therein a data packet and an inter-base-station transfer packet assigned with sequence numbers. When the inter-base-station transfer packet is stored in the packet storage unit, a packet reading unit reads the inter-base-station transfer packet in order of the sequence number, and then reads the data packet in order of receiving the data packet. A packet transmitting unit transmits the inter-base-station transfer packet and the data packet read by the packet reading unit to a destination mobile terminal. The packet reading unit determines whether all inter-base-station transfer packets are read based on the sequence numbers.04-22-2010
20090285174COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS, CONTROL STATION, AND MULTICARRIER COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication terminal apparatus wherein a base station apparatus uses only subcarriers, which provide good propagation circumstance for the communication terminal apparatus, to transmit data, thereby improving the transmission efficiency of the whole system and wherein the frequency scheduling is performed in view of whether the user exists in a handover area, thereby providing a site diversity effect and hence improving the reception quality and the throughput. In this apparatus, a cell-#11-19-2009
20080247359MOBILE DEVICE HANDOFF CONTROLLER AND METHOD AND SYSTEM INCLUDING THE SAME - A hand-off controller for use in a system including an application server, the application server being connected to a mobile device via a first network connection to conduct an application session involving data communications between the application server and the mobile device. The hand-off controller is operatively coupled to the application server and configured to recognize that a surrogate device has connected to the application server via a second network connection; recognize that the surrogate device is intended to participate in the application session in the place of the mobile device; enable data communications directed to the mobile device from the application server, in relation to the application session, to be sent to the surrogate device; and enable data communications directed to the application server from the surrogate device, in relation to the application session, to be sent to the application server, whereby the surrogate device is able to continue the application session with the application server in place of the mobile device.10-09-2008
20080247361Traffic Transmission Path Relocation Method For Radio Communication System - A method for effectively relocating a traffic transmission path when a mobile terminal changes a gateway for a traffic transmission that may include: when a mobile terminal performs handover from a first radio network node to a second radio network node, determining a gateway for processing traffic most suitable for the second radio network node; changing a traffic transmission path to the determined gateway; and transmitting, by a traffic transmission node, traffic to the second radio network node through the changed traffic transmission path.10-09-2008
20110211555METHOD TO HANDOVER A SUBSCRIBER BETWEEN DIFFERENT BASE STATIONS IN A MULTI-LAYERED WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and system are provided for enabling an MS operative in a multi-layer wireless network, to be handed over to a target BS associated with another one of the multi-layers. By the method provided, if it is required that the MS which has not yet been provided with information that relates to a potential target BS associated with a layer different from the one with which its currently serving BS, be handed over to such a target BS, then upon receiving an acknowledgement from the target BS indicating its capability to provide service to the MS, a message is transmitted to the MS that comprises information to enable the MS to perform a fast network re-entry in order to communicate with the target BS. Next, a handover procedure between the MS and the target BS is initiated, during which the MS performs a fast network re-entry.09-01-2011
20090022104METHOD OF ESTABLISHING AN HRPD SIGNAL LINK01-22-2009
20090022107COMPRESSION STATIC AND SEMI-STATIC CONTEXT TRANSFER - Systems, methodologies, and devices are described that facilitate transferring a subset of compression context from a source base station to a target base station during an inter-base station handover of a mobile device to facilitate establishment of compression context between the mobile device and target base station. The source base station can transfer a subset of compression context comprising static and semi-static context to the target base station during inter-base station handover to at least partially establish compression context between the mobile device and target base station prior to or during handover. The source base station can transmit, to the mobile device, indicator information related to compression context transferred. The target base station can at least partially establish compression context based on received subset of compression context to facilitate efficient communication with the mobile device and can establish any remaining portion of compression context with the mobile device after handover.01-22-2009
20110255510GRE User-Plane - The present invention relates to providing a generic control plane in a GTP mobility protocol in a core network. When a type of user plane is detected, a user plane parameter is provided in a control plane message header. The user plane message indicates the type of user plane. Functions, parameters and messages are provided according to the indicated type of user plane. Thus, e.g. easier hand over between different access networks can be provided and an optimization of the user plane implementation in an edge node.10-20-2011
20110255513METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EXTENDED NETWORK ACCESS NOTIFICATION VIA A BROADBAND ACESS GATEWAY - A system and method supporting extended network access notification via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. A representative embodiment of the present invention may comprise a wireless interface and may be capable of exchanging multimedia communication between the wireless interface and a broadband network. The gateway may support multimedia communication via access devices that may seamlessly hand off from a wireless wide area network to a personal area network supported by the wireless interface. The hand off may be coordinated by the gateway and the wireless wide area network via the broadband network. A user of an access device may be notified when such a hand off has been automatically initiated, and a user may configure aspects of such hand offs.10-20-2011
20110255507METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDLING QOS FLOWS WHEN MOVING BETWEEN SYSTEMS - When a mobile device moves from a first QoS-aware system to a second QoS-aware system, QoS flows may or may not be moved properly. To deal with this, the mobile device requests de-allocation of flows in the second QoS-aware system, and then initiates reservation of flows in the second QoS-aware system. After this, the mobile device will know for certain which QoS flows exist in the second QoS-aware system and can behave accordingly.10-20-2011
20090190553RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO TERMINAL, BASE STATION, AND BASE STATION SEARCH METHOD - A wireless communication system includes a wireless terminal and a plurality of base stations that can communicate with each other via a predetermined communication path that is different from the wireless communication path to the wireless terminal. The wireless terminal transmits a request signal to one of the base stations to request a response signal from another base station. The one base station transfers the received request signal to the other base station via the predetermined communication path. Upon reception of the request signal transferred from the one base station, the second base station transmits a response signal to the wireless terminal via the predetermined channel. The wireless terminal receives the response signal transmitted from the second base station via the predetermined channel.07-30-2009
20090180439METHOD OF DETERMINING A LOCATION OF A BASE STATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND BASE STATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method of determining a location of a base station (07-16-2009
20090168720Mobile node, a method or handover and a computer program - A mobile node comprising a handover engine configured to control the handover of the mobile node from one access node to another access node, said handover engine being arranged to provide TCP window size information to a TCP endpoint node, to which the mobile node is connected via a connection, before said handover engine initiates registration of a new location address for said connection.07-02-2009
20090161628COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND INFORMATION MANAGEMENT METHOD - An integrative radio base station holds station data required for operation including information on the cell managed by itself and the information on the cells managed by an adjacent integrative radio base stations. If information on the cells of the destination of a mobile terminal is not held at the time of the handover of the mobile terminal, the information is acquired from a station data management device. The station data management device manages station data for each integrative radio base station and transmits information on the cell requested from the integrative radio base station to a source that made the request.06-25-2009
20090129341SOURCE INITIATED COMMUNICATION HANDOVER - In a handover operation an access terminal is handed over from a source access point to a target access point. To facilitate efficient identification of a target access point, a handover operation may be initiated by the target access point. A candidate frequency search also may be invoked to confirm that an access terminal identified by a target access point for a handover is in the vicinity of the target access point. A source access point may verify whether an access terminal is in a vicinity of a target access point to determine whether to perform a handover operation. A source access point may handle potential ambiguity between several target access points by sending handover commands to each of these target access points. An access terminal also may assist in the determination of whether to perform a handover operation.05-21-2009
20080273496System For FA Relocation With Context Transfer In Wireless Networks - A system for foreign agent relocation in a wireless network. The system comprises at least one first foreign agent; at least one second foreign agent; and at least one mobile node. Relocation negotiation is performed to determine whether foreign agent relocation of the mobile node from the at least one first foreign agent to the at least one second foreign agent is agreed, and foreign agent relocation is performed if the foreign agent relocation is agreed.11-06-2008
20090028110Seamless Establishment and Maintenance of Network Connections for Mobile Applications - This invention provides a seamless mobile connection system that can maintain connectivity as a cell phone's Internet protocol changes due to changes in its user's location. This system can operate with multiple applications on a cell phone, and achieves Internet connectivity through a 3G IP based network. This invention solves the seamless mobility problem where network connectivity is lost due to changes in network settings produced by changes in a user's location.01-29-2009
20110255509METHOD FOR RESELECTION AMONG HOME BASE STATION CELLS - The present invention discloses a method for reselection among home base station cells, which comprises the following steps that: a user terminal camps on a Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) cell (S10-20-2011
20080279150METHOD FOR HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK COMPRISING A NUMBER OF SUB-NETWORKS - The present invention discloses a method for carrying out a handover process in a wireless network, wherein the wireless network comprises at least a first and a second base stations belonging each to a different subnet associated of that wireless network and communicating through a first and a second gateways or foreign agents, respectively, and wherein the first base station is used as a serving base station currently in communication with at least one mobile subscriber station (MS). The method provided comprises a step of determining a traffic conveying entity as an intermediate anchoring point, and when the MS moves to a second subnet which comprises the second base station, a path is established for conveying traffic to/from that MS from/to a remote destination. The path comprises the intermediate anchoring point and the first gateway (or the first foreign agent).11-13-2008
20090219889Method and Apparatus for Utilizing Synchronization Information - A communication method and system are provided that include providing synchronization information about a co-sited downlink carrier. This information may be transmitted to from a base station to a mobile device. The mobile device may receive this information and perform handover or measurements based on the received synchronization information.09-03-2009
20100309883WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication apparatus is provided with a wireless communication unit (12-09-2010
20100309881MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TUNNEL MANAGEMENT METHOD THEREOF - The present invention relates to a mobile communication system and a tunnel management method thereof. In the tunnel management method, tunnel information update request having a user equipment identifier of the user equipment is received at a serving gateway from a mobility managing device when the user equipment performs handoff. Then, tunnel information is updated by changing address information of data destination for all tunnels having the user equipment identifier.12-09-2010
20100309882HANDOVER METHOD FOR MOBILE WIRELESS NETWORK - Provided is a handover method for a mobile wireless network. The handover method for a mobile wireless network, including: receiving, by a mobile node, information on a new access router by requesting the information necessary for the handover from a previous access router in accordance with a handover initiation; sending a fast binding update message to the previous access router via the new access router by connecting to the new access router; receiving a packet from the new access router; and disconnecting from the previous access router.12-09-2010
20100309880CONNECTION STATE REPORTING METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL USED IN THE METHOD - A technology is disclosed for providing a connection status notifying method and the like that can infer that a new connection will become usable shortly based on a predetermined action, and give notification thereof. The technology includes a step at which a mobile node 12-09-2010
20100309877RANDOM ACCESS SIGNALING TRANSMISSION FOR SYSTEM ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Techniques for transmitting random access signaling for system access are described. In an aspect, random access signaling may be sent based on at least one transmission parameter having different values for different user equipment (UE) classes. At least one parameter value may be determined based on a particular UE class, and the random access signaling may be sent based on the determined parameter value(s). The random access signaling may be a random access preamble, and the at least one transmission parameter may include a target SNR, a backoff time, and/or a power ramp. The random access preamble may then be sent based on a target SNR value, a power ramp value, and/or a backoff time value for the particular UE class. In another aspect, a message for system access may be sent based on a power control correction received in a random access response for the random access preamble.12-09-2010
20110164592HANDOVER METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A handover method and a mobile station are disclosed in the present invention, and the method includes: the mobile station handing over from a service station to a legacy zone of a target station, and sending a first ranging request message on the legacy zone; the mobile station receiving a first ranging request response message, and acquiring relevant information of the target zone carried in the first ranging request response message; the mobile station switching to the target zone according to the relevant information. The unnecessary procedures in the two handover processes can be reduced and the handover efficiency of the compatible telecommunication system can be enhanced through above technical scheme.07-07-2011
20080253333Call Admission Control Method for Use in Packet Based Communication System - Provided is a call admission control method for use in a packet based communication system, which can secure a handoff and a quality of service (QoS) by discriminating a new call and a handoff call and borrowing a shared bandwidth, a reserved bandwidth, and a bandwidth of other service according to kinds of services and their characteristics. The call admission control method includes the steps of: a) dividing frequency band into a reservation band and a shared band for communication service handoff call and multicast service handoff call, and determining whether a call admission request of users is a new call or a handoff call; b) when the call admission request is the new call, determining whether to accept the call admission request by allocating the shared band and a band borrowed from other service; and c) when the call admission request is the handoff call, determining whether to accept the call admission request by allocating the shared band, the reserved band, and the borrowed band according to services and bandwidth resources.10-16-2008
20080253331Methods and Apparatus for RF Handoff in a Multi-Frequency Network - Methods and apparatus for RF handoff in a multi-frequency network. A method includes generating seamless and partially seamless handoff tables for multiplexes carried in a current LOI, wherein the seamless and partially seamless handoff tables comprise neighboring RF channels carrying one or more of the multiplexes in the current LOI, detecting a handoff event initiated by acquisition failures on a current RF, selecting a selected RF channel from the seamless and partially seamless handoff tables, and performing a handoff to the selected RF channel. An apparatus includes processing logic configured to generate the seamless and partially seamless handoff tables, detect a handoff event initiated by acquisition failures on a current RF, and select a selected RF channel from the seamless and partially seamless handoff tables. The apparatus also includes channel switch logic configured to perform a handoff to the selected RF channel.10-16-2008
20080253334Downlink Solution for Seamless and Lossless Cell Change in a Cellular System - The present invention relates to a UE, base station network node and methods thereof in a cellular mobile communication system. One method concerns handover from a first radio base station to a second radio base station wherein, it comprises the steps receiving a notification from the first radio base station that currently serves said UE, said notification indicating the last packet to be transmitted to this user equipment from said first radio base station on a first connection; and informing the second radio base station by a request to commence transmission from this second radio base station when the notified last packet is received at the UE.10-16-2008
20120201225METHOD OF PERFORMING HANDOVER IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method for performing effective handover (HO) in a broadband wireless access system is disclosed. The method for controlling a mobile station (MS) to perform handover in a broadband wireless access system includes receiving a first message including at least one of first index information and second index information from a serving base station (SBS), wherein the first index information indicates a subframe to which an additional ranging opportunity for the mobile station (MS) is allocated from a target base station (TBS) and the second index information indicates a frame to which the additional ranging opportunity is allocated, and transmitting a ranging code to the target base station (TBS) through the additional ranging opportunity indicated by the first index information and the second index information.08-09-2012
20080240040IP ADDRESS ALLOCATION IN EVOLVED WIRELESS NETWORKS - A networking system includes a first wireless network module that transmits a request to attach to a network and a second wireless network module. The second wireless network module receives the request, determines whether the first wireless network module requires an IP address based on the request, and selectively allocates an IP address to the first wireless network module based on the determination.10-02-2008
20080205339Auto-Provisioning of a Mobile Computing Device for Operation With A Wireless Network - An automatic provisioning methodology for a mobile computing device in a wireless network is disclosed herein. The mobile computing device can support open communication with a wireless switch, which is configured to function as a load request proxy between the mobile computing device and a mobile services system on the wireless network. The mobile services system sends provisioning data to the wireless switch (using secure communications), which in turn sends the provisioning data to the mobile computing device. The mobile computing device can then use the provisioning data to configure its software applications, security settings, and the like.08-28-2008
20080205341Terminal Having Sctp-Based Handover Function and Sctp-Based Handover Method of the Terminal - A terminal having a stream control transmission protocol (SCTP)-based handover function and an SCTP-based handover methods, the terminal including: a session management unit to initiate an SCTP session with a second terminal; a link layer information collection unit to store beacon signals in a link layer state information database; a signal intensity extraction unit to, if the terminal enters an overlapping area of first and second communication areas, extract an intensity of a beacon signal transmitted by a second base station managing the second communication area from the link layer state information database; and a handover unit to, if the intensity is greater than a critical value, add an IP address received from the second base station to the SCTP session, and to, if the intensity is greater than a second critical value, requests the second terminal to communicate with the terminal using the received IP address.08-28-2008
20110164590METHOD FOR UE HANDOVER BETWEEN HOME NODE BS - The present invention provides a method for User Equipment (UE) handover between home Node Bs, comprising steps of: sending, by a source home Node B that stores the ID of the connected gateway, a message to the gateway, the message including the gateway ID and a destination home Node B ID; sending by the gateway a message to the destination home Node B identified by the destination home Node B ID to establish a radio bear of the destination home Node B for the UE; sending by the destination home Node B the radio bearer allocated to the UE to the gateway; sending by the gateway the radio bearer to the source home Node B; sending by the source home Node B the radio bearer to the UE; and completing by the UE a handover to the destination home Node B. With the present invention, successful handover between home Node Bs under the same access control can be guaranteed in the case of the same gateway. Meanwhile, it is not necessary to make any modification to the current 3GPP protocol signaling, and the present invention is compliant with the protocol signaling for interfaces Uu and Iu.07-07-2011
20110164591METHOD FOR USER RELOCATION TRIGGERED BY HOME NODE B GATEWAY - A method for user relocation triggered by a Home NodeB Gateway (HGW) is provided, which comprises steps of: transmitting, by the HGW, a relocation request message to a Home NodeB (HNB) to which a User Equipment (UE) belongs; triggering, by the HNB, a relocation procedure to relocate the UE to another NodeB; and transmitting, by the HNB, a relocation response message corresponding to the relocation request message to the HGW. With the present invention, it is possible in a HNB system to implement a UE relocation triggered by a HGW for new scenarios. This scheme enhances the Iu-h interface and facilitates the improvement of service quality of users. Additionally, it is capable of providing users with continuous services in different scenarios. The present method is easy to implement and effective in improving the stability and performance of HNB system.07-07-2011
20110164589CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL (TCP) TRANSMISSIONS IN HANDOVER - Methods and apparatuses are provided that pausing transmission control protocol (TCP) transmissions during or following handover to prevent unwarranted duplicated acknowledgement transmission, which can cause decrease in TCP window size. During handover, transmission on-hold commands can be sent to a TCP layer that indicate to prepare to pause TCP transmissions, immediately pause TCP transmissions, and/or the like. Transmission resume commands can be sent to the TCP layer following handover. In addition, TCP transmissions can be paused following handover to allow data forwarding data to be provisioned to a device from a target base station without duplicated acknowledgement transmission.07-07-2011
20110164588MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD OF PERFORMING HANDOVER - Enclosed are a mobile terminal and a method of performing handover. The mobile terminal is connected to a selected network among a plurality of networks sensed in accordance with the movement of the mobile terminal so that handover is performed between different networks and that a service used by the mobile terminal is continuously provided. Therefore, the convenience of a user is improved and network utility is improved.07-07-2011
20110255511HANDOVER METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL AND HOME AGENT UTILIZED IN SAID METHOD - A technology is disclosed that provides a handover method and the like capable of improving communication efficiency by detecting that a handover destination network is a home link at an early stage and reducing tunnel overhead between a mobile node and a home agent. The technology includes, when the mobile node performs a handover from an access router of a network before the handover to which the mobile node is currently connected, to an access router of another network that is a handover destination: a step of transmitting, by a mobile node 10-20-2011
20110044283METHOD OF COLLECTING PER-USER PERFORMANCE DATA - The present invention provides a method for implementation in a wireless communication system including a plurality of base stations, a plurality of gateways, and a plurality of mobility management entities. The method includes receiving, at a first mobility management entity and from a first base station, measurement data collected by the first base station for a first mobile unit having a connection to the wireless communication system via the first base station. The measurement data includes a temporary identifier associated with the first mobile unit for the duration of the connection. The method also includes identifying the first mobile unit using the temporary identifier and forming a first record associated with the first mobile unit. The first record includes the measurement data collected by the first base station for the first mobile unit and previously collected measurement data for the first mobile unit.02-24-2011
20110255506SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INTEGRATION OF IP-BASED DATA LINK MANAGEMENT IN EXISTING AVIONICS ARCHITECTURES - Systems and methods for integration of IP-based data link management in existing avionics architectures are provided. In one embodiment, a communications management unit comprises: a legacy router providing access to a first set of air-ground data links; an internet protocol router providing access to a second set of air-ground data links; an applications and routing policy that provides criteria for selecting of a data link from one of the first set of air-ground data links or the second set of air-ground data links; and a data link manager that selects the data link from either the first set of air-ground data links and second sets of air-ground data links based on information provided by the applications and routing policy and controls the legacy router and the internet protocol router to route communication messages via the selected data link.10-20-2011
20100284368Wireless LAN Mobility - A method of performing hand-off of a Mobile Node from a previous Access Point to a new Access Point within a WLAN domain, where the previous and new Access Points are connected respectively to previous and new Access Routers. The method comprises, following a MAC authentication exchange between the Mobile Node and the new Access Point, sending a MAC Reassociation Request from the Mobile Node to the New Access Point, forwarding said Reassociation Request to said new Access Router, and sending the Reassociation Request from said new Access Router to said previous Access Router within an IP hand-off request, and authenticating the Reassociation Request at the previous Access Router and initiating the tunnelling of IP packets received at the previous Access Router and destined for said Mobile Node, towards said new Access Router.11-11-2010
20100284369Optimization method of multiple service flows operation for WiMAX system - An optimization method of multiple service flows operation for a WiMAX system includes: adding a resource combination indication to a hand-off request message, a path pre-registration request message and a path registration request message; hand-off request processing: when multiple service flows are handed off by a mobile station from a current serving network to a target network, determining whether the mobile station is allowed to hand off to a target network according to the resource combination indication in the hand-off request message and whether the handoff of the multiple service flows is accepted by the target network; path pre-establishment processing and path establishment processing: when the mobile station is allowed to hand off multiple service flows from the current serving network to the target network, determining whether data paths between the target network and the network where a data management unit is located can be pre-established/established according to the resource combination indication in the path pre-registration request message and the path registration request message and whether the data path pre-registration/registration of the multiple service flows can be established.11-11-2010
20100284367System and Method for Handovers in a Multi-Carrier Wireless Communications System - A system and method for handovers in multi-carrier wireless communications systems is provided. A method for communications device operation includes computing a bandwidth requirement, transmitting a handover request to a server controller, receiving a response responsive to the handover request, and in response to determining that the handover request was granted, initiating a handover. The handover request includes the bandwidth requirement.11-11-2010
20100284366Multiple location retrieval function (LRF) network having location continuity - An IMS emergency call is reliably handed off within the PS domain or from the PS domain to the CS domain, by providing continuous support of location of a user device on behalf of a PSAP. The invention provides for handover of an IMS emergency call with EPS/GPRS access in a multi-LRF environment. Emergency location services for CS based emergency and/or IMS based emergency location services are often provided by multiple emergency location service providers. The information element that is critical for supporting Location Continuity in Multi-LRF environment can be either the assigned ESQK or the Serving LRF address. ESQK is assigned by the Serving LRF during IMS emergency call setup, and is used to uniquely identify the emergency service provider that operates the serving LRF. A simpler implementation uses the Serving LRF's address to identify the Serving LRF during and after the handover (PS-PS or PS-CS).11-11-2010
20110255515MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, HANDOVER CONTROLLING METHOD, RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A radio network controller constructed to divide a plurality of base stations into a group of base stations included in an E-DCH active set and a group of base stations included in an active set for soft handovers according to a status of reception of data in each of the plurality of base stations.10-20-2011
20100135244REDUCTION OF HANDOVER DELAYS IN NESTED PROXY MOBILE IPv6/MOBILE IPv6 NETWORKS - A method for reducing handover delays of a mobile node moving from a first domain to a second domain, those domains being nested in a network, comprises, in a network node that manages connectivity between the first and second domains: establishing procedures for handover of the mobile node in the second domain, wherein establishing the procedures comprises receiving a binding request issued on behalf of the mobile node; and in response to the received binding request, establishing binding procedures in the first domain. Establishing the procedures for handover of the mobile node and the binding procedures occur in an overlapping manner. The network node for carrying such a method comprises a processing module for establishing procedures for handover in the second domain; and a binding processing module, responsive to the received binding request, for establishing binding procedures in the first domain. The processing and binding modules work in an overlapping manner.06-03-2010
20100329205SERVICE CONTINUITY DURING OUTBOUND HANDOVER FROM A HOME NETWORK BASE STATION WITH LOCAL INTERNET PROTOCOL ACCESS - A method, a mobile system, and a home network base station are disclosed. A mobile management entity 12-30-2010
20100329213WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION DEVICE, MOVE CONTROL NODE, AND METHOD OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - The wireless communication system of the present invention includes a base station (12-30-2010
20100329207CALL ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques to configure quality of service (QoS) and utilize radio resources for a call in a WLAN are described. In an aspect, a station ensures that an access point in the WLAN is suitable for receiving service prior to performing registration to receive services via the WLAN. In another aspect, the station first requests for radio resources for traffic flows, then requests for radio resources for signaling flows, and sends signaling as best effort traffic if radio resources are not granted for the signaling flows. In yet another aspect, the station aggregates QoS for multiple applications and requests for radio resources based on the aggregated QoS. In yet another aspect, the station releases extra radio resources corresponding to the difference between the QoS granted by the WLAN and the QoS proposed by a remote terminal for the call. In yet another aspect, the station requests for the same QoS or lower from a new access point during handoff.12-30-2010
20100329206DUAL IDLE-TRAFFIC STATE OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless communication device maintains a dual idle-traffic state where the wireless communication device is in an idle state relative to a first transceiver node and is in a traffic state relative to a second transceiver node. First control signals are received from the first transceiver node and second control signals are received from the second transceiver node where the second control signals are different from the first control signals.12-30-2010
20100329210Resource Release At Source System During Handoff to Multi-Radio Access Technology Target System - Aspects describe coordination of resource release on a source system. An aspect relates to a network based coordination. Another aspect relates to a mobile device based coordination. Also provided is a network and mobile device coordinated approach. An un-coordinated approach is also provided.12-30-2010
20100329209CONNECTION HANDOVER HANDLING - A method in a server for handling a connection between a mobile communication device and a second communication device, said server being connected to a wireless local area network and a wireless wide area network, said method comprising receiving a signal indicative of a status of the connectivity between said mobile communication device and said wireless local area network; and depending on said connectivity status, controlling a sticky handover process, wherein in a case the connectivity status of the connection between the mobile communication device and the wireless local area network is bad and the mobile communication device is connected to the wireless local area network, handing over the connection from the wireless local area network to said wireless wide area network; and in a case the connectivity status of the connection between the mobile communication device and the wireless local area network is good and the mobile communication device is not connected to the wireless local area network, handing over the connection to the wireless local area network is provided. A device and computer program product thereof is also provided.12-30-2010
20100329208RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, GATEWAY, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - The radio communication system of the present invention includes a base station (12-30-2010
20110038352TTI BUNDLING INDICATION TO NON-SERVING BASE STATION - The technology applies to a cellular radio communication system in which a mobile radio terminal transmits information in transmission time intervals (TTIs) that is received by a serving base station and by one or more non-serving base stations. A number N of hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) transmissions transmitted together by the mobile terminal is determined. An HARQ transmission includes a first transmission, one or more retransmissions of the first transmission, or both. An indication of the number N of HARQ transmissions is provided either directly or indirectly to the one or more non-serving base stations so that the one or more non-serving base stations can take the number N into account when combining HARQ transmissions received from the mobile terminal.02-17-2011
20110044287METHOD FOR REDUCING HANDOVER LATENCY - The present invention relates to a handover procedure, and more particularly, to a method of reducing latency in performing handover using fast ranging. The present invention includes the steps of receiving a handover message including a specific ranging code and uplink resource information from a serving base station and transmitting the specific ranging code to a target base station using the uplink information.02-24-2011
20110134886METHOD OF EXECUTING HANDOVER IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The primitives between an upper management layer and the MAC layer within a mobile station and a base station are defined in order to specify and clarify the operations within the protocol stack layers in a broadband wireless access system to allow a mobile station to execute handover. Media Independent Handover (MIH) procedures can be achieved because the NCMS and MIH layer can communicate through use of these primitives.06-09-2011
20110134884METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION, WIRELESS DEVICE, AND BASE STATION - A wireless device transmits first information, representing whether the wireless device expects to receive data from a base station, to the base station before receipt of an inquiry from the base station about whether the wireless device expects to receive the data, and on receipt of the inquiry from the base station, restricts transmission of a response to the inquiry to the base station if the first information is not changed.06-09-2011
20110134883NETWORK BASED MOBILITY SYSTEM AND HANDOVER METHOD THEREOF - A network-based mobility system and a handover method in the system are provided. If a mobile terminal having interfaces of different service providers establishes a connection between domains of the different service providers, a new domain to which the mobile terminal is connected sends a notification of the new connection to the existing domain to which the mobile terminal has been connected. If there is a flow binding switch operation caused by the new connection, the existing domain sends a flow binding setup request to the new domain. The new domain sets up flow binding for the mobile terminal. A tunnel for the corresponding flow is set up between the new domain and the existing domain, whereby packets transmitted to the existing domain are forwarded to the new domain through the tunnel.06-09-2011
20110134881Method for handling hand off of a mobile device using reverse link quality measurements as trigger - In one embodiment a first comparison result is determined based on a link quality metric and a first threshold value. Based on the first comparison result, a second base station is selected, and the mobile device is instructed to switch from communicating wirelessly with the first base station to communicating wirelessly with the second base station06-09-2011
20110134880LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) MOBILE ANCHORING - A device receives roaming information associated with a user equipment (UE), a current eNodeB conducting a current Internet protocol (IP) session with the UE, and a plurality of eNodeBs that are neighboring the current eNodeB. The device also selects, based on the roaming information and from the plurality of eNodeBs, an optimal eNodeB to which to handover the UE, and establishes a preemptive IP session with the optimal eNodeB. The device further initiates a handover of the current IP session and the UE from the current eNodeB to the optimal eNodeB, where the current eNodeB acts as an anchoring point for a bearer path associated with the UE during the handover.06-09-2011
20100303039METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING COMPONENT CARRIER-SPECIFIC RECONFIGURATION - Techniques for component carrier-specific reconfiguration are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) is capable of transmitting or receiving via multiple component carriers. The WTRU may perform component carrier reconfiguration on a component carrier basis to add, remove or replace a component carrier. Discontinuous reception (DRX) and/or discontinuous transmission (DTX) may be performed on at least one component carrier, wherein DRX and/or DTX patterns on the component carriers may not overlap each other. A random access procedure may be performed at the target cell on one component carrier while other component carriers are inactive. The component carrier-specific reconfiguration or handover of a component carrier or a channel may be implemented in coordinated multiple point transmission (CoMP), wherein a handover of a control channel, not a traffic channel, may be performed. Alternatively, a handover of a traffic channel may be performed.12-02-2010
20100254345METHODS FOR SUPPORTING MOBILE NODES IN INDUSTRIAL CONTROL AND AUTOMATION SYSTEMS AND OTHER SYSTEMS AND RELATED APPARATUS - A method includes providing wireless service to a mobile leaf node using at least one first infrastructure node in an industrial control or monitoring system. The method also includes detecting movement of the mobile leaf node away from the at least one first infrastructure node. The method further includes handing off the mobile leaf node to at least one second infrastructure node in the industrial control or monitoring system so that the at least one second infrastructure node provides the wireless service to the mobile leaf node. The wireless service provided to the mobile leaf node remains deterministic. Various techniques can be used to detect the movement of the mobile leaf node. Also, the first and second infrastructure nodes could be in different clusters of nodes, and various techniques can be used to support handoffs between infrastructure nodes in different clusters.10-07-2010
20110261788METHOD FOR VIRTUAL CONNECTION RELEASING IN INTER-OPERATING NETWORK - The present invention provides a virtual connection releasing method in an inter-operation network. In the inter-operation network between the Enhanced Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) and the evolved HRPD (eHRPD) Access Network, a PMIP indication is set for indicating whether the HRPD Serving Gateway HSGW needs to initiate the Proxy Mobile IP (PMIP) binding updating operation or not. When the virtual connection releasing is initiated, the evolved Access Network (eAN) sends the A10-27-2011
20110261784METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING CALL HANDOFF - According to embodiments described in the specification, a method, system and apparatus for managing call handoff are provided, comprising: receiving a request from a mobile electronic device to initiate handover of a first media session between the mobile electronic device and a private branch exchange (PBX) from a first transport to a second transport; establishing a second media session with the mobile electronic device over the second transport; shuffling call media from the first media session to the second media session; and responsive to shuffling the call media, terminating the first media session.10-27-2011
20120147854Method and System For Transmitting Content In A Wireless Communication Network - The present invention provides methods and systems for transmitting content in a wireless communication network. The method includes caching a content in each base station of a set of base stations in the wireless communication network. The content includes a plurality of packets. In response to caching the content, a first base station belonging to the set of base stations transmits a first group of packets of the content to a mobile station. The method further includes handing over the mobile station to a second base station. The second base station belongs to the set of the base stations. The second base station resumes transmission of a second group of packets of the content to the mobile station.06-14-2012
20120147851COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached.06-14-2012
20110255514METHOD AND APPARATUS OF COMMUNICATION - The disclosure pertains to cell transmit parameter management of wireless communication systems. It applies to different wireless access technologies. An example embodiment of the disclosure includes reference-signal transmit-power coordination between cells over a base-station-base-station interface.10-20-2011
20110255508MOBILE STATION AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile station according to the present invention includes: a communication unit (10-20-2011
20110149909METHOD OF BINDING NETWORK-BASED FLOW THROUGH NOTIFICATION OF TERMINAL - A method of binding a network-based service flow is provided. The method binds a network-based service flow through notification of a terminal by allowing the terminal to notify a mobile access gateway (MAG) of binding information of a desired service flow at a specific moment by allowing intervention of the terminal, and allowing the MAG to again notify a local mobility anchor (LMA) of corresponding service flow binding information.06-23-2011
20080219217Method and system for transmitting and receiving data in a heterogeneous communication system - A method and system for transmitting/receiving data in a heterogeneous communication system. A terminal accesses a first controller of a first communication system supporting a first communication service to make a communication path to the first communication system. After making the communication path to the terminal, the first controller determines whether it is possible to provide the first communication service to the terminal over the first communication system. If it is not possible, the first controller transmits to an interworking unit a first request indicating that the terminal requires the first communication service over the second communication system. The interworking unit transmits a second request to a second controller of the second communication system in response to the first request, the second request indicating that the second controller provides the first communication service to the terminal. Upon receiving a response to the second request, the interworking unit controls the first controller to provide the first communication service to the terminal over the second communication system according to the response.09-11-2008
20080219215METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER CAPABILITY DISCOVERY - A first media independent handover function (MIHF) receives a media independent handover (MIH) capabilities discovery request from a second MIHF and generates a MIH capabilities discovery response message, including one or more parameters. Then the first MIHF then sends the MIH capabilities discovery response to the second MIHF. Based on the information contained in the MIH capabilities discovery response, the first MIHF may receive a handover request message from the second MIHF. The one or more parameters included within the discovery response message indicates the specific technologies for which the first MIHF supports a MMB handover. The one or more parameters may include a list of the technologies for which a make-before-break (MMB) handover is supported. For example, a parameter may use a specific bit structure wherein each bit is a Boolean representation of whether MMB handover is supported for a specific type of technology.09-11-2008
20080219214WIRELESS WIDE-AREA COMMUNICATION NETWORK MULTIHOP RELAY STATION MANAGEMENT - A system and method for managing a multihop relay station in a wireless wide-area communication network includes determining whether any mobile stations are being served by the relay station. If not, inactivating the relay station by; inactivating transmitted signals from the relay station, leaving a receiver active, and monitoring signals on the active receiver. Whereafter, estimating a channel quality of at least one mobile station from the monitored signals by the inactive relay station, and activating the relay station in response to the monitored signals indicating that a channel quality of the mobile station will improve when being served by the relay station.09-11-2008
20080219213DYNAMIC SHARING OF WIRELESS RESOURCES AMONG DIFFERENT COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Various embodiments are described to enable multiple, independent communication networks to share in an autonomous and dynamic manner unlicensed wireless resources. Generally, this involves determining that a first network node (09-11-2008
20080219212Handover Method for Mixed Mobile Communication System of Asynchronous Network and Synchronous Network - A method for improving a success rate of handover in a mobile communication system in which an asynchronous network and a synchronous network are mixed is disclosed. The method comprises the steps of: an asynchronous system instructing an asynchronous modem of a mobile station to initiate a synchronous modem according to a handover request, the handover request that is generated from the mobile station when intensions of a forwarding and receiving signals between the mobile station and a node B of the asynchronous system are less than a predetermined intension; the asynchronous system determining a cell for the handover and instructing the mobile station to handover a synchronous system; the asynchronous modem requesting the synchronous modem to receiving a current communication according to a handover request of the asynchronous system to the asynchronous modem; the mobile station accessing the synchronous system; and the asynchronous releasing the communication with the mobile station.09-11-2008
20080219218Gtp for Integration of Multiple Access - A network architecture comprising at least one core network, each core network comprising a number of packet data gateway access supporting nodes GASNs handling mobile user station access over an access network, said core network(s) further providing access to one or more global packet data communication networks (IN), and one or more nodes holding subscriber or mobile user station related information. The GASNs are further adapted to support intercommunication over a mobility protocol interface to, at reception of a request for change of access type from a mobile user station, establish information about the previous GASN of the mobile user station, and to, using the established information, update an established communication context concerning the mobile user station or create a new communication context concerning the mobile user station such that mobility between different access network types is enabled for a mobile user station without interruption of an ongoing session.09-11-2008
20110134882COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TERMINAL DEVICE, BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION QUALITY MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND PROGRAM - In a communication system (06-09-2011
20090092093Handoff of dual mode mobile device between an IP network and a PLMN - A device and a method for handoff of a VoIP internet telephone call from an IP network to a cellular network and for hand-back of the call to the IP network, in which during or after hand-off of the call an identifier of the hand-off call is obtained and stored and the identifier is used during hand-back of the call to the IP network.04-09-2009
20100061337Cell Selection/Reselection Mechanism for a Mobile Communication System - A method and mobile station for operating within one or more radio access networks. The radio access network broadcasts system information messages which indicate whether the network or cell supports a packet-switched handover procedure. The mobile station receives the system information messages and utilizes the indicated support as a factor in selecting a cell or routing area of a radio access network within which to camp.03-11-2010
20110096750DYNAMIC GATEWAY SELECTION PROCESS - A selection mechanism and a selection process are disclosed that provide the selection of a network device based on defined criteria to allow efficient use of the network and load balancing. In one embodiment, a method is disclosed that includes receiving an initial attachment at a gateway including an identifier of a radio attachment point, obtaining a name for the radio attachment point based on the identifier, accessing a list of names of packet data network gateways (PGWs) that can serve the initial attachment to provide a network connection, comparing the name for the radio attachment point with the list of names of the PGWs to determine at least one PGW that provides a closest match to the name for the radio attachment point, and selecting at least one PGW that provides the closest match to establish the network connection.04-28-2011
20110096752HANDOVER SUPPORT METHOD USING DEDICATED RANGING CODE - The present invention discloses a variety of methods of supporting handover in a wireless access system. A handover support method according to an embodiment of the present invention includes the steps of: transmitting a handover request message to a first base station (serving base station); receiving a handover response message (UL grant or UL-MAP message) containing authentication information (M) from a second base station (target base station); deriving a dedicated code index (DCI) for instructing a dedicated ranging code by using the authentication information (M); transmitting the dedicated ranging code to the second base station on a non-contention basis; and receiving a ranging response message as a response for the dedicated ranging code.04-28-2011
20110096751SOFT HANDOFF FOR OFDM - The present invention relates to soft handoffs in an OFDM system. Each mobile terminal measures pilot signal strengths of transmissions from adjacent base stations. If the pilot signal strength for a base station exceeds the defined threshold, that base station is added to an active set list. Each mobile terminal notifies the base stations of their active set lists. By providing the set list to the base station controller and the servicing base station, the mobile terminal identifies the sole servicing base station or triggers a soft handoff mode when multiple base stations appear on the active set list. The soft handoff mode uses a combination of scheduling and space-time coding to affect efficient and reliable handoffs.04-28-2011
20110116468Handover of user equipment - The invention relates to supporting a handover of user equipment (05-19-2011
20100165946METHOD OF PERFORMING SESSION HANDOVER BETWEEN TERMINALS, NETWORK SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM - It is difficult to perform handover between mobile terminals. In addition, when a session handover is performed between terminals whose mobilities are managed by individual Mobile IP HAs, it is difficult for an IETF standard to normally treat an Uplink packet. A network system includes: a function 07-01-2010
20100195620METHODS AND DEVICES TO SUPPORT MOBILITY OF A CLIENT ACROSS VLANS AND SUBNETS, WHILE PRESERVING THE CLIENT'S ASSIGNED IP ADDRESS - The present invention relates to methods and devices that support mobility of a client across a campus, particularly mobility across VLANs and subnets, while preserving the client's assigned IP address. Both layer 2 and layer 3 packets are supported. Mobility support most clearly applies to wireless clients, but could apply to other kinds of mobile connections, even to wired connections. A smart server is adapted to support multiple VLANs and to modify and redirect packets in sessions with a client that moves from one VLAN to another, preserving the client's assigned EP address. Two or more smart servers, in cooperation with a smart manger, modify packets and tunnel them between smart servers when a client that moves from one VLAN to another and from one smart server to another, again preserving the client's assigned IF address. A similar approach applies to support mobility of a client that moves between subnets that are supervised by two smart servers, with the second smart server acting on behalf of the first smart server and tunneling packets back and forth to the first smart server. Particular aspects of the present invention are described in the claims, specification and drawings.08-05-2010
20100067490SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING SERVICE CONTINUITY OF MULTICAST AND BROADCAST SERVICES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There is provided a method of handing over a provided service from a serving base station to a target base station, the service including streaming content sent to a mobile station. The method includes receiving, at the target base station, a handover request from the serving base station, the handover request identifying the streaming content being provided to the mobile station by the serving base station, and an interrupt data packet, of the streaming content, last transmitted to the mobile station. The method includes sending a handover response to the serving base station and receiving a notification from the serving base station indicating that the target base station is selected for handover. The method includes receiving, from the serving base station, subsequent data packets of the streaming content that are later in time than the interrupt data packet and sending the received subsequent data packets to the mobile station.03-18-2010
20100067487Wireless Communication Terminal, Hand-Off Method in Wireless Communication Terminal, and Wireless Communication System - It is possible to provide a wireless communication terminal, a handoff method in the wireless communication terminal, and a wireless communication system which can suppress the affect of an instantaneous disconnection in a hard handoff. The wireless communication terminal (03-18-2010
20100067488WIRELESS TERMINAL AND HANDOVER METHOD OF WIRELESS TERMINAL - A wireless terminal includes a data transmitting/receiving function and a handover control section. The handover control section scans channels to detect the existence or non-existence of the handover destination candidate on all available wireless channels. The handover control section acquires the handover destination candidate, by scanning the existence or non-existence of the handover destination in advance before handover execution. The verification scan is carried out to check whether or not the candidate is in a communicable area with the terminal. Then, based on the execution result of the verification scan, it performs a handover.03-18-2010
20100027503METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING DATA LOSS DURING HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for buffering and resending data in order to reduce data loss during handover are described. A network controller may determine whether or not to buffer data for a user equipment (UE). The network controller may continuously buffer a predetermined amount of latest data sent to a serving Node B if a decision is made to buffer the data for the UE. In one design, the network controller may send data for the UE to a source Node B, perform handover of the UE from the source Node B to a target Node B, resend to the target Node B a portion of the data sent previously to the source Node B, and send new data for the UE to the target Node B. e.g., after the resent data. The buffer and resend feature may be selectively enabled or disabled for each data flow for the UE.02-04-2010
20090296659SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING A FAST HANDOVER IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A broadband wireless access (BWA) communication system includes a mobile subscriber station (MSS), a serving base station (BS) with which the MSS performs communication, and a plurality of neighbor BSs. The serving BS transmits, to the MSS, a handover request message including information on at least one recommended BS to which the MSS can perform a handover, among the neighbor BSs, and indication information indicating a fast handover, and transmits, to each of the recommended BSs, a handover confirm message indicating that the MSS will perform the fast handover.12-03-2009
20090245204METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CARRYING OUT A HANDOVER BETWEEN BASE STATIONS OF A MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK FOR A MOBILE TERMINAL - A method and system for carrying out a handover between base stations of a telecommunication network. Each mobile terminal is in communication with a set of base stations including at least a first and a second base stations, the first base station receiving downlink data to be transmitted within data packets bearing a downlink sequence number to a first mobile terminal from an access gateway of the telecommunication network. The method includes determining a downlink sequence number, sending a handover request message to the second base station comprising the determined downlink sequence number and information related to the set of base station, requesting the second base station to receive data to be transmitted to the first mobile terminal from the access gateway, and stopping building data packets if the built data packets would bear a sequence number equal or higher than the determined downlink sequence number.10-01-2009
20110182269MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: transmitting, from an LTE-AS function to an EMM function, a reconnection request, when the LTE-AS function detects that an RRC connection is chanted to an idle state; and transmitting, at the EMM function, a service request, when the EMM function receives the reconnection request and detects that the LTE-AS function is in a coverage area.07-28-2011
20110051691CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN CODEC LIST FOR SINGLE RADIO VOICE CALL CONTINUITY - A Circuit Switched (CS) domain codec list for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SR-VCC) is provided An apparatus providing such a list can include prepaπing a list of circuit switched capabilities of a terminal device, sending the list to a network device dunng attachment, receiving the list at the network device, stoπing the list in the network device, sending the list to a second network device, receiving the list at the second network device, and using the list in handing over the terminal device to the second network device.03-03-2011
20110051690RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, TERMINAL, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A radio communication system includes a terminal and a base station that reports power information in the base station to the terminal. The terminal includes a prediction unit that, at the time of handover, predicts the timing at which power information is to be reported next based on the report period for reporting power information by the base station, and a switching unit that, at the time of handover, carries out switching to a handover target base station before the timing that was predicted.03-03-2011
20110051689Method for Reserving the Network Address During a Vertical Handover - A method for allocating the same network address to a first network interface and to a second network interface of a host is described. The method includes connecting the host to a first network (RANI) via the first network interface and connecting the host to a second network (RAN03-03-2011
20110051688METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOCATING RANGING CHANNEL FOR SYNCHRONIZED MOBILE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for allocating a ranging channel for a synchronized mobile station in a wireless communication system is provided. A base station (BS) allocates the ranging channel for the synchronized mobile station in a first subframe and a first subband. An index of the first subframe and an index of the first subband are determined respectively based on an index of a second subframe and an index of a second subband in which a ranging channel of a non-synchronized mobile station is allocated.03-03-2011
20110051687COMMUNICATION METHOD AND TERMINAL APPARATUS USING THE SAME - A radio unit and other units communicate with a base station apparatus. The radio unit and other units are capable of performing multiple types of communications. An acquisition unit acquires communication quality and moving speed. A determination unit determines the execution of a handover based on acquired quality and moving speed. The determination unit specifies, from among acquired quality and moving speed, a parameter used to determine the execution of a handover, based on the type of performed communication. An instruction unit instructs the radio unit and other units to perform a handover.03-03-2011
20110051686METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PERFORMING HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing a handover procedure of a handover performing apparatus in a wireless communication system in which a macro base station and a femto base station coexist is provided. The method of performing the handover procedure of the handover performing apparatus includes detecting an uplink signal transmitted from a terminal to the macro base station, sending a report message including information about the uplink signal to the macro base station, and performing the handover procedure with the terminal when the macro base station triggers handover based on the report message.03-03-2011
20110051685RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio communication system includes: a first base station for communicating with a mobile station in a first area; and a second base station for communicating with the mobile station in a second area; the first base station including: a first receiving unit for receiving connection control information from the second station; a first setup unit for generating scheduling information; and a first transmitting unit for transmitting the generated scheduling information to the second base station and for transmitting the data decided to send to the mobile station on the basis of the scheduling information; the second base station including: a second transmitting unit for transmitting the connection control information and for transmitting the data decided to send to the mobile station on the basis of the scheduling information; and a second receiving unit for receiving the scheduling information from the first base station.03-03-2011
20110051684METHODS AND APPARATUS TO SUPPORT COORDINATED INTERFERENCE MITIGATION IN MULTI-TIER NETWORKS - For use in a wireless network, a femtocell base station in communication with at least one first mobile station is provided. The femtocell base station is configured adjust a resource of the femtocell base station to mitigate interference at a second mobile station. In certain embodiments, the femtocell base station is configured to coordinate a handover of the at least one first mobile station from the femtocell base station to a neighboring base station. In certain embodiments, the femtocell base station is configured to transmit a message regarding the resource adjustment to the at least one first mobile station.03-03-2011
20110051683INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOVERS FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methods for improved inter-technology handovers between wireless networks are disclosed, in which a source radio access network operates on a first technology and a target radio access network operates on a second technology, and both radio access networks are managed at a single packet serving gateway. A foreign agent receives a mobile subscriber identifier during a handover of a mobile device from the source radio access network to the target radio access network and sends the mobile subscriber identifier to the packet serving gateway, and the packet serving gateway locates at least one process instance running on the packet serving gateway that is routing existing packet flows to the mobile device based on the mobile subscriber identifier. The packet serving gateway then transfers control of the at least one process to a control process.03-03-2011
20110051682Assignment and Handover in a Radio Communication Network - A network entity for a radio communication network includes a processing unit which causes a first resource and a second resource for a terrestrial interface of the radio network to be seized, where the first resource is distinct and different from the second resource. The entity includes a network interface through which a handover request or an assignment request message identifying the first and the second resource is sent. A network entity for a radio communication network includes a network interface which receives a handover request message or an assignment request message identifying a first resource and a second resource. The first resource is distinct and different from the second resource. The entity includes a processing unit that selects one of the first and second resources, allocates a radio channel associated with the handover or assignment, selects a bearer for a terrestrial interface and seizes resources for the interface.03-03-2011
20110188475APPARATUS, AND AN ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR PRESERVING COMMUNICATION SERVICE QUALITY LEVELS DURING HAND-OFF OF COMMUNICATIONS IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station is configured to transmit a sequence of data packets over a wireless network. The station includes a data sequence expander. The expander receives an indication of a pending hand-off for the mobile station from a first network access point to a second network access point and estimates an amount of time prior to occurrence of the hand-off. The expander inserts a number of delay packets into the sequence of data packets in response to receiving the indication of the pending hand-off. The number of delay packets is determined based on the estimated amount of time prior to the occurrence of the hand-off such that the insertion of the delay packets into the sequence of data packets will cause a delay that corresponds to the amount of time prior to occurrence of the hand-off.08-04-2011
20110188474SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - According to the present invention, Bluetooth master device offset information is determined and distributed among the master devices within a Bluetooth network. The system either provides an offset to each master device or determines master device offsets and distributes this information to master devices within the system to allow or efficient hand-offs of a slave between master devices.08-04-2011
20110188473SELF CONFIGURING AND OPTIMIZATION OF CELL NEIGHBORS IN WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - The present invention relates to a cellular communications network and in particular to the problem of identifying cells for neighbor lists, or handover candidates when the cells are identified by a limited number of non-unique identities. The present invention includes a method for a radio base station, wherein the base station receives reports from one or more terminals in neighbor cells quality and non-unique identities. The match is sought in a neighbor cell list non-unique identity with a unique cell identity. If the match cannot be made without ambiguity, the base station causes the terminal to detect the unique cell identity. If the reason for the ambiguity is the particular cell is not included in the neighbor cell list it is included when its unique identity has been established. The uniquely identified cell is used if it is determined to perform a handover.08-04-2011
20110188472METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus ensure efficient handover in a wireless communication system even when a User Equipment (UE) moves at a high speed. A serving eNB receives interference power information of an uplink (UL) signal and interference increase/decrease information of the UL signal from at least one adjacent eNB. an adjacent eNB, for which the received interference power information indicates that interference power of the UL signal is equal to or greater than a threshold value, is selected as a target eNB for a User Equipment (UE) among the at least one adjacent eNB. Whether handover of the UE is delayed is determined based on the interference increase/decrease information received from the target eNB. And if the handover of the UE is delayed, a handover parameter is transmitted to the UE to perform handover to the target eNB.08-04-2011
20110188471METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN A MOBILE STATION SUPPORTING RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - A method and apparatus supports Inter-Radio Access Technology (IRAT) Packet Switch (PS) handover during a simultaneous voice and data (SVD) mode in a mobile station that supports a Radio Access Technology (RAT). The method includes determining a state in which a data call is connected through a first system and a voice call is connected through a second system. The MS determines whether handover to the second system should be performed for the data call. A measurement report message that indicates a set of active base stations (BSs) of voice call connection in the second system is generated. And the measurement report message is transmitted to a serving BS of the data call connection in the first system.08-04-2011
20110188470HANDLING MOBILE TERMINATED CIRCUIT-SWITCHED CALLS USING AN 802.21 MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER (MIH) FRAMEWORK - A Media Independent Handover (MIH) server communicates with nodes in a cellular network to perform handover of a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) in the event of an incoming circuit-switched (CS) call. A Gateway Mobile Switching Center (GMSC) and/or Home Location Register (HLR) receive an indication of an incoming call, and may communicate with the MIH server. A determination is made regarding whether the WTRU is active in the cellular network. When required, the MIH server initiates an MIH handover of the WTRU to the cellular network. The WTRU hands over to the cellular network and receives the call. Additionally, an MIH server and a HLR communicate location information associated with a WTRU. The location information may be used by the MIH server and HLR to perform their respective MIH and HLR functionality, and/or to handover the WTRU to a cellular network in the event of an incoming CS call.08-04-2011
20110188476WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS BASE STATION, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - The controller of the wireless base station includes: the handover source down link data transfer unit configured to transfer the down link data from the upper layer network to the handover source wireless base station in a case where a connection destination of the wireless terminal is the handover source wireless base station; and the handover target down link data transfer unit configured to switch a transfer destination of the down link data from the handover source wireless base station to the handover target wireless base station and then transfer the down link data to the handover target wireless base station in a case where the connection destination of the wireless terminal needs to be switched from the handover source wireless base station to the handover target wireless base station, and also where the down link data is specific data.08-04-2011
20110188469METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS OF DIFFERENT TECHNOLOGY TYPES - For handover between wireless telecommunications networks of different technology types, an air interface is set up between a first node 08-04-2011
20110188468RETURNING USER EQUIPMENT TO A SOURCE RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A device receives a request for a service for a user equipment associated with a source radio access network, and establishes a connection with the user equipment via a circuit switched fallback procedure. The device also receives, from the source radio access network, information associated with one or more source cells, and provides the service to the user equipment through a target radio access network. The device further uses the information to select one of the one or more source cells for the user equipment to return after the service terminates, terminates the service, and returns the user equipment to the selected source cell.08-04-2011
20090175242FLOATING IP ADDRESS FOR ROAMING INTERNET CONNECTED SUBSCRIBER UNITS - A system apparatus for wireless communication that includes receiving, receiving data for a subscriber, determining the subscriber to whom the data is addressed, determining which cell the subscriber currently resides, and transmitting the data accordingly.07-09-2009
20090175241METHOD FOR DROPPING PACKET DATA, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A control method in a mobile communication system with a buffer unit for temporarily storing packet data to be sent, includes dropping the packet data stored in the buffer unit before sending when a drop timer corresponding to the packet data before sending reaches a given value or when a drop condition required by a drop mechanism accompanying the buffer unit is satisfied, and dropping the packet data stored in the buffer unit after sending when a drop timer corresponding to the packet data after sending reaches a given value.07-09-2009
20090175239METHOD OF SUPPORTING QUALITY-OF-SERVICE APPLICATION SESSION CONTINUITY DURING INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOVER USING A COMMON PACKET DATA FUNCTION - The present invention provides a method of handing off a mobile unit that supports multiple quality-of-service (QoS) application layer clients that operate according to multiple wireless access technologies in a packet-switched communication system. The method includes receiving information indicating a request to hand off the mobile unit from a first access network that operates according to a first wireless access technology to a second access network that operates according to a second wireless access technology. The mobile unit established a first session according to the first wireless access technology at a first QoS level. The method also includes establishing, concurrently with the first session and in response to receiving the handoff request, a second session according to the second wireless access technology at the first QoS level. The method further includes communicating with the mobile unit at the first QoS level using the first and second sessions.07-09-2009
20110206002METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND BROADCAST NETWORK - An exemplary embodiment of the present invention provides a method of commanding, by a handover control apparatus, a group of terminals to perform handover from a broadcasting network to a communication network, the method comprising generating a handover indication message including service information for identifying the group of terminals and transmitting the handover indication message to the group of terminals.08-25-2011
20100027509LOCAL MOBILITY ANCHOR RELOCATION AND ROUTE OPTIMIZATION DURING HANDOVER OF A MOBILE NODE TO ANOTHER NETWORK AREA - The invention relates to a method for managing the mobility of a mobile node that moves to a different network, but keeps the same IP address. It is proposed to perform route optimization by a Proxy MIP agent on behalf of the MN, thereby shortening the data-path while allowing network-based mobility. At session setup with a correspondent node, the PCC system in the home network derides whether route optimization is to be performed for the communication session. The PMIPa requests relevant information for the route optimization, including the decision for route optimization and the addresses of MN and CN, from the PCC system in the home network, when the MN attaches to the new network area. Accordingly, route optimization is performed by using the Return Routability Procedure according to MIPv6, thereby applying the MN's IP address as Home Address, and the PMIPa's address as Care-of Address of the MN.02-04-2010
20100027508FAST HANDOVER METHOD AND SYSTEM USING NETWORK-BASED LOCALIZED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - The present invention relates to a method in which a mobile node having mobility performs handover in a mobile communication system, and more particularly, to a fast handover method and system using network-based localized mobility Management. According to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention, in a network access process between a mobile node and a base station, the base station sends a message allowing network access to the mobile node and a link-up message to an access router. Then, the access router sends a location registration message, which includes a mobile node identifier, a target base station identifier, a localized mobility anchor identifier, and access permission flag information, to a localized mobility anchor (LMA), and receives an acknowledgement (Ack) message including network prefix information. Accordingly, when a router advertisement (RA) message is sent to the base station, the mobile node performs duplicate address detection (DAD). Accordingly, fast handover is performed to reduce packet loss and delay that occur when the mobile node moves between networks, thereby minimizing the packet loss and delay.02-04-2010
20100020767RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RADIO TRANSMISSION PATH CONTROL METHOD - An IP address is assigned to each of IP bearers, and a mobile anchor device (GWN) 01-28-2010
20100020768METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR RESTRICTION OF DOMAIN TRANSFER - A method and mobile terminal for controlling a voice call continuity (VCC) operation, are provided. According to an embodiment, the invention is directed to a method for controlling a voice call continuity (VCC) operation between a mobile terminal and a network, the method comprising: receiving operator policy via an OMA Device Management (DM) method during at least one call or session established between the mobile terminal and the network, the operator policy including domain transfer restriction information; evaluating the domain transfer restriction information of the operator policy; and selectively initiating a domain transfer according to the evaluated domain transfer restriction information of the operator policy, wherein the domain transfer restriction information indicates that a domain transfer from CS domain to IMS domain is restricted or not or a domain transfer from IMS domain to CS domain is restricted or not.01-28-2010
20100020763COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM - To provide a technology with which a large number of wireless communication networks can be efficiently used while the size of a device operated by a user is reduced and power is saved by providing a communication terminal whose connection with a different wireless communication network can be dynamically reconfigured. A communication terminal 01-28-2010
20100020766MOBILE NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING IP HANDOFF THEREOF - Provided are a mobile network system capable of processing a high-speed handoff by dividing into a data packet path between mobile nodes and a handoff packet path of the mobile node, and a method for processing IP handoff thereof. The system includes a MAP broadcasting a handoff registration request and reply between a foreign agent and a home agent, and an additional handoff signal path between the MAP and a mobile agent operating as a foreign agent and a home agent by means of a HAAP and VPN technology to be physically distinguishable from a data path. Therefore, limitation in a head of line can be resolved and the IP handoff can be promptly provided.01-28-2010
20100020762CONVERSION OF VOICE-OVER-IP MEDIA CONTROL MESSAGING INTO MOBILE CONTROL CHANNEL SIGNALING USING A VOICE-OVER IP GATEWAY - A gateway serving as an interface between a mobile network and a wireless network can be configured to send a signal strength indicator to the mobile network thereby causing the mobile network to recognize the gateway as a valid path for handing off a call. The wireless network can be configured according to one of the 802.11 wireless communications protocols. The gateway can route the call from the mobile network to a wireless access point of the wireless network via a packet-switched network, such that the call is conducted via a wireless communications link with the wireless access point.01-28-2010
20110216735LEGACY AND ADVANCED ACCESS SERVICE NETWORK INTERNETWORKING - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe methods, apparatus, and system configurations for transferring wireless connections among legacy and advanced access service networks.09-08-2011
20110216743OPTIMIZATION OF HANDOVERS TO UNTRUSTED NON-3GPP NETWORKS - The invention relates to a method for ensuring IP session continuity upon a handover of a mobile node to a non-3GPP network, wherein an ongoing IP session of the mobile node goes via a packet data network gateway. For non-3GPP networks it is necessary to discover a security gateway and to then establish the corresponding tunnels to the ePDG to form the new data path; a security tunnel between the mobile node and the security gateway, and an IP tunnel between the packet data network gateway and the security gateway. In order to prepare the handover to possible non-3GPP accesses, the two tunnels are pre-established, however maintained deactivated until their use is actually needed. Accordingly, when handing over to the non-3GPP network, the IP session may be continued without any significant interruption by activating the already established tunnels.09-08-2011
20110216742METHOD FOR SUPPORTING HANDOVER MECHANISMS - A method for supporting handover mechanisms, in particular Media Independent Handover (MIH) mechanism according to the IEEE 802.21 standard, wherein a user equipment (UE) attaches to an access network (AN) via points of attachment (PoAs), wherein signalling messages are exchanged between the entities participating in the handover process, in particular between the user equipment and the points of attachment, and wherein the handover mechanism supports changing the network connection of the user equipment from one of the points of attachment—current point of attachment (PoA)—to another one of the points of attachment—target point of attachment—while maintaining all ongoing communication of the user equipment, is characterized in that information about the user equipment's ongoing communication is added to the signalling messages exchanged in the handover process, wherein the information is employed to treat individual traffic flows of the user equipment's ongoing communication selectively during the handover process.09-08-2011
20110216741SEAMLESS CELL RECONFIGURATION IN BROADBAND WIRELESS NETWORKS - Embodiments of a system and method for wireless communication are provided. In certain embodiments, systems and methods for providing seamless reconfiguration of a network which incorporate known features of the network. In some embodiments, the mobile station implements a hand over from one physical base station to the same physical base station, so as to allow that base station to reconfigure and update configuration parameters.09-08-2011
20110216740HANDOVER BETWEEN LEGACY AND NON-LEGACY WIMAX NETWORKS - Embodiments of a system and method for handover and zone switching between legacy and non-legacy base stations are provided. In certain embodiments, a fast ranging IE allocation is used to transfer a dedicated allocation to a mobile station for ranging with a target base station.09-08-2011
20110216738Method and System for Mobile Station Acquisition - A system and method for mobile station acquisition are presented. A preferred embodiment comprises a control message that contains additional information than would be found in a neighbor advertisement MAC management message. This control message contains enough information to allow the mobile station to locate, synchronize, and acquire service from a separate base station for a handoff process.09-08-2011
20110216737SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND MEDIA FOR IMPLEMENTING CALL HANDOFF BETWEEN NETWORKS - Systems, methods, and media for implementing call handoff between networks are provided, in some embodiments, systems for implementing call handoff between networks are provided, the systems comprising.: at least one device that: receives a call from a first endpoint; establishes a connection between the first end-point and a conference; calls a second endpoint: establishes a connection between the second end point and the conference; and when one of the first endpoint and the second endpoint is able to be connected to a different network from a current network which the one of the first endpoint and the second endpoint is connected to the conference: establishes a connection between the conference and the one of the first endpoint and the second endpoint via the different network; and removes the connection via the current network between the one of the first endpoint and the second endpoint and the conference.09-08-2011
20110216736System and Method for Supporting Bandwidth Requests in a Handover - A system and method for supporting bandwidth requests in a handover are provided. A method for mobile station operations includes transmitting a first message, receiving a second message responsive to the first message, and initiating a handover with the target controller and a serving controller. The first message includes an incremental bandwidth request, the second message includes an indicator indicating that a target controller has allocated resources at least equal to a total bandwidth required by the mobile station, and the total bandwidth required by the mobile station is provided by a serving controller or maintained by the target controller.09-08-2011
20090122759Network-Based System and Method for Global Roaming - A system and method of mobile communication roaming where a subscriber's home network and a roaming network used by the subscriber do not have a roaming agreement. The roaming network sends a “Send Authentication/Parameters” request to the home network via an intelligent roaming system on or attached to the backbone. The home network sends an authentication response to the “Send Authentication/Parameters” request from the home network to the roaming network via the backbone and intelligent roaming system. The roaming network sends a “Update Location” request from the roaming network to the intelligent roaming system. The visitor locator register (VLR) address in the “Update Location” request is replaced with the VLR address of the intelligent roaming system to create a modified update request. The modified update request is sent from the intelligent roaming system to the home network. The home network sends an update response to the modified update request to the roaming network via the backbone and intelligent roaming system.05-14-2009
20120147852COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system is described in which mobile telephones are able to roam between neighbouring home node base stations and in which the home base stations or the home base station gateway devices are arranged to aggregate “Unsuccessfully Transmitted DL Data Volume” determined by previous home base stations served by the gateway device. In this way, when a call is transferred away from the gateway device or is released, a total aggregated value of “Unsuccessfully Transmitted DL Data Volume” can be provided to the core network for billing purposes.06-14-2012
20100329211Method and Apparatus for Handling Inter-RAT Handover - A method for handling inter-RAT handover in a user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes steps of performing a handover procedure to handover the UE from other communication system to the wireless communication system; receiving an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message, and configuring radio link failure timers and constants of the UE according to whether the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message includes an UE specific configuration parameter for the radio link failure timers and constants.12-30-2010
20090109922METHOD OF INTEGRATING FEMTOCELLS IN A PACKET CABLE MULTIMEDIA ARCHITECTURE - The present invention provides a method for implementation in a cable modem termination system that is communicatively coupled to a first wireless access device configured to provide wireless connectivity to at least one mobile unit. The method includes receiving a request to allocate resources to the first wireless access device for a wireless connection to the mobile unit. The requested resources are determined based upon a quality of service associated with the mobile unit. The method also includes determining whether to grant the request for the resources based on policy information received from a policy server and providing information indicating whether the requested resources have been granted.04-30-2009
20090129334Soft handoff in Ofdma system - The soft handoff in an OFDMA system. If the pilot signal strength for a base station exceeds the defined threshold, the base station is added to an active set list. Subcarriers in a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols are divided and allocated into subchannels. The OFDM symbols are divided and multiplexed. A soft handoff zone with a first dimension of the subchannels and a second dimension of the divided and multiplexed OFDM symbols is defined. The soft handoff zone have subcarriers with a subchannel definition, for example, an identical permutation.05-21-2009
20090052395Femto-BTS RF access mechanism - Femto cells that extend mobile network coverage into customer premises operate in a frequency band typically assigned to a macro network. As disclosed, to facilitate system discovery and registrations of mobile stations with femto cells, a carrier designates one the channels within the band as a primary channel for its femto cells. For example, neighbor list messages transmitted by macro network base stations can provide frequency and PN code information directing mobile stations to search the primary channel for a PN code of the femto cells. Also, a mobile station PRL may identify femto cells by SID/NID. The SID is that of the carrier's macro network, whereas the NID may be a NID of the macro network or one specifically assigned to femto cell operations. The PRL uses frequency acquisition information for the femto cells that is the same as or similar to that for one of the macro networks.02-26-2009
20100128696MANAGEMENT OF SEAMLESS HANDOVER BETWEEN DIFFERENT COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS IN AN IP DUAL-MODE TERMINAL - A dual-mode terminal designed to connect to an IP-based network via a first communication system and a second communication system, the dual-mode terminal including a first physical network interface module adapted to establish a packet-based communication with the IP-based network via the first communication system, the first physical network interface module being accessible via a first physical network interface having a first physical network address; a second physical network interface module adapted to establish a packet-based communication with the IP-based network via the second communication system, the second physical network interface module being accessible via a second physical network interface having a second physical network address; an IP-based protocol stack adapted to operate between a software application in the dual-mode terminal and the first and second physical network interface modules; and a system for performing a seamless handover between the first communication system and the second communication system during a connection to the IP-based network.05-27-2010
20120147853COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached.06-14-2012
20120147855METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING A SERVING HS-DSCH CELL CHANGE - A method and apparatus for performing a serving high speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) cell change from a source cell to a target cell are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may be pre-configured with HS-DSCH configuration for the target cell. The WTRU may start monitoring a high speed shared control channel (HS-SCCH) on the target cell using the pre-loaded HS-DSCH configuration for the target cell on a condition that a measurement report is triggered by the event 1D. The WTRU may initiate a timer when the WTRU starts monitoring the HS-SCCH on the target cell.06-14-2012
20120307801CONTEXT HANDLING METHOD - The present invention relates to a method for context handling when a user equipment (12-06-2012
20120307802INTERNETWORKING TECHNIQUES FOR TRANSFERRING PACKETS BETWEEN SOURCE AND TARGET SERVING GATEWAYS - Techniques for wireless communications include operating first and second access networks to provide wireless service to wireless devices. The first and second access networks are associated with respective first and second gateways. The first gateway is operated to (1) receive a request for transferring wireless service of a wireless device from the second access network to the first access network and (2) send a message that includes key information to the second gateway based on the request. The second gateway is operated to (1) send session context information to the first gateway in response to the message and (2) forward a data packet associated with the wireless device to the first gateway. The forwarded data packet includes a packet data network identifier (PDN-ID) to identify a packet data network (PDN) associated with a downlink data packet.12-06-2012
20120307803METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPDATING A KEY IN AN ACTIVE STATE - A method for updating a key in an active state is disclosed according to the embodiments of the present invention. The method includes steps of: initiating a key update by a user equipment in the active state or a network side when a pre-defined condition is met; updating the key by the network side and the user equipment, and negotiating an activation time of the new keys. An apparatus for updating a key in an active state is also disclosed according to the present invention. With the present invention, the user equipment in an active state and the network side may actively initiate the key update procedure in different cases, thereby solving the problem concerning the key update for a session in an active state.12-06-2012
20120307798Session Management Method and System Based on M2M Application, and Apparatus - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a session management method and system based on an M2M application and an apparatus. The method includes: first acquiring gateway equipment information and group number information of a group user device; when acquiring that group information of the group user device changes, according to the gateway equipment information and the group number information of the group user device, instructing a gateway equipment to execute bearer change processing on the group device, and executing the bearer change processing on the group user device, so as to reduce signaling congestion on a network side and correspondingly reduce a network load.12-06-2012
20120307799METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE SIMULTANEOUS PDN CONNECTIONS TO THE SAME APN - A method for supporting selection of PDN connections for a mobile terminal, wherein the mobile terminal is connected to an access point, and wherein the mobile terminal is in active mode having at least one ongoing session to an APN via a PDN gateway—first PDN gateway—, includes the steps of monitoring whether a more suitable PDN gateway—second PDN gateway—than the first PDN gateway becomes available for the mobile terminal, and, if available, establishing any new sessions of the mobile terminal to the APN by establishing a new PDN connection to the second PDN gateway, while keeping already ongoing sessions associated with the existing PDN connection to the first PDN gateway. Furthermore, a mobile terminal with PDN connection selection support is disclosed.12-06-2012
20120307797GATEWAY SELECTION METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM DURING HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK HANDOVER - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a gateway selection method for heterogeneous networks, where the method includes: accessing, by a terminal, an access network 12-06-2012
20120307800Enhanced Single Voice Radio Call Continuity Using Packet Data Network Bi-Casting - A method can comprise providing single voice radio call continuity using packet data network bi-casting, wherein the call continuity is provided during a handover of a user equipment from a real-time transport protocol voice to a circuit switched voice call In such a method, the real-time transport protocol voice can be carried m a long term evolution system and the circuit switched voice call can be carried in a second or third generation system The method can be performed by a serving network of the user equipment.12-06-2012
20120307795MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND GATEWAY DEVICE - A handover method according to the present invention includes a step of transmitting, by a radio base station HeNB#12-06-2012
20120307796Method, System and Device for Controlling Handover of User Terminal Device - Embodiments of the invention provide a method and system for controlling handover of a user terminal device.12-06-2012
20120307793METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER BETWEEN A LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) NETWORK AND ANOTHER TYPE OF RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method for performing handover by wireless User Equipment (UE) is provided. The UE includes a Long Term Evolution-Mobile Extreme Convergence (LTE-MXC) application processor, a LTE processor and a Digital Signal Processor (DSP). The UE buffers a set of IP packets when a Radio Access Technology (RAT) indicator is less than a pre-defined threshold and sends the set of IP packets to the LTE processor and the DSP. The LTE processor transmits the set of IP packets to the LTE network and sends acknowledgement signals to the LTE-MXC application processor and the DSP. When the handover is complete, the LTE processor sends the transmission status of the set of IP packets to the DSP. The UE also includes multimode Radio Resource Control (RRC) and Non-Access Stratum (NAS) modules.12-06-2012
20120307794METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-DEVICE TRANSFER (HANDOFF) BETWEEN IMS AND GENERIC IP CLIENTS - A method of Inter-User Equipment (UE) Transfer (IUT) for use in a Home enhanced-Node B (H(e)NB), the method comprising receiving a transfer command from a first IMS capable WTRU via IMS signaling, translating the transfer command to a non-IMS based message, and transmitting the translated non-IMS based message to a Service Centralization and Continuity Application Server (SCC AS).12-06-2012
20120307791Methods and Devices for Controlling Handover - Methods and devices in a cellular radio system for handling repeated handovers of a user equipment between a pair of cells is provided. It is determined if the user equipment is in one of two states, moving state or stationary state. Based on the determination different actions can be taken. For example threshold optimizations for reducing repeated handover may only be applied to a user equipment determined to be in a stationary state or a user equipment determined to be in a stationary state to can be nailed to the best cell of said pair of cells by not allowing the user equipment to handover to the other cell of said pair of cells.12-06-2012
20120307792WI-FI VIRTUAL PORT UPLINK MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL - Uplink medium access control on per-wireless device level. An access point sends a beacon frame to a wireless device. The beacon frame includes a BSSID that is unique to the wireless device. The beacon frame also includes embedded uplink configurations specifying uplink medium access for the wireless device. In one embodiment, a controller recognizes a device or user associated with the device, and sends corresponding uplink configurations for embedding in a subsequent beacon frame.12-06-2012
20090147750Handover Process And Information Support for Communication Transfer Between Telecommunication Networks - This invention discloses an automatic and network-transparent “handover convenience information support” method (HOCIS method) for a subscriber (SUBC) of a primary communications process (alias primary telecommunications process alias primary TC process, PTCP) in which an HO takes place—wherein this HO process can comprise arbitrary times prior or after the “actual HO”.06-11-2009
20110090866METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR INTER-RAT HANDOVER IN 3G LTE - The invention provides a method for enabling inter-RAT handover in a communication system comprising a first network utilizing a first radio access technology and a second network utilizing a second radio access technology. When a user equipment moves from the first network into the second network and a handover is to be made, processing protocol data units (PDUs) in non-IP packet format and buffered in the first network or in the user equipment into IP packets in response to a handover confirmation (HOcfm) sent by the second network; forwarding the processed IP packets from the first network to the second network if the PDUs are buffered in the first network; and retransmitting the processed IP packets after the user equipment is switched to the second network. An user equipment and a communication system corresponding with the method of the invention are also provided.04-21-2011
20090073934DYNAMIC COMPENSATION FOR RESOURCE STEALING IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A scheduler associated with a base station of a wireless communication network dynamically compensates for uplink bandwidth that has been re-assigned (stolen) by a mobile station (MS) to transmit a control message. The scheduler allocates a preset amount of bandwidth to the MS for data transmission. The scheduler detects bandwidth stealing activity and evaluates when bandwidth stealing is justified on he part of the MS. The scheduler provides additional bandwidth to appropriately compensate for the stolen bandwidth when bandwidth stealing is justified, in order to maintain the quality of service of the data traffic connection.03-19-2009
20110116473METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-DEVICE HANDOVER (HO) BETWEEN INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM (IMS) AND CIRCUIT SWITCHED (CS) WIRELESS TRANSMIT/RECEIVE UNITS (WTRUs) - A method and apparatus for Inter-User Equipment Transfer (IUT) of an IP Multimedia (IM) Subsystem (IMS) session between a circuit switched (CS) wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and an IMS-capable WTRU.05-19-2011
20110116474OPTIMIZED RESOURCE ALLOCATION FOR WIRELESS DEVICE IN PACKET TRANSFER MODE - A method and system for a wireless device configured to communicate with a network is presented. The network is communicated with at a radio link control layer. An indication is communicated to the network that a higher layer protocol is operating in an acknowledged mode. The higher level protocol is above the radio link control layer. In some implementations, the higher level protocol terminates at a device located outside the network. A resource allocation is received from the network. The resource allocation is at the RLC layer.05-19-2011
20110116475VERTICAL HANDOFF METHOD, VERTICAL HANDOFF SYSTEM, HOME AGENT, AND MOBILE NODE - The invention provides a technique to reduce a packet size of signaling to request vertical handoff in case a mobile node has static vertical handoff rules. According to this technique, MN 05-19-2011
20110116477CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, ACCESS CONTROL METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE - A Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) information processing method, an access control method, and the corresponding system and devices are disclosed herein. The CSG information processing method includes: obtaining modified CSG information of User Equipment (UE); and sending a message that carries the CSG information to the UE. The method and the corresponding system and devices enable the UE to know the change of the stored CSG information. The access control method includes: obtaining modified CSG information; and detaching a UE from an accessed CSG area when discovering that the UE is not allowed to access the accessed CSG area any longer according to the modified CSG information. The access control method and the corresponding system and devices implement access control under a CSG mechanism.05-19-2011
20110116469LOCAL INTERNET PROTOCOL ACCESS/SELECTED INTERNET PROTOCOL TRAFFIC OFFLOAD PACKET ENCAPSULATION TO SUPPORT SEAMLESS MOBILITY - A method, a mobile system, and a mobility management entity are disclosed. A transceiver 05-19-2011
20100157943ACCESS POINT HANDOVER CONTROL BASED ON CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP SUBSCRIPTION INFORMATION - One or more nodes in a network provide access control for an in-bound handover of an access terminal to a closed subscriber group. For example, at least one of a source access point, a network node, or a target access point may determine whether handover is allowed based on whether a closed subscriber group identifier of the target access point is listed in closed subscriber group subscription information for the access terminal.06-24-2010
20090141683METHOD OF BEST EFFORT HANDOFF TO MAINTAIN RADIO BEARER AND MIP SESSION CONTINUITY FOR MULTI-MODE MOBILE UNITS - The present invention provides a method of best effort hand off that is implemented in a mobile unit capable of communicating with a network according to multiple wireless access technologies. The method includes performing a handoff of the mobile unit from a first wireless communication link established according to a first wireless access technology to a second wireless communication link established according to a second wireless access technology. The method also includes transmitting, over the second wireless communication link, a de-registration message requesting de-registration of the first wireless communication link in response to performing the handoff.06-04-2009
20080273499Packet Forwarding Method, Path Reconstrucitng Method and State Transition Method For Avoiding Packet Loss During Handover - Provided is a method of packet forwarding over partial mesh network to avoid packet loss during handover. The method includes: based on first trigger information of a layer 2 obtained when a mobile node (MN) moves from a domain of a currently connected first BS to another domain, expecting a second BS of the domain to which the MN moves; if the first BS acquires second trigger information of the layer 2 indicating a disconnection between the first BS and the MN, forwarding packets destined for the MN to the second BS through the links; and if the second BS buffers the packets forwarded from the first BS and third trigger information of the layer 2 indicating a connection between the second BS and the MN, transferring the buffered packets to the MN.11-06-2008
20110305222LOW LATENCY HANDOVER BETWEEN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS USING DIFFERENT RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - A communications system for providing a user's mobile station (MS) with an Internet Protocol (IP) connectivity, has an IP network gateway for allocating an IP address to the MS to enable it to access an IP network. First and second base stations are respectively configured to support communications of the MS over first and second radio access networks using different radio access technologies. A first access gateway provides an interface between the IP network gateway and the first radio access network, whereas a second access gateway provides an interface between the IP network gateway and the second radio access network. A handover interface is provided between the first access gateway and the second access gateway for enabling the MS to switch between the first and second radio access networks with minimum latency.12-15-2011
20110305221METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USER HANDING OVER TO HOME NODEB - A Method and apparatus for a user handing over to a home NodeB are provided. The method comprises the following steps: when the user initiates a handover procedure from a source NodeB to a target home NodeB, a target home NodeB gateway receiving a relocation request message from a mobility management unit of a core network; the target home NodeB gateway generating a user context for the user according to the relocation request message, allocating a user context identifier for the user context, and sending the user context identifier and the relocation request message to the target home NodeB; and when receiving a relocation request acknowledgement message replied by the target home NodeB, the target home NodeB gateway sending the relocation request acknowledgement message to the mobility management unit of the core network. The application of the above technical solution can ensure the handover of a user to a home NodeB which serves as a target NodeB successfully.12-15-2011
20110305220Methods and Devices for Managing Radio Access in a Communication System - A method for managing radio access comprises sending of a radio access technology (RAT) resource aggregation request from a first radio access network (RAN) to a second RAN concerning communication with a user equipment connected to a source RAN, and returning a response to the first RAN. The source RAN is the first or second RAN. The first and second RANs use different radio access technologies. Radio resources of a base station in a target RAN, the RAN to which the user equipment is not connected, are reserved. A report of the reserved radio resources is sent to the source RAN. A RAT resource aggregation command is transmitted to the user equipment. The RAT resource aggregation command comprises that a RAT resource aggregation shall be used and the reserved radio resources. The base stations have at least partly overlapping coverage areas.12-15-2011
20090122762METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR HFN HANDLING AT INTER-BASE STATION HANDOVER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Systems and methods for addressing the de-synchronization of the cryptosync between the network and the mobile stations (eNB) that can occur at mobility are addressed. De-synchronization is resolved by forwarding HFN and PDCP Sequence Number(s) from the source eNB to the target eNB. In order to avoid re-use of a cryptosync for a given key, a backward offset from the initial COUNT value is used by the target eNB. These approaches do not require an over-the-air signaling and the COUNT value handling in the network is transparent to the mobile station.05-14-2009
20100189071RE-SYNCHRONIZATION OF TEMPORARY UE IDS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for re-synchronizing Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifiers (C-RNTIs) in a wireless communication system are described. In one design, a user equipment (UE) sends a random access preamble for random access. A base station receives the random access preamble, assigns a Temporary C-RNTI to the UE, and sends a random access response including the Temporary C-RNTI. The UE uses the Temporary C-RNTI as a C-RNTI for itself if a valid C-RNTI is not already available. The UE discards the Temporary C-RNTI and uses the valid C-RNTI if available. The UE sends a transmission after receiving the random access response, and the transmission may include the valid C-RNTI if available. For handover, the base station (a target base station) receives a handover request from a source base station, assigns the valid C-RNTI to the UE, and sends the valid C-RNTI to the source base station for forwarding to the UE.07-29-2010
20110142006Techniques for Optimizing Efficiency in a Situation for a Possible Handover of a Mobile Terminal - A technique is proposed for optimizing efficiency in a situation for a possible handover of a mobile terminal (06-16-2011
20100284370WIRELESS NETWORK INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOFFS - In general, a method is described for handing off a communication session associated with a mobile device from a first network running a first technology to a second network running a second technology different from the first technology, the method comprising: establishing a communication channel with the mobile device through the first network; and enabling, through the communication channel, a handoff of the communication session associated with the mobile device from the first network to the second network.11-11-2010
20100290430Apparatus and method for handover in wireless communication system - An apparatus and method provide an effective handover of a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system from a macro evolved Node-B (eNB) to a relay eNB). In a method of supporting a handover of a User Equipment (UE) by a macro evolved Node-B (eNB) in a wireless communication system, a handover of the UE to a relay eNB is determined. A handover request and RRC connection setup message is transmitted to the relay eNB by integrating a handover request message for requesting a handover of the UE and an RRC connection setup message for requesting RRC connection setup between the macro eNB and the relay eNB. A handover request response and RRC connection setup response message are received from the relay eNB by integrating a handover request response message and an RRC connection setup response message.11-18-2010
20090232096BASE STATION, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND PROGRAM STORAGE MEDIUM - There is provided a base station that includes a search request receiving unit configured to receive from a mobile terminal a search request requesting search of a candidate base station for a handover target; an examination request transmitting unit configured to transmit to other base stations an examination request for checking whether or not the mobile terminal is present in the coverage areas of the other base stations when the search request has been received; an examination result receiving unit configured to receive, from the other base stations, examination result information showing whether or not the mobile terminal is present in the coverage areas of the other base stations; and a search response transmitting unit configured to identify one of the other base stations whose coverage area contains the mobile terminal as the candidate base station, and transmit, to the mobile terminal, information on the identified candidate base station.09-17-2009
20130010752Method and Device For Handling Handover of a Communications Service - The embodiments herein relate to method in a mobile management entity, referred to as MME, for enabling handover of a communication service between a circuit switched (CS) network and a packet switched (PS) network. The user equipment is located in the CS network and having a communications service in the CS network. Handling is improved by providing communication between the MME and a mobile switching centre server.01-10-2013
20090116452APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR A MOBILE NODE ROAMING IN AN IPv6 NETWORK - The present invention discloses an apparatus and method for a mobile node roaming in an Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) network. The apparatus includes a foreign home agent (FHA). The method includes: when a mobile node (MN) moves from an Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) network to an IPv6 network, a FHA exchanges messages with the MN and the IPv4 home agent (HAv4) of the MN to register tunnels at the IPv6 network interface and the IPv4 network interface. The method further includes: the MN sends a Binding Update (BU) message that carries an IPv4 registration option of the MN, when the MN moves from the IPv4 network to the IPv6 network. With the present invention, the routing scheme for a dual-stack MN to roam from an IPv6 network to an IPv4 network is implemented.05-07-2009
20090034470FORWARDING BROADCAST/MULTICAST DATA WHEN WIRELESS CLIENTS LAYER 3 ROAM ACROSS IP SUBNETS IN A WLAN - In a network comprising a first subnet comprising a first WLAN associated with a home wireless switch a second subnet comprising a second WLAN associated with a first current wireless switch and a third subnet comprising a third WLAN associated with a second current wireless switch, methods are provided for forwarding a Broadcast/Multicast (BCMC) packet generated by a first wireless client device when the first wireless client device roams from the first subnet to the second subnet and a second wireless device roams from the first subnet to the third subnet. Other methods are provided for forwarding a BCMC packet generated by a wired host to a first wireless client device when the first wireless client device roams from the first subnet to the second subnet and to a second wireless device when the second wireless device roams from the first subnet to the third subnet.02-05-2009
20110080891System and Method for Handover Between Relays - A method is provided for handing over a user equipment (UE). The method includes a donor access node with which the UE is in communication via a serving relay node receiving UE context information. The method further includes the donor access node using the UE context information to identify data packets that belong to the UE, wherein the data packets are forwarded from the serving relay node to a target relay node.04-07-2011
20100189074Improved Resource Reservation During Handover in a Wireless Communications System - A serving base station provides time slot allocation information to a target base station for a mobile station that will likely undergo handover. The target base station uses the time slot allocation information to determine when resources should be reserved to facilitate the handover of the mobile station.07-29-2010
20100085938WiFi network system for performing a high-speed handover of voice and multimedia data and method applied to the same - A WiFi network system for performing a high-speed handover of voice and multimedia data includes a wireless station (STA), a network router for connecting to the Internet; first and second smart base stations respectively connected with the Internet through the network router, wherein the second smart base station is adjacent to the first smart base station. Each of the smart base stations covers an area in order to register the STA located in the area and connect the STA with the Internet through the first or a second smart base station and the network router.04-08-2010
20090201879INTEGRATION OF 802.21 MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER FUNCTIONALITY TO RADIO INTERFACE LAYER AND TELEPHONY SERVER - A radio interface layer media independent handover (RIL MIH) client functionality enables transparent inter-system handover of a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) between different radio access technologies (RATs), without user intervention. The RIL MIH client interacts with RIL drivers and proxies, informs the RIL proxies of the handover status, then the proxies interact with a new driver in use. A WTRU is modified to add MIH functionality to a telephony server to support inter-system handover.08-13-2009
20120039303PS TO CS HANDOVER INDICATOR - The present invention relates to a solution for handling handover of connections for a user equipment from a packet switch network to a circuit switched network This is provided as a method implemented in a node and system The method is provided in a telecommunications network (02-16-2012
20090201882METHOD OF EXECUTING SCANNING IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The primitives between an upper management layer and the MAC layer within a mobile station and a base station are defined in order to specify and clarify the operations within the protocol stack layers in a broadband wireless access system to allow a mobile station to perform scanning procedures. Media Independent Handover (MIH) procedures can be achieved because the NCMS and MIH layer can communicate through use of these primitives.08-13-2009
20110110334COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION PROCESSING DEVICE AND AUTHENTICATION PROCESSING DEVICE - Disclosed is a technique to enable a session handover between devices with different key generation functions in an authentication protocol. According to the technique, when a session where a UE (05-12-2011
20110110333DISTRIBUTED MOBILE AGENT - Systems, apparatus, and methods for forwarding data packets towards a mobile node roaming in a foreign packet-switched data network are disclosed. The data packets having been addressed to a home address of the mobile node, the mobile node being provided with a care of address for use in the foreign network, the systems, apparatus, and methods comprise various features.05-12-2011
20110110332METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN MULTI-MODE TERMINAL - A method for performing handover in a dual-mode terminal is disclosed. The method for performing handover in a dual-mode terminal includes receiving an Internet Protocol (IP) packet from a personal computer (PC), and transmitting the received IP packet to a serving network; upon receiving a handover message from the serving network, stopping reception of the IP packet from the PC; forwarding residual packets from a first processor corresponding to the serving network to a second processor corresponding to a target network; upon handover completion and completion of the forwarding of the residual packets, restarting reception of the IP packet from the PC; and transmitting the residual packets to the target network.05-12-2011
20110110329SECURITY UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR ZONE SWITCHING IN MIXED-MODE WIMAX NETWORK - A zone switching method is disclosed for use in a mixed-mode WiMAX environment. The zone switching method is useful in a WiMAX network having both 802.16e (legacy) and 802.16e/802.16m (mixed-mode, or advanced) entities, including mobile stations, base stations, and access service network entities. The zone switching method includes anchor authenticator relocation, dual security context maintenance, and security updates for both entry-before-break-capable mobile stations and for those mobile stations with slower switching speeds. The zone switching method enables an advanced mobile station to seamlessly switch from legacy to mixed-mode operation once the mixed-mode entities are available to service the 802.16m operations.05-12-2011
20110110327SYSTEM INFORMATION ACQUISITION IN CONNECTED MODE - A method of wireless communication includes acquiring at least one non-required system information from a cell while in a radio resource control connected state. The non-required system information is system information that is not required in the radio resource control connected state. The method includes transitioning from the radio resource control connected state to a radio resource control idle state on the cell without acquiring the at least one non-required system information.05-12-2011
20110110326Handover Of Circuit-Switched Call To Packet-Switched Call, And Vice Versa - A method includes, during an ongoing call of a wireless user terminal in one of a circuit switched domain or a packet switched domain, initiating a handover procedure; setting parameters allowing the other domain to determine the actual resources needed to continue the call in the other domain, sending an indication of these parameters towards a network element of the other domain and completing the handover procedure. When the ongoing call is in the circuit switched domain completing the handover procedure results in handing over the ongoing call to the packet switched domain, and when the ongoing call is in the packet switched domain completing the handover procedure results in handing over the ongoing call to the circuit switched domain. For example, the circuit switched domain may be a GERAN network and the packet switched domain may be an E-UTRAN (LTE) network. In the GERAN network the handover procedure may be accomplished at least in part through a Gs interface between a mobile switching center and a serving general packet radio system support node and/or through a Gb interface between a base station system and the serving general packet radio system support node. The handover procedure is accomplished at least in part by signaling conducted over an S05-12-2011
20100195616Handover From Circuit Switched Over Packet Switched Domain to Circuit Switched Domain - A method for initiating handover of a circuit switched service using a packet switched bearer of a mobile station (08-05-2010
20100260140Apparatus, Method and Computer Program Product Providing Non-Synchronized Random Access Handover - A method is provided including sending a source Node-B a target Node-B cell-specific unique identifier for a user equipment to be handed over to the target Node-B, sending the source Node-B a predetermined access preamble sequence for the user equipment to be handed over to the target Node-B, and in response to receiving the predetermined access preamble sequence from the user equipment, sending the user equipment handover related information in association with the cell-specific unique identifier for handing over to the target Node-B.10-14-2010
20110069673LOCAL ROUTING OF VOICE CALLS BY A FEMTO GATEWAY - A femto gateway enables local routing of voice calls for users communicating through the same femto gateway, without passing through a mobile switching center. Local routing reduces costly switching of calls, and can provide better quality of service and more innovative service plans to subscribers.03-24-2011
20120039301APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING HARQ AND ARQ IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for controlling a Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) of a mobile communication system is provided. The method includes establishing a default Best Effort (BE) connection, transmitting, when a Dynamic Service Addition (DSA) is request for a new service, an Advance Air Interface_Registration-Request (AAI_DSA-REQ) message including HARQ channel mapping information from a base station to a mobile station, and transmitting, when the AAI_DSA-REQ message is received from the base station, an Advance Air Interface_Dynamic Service Addition-Response (AAI_DSA-RSP) message from the mobile station to the base station in order to establish a HARQ channel based on the HARQ channel mapping information.02-16-2012
20120039302METHOD OF PERFORMING A HANDOVER PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and UE providing wireless communication services, and a method of effectively performing a handover procedure in an evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) that has evolved from a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, or a LTE-A (LTE-Advanced) system and it may be an object of the present invention to perform the handover procedure without terminating a data transmission between a terminal and a base station by utilizing carrier aggregation scheme, which allows a high-speed data transmission by using a plurality of frequencies.02-16-2012
20120039299Relay enhanced cellular telecommunication network - Systems and techniques for avoiding inefficiencies resulting from failed handover attempts. A base station selects one or more mobility management entity (MME) pools for assignment to a relay node, with the selection being performed so as to minimize or eliminate handover attempts requiring that a target device support a particular MME pool when the MME pool is not supported by the MME. A base station selects, when communicating with a relay node, a subset of the MME pools that it supports and assigns the subset to the base station. UEs served by the relay node are assigned the MME pool or MME pools assigned to the relay node. The relay node is informed of the MME pools supported by one or more neighbor nodes and, when attempting a handover to a neighbor node, attempts an X2 handover only to neighbor nodes supporting an MME pool assigned to the relay node.02-16-2012
20120099561Handover Control Method and Device - A handover control method is applicable to handover between networks adopting different access technologies. A serving gateway of a source network buffers downlink data of a user terminal on the source network after the source network determines that the user terminal is ready to be handed over to a target network. The serving gateway of the source network sends the downlink data to a serving gateway of the target network after the user terminal is handed over from the source network to the target network.04-26-2012
20120099560METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETACHMENT FROM A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques are provided for efficient detachment from or attachment to wireless network(s). In one example, there is provided a method, operable by the user equipment (UE), that may involve connecting to a first wireless network (e.g., a 3GPP network) associated with a first access point name (APN), and connecting to a second wireless network (e.g., a WAN) associated with a second APN. The method may involve performing handover for the first APN from the first wireless network to the second wireless network. The method may involve performing detach for the first APN from the second wireless network.04-26-2012
20120147850CELL SEARCH METHOD OF TERMINAL AND RELATED DEVICE AND SYSTEM - A cell search method of a terminal is provided. The terminal includes first and second network units. The first network unit camps a CS domain on a first network preferentially, and executes a CS domain service; the second network unit camps a PS domain on a second network preferentially, and executes a PS domain service; the first network unit receives a system message from a cell of the first network where the first network unit is located, and determines whether the system message carries neighboring cell information of the second network of the cell; and the second network unit searches for a cell of the second network after the first network unit determines that the system message carries the neighboring cell information of the second network of the cell. With the solutions, subscriber experience can be improved and cell search time of the terminal can be reduced.06-14-2012
20120147849METHOD FOR SUPPORTING FLOW MOBILITY - A method of supporting flow mobility of an MN is provided in an LMA. The LMA updates a BCE when a flow of the MN moves from a first MAG to a second MAG. The LMA sends a message for requesting binding registration of the flow to the second MAG, and sends a message for requesting binding de-registration of the flow to the first MAG.06-14-2012
20090323636ROAMING GATEWAY - A roaming gateway has at least one IP network interface, and at least one cellular network interface, and inter-working functions for inter-working between a wireless IP network and a cellular network. The inter-working functions communicate with user devices in an IP network according to a machine-level subscribe-and-notify event package protocol for managing handover of mobile devices roaming between IP and cellular networks. They also poll a cellular network for subscriber status on that cellular network in the absence of a mobility event package. The inter-working functions comprise HSS functionality programmed to access data on a HLR of a cellular network and to perform HSS operations using said data. The gateway applies routing policies specific to call types, allowing or disallowing the anchoring of calls originating in either an IP network or a cellular network based on number prefixes. The inter-working functions comprise an application server programmed to communicate with a user device as a client. The server provides a staging point for cellular supplementary services while anchoring calls, retrieving configurations from cellular network elements and applying appropriate routing based on these configurations and the current state of a call.12-31-2009
20100061335Method and System for the Reduction of Scanning Time While Roaming - Described are systems, methods, and devices used for reducing scanning time while communicating between wireless mobile computing devices within a wireless communications network. The method includes the following step(s): receiving communication data from one or more APs within a network, the communication data being specific to each of the one or more APs and transmitting the communication data to an MU within the network. The MU is associated with a first AP and the MU associates with a second AP based on the communication data as the MU roams to the second AP. The method further includes the steps of: associating, by an MU, with a first AP within a network, receiving communication data from the first AP, the communication data including information specific to each of one or more further APs, and associating with one of the further APs based on the communication data.03-11-2010
20120155430PREVENTING LOSS OF IP CONTINUITY WHEN TRANSITIONING BETWEEN DIFFERENT NETWORKS - Aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques for preventing loss of IP continuity when transitioning between networks. Certain aspects provide methods that generally include initiating a first timer upon attempting to transition from a first RAT network to a second RAT network during an IP session and initiating a second timer if a channel in the second RAT network is successfully acquired. According to aspects, a device may transfer context of the IP session to the second RAT network if a session is successfully negotiated in the second network prior to expiration of the second timer and the first and second networks share a common core network for IP services.06-21-2012
20110064055HANDOFF METHOD IN FMIPV6 FOR SEAMLESS TCP PACKET TRANSMISSIONS - A handoff apparatus and method in FMIPv6 for seamless TCP packet transmissions. The handoff method includes steps of intercepting by a previous access router certain TCP packets sent from a correspondent node to a previous temporary address of a mobile node; and creating a TCP ACK by the previous access router in response to the certain TCP packets and sending by the previous access router the created TCP ACK to the correspondent node every time the certain TCP packets are forwarded to a new access router through a bi-directional tunnel. The handoff method has an advantage in that the packet transmission rate can be secured at the same level as the mobile node stays still during the performance of the handoff of the mobile node since the previous access router instead of the mobile node creates and sends the TCP ACK to the correspondent node during the performance of the handoff of the mobile node.03-17-2011
20110064057METHOD OF ACQUIRING BROADCAST INFORMATION - In a method of acquiring broadcast information acquisition, the terminal receives partial broadcast information from a base station, and transmits an initial access message including indication for the partial broadcast information to the base station. The terminal receives an initial access response message including broadcast information other than the partial broadcast information.03-17-2011
20110064056SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RESELECTION OF A PACKET DATA NETWORK GATEWAY WHEN ESTABLISHING CONNECTIVITY - A network control module includes an access module that determines whether a first packet data network gateway communicating with a first packet data network also communicates with a second packet data network. The network control module also includes a selection control module in communication with a mobile wireless terminal. The mobile wireless terminal attempts to access the second packet data network by establishing a connection with a second packet data network gateway that communicates with the second packet data network. In response to the access module determining that the first packet data network gateway also communicates with the second packet data network, the selection control module commands the mobile wireless terminal to access the second packet data network through the first packet data network gateway.03-17-2011
20110064054Method and System for Maintaining Multiple PDN Network Connection During Inter-Technology Handover in Idle Mode - The present invention provides a method and system for supporting an optimized an idle mode handoff of user equipment from a 3GPP (EUTRAN) to a non-3GPP system (HRPD, cdma2000) where the user equipment washes to maintain connectivity with multiple PDN networks. Namely, during an idle mode registration of the user equipment with the non-3GPP system, the user equipment will provide an indication to the access node on the non-3GPP system so that the access point in that non-3GPP system contacts the appropriate entity (HSS or AAA) on the home network for the user equipment to download the addresses of the multiple PDN gateway addresses that are currently in use by the user equipment. This indication to the non-3GPP access node, the contact message from the access node to the home network, and the response from the home network to the access node on the non-3GPP system are novel features that are not shown in the prior art, and provide the access node with sufficient information to maintain multiple PDN connectivity to the user equipment during an idle mode handover.03-17-2011
20110064053HANDOVER MANAGEMENT METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a handover management method that can reduce a service interruption time due to handover of a mobile station in a wideband wireless access system. A handover management method according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention includes receiving a handover request message from a serving base station, transmitting a handover response message that includes a basic channel identifier to be allocated to a mobile station, receiving a ranging request message from the mobile station using the basic channel identifier, and using the basic channel identifier to start uplink/downlink communication with the mobile station.03-17-2011
20110064047METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSFERRING A COMMUNICATION SESSION BETWEEN DATA SOURCES - To transfer a communication session from a first data source to a second data source, the following operations are carried out when a radio terminal is handed over from a first base station to a second base station: the session settings and status information related to the communication session are transferred (03-17-2011
20110064052CELL RESELECTION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PACKET DATA SERVICE IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A cell reselection method and apparatus for a packet data service in a mobile communication terminal are provided. The cell reselection method for the packet data service in the mobile communication terminal includes if a Circuit Switch (CS) call ends, determining whether the ended call is a CS fallback call, if it is determined that the ended call is the CS fallback call, determining whether an accessible Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) cell exists by measuring signals received from neighbor cells, and reselecting the accessible E-UTRAN cell.03-17-2011
20110064048Wireless Terminal, Wireless Base Station and Communication Method in Wireless Communication System - In a wireless communication system, time point information is transmitted from a second wireless base station. The time point information indicates a time point at which service information is transmitted from the second wireless base station. Moreover, at the time point indicated by the time point information, the service information is transmitted from the second wireless base station. On the wireless terminal side, firstly, the time point information is obtained in a first non-communication period in which communication with the first wireless base station is temporarily stopped. Then, the service information is obtained in a second non-communication period which is ensured in accordance with the time point indicated by the time point information.03-17-2011
20110064046User plane emergency location continuity for voice over internet protocol (VoIP)/IMS emergency services - Continuity of location information relating to an IMS emergency call during their IMS emergency call is maintained by triggering, during an IMS emergency call, a request to a location service based on an occurrence of a handover of an IMS emergency calling mobile device. A physical user plane location server initiates a user plane positioning request, and an updated location of the IMS emergency call is obtained during the IMS emergency call but after the handover. Updated location information relating to an IMS emergency caller is kept track of during IMS handover during their IMS emergency call by mapping access network information relating to a mobile IMS emergency calling device. Coverage information relating to a plurality of location servers is maintained, and a currently serving location server is associated with an updated location of the IMS emergency caller as the IMS emergency caller changes location during an IMS emergency call.03-17-2011
20110317668Method and System for Implementing Inter-Access Networks Handoff in Active State in HRPD Network - A method and system for implementing an inter-Access Network (AN) handoff in an active state in a High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) Network are disclosed. The method includes determining that an inter-AN handoff operation is necessary and initiating a handoff procedure to perform the inter-AN handoff, sending data to be transmitted to an access terminal to the destination AN in advance in the handoff procedure, and then sending the access terminal the data to be transmitted to the access terminal by the source AN or the destination AN according to the result of the handoff procedure.12-29-2011
20110317667SOFT HANDOFF ACROSS DIFFERENT NETWORKS ASSISTED BY AN END-TO-END APPLICATION PROTOCOL - A method of handoff across different networks is disclosed. A first communication link through a first network is used for communicating between a first user agent and a second user agent. The user agents negotiate to use a second communication link for the same call. The second communication link is established through a second network between the first user agent and the second user agent while maintaining the first communication link. Related data is sent through the first communication link and the second communication link. The first communication link is dropped and communication is continued using the second communication link.12-29-2011
20110317666Method and System for Managing Address Prefix Information Associated with Handover in Networks - Method and system for managing address prefix information associated with handover in network. A fast handover process is achieved for point-to-point communication model. A mobile node send a provisional new care-of-address with an aggregate prefix part to its previous access router, which forwards the address to a new access router. The new access router in response generates a modified new care-of-address with a unique prefix part for the mobile node. Alternatively, the mobile node sends a request to the previous access router for a unique prefix. The request is forwarded from the previous access router to the new access router. The new access router assigns a unique prefix for the mobile node.12-29-2011
20110317665METHOD FOR UPDATING SYSTEM INFORMATION DURING HAND-OVER IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a broadband wireless access system, and more particularly, to a method for efficiently acquiring system information on a target base station during a hand-over, and to an apparatus for carrying out the method. One method for enabling a mobile station to update system information on a target base station during a hand-over, according to one embodiment of the present invention, comprises the steps of: receiving, from a serving base station, a broadcast message containing system information on at least one neighbor base station including the target base station, and containing first change count information for indicating whether or not to update the system information; and receiving, from the serving base station, second change count information for indicating whether or not to update the system information currently possessed by the serving base station.12-29-2011
20110317662SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOFF BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF NETWORKS BY USING A VOICE SERVICE - A system and method for handing off from a first network to a second network. A determination may be made as to whether an accessible base station of the second network is located in the vicinity of a user equipment based on information on a current location of the user equipment in the first network. An activation call may be generated with a first telephone number as a caller number when an accessible base station of the second network is located in the vicinity of the user equipment based on the determination result. The activation call indicates an initiation of a search for an accessible base station of the second network, and an accessible base station of the second network may be searched for when the activation call with the first telephone number is received. A handoff from the first network to the second network may then be executed when the accessible base station of the second network is located.12-29-2011
20110317661SYSTEM, APPARATUS, AND METHOD FOR UTILIZING NETWORK ACCESS PARAMETERS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - In accordance with aspects of the disclosure, a method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for wireless communication. The method, apparatus, and computer program product may be configured to provide a message from a first network to a device, wherein the message comprises one or more parameters for access to a second network, direct the device to switch from the first network to the second network based on the one or more parameters provided by the first network, and direct the device to perform random access on the second network based at least in part on the one or more parameters provided by the first network. The one or more parameters may comprise a priority parameter for performing random access on the second network.12-29-2011
20110317660METHOD FOR SELECTIVELY PERFORMING HANDOFF ACCORDING TO SERVICE TYPE AND SYSTEM THEREOF - Provided are a method for selectively performing a handoff according to a service type, and a system thereof. A home agent provides a target service to a user equipment through a mobile network channel of a mobile network. The user equipment detects entering a wireless access zone of a wireless data network while receiving the target service through the mobile network channel and determines a service type of the target service. The user equipment performs a handoff from the mobile network to the wireless data network in cooperation with the home agent when the service type is a non real-time service and refrains from performing a handoff when the service type is a real-time service.12-29-2011
20110317658MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NETWORK DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication system having a first communication system and a second communication system forwards forwarding data from the first communication system to the second communication system when switching from the first communication system to the second communication system is determined, the forwarding data being a data that the first communication system has already received from a core network device. A network device transmitting direct data to a mobile communication terminal via the second communication system is configured to count the number of switching times that the switching from the first communication system to the second communication system has been determined, for every user. The network device is configured to count the number of successful reception times that information identifying a user has been received via a forwarding path of the forwarding data, for every user. The network device is configured to judge whether the forwarding path of the forwarding data is normal or not on the basis of a ratio between the number of switching times and the number of successful reception times.12-29-2011
20110317657Change of rate matching modes in presence of channel state information reference signal transmission - In one aspect thereof the exemplary embodiments of this invention provide a method that includes, prior to confirmation that a network access node has correctly acquired capabilities of a user equipment, operating a user equipment with the network access node in accordance with a first rate matching mode and, only after confirmation to the user equipment that the network access node has correctly acquired capabilities of the user equipment, changing the rate matching mode to a second rate matching mode. In an embodiment the first rate matching mode comprises puncturing a downlink shared channel transmission with a set of resource elements, which may be at least one of reference symbols and muted resource elements, and the second rate matching mode comprises rate matching the downlink shared channel around those resource elements that are members of the set of resource elements. Also described are apparatus and computer readable storage medium storing program code that operate in accordance with the method.12-29-2011
20110317664Method of performing an intra-segment handover - The invention concerns a method of performing an intra-segment handover (HO) of a mobile station (MS) from a source access point (AP12-29-2011
20120044908INTERWORKING GATEWAY FOR MOBILE NODES - Systems and methods are provided that allow inter-working between communication networks for the delivery of service to mobile nodes. A gateway is provided that communicates with a femto cell to extend service to an area that otherwise does not receive coverage from a service provider. The femto cell is a small scale base station used to provide coverage over a small area (such as a home or business), and connect to a home or enterprise network. The femto cell provides service for a mobile node and a gateway permits communication over a broadband network. The gateway integrates the mobile nodes connecting via a femto cell into the service provider's network. The gateway also allows provisioning of services and applications, control of service levels, and provides seamless handoffs to marco base stations and other types of access technologies such as Wi-Fi.02-23-2012
20100290432COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM - Provided is a communication system capable of performing handover control using MGWs. The communication system includes communication control devices (MGW11-18-2010
20120044909EFFICIENT HANDOVER METHOD IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a broadband wireless access system, and more particularly, to a handover method that can reduce a stop time in an entry before a break-type handover for performing more efficient handover, and to apparatus for performing same. A handover method for a terminal in a broadband wireless access system according to one embodiment of the present invention may include: receiving, from a serving base station, a handover command message including the information of a section in which scheduling for the terminal is not performed; transmitting a ranging code to a target base station during the section; and receiving information indicating the transmitted result of the ranging code from the serving base station.02-23-2012
20090103493Method and Apparatus of Handling Data Decryption for a Packet Data Convergence Protocol Layer in a Wireless Communication System - The present invention provides a method of handling data decryption for a Packet Data Convergence Protocol layer of a user equipment upon handover in a wireless communication system for increasing the validness of deciphering packages in the wireless communication system, which includes using a security variables corresponding to a source base station for deciphering the packets received from the source base station when the user equipment performs a handover procedure.04-23-2009
20120057567Dynamic Internetwork Load Balancing - Examples are disclosed for executing vertical handovers of wireless devices configured to couple with heterogeneous wireless networks.03-08-2012
20120002637METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING HOME NODE-B MOBILITY - Techniques for supporting home NodeB (HNB) mobility and virtual active set management in support of soft handover are disclosed. A source HNB may decide to initiate a relocation of a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) from the source HNB to a target HNB, and may initiate an access control for the WTRU to determine whether the WTRU is allowed to receive a service provided via the target HNB. The source HNB may send an access control query to either a core network (CN) or an HNB gateway (HNB-GW) for verifying that the WTRU is allowed to receive a service provided via the target HNB. The access control query response may include access control information for all or a subset of subscriber groups that the WTRU is a member of. The WTRU may maintain a virtual active set (VAS) including at least one macro cell and at least one femto cell.01-05-2012
20120002642ENHANCED UPLINK OPERATION IN SOFT HANDOVER - A method and system for an enhanced uplink (EU) operation in a wireless communication system during soft handover. The system comprises a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU), at least two Node-Bs, and a radio network controller (RNC). One Node-B may be designated as a primary Node-B, and the primary Node-B may control EU operation during soft handover including uplink scheduling and hybrid automatic repeat request (H-ARQ). Soft buffer corruption is avoided during soft handover by controlling H-ARQ by the primary Node-B. Alternatively, an RNC may control EU operation during soft handover including H-ARQ. In this case, an RNC generates final acknowledge/non-acknowledge (ACK/NACK) decision based on the error check results of the Node-Bs.01-05-2012
20120002641METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR USE IN A CONNECTED STATE HANDOFF OF AN ACCESS TERMINAL - A method of sending reset message sequence number is provided. During a connected state handoff of an access terminal (AT) between a source access network (AN) and a target AN, the source AN sends a reset message sequence number of the AT to the target AN. The source AN adds the reset message sequence number of the AT to the message sent to the target AN. Thereby, the problem in the existing systems that, the source AN cannot send the reset message sequence number of the AT to the target AN, and thus the target AN cannot perform a reset process on the AT when the AT is switched from the source AN to the target AN is thus solved. An access network (AN) and a communication system are also provided.01-05-2012
20120002640FLEXIBLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND METHODS - A method of initiating a telecommunication session for a communication device include submitting to one or more telecommunication carriers a proposal for a telecommunication session, receiving from at least one of the one or more of telecommunication carriers a bid to carry the telecommunications session, and automatically selecting one of the telecommunications carriers from the carriers submitting a bid, and initiating the telecommunication session through the selected telecommunication carrier.01-05-2012
20120002639OPEN WIRELESS ARCHITECTURE (OWA) UNIFIED AIRBORNE AND TERRESTRIAL COMMUNICATIONS ARCHITECTURE - This invention relates to an Open Wireless Architecture (OWA) unified airborne and terrestrial communications architecture providing optimal high-speed connections with open radio transmission technologies (RTTs) between aircrafts and ground cells, and between different aircrafts in Ad-Hoc or Mesh network group, to construct the multi-dimensional unified information delivery platform across the airborne networks and the terrestrial networks wherein the same OWA mobile device or OWA mobile computer can be used seamlessly and continuously both in the aircrafts and on the ground.01-05-2012
20120002638SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HANDOFF BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF NETWORKS - System and method for handoff between different types of networks. A communication session of a user equipment may be handed off from a first network to a second network based on a network condition of the first network. A network information may be transmitted from the first network and the network condition of the first network may be determined based on received network information. The network information may include information of an adaptive multi-rate (AMR) mode assigned for providing a corresponding service, and the information of the AMR mode may be assigned based on the network condition of the first network and may be associated with a bit-rate for speech coding. A handoff from the first network to the second network may be initiated when the network condition of the first network is determined to be poor.01-05-2012
20100215018CS HANDOVER FROM IMS FEMTO TO MACRO - Systems and methods for performing a cellular call handover from a home node b (HNB) to a macro cellular communication node (e.g., a base station or radio access network) are disclosed. An interworking function (IWF) is provided in the HNB and acts as an anchor mobile switching center (MSC) for a user device served by the HNB, and communicates with a visited MSC for the HNB. The IWF sends a request to a target MSC (which may be the visited MSC) serving the HNB, to handover the call to the macro node. The call is then handed over to the macro communication node by the target MSC. In this manner, the IWF facilitates providing the described handover in conformity with existing 3GPP standards, without requiring additional standards to be generated and without requiring additional system components.08-26-2010
20090016296POWER OPTIMIZED STATION CONNECTION MANAGER IN IEEE 802.11 TYPE STATIONS - A method of managing a mobile station (e.g., IEEE 802.11 station) having a serving BSS, uses a station connection manger and initially maintains a default idle stable state with minimum power to receive incoming calls. While idle, the station periodically polls and scans a detected BSS (Access Point) to detect messages using DTIM (Delivery Traffic Indication Message). A null frame sent, triggers corresponding frame transmission at an Access Point. If the null frame is acknowledged, the station switches to the active state until end of packet exchange. With no null frame acknowledged, scanning is resumed to update a BSS list prior to joining a newly found BSS via authentication and association states. When no candidate BSS is found, a time out period is used before next polling. After the last message frame is transmitted, the station resumes the default idle state. The station manager conserves battery power in the station.01-15-2009
20080205343Method And System For Allocating SFID In A Worldwide Interoperability Microwave Access Network - A method for allocating an SFID in a WiMAX network including an ASN and a CSN may include: establishing, by the CSN a service flow in response to a service flow creation request from an MSS, and sending the service flow to the ASN; and allocating, by the ASN, a value that currently is not used by the MSS as an SFID of the service flow requested by the MSS. A system for allocating an SFID in a WiMAX network is also provided. According to the method and system for allocating an SFID in a WiMAX network, after an MSS performs a handover, it is not necessary to notify a function module generating an SFID to release the SFID, thereby simplifying the SFID management.08-28-2008
20100157946Methods and Apparatuses For CDMA2000/GPRS Roaming - IIF architectures and corresponding call flows are provided for CDMA2000/GPRS roaming scenarios such as GPRS foreign mode with Mobile IPv4, GPRS foreign mode with Simple IPv4 or IPv6, CDMA2000 packet data foreign mode with Mobile IPv4, and CDMA2000 packet data foreign mode with Simple IPv4 or IPv6.06-24-2010
20110064050BROADCAST SERVICE HANDOVER - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may receive a broadcast service via a broadcast system. The broadcast service may be handed over from the broadcast system to a second broadcast system, and the WTRU may receive the broadcast service via the second broadcast system. The WTRU and/or the broadcast system may change broadcast service configuration parameters (such as video encapsulation format, video codec, frame rate, audio codec) to receive and/or display broadcast service data received via the second broadcast system. Additionally, a WTRU may receive a broadcast service via a broadcast system that includes more than one broadcast transmission network. The broadcast service may be handed over from a first broadcast transmission network in the broadcast system to a second broadcast transmission network in the broadcast system. The WTRU may change broadcast service configuration parameters to receive and/or display broadcast service data received via the second broadcast transmission network.03-17-2011
20120207137Method for Managing Local IP Access Connection - Disclosed is a method for managing local IP access connection, wherein the method comprises: determining whether a local IP access connection supports mobility; if yes, then processing the local IP access connection, wherein the processing includes at least one of the following: activate, establish and update. According to the present invention, the source/target mobility management entity or source/target RAN node determines whether a local IP access connection supports mobility according to a CSG identifier or local gateway information, which thus achieves the management operation on the local IP access connection, avoids the waste of system resources and the increasing of system burden and improves the processing efficiency of the mobile communication system.08-16-2012
20120207127Method and system for realizing single radio voice call continuity - The disclosure discloses a method for realizing single radio voice call continuity, which is applied in an IP Multimedia Core Network Subsystem (IMS) network. The method includes: receiving, by a service continuity application server (SC AS), a handover request, and then updating, by the SC AS, a remote leg, and transmitting, by the SC AS, a handover notification message to a user terminal; receiving, by the user terminal, a handover command in a Packet Switch (PS) domain and the handover notification message, then adjusting, by the user terminal, an access mode to be accessing a Circuit Switch (CS) domain. The invention further discloses a system for realizing single radio voice call continuity. The method and system for realizing enhancement of single radio voice call continuity provided by the disclosure can effectively reduce the overlong interruption time in the prior art, and greatly improve the user experience.08-16-2012
20120207135METHOD OF COMMUNICATING IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A wireless network includes a current coordinator, at least one device which is currently associated with the wireless network, and a device selected as a new coordinator among the at least one device by the current coordinator. The current coordinator transmits a handover request message to the new coordinator; receives a handover response message in response to the handover request message from the new coordinator, the handover response message including a reason code field that is set to “success”; and broadcasts one or more beacons, each beacon including identification information which identifies the new coordinator and number information which indicates a number of remaining beacons that the current coordinator will broadcast before a handover occurs. The number information included in a last beacon among the one or more beacons is set to “0,” and the new coordinator broadcasts a beacon after receiving the last beacon from the current coordinator.08-16-2012
20120207134METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EXTENDED NETWORK ACCESS NOTIFICATION VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method supporting extended network access notification via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. A representative embodiment of the present invention may comprise a wireless interface and may be capable of exchanging multimedia communication between the wireless interface and a broadband network. The gateway may support multimedia communication via access devices that may seamlessly hand off from a wireless wide area network to a personal area network supported by the wireless interface. The hand off may be coordinated by the gateway and the wireless wide area network via the broadband network. A user of an access device may be notified when such a handoff has been automatically initiated, and a user may configure aspects of such hand offs.08-16-2012
20120207131Method and Apparatus for Continuing HSPA During Baton Handover in TD-SCDMA Systems - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose techniques for continuing high-speed packet access (HSPA) during the baton handover in Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCD-MA) systems. In aspects of the disclosure, one techniques for performing a baton handover from a source node B (NB) to a target NB by a user equipment (UE) is provided. The technique generally includes receiving a first signal instructing the UE to perform the baton handover from the source NB to the target NB, the first signal including non-scheduled transmission grant information and transmitting data to the target NB during the baton handover in accordance with the non-scheduled transmission grant information, wherein the data is re-transmitted to the target NB a predetermined number of times.08-16-2012
20120207129METHOD FOR PROCESSING DATA ASSOCIATED WITH HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - The technical features of this description provides a method and apparatus of processing data associated with handover in a wireless network transmitting a radio signal based on a number of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols or single carrier frequency division multiple access (SC-FDMA) symbols. In an aspect of the features, when MME learns that HeNB is preparing handover of UE, it sends the UE a PDN CONNECTIVITY REJECT with a proper cause, so that LIPA PDN connection cannot be used in the target cell. Accordingly, the LIPA PDN connection is only restricted to a CSG cell. Moreover, the network can explicitly reject the request from the UE, either before or after handover, thereby avoiding the UE's unnecessary retry08-16-2012
20120207128METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING THE HANDOVER TO A CLOSE SUBSCRIBER GROUP CELL - The present invention discloses a method and apparatus for processing the handover to a close subscriber group cell, which method comprises: a target network element receiving a handover message; the target network element performing verification on the close subscriber group identity CSG ID carried in the handover message, if the verification is not passed, then returning a response message with the CSG ID of the target network element to a superior network element of the target network element. The present invention improves handover efficiency and system performance.08-16-2012
20120008596METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a handover method for a mobile communication system. The handover method according to the present invention comprises the steps of: receiving from a serving base station a handover command message, the handover command message containing target base station information, information on an available interval enabling data transmission/reception to/from the serving base station during handover, information on an unavailable interval not enabling data transmission/reception during handover, and information on the time of disconnection of a link connected to the serving base station; performing a network entry process with the target base station; transmitting status information to the serving base station when an error has occurred in the network entry process; receiving from the serving base station a status information response message containing available interval and unavailable interval reset information and link disconnection time reset information for extending the link disconnection time; enabling the serving base station to provide a data transmitting/receiving service during the available interval; and re-performing the network entry process with the target base station, and disconnecting the link to the serving base station at the reset link disconnection time.01-12-2012
20120008592HANDOFF OF A MOBILE STATION BETWEEN PACKET-SWITCHED AND CIRCUIT-SWITCHED WIRELESS DOMAINS - A first mobility management entity associated with a packet-switched wireless access network receives information associated with a mobile station being served by the first mobility management entity, where the information identifies a serving generic access network controller for the mobile station. The serving generic access network controller is used to provide a circuit-switched service to the mobile station while the mobile station is attached to the packet-switched wireless access network. The first mobility management entity initiates a handoff of the mobile station from the packet-switched wireless access network to a circuit-switched wireless access network, where the circuit-switched wireless access network is in a region served by a second generic access network controller different from the serving generic access network controller. In performing the handoff, the first mobility management entity uses the information to identify the serving generic access network controller to communicate handoff-related messaging to the serving generic access network controller to cause provision of the circuit-switched service to be handed off from the serving generic access network controller to the second generic access network controller.01-12-2012
20120008595HANDOVER METHODS BETWEEN AN UNLICENSED MOBILE ACCESS NETWORK AND A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND APPARATUSES THEREOF - The present invention relates to a handover technology between an unlicensed mobile access network and a cellular communication network. According to a first aspect of the present invention, a method of handing over a communication connection from an unlicensed mobile access network to a cellular communication network in a mobile terminal is provided. The method includes the following steps: acquiring a location information and/or moving direction and/or moving velocity of the mobile terminal (01-12-2012
20120008594System and Method for Allocating An Anchoring Point for a Mobile Terminal - A first network configured to connect a terminal to a home network during a time that the terminal is roaming within the first network. The first network includes a plurality of attachment points, wherein a first attachment point is configured to receive an attach request from the terminal, and wherein the attach request includes a request from the terminal for an IP address from an anchoring point within the home network. The first network further includes an Authentication/Authorization/Accounting server proxy configured to determine whether the terminal is authorized to attach to the first attachment point, wherein in response to the terminal being authorized to attach to the first attachment point, i) a first tunnel is created between the first attachment point and a second attachment point, and ii) a second tunnel is created between the second attachment point and the anchoring point within the home network.01-12-2012
20120008593METHOD FOR PRIORITIZING HANDOVER TARGETS FOR SCANNING BY A MOBILE TERMINAL IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for prioritizing handover targets for scanning by a mobile terminal, MS (01-12-2012
20100303041INTER-DOMAIN COORDINATION FOR MT AND MO CALLS - A mobility management entity (MME) for setting up a call includes a first network interface which receives a tracking area update (TAU) request from a user equipment (UE). The MME includes a processing unit which translates the TAU request into a location area update (LAU) request. The MME includes a second network interface in communication with the processing unit which sends the LAU request to a mobile switching center (MSC) selected as a tracking MSC thereby establishing the MME as a network node through which the UE is paged. The second network interface receiving a LAU response from the tracking MSC that includes at least information identifying one or more suitable location area identifiers (LAI(s)) to which handover is allowed and Network Resource Identifier (NRI) information where the information indicates that the tracking MSC controls the suitable LAI(s), and the processing unit translating the LAU response into a TAU response which is sent through the first network interface to the UE. A user equipment (UE) includes a processing unit which transmits a tracking area update (TAU) request. The UE includes a network interface in communication with the processing unit which sends the TAU request to a mobility management entity (MME), and receives a TAU response having suitable location area identifiers (LAIs) and TMSI/network resource identifier (NRI). The UE includes a memory in communication with the network interface which stores the suitable LAIs and TMSI/NRI. A method for a mobility management entity (MME) for setting up a call. A method for a user equipment (UE).12-02-2010
20100150106METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING ASSIGNMENT DURING HANDOFF IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for managing assignment during handoff in a wireless communication system is described. It is determined if a forward link shared signaling (FLSS) Changed Indication is received from a RCC MAC protocol. The forward link access terminal assignments (FL-ATAs) associated with the FLSS is cleared.06-17-2010
20120014354VOICE SERVICE IN EVOLVED PACKET SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus to manage voice service in evolved packet systems are disclosed. An example method in a UE in an Evolved Packet System (EPS) includes receiving a first Non Access Stratum (NAS) protocol response message with network provided Voice over IP Multimedia (IM) Core Network (CN) Subsystem (VoIMS) indicators, wherein the UE has a voice services indicator related to a UE usage setting and responsive to at least one of the voice services indicator related to a UE usage setting or the network provided VoIMS indicators, causing the UE to disable evolved universal mobile telecommunications system terrestrial radio access (E-UTRAN) cell reselection.01-19-2012
20120014355METHOD OF RELIABLE HANDOVER SIGNALING PROCEDURE IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method for determining whether a mobile station (MS) is present in coverage of a serving base station (SBS) during a handover process and an apparatus for carrying out the same, resulting in the implementation of more reliable handover, are disclosed. A method for controlling an MS to perform a presence check procedure during handover of a broadband wireless access system includes receiving a first signal for a presence check request from an SBS, and transmitting a second signal as a response to the presence check request to the SBS. Preferably, the first signal is received after the lapse of a first time indicating a deadline at which the MS performs network re-entry to a target base station (TBS).01-19-2012
20120014356Systems, Methods, Apparatuses, and Computer Program Products for Facilitating Voice Call Continuity in Intersystem Handover - Systems, methods, apparatuses, and computer program products are provided for facilitating voice call continuity in intersystem handover. A method may include determining that a user equipment device being handed over from a packet switched network to a circuit switched network is a party to a voice call in an alerting state. The method may further include providing session state information indicating that the user equipment device is a party to a voice call in an alerting state to a network entity on the circuit switched network in response to the determination. Corresponding systems, computer program products and apparatuses are also provided.01-19-2012
20120057568CELLULAR WIRELESS NETWORK AND METHOD OF OPERATION - A method of operating a cellular wireless network comprises broadcasting information about Internet Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) emergency call capability of the network on a broadcast channel in a cell of the network. This information may in one method concern the IMS emergency call capability of a base station included in the network and in another method it may include IMS emergency call capability of a base station and the core network.03-08-2012
20120057566ENHANCED BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING THROUGH AN ENHANCED DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM (eDAS) - Embodiments of an enhanced base station and method for communicating through an enhanced distributed antenna system (eDAS) are generally described herein. The eDAS includes geographically-separated antenna nodes and each of the antenna nodes has a plurality of antenna elements. The base station may perform physical-layer baseband processing for each of the antenna nodes at a centralized processing location, and may cause the antenna nodes to transmit reference signals in accordance with a multiplexing scheme to allow user equipment to perform channel estimation for the antenna elements of any one or more of the antenna nodes. The base station may also cause the antenna nodes to transmit signals having synchronization codes to allow the user equipment to synchronize with the antenna elements of any one or more of the antenna nodes. In some embodiments, the base station may communicate with the antenna nodes over a physical-layer interface.03-08-2012
20120057565DLS-ASSISTED WIRED TO WIRELESS HANDOVER - Solutions are proposed to enable a seamless handover/handback of a communication between a docked state and an undocked state. The transfer is effected by performing a transfer between a docked persona of a user and an undocked persona of that same user. By utilizing certain SIP transfer mechanisms or H.323 bridged-appearances, in-progress call sessions and media can be sustained during handover and/or handback.03-08-2012
20120057564METHOD AND APPARATUS TO SHORTEN THE DURATION OF INITIAL NETWORK SELECTION AND HANDOVER DECISIONS IN MULTICOMM PLATFORMS BY UTILIZING ALTERNATE FRAGMENTED SCANNING - An embodiment of the present invention provides an apparatus, comprising a network adapter capable of combining more than one wireless communication technology (comm) for wireless communication in a wireless network, wherein the apparatus includes a network detection phase implemented by doing a full scan of one comm followed by one or more additional comm scans; and wherein the network adapter breaks a scan into buckets, and alternates between different scanning buckets of different comms to provide faster scanning, connection time and handover from one wireless technology to another wireless technology.03-08-2012
20120014353WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHODS AND COMPONENTS THAT IMPLEMENT HANDOFF IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - This invention relates to wireless local area networks, and particularly to the IEEE 802.11 family of standards. It consists of a method and apparatus that can be implemented in access points (APs) and subscriber wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs), in order to allow an AP to initiate re-association of a WTRU to itself or a different AP. The invention improves the robustness of the network by enabling more efficient load balancing, congestion control, and roaming, without compromising the user experience.01-19-2012
20120014350APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING SEAMLESS HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS BASED ON IPV6 OVER IPV4 TUNNELING MECHANISM - The invention relates to a method and an apparatus for controlling seamless handover between heterogeneous networks based on IPv6 over IPv4 tunneling. When IPv6 service is provided using tunneling in an IPv4 based network environment, handover of a mobile terminal between different networks is achieved through switching of an active tunnel and a standby tunnel, and thus handover between different networks is facilitated and data loss is prevented to secure continuity of service provided to the mobile terminal even when the mobile terminal hands over to a heterogeneous network.01-19-2012
20120014352APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ENFORCEMENT OF MULTIPLE PACKET DATA NETWORK (PDN) CONNECTIONS TO THE SAME ACCESS POINT NAME (APN) - An apparatus and method for enforcement of multiple packet data network (PDN) connections to a same access point name (APN) in a wireless communication system including receiving a message from a mobile device related to a first packet data network (PDN) connection to a first APN; and associating the first PDN connection related to the mobile device with a radio connection between the mobile device and an access point in response to the message. In one example, the apparatus and method further includes determining if the mobile device utilizes at least one additional radio connection with the access point to communicate over at least one additional PDN connection to the first APN.01-19-2012
20100002651HANDOVER METHOD AND APPARATUS IN A WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A wireless telecommunications network may include parts that operate at different packet transfer delays, so that a mobile terminal undergoing handover from one node to another experiences different delays before and after handover. An additional delay is applied during the handover process to packets sent to the mobile terminal via the node at the smaller delay so as to reduce the difference between the two delays. The additional delay may be applied at an anchor node connecting parts of the wireless network of different radio access technology types or at other parts of the network. Information regarding packet transfer delays may stored and accessed to determine the delays for nodes involved in handover and/or obtained by measurements made during a call, for example.01-07-2010
20100067489Selective Packet Forwarding for LTE Mobility - Methods and devices are disclosed for forwarding data packets during handover in a packet-switched wireless communications system, such as a 3GPP Long-Term Evolution/System Architecture Evolution system. In an exemplary method, a source base station node (03-18-2010
20120113957APPARATAUS AND METHOD FOR ALLEVIATING BARRED ACCESS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user equipment for alleviating barred access while reselecting from a first cell to a second cell in a mobile communication system is provided. A wireless module detects receives system information broadcasted in the first cell. A storage unit stores the system information. A controller reselects the user equipment from the first cell to the second cell. Particularly, the cell reselection is not performed during a connection establishment procedure. Also, the controller determines whether a first barred access timer is running in response to reselecting from the first cell to the second cell, and stops the first barred access timer and informs the upper layer of an RRC protocol that the access of the first service is allowed in response of that the first barred access timer is running.05-10-2012
20120113960Method and Apparatus to Support HSUPA During Baton Handover in TD-SCDMA Systems - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose techniques for continuing high-speed packet access (HSPA) during the baton handover in Target Cell Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) systems. In an aspect of the disclosure, a technique for performing a baton handover from a source node B (NB) to a target NB by a user equipment (UE) is provided. The technique generally includes receiving a first signal instructing the UE to perform the baton handover from the source NB to the target NB, transmitting data in uplink transmissions to the target NB during the baton handover, and receiving, from the source NB, information regarding the uplink transmissions.05-10-2012
20120113959CONNECTION MANAGEMENT METHOD, CONNECTION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL, PACKET DATA GATEWAY AND MOBILE MANAGEMENT GATEWAY - When a mobile terminal transmitting/receiving a packet using a plurality of IP address types performs a handover to an access network (single address type connection network) permitting transmission/reception of a packet using a single IP address only, an IP address not permitted is unfortunately discarded at an access network as a handover destination. Disclosed is a technique configured so that a mobile terminal (UE 05-10-2012
20120113958METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSFERRING SERVICE CONTROL SIGNALLING PATH - A method, device, and system for transferring a Service Control Signalling Path are provided. The method for transferring a Service Control Signalling Path includes: establishing a connection with an opposite end by a User Equipment (UE), where the UE uses a Circuit Switched (CS) bearer in a CS network and a Service Control Signalling Path in a first Packet Switched (PS) network; sending a transfer request via a second PS network, to instruct a network side to transfer the Service Control Signalling Path according to the transfer request. Thus, the UE can replace a current Gm reference point with a Gm reference point of a new and available PS network when the PS network where the current Gm reference point is located is unavailable, so as to ensure smooth data transmission.05-10-2012
20120020328LABEL SWITCHED PACKET TRANSFER DEVICE - A device for connecting base station(s) to a cellular label switched network in a cellular network. The cellular network includes: base station(s), the connecting device(s); cellular label switched network(s); and service area(s). The base station(s) communicates with mobile terminals using wireless technology. The wireless technology uses a protocol layer architecture that includes at least one of the following: a wireless physical layer; a wireless medium access control protocol layer; a radio link control layer; and a network layer. The connecting device(s) include: a first interface to connect to the base station(s); a second interface to connect to cellular label switched network(s); and a label forwarding layer that: forwards packets between base station(s) and cellular label switched network(s); attaches label(s) to packets and removes label(s) from packets. A service area divided into a multitude of cells through which mobile terminals can move through and communicate with base station(s).01-26-2012
20120020329METHOD FOR ACQUIRING INFORMATION FOR MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER - This document is related to a method for acquiring information for media independent handover. More specifically the method comprises: submitting a media independent handover (MIH) query to a base station (BS) by sending a first request message, and receiving a response to the MIH query. Because the first request message is used for authorization, preferably the PKM message, the MS can acquire information for handover between heterogeneous networks before the MS finishes the network entry.01-26-2012
20120063415IMS FEMTOCELL FOR VOICE, DATA AND VIDEO - An Internet Protocol Multimedia System (IMS) femtocell serves as a base station and base station controller in a wireless/wireline service provider's macro network and a Wi-Fi access point to seamlessly support cellular and packet user devices and deliver both circuit switched and packet switched services inside a building.03-15-2012
20120026981MOBILE STATION MESSAGE HAVING A STATION CLASS MARK FIELD FOR INDICATING AN MEID CAPABLE MOBILE STATION - A mobile station for wireless communication includes a control processor configured to generate a message for transmission on a reverse signaling channel, the message including a Station Class Mark field having a plurality of bits, a portion of the Station Class Mark field indicating that the mobile station is uniquely identified by a Mobile Station Equipment Identifier.02-02-2012
20120026982METHOD FOR IMPROVING HIGH-SPEED DOWNLINK OPERATION IN CELL_FACH STATE FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND RELATED APPARATUS - A method of improving a high-speed downlink operation in CELL_FACH state for a network terminal of a wireless communications system includes using a first function but not using a second function when a user equipment, hereinafter called UE, initiates a cell update procedure. The network terminal wirelessly communicates with the UE, and the network terminal and the UE both support the high-speed downlink operation in CELL_FACH state. The first function is used for allocating a dedicated HS-DSCH radio network transaction identifier (H-RNTI) to the UE, so as to manage the UE to perform the high-speed downlink operation in CELL_FACH based on the dedicated H-RNTI. The second function is used for not allocating the dedicated H-RNTI to the UE.02-02-2012
20120026979METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEFERRED LEG LINKING IN PCRF IN RELATION TO HANDOVER - The present invention relates to a solution for handling deferred leg linking in policy and charging rules function in a telecommunications network in relation to handover between two different access technologies. The solution is provided as a nodes, system and a method for handling handover of a user equipment, i.e. UE, (02-02-2012
20120026978METHOD OF ZONE SWITCH IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method for allowing a mobile station (MS) to perform zone switching within coverage of a base station (BS) in a broadband wireless access system is disclosed. A method for controlling an advanced mobile station (AMS) to perform zone switching in an MZone of a serving advanced base station (serving ABS) supporting a legacy mobile station (MS) includes receiving a handover command (AAI_HO-CMD) message indicating zone switching to a legacy zone (LZone) from the MZone, and receiving at least one of an uplink MAP (UL-MAP) and a downlink MAP (DL-MAP) from the LZone.02-02-2012
20120026973HANDOVER DATA INTEGRITY IN A WIRELESS DATA NETWORK - A method and apparatus for handover data integrity of a mobile station in a wireless data network with a plurality of wireless network service areas. The method and apparatus includes initiating handover by a mobile station, identifying a target access service network (ASN) for handover from a serving ASN. When the target ASN is identified, receive a data integrity capability from the target ASN, and determine whether a direct data delivery mode is available as a data integrity mode. When a direct data delivery mode is available, direct data delivery is performed with the data associated with the service flow from the serving ASN to the target ASN.02-02-2012
20120026977METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN A MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for handover in a multi-carrier system are provided. A user equipment receives multi-carrier measurement information from a base station, and measures carriers based on the multi-carrier measurement information. The user equipment performs a handover with a target base station through an access reference carrier which is one of a plurality of component carriers of which the measurement result is reported. The present invention minimizes a delay caused by the handover, and reduces battery consumption of the user equipment.02-02-2012
20120026976RANDOM ACCESS METHOD, EVOLVED NODE B, AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT - A random access method, an evolved Node B (eNB), and a terminal equipment are provided. The method includes: determining target component carriers to which a User Equipment (UE) is to be handed over, and notifying the UE of information about the target component carriers through a source eNB; and after receiving a dedicated random access preamble sent by the UE, sending a random access response message on at least one component carrier in the target component carriers. The terminal equipment includes: a handover command receiving unit, a sending unit, and a random response receiving unit. Therefore, in a random access procedure of cell handover, the eNB is capable of determining downlink component carriers that a UE monitors, thereby increasing utilization rate of downlink resources.02-02-2012
20120026974LOAD BALANCING FOR AN AIR INTERFACE PROTOCOL ARCHITECTURE WITH A PLURALITY OF HETEROGENEOUS PHYSICAL LAYER MODES - A system and method for dynamic traffic load balancing with a multiple physical layer modes of an air interface protocol architecture, the protocol architecture residing in a base station and/or an access network that includes a base station and access gateway that include distributed and centralized components of the air interface protocol architecture. The traffic load balancing supports various multiplexing scenarios for scheduling communication data under time division multiple access and frequency division multiple access techniques for use in the multi-carrier wireless network.02-02-2012
20120155432FACILITATING METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication method performed in a mobile communication device of a telecommunication system includes receiving Service Data Units, SDUs, for transmission to a source node of the telecommunication system, storing a copy of the SDUs in an SDU management buffer, passing the SDUs to a concatenation and segmentation unit to generate Protocol Data Units, PDUs, storing the PDUs in a transmit buffer for transmission to the source node, sending a feedback message to the SDU management buffer identifying an SDU that can be removed from the SDU management buffer, receiving a handover command from the source node after receiving the status report, and after completing handover to a target node, using the received status report to control which SDUs are passed to the concatenation and segmentation unit to form PDUs for transmission to the target node.06-21-2012
20120155431APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FORWARDING HANDOVER DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A technique forwards handover data in a wireless communication system. A base station apparatus includes a first buffer for storing downlink data of a terminal, a handover agent for, when the terminal performs a handover, performing scheduling on data which is stored in the first buffer for at least one terminal including the terminal that performs the handover so that an interruption time of the at least one terminal is reduced in order to forward the data to a target base station, and a communication unit for transmitting the data according to a scheduling result of the handover agent.06-21-2012
20120026980Inter-node B handover method - The present invention discloses an inter-Node B handover method, wherein a target eNB sends a Handover Request Acknowledge message including handover reference frequency point information through a source eNB to a user equipment, wherein the handover reference frequency point information includes center frequency point information of an uplink component carrier designated for the user equipment to initiate a random access request. Further, the present invention discloses another inter-Node B handover method, wherein a target eNB orderly arrays center frequency point information of uplink component carriers of a target cell to obtain a first list, the target eNB sends a Handover Request Acknowledge message including the first list through a source eNB to a user equipment, and the user equipment requests a random access according to the center frequency point information of a first uplink component carrier. Through the solution of the present invention, the usage rate of the random access resources for the target eNB can be improved effectively and the conflict of random is accesses can be reduced.02-02-2012
20120026972APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING RANGE EXPANSION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A wireless network for communicating with a mobile station capable of operating in a range expansion mode. The wireless network comprises a macro-base station (BS) operable to communicate with the mobile station and a micro-base station (BS) in a coverage area associated with the macro-BS. The macro-BS transmits to the micro-BS a first control message indicating a range expansion (RE) capability of the mobile station. In response, the micro-BS transmits to the macro-BS PCFICH information associated with the micro-BS. The macro-BS transmits the PCFICH information to the mobile station and the mobile station uses the PCFICH information to perform a handover procedure to the micro-BS.02-02-2012
20120026975ACCESS CONTROL METHOD, ACCESS CONTROL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An access control method, an access control apparatus and a communication system are disclosed, and a mechanism for processing Emergency Call (EMC) services is disclosed, and such mechanism ensures continuity of the EMC service while implementing the access control under a Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) mechanism. The access control